Mitsubishi Electronics Digital Portable Multimedia Player Got1000 Users Manual Series Connection (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 (ELE)
GOT1000 to the manual 8be7cf51-f2a9-4e72-b23b-5d480278e534
2015-02-09
: Mitsubishi-Electronics Mitsubishi-Electronics-Mitsubishi-Digital-Electronics-Portable-Multimedia-Player-Got1000-Users-Manual-556773 mitsubishi-electronics-mitsubishi-digital-electronics-portable-multimedia-player-got1000-users-manual-556773 mitsubishi-electronics pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 754
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE) BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION INVERTER CONNECTION SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION CNC CONNECTION GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION". WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage. Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety. Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user. [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction. ● If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. For bus connection : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative. For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction. ● Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. A-1 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active. This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to operate. Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank. The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears dimmed. The monitor screen appears blank. The monitor screen appears dimmed. ● The display section of the GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 are an analog-resistive type touch panel. If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around the center of the touched point, if any, may operate. Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously. Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. ● When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction. CAUTION ● Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring. Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart. Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction. ● Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section. ● When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration. • When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. • When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network. Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18). The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. ● Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT. A-2 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the GOT. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction. ● Before mounting an optional function board or Multi-color display board, wear a static discharge wrist strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity. CAUTION ● Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User's Manual. Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. ● When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT. ● When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GOT (GT16, GT15), fit it to the extension interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit. ● When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT (GT15), connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact. Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction. ● When mounting the option function board onto the GOT (GT16), connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. ● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT15), fully connect it to the connector until you hear a click. ● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT11), fully connect it to the connector. ● When inserting a CF card into the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact. ● When inserting/removing a SD card into/from the GOT(GT14), turn the SD card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card. A-3 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card. ● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break. ● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break. ● When installing a USB memory to the GOT(GT16, GT14), make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact. ● Before removing the USB memory from the GOT(GT16, GT14), operate the utility screen for removal. After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully. Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory. ● For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the firmly to comply with the protective structure. mark on the latch ● Remove the protective film of the GOT. When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed. ● Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity, and vibrations. ● When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT. [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. CAUTION ● Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is used exclusively for the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. ● Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m. Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal. ● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque. If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in failure. A-4 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure. ● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT. ● Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. ● The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the module during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation. ● Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault. ● Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit. ● Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault. [TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method. During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident. A-5 [STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. ● Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire. ● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit. CAUTION ● Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. ● Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly. Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. ● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault. ● When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault. ● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit. Doing so may damage the unit. ● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using. ● Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction. ● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by Mitsubishi electric Co. only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. ● Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. A-6 [TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration. ● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction. [BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user). Not doing so can cause an electric shock. Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or control panel to drop, resulting in an injury. CAUTION ● Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user. Not doing so can cause an injury. ● Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user. Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight. [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste. ● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be used.) A-7 [TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.) ● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User's Manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation. A-8 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT). Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 9 CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 9 MANUALS............................................................................................................................................... A - 20 QUICK REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................. A - 22 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 24 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................. A - 29 1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface............................................................................................... 1 - 3 1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)................................................................... 1 - 4 1.1.2 I/F communication setting................................................................................................... 1 - 12 1.1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 1 - 14 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT............................................................................. 1 - 15 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT................................................................... 1 - 15 1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT ............................................................ 1 - 16 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection ............................................................................. 1 - 17 1.3.1 Communication module ...................................................................................................... 1 - 17 1.3.2 Option unit .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 18 1.3.3 Conversion cables .............................................................................................................. 1 - 18 1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter ........................................................................................... 1 - 18 1.3.5 Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ...................................................................................... 1 - 18 1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter .............................................................................. 1 - 18 1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) ............................ 1 - 19 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection ....................................................................... 1 - 26 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications ............................................................................................ 1 - 26 1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method ...................................................................... 1 - 29 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT ............................................................................................. 1 - 30 1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor ............................................................ 1 - 33 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment........................................................................ 1 - 34 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring .................................................................................................... 1 - 39 1.6.1 Check on the GOT.............................................................................................................. 1 - 39 1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) ............. 1 - 45 1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) ............ 1 - 47 1.6.4 Check on GX Developer .................................................................................................... 1 - 50 1.6.5 Check on GX Works2 ......................................................................................................... 1 - 54 1.6.6 Check on the PLC ............................................................................................................. 1 - 55 A-9 MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700........................................................................... 2 - 8 2.2 MELSEC-L ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 9 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * ............................................................................................. 2 - 10 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion ......................................................................................................... 2 - 11 2.5 MELSEC-A .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 12 2.6 MELSEC-FX .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 13 2.7 MELSEC-WS ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 14 3.ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems........................................................... 3 - 2 3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network ..................................................................................................... 3 - 2 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection ................................................... 3 - 13 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring.............................................................................. 3 - 14 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring ........................................ 3 - 17 3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU............................................................... 3 - 18 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System........................................ 3 - 19 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System .......................................... 3 - 22 4.HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System.......................................... 4 - 8 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) .......................... 4 - 8 4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station) .................... 4 - 9 4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) ..... 4 - 10 4.2 Direct CPU Connection.................................................................................................................. 4 - 11 4.2.1 When using one GOT ......................................................................................................... 4 - 11 4.2.2 When using two GOTs........................................................................................................ 4 - 12 4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system without making Q redundant setting ................................................................................... 4 - 13 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)............................................................................ 4 - 18 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) ........................................................................................................ 4 - 20 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) ...................................... 4 - 22 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) ...................................................... 4 - 23 4.7 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 24 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit.............................................................. 4 - 25 4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)........................................................................ 4 - 25 4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit)............................................................................................................ 4 - 26 4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit)............................................................... 4 - 27 A - 10 4.8.4 4.9 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) ..... 4 - 28 Q Redundant Setting ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 29 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function ................................. 4 - 31 4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function..................................................... 4 - 31 4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function .................................................................. 4 - 38 5.BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 5 - 2 5.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 5 5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 5 - 5 5.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 9 5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU................................................................................ 5 - 12 5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU .................................................................................................. 5 - 18 5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) ........................................................... 5 - 19 5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))................... 5 - 24 5.3 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 5 - 30 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 5 - 30 5.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 5 - 30 5.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 34 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS .................................................................................. 5 - 34 5.4.2 Turning the GOT ON .......................................................................................................... 5 - 34 5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON) ............................................. 5 - 35 5.4.4 Reset switch on GOT ......................................................................................................... 5 - 35 5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC ................................................................................... 5 - 35 5.4.6 Position of the GOT ............................................................................................................ 5 - 35 5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 35 5.4.8 When designing the system ............................................................................................... 5 - 36 5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O signals ....................................................................................... 5 - 36 5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................. 5 - 36 5.4.11 When connecting to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type ...................................................... 5 - 37 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs ........................................................................................ 5 - 38 5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode ....................................................................... 5 - 38 5.4.14 When connecting to a Q4ARCPU redundant system ......................................................... 5 - 39 5.4.15 When monitoring the Q170MCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 39 5.4.16 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 5 - 39 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 6 - 2 6.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 6 - 6 6.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ............................................................................................................. 6 - 7 6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU........................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.2.4 Connecting to ACPU ............................................................................................................ 6 - 9 6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU ........................................................................................................ 6 - 10 6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU ....................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.2.7 Connecting to the motion controller CPU ........................................................................... 6 - 20 A - 11 6.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 25 6.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 6 - 25 6.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 6 - 25 6.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 28 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 7 - 2 7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 7 - 2 7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module........................................................... 7 - 6 7.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 7 7.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................................ 7 - 7 7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ............................................................................................................. 7 - 8 7.2.3 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) ............................................................................................ 7 - 9 7.2.4 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type)............................................................................ 7 - 10 7.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) ......................................................................... 7 - 11 7.2.6 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) ................................................................................... 7 - 13 7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) ......................................... 7 - 14 7.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 15 7.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 15 7.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 17 7.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 19 7.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 7 - 19 7.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 7 - 19 7.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 22 7.5.1 Connecting serial communication module (Q, L Series)..................................................... 7 - 22 7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) .................................................... 7 - 24 7.5.3 Connecting computer link module ...................................................................................... 7 - 25 7.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 7 - 29 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 8 - 2 8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 8 - 2 8.1.2 Ethernet module ................................................................................................................... 8 - 6 8.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 7 8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module ............................................................................................ 8 - 7 8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module ...................................... 8 - 11 8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F.................................................................................................... 8 - 12 8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 13 8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 14 8.3 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 8 - 15 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 8 - 15 8.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 8 - 15 8.3.3 Ethernet setting................................................................................................................... 8 - 17 8.3.4 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 8 - 18 8.4 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 20 8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) .................................... 8 - 20 A - 12 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7 8.4.8 8.4.9 8.4.10 8.5 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) ......................................... 8 - 22 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series)...................................................................... 8 - 24 Connecting to C Controller module .................................................................................... 8 - 27 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) .................................................................... 8 - 30 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) ......................................................................... 8 - 33 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) ....................................................................... 8 - 38 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70)................................................................................. 8 - 42 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 44 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 46 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 49 9.MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 9 - 2 9.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU .................................................................................................. 9 - 2 9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module.......................................................................................... 9 - 6 9.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 7 9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ........................................................................................ 9 - 7 9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system .................................................................................. 9 - 7 9.3 GOT Side Settings........................................................................................................................... 9 - 9 9.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)................................................. 9 - 9 9.3.2 Communication detail settings.............................................................................................. 9 - 9 9.3.3 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 9 - 10 9.4 PLC Side Settings.......................................................................................................................... 9 - 11 9.4.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 9 - 11 9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module ............................................................ 9 - 11 9.4.3 Parameter setting ............................................................................................................... 9 - 12 9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 .................................................................................. 9 - 15 9.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 9 - 16 10.MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 10 - 2 10.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 10 - 2 10.1.2 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module ................................. 10 - 6 10.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 10 - 7 10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 10 - 7 10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system ................................................................................ 10 - 8 10.3 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 10 - 9 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 10 - 9 10.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 10 - 9 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting ................................................................................................ 10 - 10 10.3.4 Switch setting (Only when MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used)....................... 10 - 11 10.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 10 - 12 10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module .............................................................. 10 - 12 10.4.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) ....................................... 10 - 17 10.4.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) ............................................ 10 - 21 10.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 10 - 26 A - 13 11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 11 - 2 11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 11 - 2 11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit............................................................ 11 - 6 11.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 11 - 7 11.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 11 - 7 11.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 11 - 8 11.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 11 - 8 11.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 11 - 8 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 11 - 9 11.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 11 - 10 11.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 11 - 16 12.CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 12 - 2 12.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 12 - 2 12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit ................................................................... 12 - 6 12.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 12 - 7 12.2.1 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit ............................................ 12 - 7 12.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 12 - 8 12.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 12 - 8 12.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 12 - 8 12.3.3 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 12 - 9 12.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 12 - 10 12.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 12 - 13 13.CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 13 - 2 13.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 13 - 2 13.1.2 CC-Link module .................................................................................................................. 13 - 5 13.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 13 - 6 13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible ........................................................................ 13 - 6 13.2.2 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible ........................................................................ 13 - 7 13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed .................................................. 13 - 8 13.3 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 13 - 9 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 13 - 9 13.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 13 - 9 13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) ............. 13 - 11 13.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 13 - 12 13.4.1 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible .................................... 13 - 13 13.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.2 compatible .................................... 13 - 16 13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed .............. 13 - 20 13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible..................................... 13 - 24 13.4.5 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible..................................... 13 - 25 13.4.6 Connecting to CC-Link module (QnA Series) ................................................................... 13 - 27 13.4.7 Connecting to CC-Link module (A Series)........................................................................ 13 - 31 13.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 13 - 39 A - 14 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 14 - 2 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 14 - 2 14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module .................................................................................... 14 - 5 14.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 14 - 6 14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) .......................................................................................... 14 - 6 14.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7 14.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8 14.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8 14.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8 14.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 14 - 9 14.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 14 - 9 14.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 14 - 9 14.5 PLC Side Settings........................................................................................................................ 14 - 11 14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 .............................................................................................. 14 - 11 14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N ................................................................................................. 14 - 12 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) .................................................................... 14 - 14 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer ............................................................................. 14 - 14 14.5.5 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) .......................................... 14 - 15 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ................................................................................ 14 - 16 14.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 14 - 17 MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 15.INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 15 - 2 15.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 15 - 3 15.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ..................................... 15 - 3 15.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ .................................. 15 - 7 15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700........................................................................................ 15 - 10 15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P ..................................................................... 15 - 14 15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522-K(-A0) ..................................................................................... 15 - 18 15.3 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 15 - 21 15.3.1 RS-422 cable .................................................................................................................... 15 - 21 15.4 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 15 - 29 15.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 15 - 29 15.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 15 - 29 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings..................................................................................... 15 - 31 15.5.1 Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series ........................................................ 15 - 31 15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series ................................................................................. 15 - 32 15.5.3 Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series ..................................................................... 15 - 33 15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series .................................................................... 15 - 34 15.5.5 Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series .................................................................... 15 - 35 15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series ................................................................................. 15 - 36 15.5.7 Connecting FREQROL-D700 series................................................................................. 15 - 37 15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series........................................................................ 15 - 38 15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series ............................................................................. 15 - 40 15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series ................................................................................. 15 - 41 15.5.11 Connecting MD-CX522-K(-A0) ......................................................................................... 15 - 42 A - 15 15.5.12 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 15 - 43 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 15 - 44 15.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 47 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 16 - 2 16.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 16 - 3 16.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series................................................................ 16 - 3 16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ....................................................................... 16 - 4 16.2.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series..................................................................... 16 - 5 16.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 8 16.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 8 16.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 9 16.4 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 16 - 12 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 16 - 12 16.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 16 - 12 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side ................................................................................................... 16 - 14 16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series.............................................................. 16 - 14 16.5.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ..................................................................... 16 - 15 16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series.................................................................... 16 - 16 16.5.4 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 16 - 16 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 16 - 17 16.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 16 - 45 17.ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 17 - 2 17.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 17 - 2 17.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) ........................................................................ 17 - 2 17.3 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 17 - 3 17.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 17 - 3 17.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 17 - 3 17.3.3 Ethernet setting................................................................................................................... 17 - 5 17.4 PLC Side Settings.......................................................................................................................... 17 - 6 17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) ........................................................................ 17 - 6 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 17 - 8 17.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 17 - 8 18.CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 18 - 2 18.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 18 - 3 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................... 18 - 3 18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) .......................................................... 18 - 4 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)................................................................... 18 - 5 18.2.4 Ethernet connection............................................................................................................ 18 - 6 18.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 7 18.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 7 A - 16 18.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 18 - 8 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 18 - 8 18.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 18 - 8 18.4.3 Ethernet setting ................................................................................................................ 18 - 13 18.4.4 Switch setting ................................................................................................................... 18 - 13 18.5 CNC Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 18 - 16 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 16 18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 19 18.5.3 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 21 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 18 - 23 18.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 18 - 23 18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................. 18 - 23 18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 23 18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 23 18.7.4 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 24 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored ........................................................................................................... 19 - 2 19.2 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 19 - 3 19.3 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 19 - 14 19.4 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 19 - 15 19.4.1 RS-485 cable .................................................................................................................... 19 - 15 19.5 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 19 - 23 19.5.1 Setting communication interface (communication settings) ............................................. 19 - 23 19.5.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 19 - 23 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ............................................................................... 19 - 24 19.6.1 Write the OS ..................................................................................................................... 19 - 24 19.6.2 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 19 - 24 19.6.3 Setting switches................................................................................................................ 19 - 28 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter.................................................................................... 19 - 29 19.7.1 Setting switches................................................................................................................ 19 - 29 19.8 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 19 - 30 20.MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 20 - 2 20.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 20 - 2 20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 20 - 2 20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface ............................................................. 20 - 4 20.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 20 - 5 20.3.1 RS-232 Cable ..................................................................................................................... 20 - 5 20.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 20 - 6 20.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 20 - 7 20.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 20 - 7 20.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 20 - 9 20.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 20 - 11 A - 17 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function?.................................................................................................... 21 - 2 21.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 21 - 4 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection ................................................................................ 21 - 4 21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection .............................................................................................. 21 - 6 21.3 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 21 - 7 21.3.1 Basics of interface selection ............................................................................................... 21 - 7 21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing ................................................................ 21 - 12 21.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ............................ 21 - 13 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)................................................. 21 - 23 21.3.5 Setting for communication settings................................................................................... 21 - 35 21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing .................................................................... 21 - 39 21.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 21 - 41 21.4.1 Precautions for hardware.................................................................................................. 21 - 41 21.4.2 Precautions for use........................................................................................................... 21 - 41 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ........................................................................................... 21 - 42 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function ............................................................................................................... 22 - 2 22.2 Compatible Software ..................................................................................................................... 22 - 2 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored.......................................................................................... 22 - 11 22.4 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 22 - 26 22.4.1 GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module ................................ 22 - 26 22.4.2 PX Developer, GX Configurator........................................................................................ 22 - 29 22.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2............................................................................................... 22 - 30 22.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ................................................................................. 22 - 32 22.4.5 FR Configurator ................................................................................................................ 22 - 34 22.4.6 FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN ......................................................................... 22 - 34 22.4.7 RT ToolBox2..................................................................................................................... 22 - 35 22.4.8 NC Configurator................................................................................................................ 22 - 35 22.5 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 22 - 36 22.5.1 Setting communication interface....................................................................................... 22 - 36 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting ................................................................................................. 22 - 39 22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator..................... 22 - 39 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 ................................................................................................. 22 - 43 22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer ............................................................................................ 22 - 52 22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ........................................................................... 22 - 53 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer ....................................................................................... 22 - 54 22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 ........................................................................................... 22 - 55 22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator..................................................... 22 - 58 22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2................................................... 22 - 58 22.6.9 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator ................................................................. 22 - 58 22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP ............................................................................ 22 - 59 22.6.11 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN .................................................................................... 22 - 60 A - 18 22.6.12 22.6.13 22.6.14 22.6.15 22.6.16 22.7 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 .............................................................................................. 22 - 61 Accessing by NC Configurator ......................................................................................... 22 - 63 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .................................................................................. 22 - 63 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool.............................................................. 22 - 64 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module ........................................ 22 - 64 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 67 22.7.1 Precautions common to each software ............................................................................ 22 - 67 22.7.2 When using GX Developer, GX Woks2 ............................................................................ 22 - 69 22.7.3 When using MT Developer, MT Works2........................................................................... 22 - 71 22.7.4 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ............................................................. 22 - 72 22.7.5 When using FR Configurator ............................................................................................ 22 - 72 INDEX REVISIONS A - 19 MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose. Screen creation software manuals Manual Name GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Enclosed in product - GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080866ENG (1D7MB9) GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080867ENG (1D7MC1) GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080861ENG (1D7MB1) GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080862ENG (1D7MB2) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080898ENG (1D7MC9) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080869ENG (1D7MC3) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080870ENG (1D7MC4) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080871ENG (1D7MC5) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM JY997D39201 Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080858ENG (1D7MA7) GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080859ENG (1D7MA8) GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080863ENG (1D7MB3) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080966ENG (1D7MD7) Connection manuals Manual Name Extended and option function manuals Manual Name GT SoftGOT1000 manuals Manual Name GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 (ELE) A - 20 GT16 manuals Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080928ENG (1D7MD3) GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080929ENG (1D7MD4) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41201 JY997D41202 (09R821) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080528ENG (1D7M23) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM JY997D44801 (09R823) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080977ENG (1D7ME1) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT11 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D17501 (09R815) GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20101 JY997D20102 (09R817) Packaging Manual Number (Model code) Stored in CD-ROM JY997D24701 (09R819) Manual Name GT15 manuals Manual Name GT15 User's Manual GT14 manuals Manual Name GT14 User's Manual GT12 manuals Manual Name GT12 User's Manual GT11 manuals Manual Name GT10 manuals Manual Name GT10 User's Manual A - 21 QUICK REFERENCE Creating a project Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing Setting details for figures and objects Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Setting functions to use peripheral devices Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Connecting a controller to the GOT Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT (Multi-channel function) GT Works3 (ELE) Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT (FA transparent function) Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT Connecting α2 with GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT Works3 (ELE) Transferring data to the GOT Writing data to the GOT Reading data from the GOT Verifying a editing project to a GOT project A - 22 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Others Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT15 User's Manual • GT14 User's Manual • GT12 User's Manual Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual • GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT10 User's Manual • GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT15 User's Manual Operating the utility • GT14 User's Manual • GT12 User's Manual • GT11 User's Manual • GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT10 User's Manual Configuring the gateway function Configuring the MES interface function Configuring the extended function and option function Using a personal computer as the GOT GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 (ELE) A - 23 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD GT1675M-S Abbrevuation GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD GT16 GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GOT1000 GT155 Series Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD GT15 GT145 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD GT1275-V GT1265 GT1265-V GT12 GT104 Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265 GT1155-Q Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA, GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD GT11 GT105 , GT155 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q GT1275 GT115 , GT156 GT1455-Q GT14 A - 24 Description GT1695 Abbreviation of GT115 , Handy GOT GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD GT1030 Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2, GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2, GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2, GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2, GT1030-HWLW GT1020 Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2, GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2, GT1020-LWLW GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020 Abbreviations and generic terms GOT1000 Series Handy GOT GT16 Handy GOT GT11 Handy GOT Description GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 Series Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE RS-422 Conversion Unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13 MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3 Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900 Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P *1 *2 *3 A9GT-QJ71LP23+GT15-75IF900 set A9GT-QJ71BR13+GT15-75IF900 set A8GT-J61BT13+GT15-75IF900 set Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Video input unit Video/RGB unit Description GT15-PRN GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4 RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1 Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1 RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR CF card unit GT15-CFCD CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR Sound output unit GT15-SOUT Fingerprint unit GT15-80FPA *1 GT15-CFEX+GT15-CFEXIF+GT15-C08CF set A - 25 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Memory card CF card SD card Description GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC, GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC, GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC Option function board GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil For GT16 GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW, GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW, GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW, GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW, GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW, GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012, GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC For GT15 GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW, GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW, GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW, GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW, GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW, GT11H-50PSC For GT10 GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW, GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW, GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW, GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO, GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND Attachment GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85 Backlight GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN, GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV Memory loader GT10-LDR Memory board GT10-50FMB Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S A - 26 Software Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) GX Works2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW engineering software GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages (SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions) GX Developer Abbreviation of SW GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control DNC-IQWK (iQ DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type general start-up support software for motion controller Q series MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN DNC-MTW2-E) -SETUP type servo set up software -SETUP-WE) Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H (SW D5C-FXSSC-E) Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E) RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE) MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E) (SW (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA) D5C-SHEET-EA) License key (for GT SoftGOT1000) Abbreviations and generic terms License key Description GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P A - 27 Others Abbreviations and generic terms IAI Description Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation) OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd. CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD. HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd. HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd. FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd. YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc. GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC. HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd. α2 Abbreviation of α2 Simple Application Controller PLC Generic term for programmable logic controllers of each manufacturer Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controllers of each manufacturer Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controllers of each manufacturer Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation Controller Generic term for controllers of each manufacturer PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT (client) Windows® font Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Abbreviation of TrueType font (Other than the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3) and OpenType font available for Windows® Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS®/RTU Generic term for protocols designed to use MODBUS® protocol messages on a serial communication MODBUS®/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS® protocol messages on a TCP/IP network A - 28 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name Not connectable model name 5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2 Applicable model name Shows GT16. Shows GT15. Shows GT14. Shows GT12. Shows GT11. Shows GT11 (BUS). Shows GT11 (SERIAL). Shows GT10. Shows GT105 ,GT104 . Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 24V). Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 5V). 1. 2. 3. … Indicates the operation steps. 2. [ ]: Indicates the setting items displayed on the software and GOT screen. 3. 4. Click! Refers to the information required. Refers to information useful for operation. Indicates the location of related content. Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page. A - 29 About system configuration The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual. The configuration of equipment connected to GOT is shown. The cable connecting the GOT to the equipment is shown. The configuration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown. For the option devices, refer to the following. 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection QCPU RS-422 connector conversion Cable GOT Connection cable Indicates the connection diagram number of cables to be prepared by the user. Refer to the connection diagram section in each chapter. A representative example of the system configuration is described with an illustration. Indicates the maximum distance between the PLC and GOT. System Configuration Examples (When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT16, with RS-422 cable) Indicates the commercially available cable models that can be used. 1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable [FA-CNV2402CBL] to the [MELSEC-Q]. 2) Connect the option [GT16-C02R4-9S] to [GT16]. 3) Connect [MELSEQ-Q] and [GT16] with the connection cable [GT01-C30R4-25P]. Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page. A - 30 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 26 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . 1 - 34 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. 1 1-1 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and perform the communication setting. 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings Writing the project data and OS Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT. Verifying the project data and OS Verify the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT. Attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the connection cable according to the connection type. Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Each chapter System Configuration Each chapter Connection Diagram 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, etc. 1-2 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT. Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET POINT When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator. The system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator can be reflected to the project of GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator. For details of the parameter functions of MELSOFT Navigator, refer to the following. (1) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When changing in GT Designer3, refer to the following (3). ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Help of MELSOFT Navigator HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 (3) To make the items reflected from MELSOFT Navigator editable on GT Designer3, select the [Option] menu and put a check mark at [Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator] in the [iQ Works Interaction] tab. However, when the items set in MELSOFT Navigator are edited in GT Designer3, the interaction function with MELSOFT Navigator is unavailable due to a mismatch with the system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator. Eliminate mismatches using the parameter verification function etc. before using the interaction function of MELSOFT Navigator. 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment, set [Set with GT Designer3] to the channel connected at [Input Detailed Configuration Information] in MELSOFT Navigator and make the settings at [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. BUS CONNECTION 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1-3 1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Setting 1. Select [Common] 2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu. 3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting. [Controller Setting] from the menu. POINT Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Mitsubishi Products 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1-4 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*]. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Item HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Description 5 Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4. Manufacturer BUS CONNECTION Use CH* Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Type (2)Setting [Controller Type] Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected.For the settings, refer to the following. I/F (3)Setting [I/F] 6 Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Driver DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (1)Setting [Driver] Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver. Detail Setting Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. (1) Setting [Driver] 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. For the settings, refer to the following. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1-5 (2) Setting [Controller Type] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following. Type Type Model name Q172DCPU Q00CPU Q173DCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q172DCPU-S1 For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Q06HCPU Q12HCPU For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU For GT10 MELSEC-Q(MULTI) Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU MR-MQ100 For GT10*1 MELSEC-QnU/DC CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) Q172CPU CRnD-700 Q173CPU Q00JCPU Q172CPUN Q00CPU Q173CPUN Q01CPU Q172HCPU Q02CPU Q173HCPU Q02HCPU Q00UJCPU Q06HCPU Q00UCPU Q12HCPU Q01UCPU Q25HCPU Q02UCPU Q02PHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU For MELSEC-QnU/DC Q172DSCPU CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) Q04UDHCPU For GT14, GT11*1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR Q173DCPU-S1 Q25PHCPU Q03UDCPU GT10*1 For GT14, GT11*1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR Q12PHCPU For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Model name Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q06PHCPU For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* *1 For GT14, GT11 MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* For GT10*1 MELSEC-QnA/Q Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QS001CPU*3 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q04UDEHCPU Q3ACPU Q06UDEHCPU Q4ACPU Q10UDEHCPU Q4ARCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q2ASCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q26UDEHCPU Q2ASHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 Q100UDEHCPU MELDAS C6 (FCA C6) Q03UDVCPU MELDAS C64 (FCA C64) Q04UDVCPU L02CPU Q06UDVCPU L26CPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU L26CPU-BT MELSEC-L L02CPU-P Q12DCCPU-V L26CPU-PBT Q24DHCCPU-V L02SCPU NZ2GF-ETB *1 *2 1-6 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface When using the multiple CPU system When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other station, select [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion], or [MELSEC-QnU/DC,Q17nD/M/NC/DR,CRnD-700] for the type regardless of the host PLC CPU type. When connecting to the remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system, set the type to [MELSECQnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *]. A373UCPU-S3 A2UCPU-S1 A171SCPU A3UCPU A171SCPU-S3 A4UCPU A171SCPU-S3N MELSEC-A A2ACPUP21 A171SHCPU 2 A171SHCPUN A2ACPUR21 A172SHCPU A2ACPU-S1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET A2ACPU A172SHCPUN A2ACPUP21-S1 A173UHCPU A2ACPUR21-S1 A173UHCPU-S1 A3ACPU FX0 A3ACPUP21 FX0S A3ACPUR21 3 FX0N A1NCPU ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING FX1 A1NCPUP21 FX2 A1NCPUR21 FX2C A2NCPU FX1S A2NCPUP21 MELSEC-FX A2NCPUR21 FX1N FX2N A2NCPU-S1 4 FX1NC A2NCPUP21-S1 FX2NC A2NCPUR21-S1 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM FX3G A3NCPU FX3GC A3NCPUP21 FX3U A3NCPUR21 FX3UC A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 MELSEC-FX(Ethernet) A2USHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 FX3U FX3UC 5 WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 MELSERVO-J2M-P8A MELSERVO-J2M-P8A MELSERVO-J2M-*DU MELSERVO-J2M-*DU MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J4-*A A1SJHCPU MELSERVO-J4-*A FREQROL-S500 A0J2HCPU FREQROL-S500E A0J2HCPUP21 FREQROL-E500 A0J2HCPUR21 FREQROL-F500 A0J2HCPU-DC24 FREQROL-F500L A2CCPU 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING A2UCPU 6 7 A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU FREQROL-A500 FREQROL 500/700 Series FREQROL-A500L FREQROL-V500 FREQROL-V500L FREQROL-E700 8 FREQROL-F700 A273UCPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-F700P A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 FREQROL-F700PJ ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC-A Model name A373UCPU BUS CONNECTION Model name DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Type Type FREQROL-A700 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1-7 (3) Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT. (a) GT16 Extension interface 1 3rd stage Extension interface 2 2nd stage Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT) Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT) 1st stage Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT) (Example: In the case of the GT1685) Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT) (b) GT15 Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 3rd stage 2nd stage 1st stage Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT) (Example: In the case of the GT1575) 1-8 Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT) 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 GT14 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (c) [Front view]] DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 [Rear view] 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Standard interface 4 (GOT built-in Ethernet interface) [Under view] 5 BUS CONNECTION (d) GT12 [Rear view] Standard interface 4 (GOT built-in Ethernet interface) 7 Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION [Front view] DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1-9 (e) GT11 • GT11 Serial [Front view] Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) [Rear view] Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) • GT11 Bus [Front view] Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) [Rear view] Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in Bus interface) 1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 GT105 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (f) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 [Rear view] 3 Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (g) GT104 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) BUS CONNECTION 5 Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (h) GT1020, GT1030 7 Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) or (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 - 11 1.1.2 I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used. Setting 1. Select [Common] 2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation. [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu. POINT When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator. When setting [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator, all of I/F Communication Setting are grayout and cannot be edited.Set these items at [Controller Setting] or [Peripheral Unit Setting]. 1 - 12 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 I/F Driver Detail Setting RS232 Setting : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3 Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 8: Used for fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial), report function (when using the serial printer), hard copy function (when using the serial printer) or GOT (extended computer) 9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Host (modem) *: Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function Multi: Used for Ethernet multiple connection The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed. Set the driver for the device to be connected. None Host (Personal computer) Each communication driver for connected devices Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver. 5 BUS CONNECTION CH No. , GT104 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU GT11, GT105 7 Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox. The RS232 setting is invalid in the following cases. • CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] in GT15 and 16. • CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] or [8] in GT14. • For GT12, GT11 and GT10 (Continued to next page) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Standard I/F setting Description Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces. GT16, GT14, GT12: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4 GT15, GT1030, GT1020: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Item HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 - 13 Item Description Extension I/F setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT. CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 5 to 7: Used for barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial), report function (when using the serial printer) or hard copy function (when using the serial printer) * : Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function Set the driver for the device to be connected. Driver None Detail Setting Each driver for connected devices Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. POINT Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting] (1) Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Mitsubishi Products 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION (2) Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. [Setting the communication] section in each chapter (3) [RS232 Setting] of GT14 Do not use [RS232 Setting] of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor. For details, refer to the following manual. GT14 User's Manual 7.11 RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor 1.1.3 Precautions (1) When using the multiple CPU system When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other stations, select [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion] or [MELSEC-QnU, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] for the type, regardless of the host PLC CPU type (QCPU, QnACPU, ACPU). When other models are selected, the setting of the CPU No. becomes unavailable. (2) Precautions for changing model (a) When devices that cannot be converted are included. When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges as [??]. In this case, set the device again. (b) When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network. The network will be set to the host station. (c) 1 - 14 When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None] The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device again. Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the [Device Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List]. 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version 2 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 1.2.1 Screen Design Manual PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears. Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 6 The [GOT Write] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. Select the [Project data, OS] radio button of the Write Data. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 4. [Write to GOT…] from the menu. Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and Communication Settings and click the [GOT Write] button. POINT 7 Writing communication driver onto GT10 When writing a communication driver onto the GT10 in which a Boot OS Ver. under F or a standard monitor OS Ver. under 01.08.00 is written, turn on the GOT in the OS transfer mode. For details, refer to the following manual. GT10 User's Manual (Operating of transmission mode) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 3. Select [Communication] 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. 2. BUS CONNECTION 5 Turn on the GOT while the bottom right corner is touched. 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 - 15 1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version 1. 2. 3. Select [Communication] Screen Design Manual [Read from GOT…] from the menu. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears. Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. The [GOT Read] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. Select the [Drive information] radio button of the Read Data. 4. Click the [Info Reception] button. 5. Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT. 1 - 16 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type. For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual. Communication module 2 GT15-QBUS2 For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model GT15-ABUS2 For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model RS-422 conversion unit GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model GT15-75QBUS2L For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit slim model GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model GT15-75ABUS2L For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male)) GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female)) GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block) GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 conversion unit Optical loop unit GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET/10 Communication module GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set) GT15-75J71BR13-Z Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set) CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit 6 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible Intelligent device station unit (A8GT-61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set) 7 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION GT15-J71E71-100 5 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Ethernet communication unit GT15-75J61BT13-Z 4 RS-422 side connector 25-pin GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J61BT13 3 RS-422 side connector 9-pin RS-232 MELSECNET/H Communication module CC-Link communication unit DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series) Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT15-QBUS Bus connection unit Serial communication module Specifications HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Model BUS CONNECTION Product name DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 1.3.1 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 17 1.3.2 Option unit Product name Model Printer unit GT15-PRN Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR GT16M-V4 Video input unit GT15V-75V4 GT16M-R2 RGB input unit GT15V-75R1 GT16M-V4R1 Video/RGB input unit GT15V-75V4R1 GT16M-ROUT RGB output unit GT15V-75ROUT USB slave (PictBridge) for connecting printer 1 ch For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch For analog RGB input signal 2 ch For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch For analog RGB output signal 1 ch CF card unit GT15-CFCD CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output GT15-DIOR For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common Input/Source Type Output) GT15-DIO For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common Input/Sink Type Output) Product name Model Specifications RS-422 connector conversion Cable GT16-C02R4-9S External I/O unit 1.3.3 Specifications For CF card installation (B drive) For GOT back face CF card eject For CF card installation (B drive) For control panel front face CF card eject Conversion cables RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-422 connector conversion cable (D-sub 9-pin) RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block) FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 RS-485 terminal block conversion modules FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 1.3.4 Product name Model Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S 1.3.5 1.3.6 1 - 18 Connector conversion adapter Specifications RS-422/485 (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-422/485 (Terminal block) Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit Product name Model Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M Specifications GOT multi-drop connection module Mitsubishi Products 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter Product name Model RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P Specifications RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection RS-485 signal (Terminal block) This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit. For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are using. For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following. User's Manual of GOT used. For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller, refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT. (1) Current supply capacity of the GOT GT1595-X 2.13 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74 GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74 GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2 GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2 GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2 GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1672-VN ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.4 GT1685M-S 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT type GT1695M-X GT1675-VN, 3 Current supply capacity (A) 1.3 GT1550-Q 1.3 5 (2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller GT15-QBUS, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS, GT15-75QBUS2L 0.275*1 GT15-ABUS, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUS2L 0.12 Module type GT16M-R2 Consumed current (A) 0*1 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1 GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1 GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1 GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1 GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT15V-75ROUT GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1 GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT15-CFCD 0.07 GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15 0.11 GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08 GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1 Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1 GT15-PRN 0.09 GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15V-75V4 0.2*1 *1 *2 RFID controller GT15-80FPA 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Consumed current (A) 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Module type *2 8 0.22 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function. For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit. When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current. (Maximum value is less than 0.3 A) 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection BUS CONNECTION Current supply capacity (A) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Calculating consumed current GOT type PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) 1 - 19 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.3.7 (3) Calculation example (a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A) 2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104 Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT. (b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A) 1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774 Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed. When using a bus connection unit The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used. (1) Wide bus units (GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2) Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface. If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used. Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units 1 - 20 Serial communication unit Bus connection unit Bus connection unit Serial communication unit 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection POINT Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2 Recognized as the 3rd stage of extend interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 2 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage of extend interface 2 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position. For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Recognized as the 1st stage of extend interface 1 GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2 Relay connector HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 (2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS) 5 BUS CONNECTION A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit Bus connection unit Bus connection unit Serial communication unit DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 21 When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface. These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage. Example: When installing a MELSECNET/H communication unit and a serial communication unit Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit Serial communication unit POINT Precautions for using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit are recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position. For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. Recognized as the 3rd stage of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 2 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 2 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 1 MELSECNET/H communication unit Relay connector 1 - 22 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface. These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage. For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z) and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Example: When installing a MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a serial communication unit 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING When using a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13- MELSECNET/10 communication unit Serial communication unit ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. For GT16, the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable. Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. Example: When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit Ethernet communication unit Serial communication unit 5 BUS CONNECTION Serial communication unit HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 When using an Ethernet communication unit DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 When using a serial communication unit A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. Serial communication unit 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Serial communication unit ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 23 When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. Example: When installing a printer unit Communication unit Printer unit Printer unit Communication unit When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit Install the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit at the 1st stage of the extension interface.These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage. When any of these units is used, the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the extension interface. Communication unit Model Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2 MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 Example: When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET/H communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit Video/RGB input unit 1 - 24 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Video/RGB input unit MELSECNET/H communication unit POINT Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 2 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 2 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Recognized as the 3rd stage of extension interface 1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface. For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 1 Video/RGB input unit Relay connector HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit 5 CF card unit BUS CONNECTION Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last. The following figures show how to install the CF card unit. Serial communication unit Serial communication unit 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU CF card unit COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 25 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary. For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side. Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user. RS-232 interface Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (1) Connector specifications Hardware GOT Connector type version*1 GT16 ― GT1595-X ― GT1585V-S ― GT1585-STBA ― ― GT1575-VTBA Manufacturer ) 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd. GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd. GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd. GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. C GT1575V-S GT1575-STBD 17LE-23090-27(D4C B or later GT1585-STBD GT1575-STBA Connector model B or later C ― D or later 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type E GT1575-VTBD ― GT1575-VN ― GT1572-VN ― GT1565-V ― GT1562-VN ― GT155 ― GT14 ― GT12 ― GT115 -Q ― GT105 -Q ― GT104 -Q ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd. 17LE-23090-27(D3CC) GT1030, GT1020 ― 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc GT15-RS2-9P ― GT01-RS4-M ― 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type 17LE-23090-27(D3CC) DDK Ltd. *1 *2 For the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version, refer to the GT15 User's Manual. The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020. (2) Connector pin arrangement GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , GT01-RS4-M GOT main part connector see from the front 1 5 9 9-pin D-sub (male) 1 - 26 See from the back of a GOT main part 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection SD RD ER DR SG RS CS NC NC 6 GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block Use the following as the RS-422 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (1) Connector model Connector model Manufacturer 2 RS-422 conversion unit 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE-13090-27(D2AC) DDK Ltd. GT16*1 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd. GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc. GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Connector type GT14 GT115 -Q GT105 -Q GT104 -Q GT01-RS4-M *1 *2 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT12 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector. To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required. For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020. (2) Connector pin arrangement GT104 GOT main part connector see from the front 5 14-pin (female) 9 1 6 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 5 See from the back of a GOT main part 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 14 GT1030, GT1020 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB 1 GOT main part connector see from the front , 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 , GT01-RS4-M BUS CONNECTION GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 GT16 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 RS-422 interface 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 27 RS-485 interface Use the following as the RS-485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (1) Connector model Hardware version*1 GOT GT16*2 ― GT14 ― GT12 ― GT1155-QTBD C or later GT1155-QSBD F or later GT1150-QLBD GT105 -Q GT104 -Q Manufacturer 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd. 9-pin terminal block*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc 9-pin D-sub (female) M2.6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd. SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmuller interconnections inc A or later B or later GT1020 E or later GT15-RS4-9S ― GT15-RS4-TE ― *3 Connector model C or later GT1030 *1 *2 Connector type ― For the checking procedure of the hardware version, refer to the User's Manual. When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector. To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required. For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.. The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020. (2) Connector pin arrangement GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT16 GT105 GOT main part connector see from the front 8 7 14-pin (female) 1 - 28 9 GT1030, GT1020 See from the back of a GOT main part 1 6 9-pin D-sub (female) 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB 1 GOT main part connector see from the front 5 14 , GT104 9-pin terminal block The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable. CAUTION Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions. Structure of the coaxial cable Washer External conductor Outer sheath Insulating material Gasket 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Components of the BNC connector Nut Plug shell Clamp Internal conductor Contact 1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below. 4 A A Cable in use Cut this portion of the outer sheath 2. Clamp PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Coaxial cable connector connection method 3C-2V 15mm 5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10mm Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 1.4.2 C B Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal conductor with the dimensions as shown below. Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp. Clamp and external conductor Solder here B C 3C-2V 6mm 3mm 5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7mm 5mm Cable in use 4. 5. Solder the contact to the internal conductor. Insert the connector assembly shown in shell and screw the nut into the plug shell. 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 3. 7 into the plug COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Insulating material Internal conductor BUS CONNECTION 5 Nut Washer Gasket Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact. • Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section. • Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other. • Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed. 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 29 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following. RS-422/485 communication unit GT16 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Switch No. Terminating OFF 2 Enable ON ON OFF OFF Disable The default setting is "Disable". *1 • For RS-422/485 communication unit ON OFF 1 2 ON resistor*1 1 ON ON 100 OHM SW1 2 2 1 1 *1 Switch No. Terminating resistor*1 Disable Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. SW1 The default setting is "Disable". • For GT1685M-S 1 ON SW1 2 ON Terminating resistor setting switch Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit. RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter For details, refer to the following. Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover) 1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor GT14 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch 1 - 30 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 GT105 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING GT12 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Terminating resistor selector switch GT11 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4 GT104 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. BUS CONNECTION 5 Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 31 GT1030 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch GT1020 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch 1 - 32 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type. POINT Enable the 5V power supply Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual. GT14 User's Manual 8.2 Utility Function List 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 1.4.4 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch 2-wire/4-wire Terminating resistor 5 6 4 3 BUS CONNECTION Set value Switch No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF 4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF 110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF 330 - - OFF ON ON OFF 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Setting item 2 1 O N 5 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION POINT RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual. GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 33 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual When using GT16, GT12 (For GT16) 1. 1. 2. 2. 1 - 34 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment After powering up the GOT, touch [Main menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. Touch [Communication setting]. 4. 5. The [Communication Settings] appears. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. 1.1Setting the Communication Interface 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 - 35 For GT15, GT14 or GT11 1. 1. 2. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. Touch [Communication setting]. (The screen on the left is not displayed on GT11.) 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. 5. 1 - 36 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment The [Communication Setting] appears. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. 1.1Setting the Communication Interface 1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] from the Utility. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 For GT10 2. 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Touch [Standard I/F] on [Comm. Setting]. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4. 5. The [Standard I/F] appears. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. 1.1Setting the Communication Interface 5 BUS CONNECTION 3. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 - 37 POINT Utility (1) How to display Utility (at default) When using GT16, GT1595, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 Utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155 , GT11, GT105 , GT104 or GT1030 Utility display (When using GT16, GT12) (When using GT15) (When using GT105 (When using GT14, GT11) GT104 ) , Utility call key Simultaneous 2-point press (When using GT1030,GT1020) (2) Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds.For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following. GT User's Manual (3) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (4) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 1 - 38 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 1.6.1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Check on the GOT Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (When using GT15) Error code 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Communication Channel No. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Error message BUS CONNECTION 5 Time of occurrence (Displayed only for errors) Advanced alarm popup display With the advanced alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen). Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all. For details of the advanced popup display, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION HINT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 39 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu. • For GT16, GT12 Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] • For GT15, GT14, GT11 Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check]. [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check]. For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual: GT User's Manual 1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen. Touching [CPU] executes the communication check with the connected PLC. 1. 2. 1 - 40 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring When the communication screen ends successfully, the screen on the left is displayed. GT10 User's Manual (Operation of communication monitoring function screen) Main Menu 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor]. For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual: PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Communication monitoring function Touch [ Touch [Comm. Setting] ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 ] HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Communication settings BUS CONNECTION 5 Touch [Comm. Monitor] DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 41 Confirming the communication status with network unit by GOT (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT15 User's Manual POINT Communication unit for displaying network module status Use the GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13 for displaying the network module status on the GOT. The GOT cannot display the network module status with GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z. 1 - 42 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Controller Network can be confirmed by the utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT15 User's Manual PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 (3) For CC-Link IE Field Network system The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Field Network can be confirmed by the utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 5 GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) BUS CONNECTION GT15 User's Manual DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 43 (4) For CC-Link system The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Link System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT15 User's Manual POINT CC-Link communication unit when network module status display is made When displaying the network module status, use the CC-Link communication unit of MODEL GT15-J61BT13. For the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z, the network module status cannot be displayed. 1 - 44 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GT Designer3 (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows® Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows®. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18 Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32time<1ms TTL=64 3 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18 Request timed out. (2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3 Select [Communication] [PING Test]. [Communication configuration] 1. 2. [Ethernet] and [Connection Test] to display ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Confirming the communication state on Windows®, PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) 4 Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [PING Test] and click the [PING Test] button. The [Test Result] is displayed after the [PING Test] is finished. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 1.6.2 BUS CONNECTION 5 2. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 Click! 1. (3) When abnormal communication 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of [Communication Settings] • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual. User's manual of the Ethernet module 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 45 Confirming the communication state on the GOT (For GT16, GT14) [PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT14 User's Manual 1 - 46 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6.3 (1) No. of faulty stations (a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored. b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Device GS230 (b) Ethernet multiple connection Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored. Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations Ch4 GS340 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Channel POINT When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display 5 BUS CONNECTION When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following. For the data operation, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Numerical Display (Data Operation tab) DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8 to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT. When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS). 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 47 (2) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238) The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set.(0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered. (a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3 PLC No. Device b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 (b) Ethernet multiple connection, servo amplifier connection, inverter connection The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection/non connection with Ethernet. With Ethernet connection: 1 to 128 With other than Ethernet connection: 0 to 127 Example) With Ethernet connection, when PC No. 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty, GS327.b3 is set. The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection. Device PLC No./Station No. Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Appendix.2.3 GOT special register (GS) 1 - 48 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (3) Network No., station No. notification The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup. If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored. Device Description CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239) GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET CH1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 49 1.6.4 Check on GX Developer Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. GX Developer Version Operating Manual (1) Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position. (The display example is based on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure GX Developer Not displayed 1 - 50 [Diagnostics] [System monitor] No error displayed at all times 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only) Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (2) Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure 3 Loop test ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION [Diagnostics] 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GX Developer DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 51 Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information]. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (a) Check [Communication status of each station] and [Data-Link status of each station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure GX Developer 1 - 52 [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Other station info. Use [CC IE Control diagnostics…] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual (a) Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control diagnostics…] [CC IE Control Network Diagnostics] 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GX Developer PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N (a) Check the [Status] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure 6 Monitoring other station DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU [CC-Link / CC-Link LT diagnostics] 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION [Diagnostics] 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GX Developer BUS CONNECTION 5 (3) For CC-Link system 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 53 1.6.5 Check on GX Works2 For CC-Link IE Field Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual Startup procedure GX Works2 → [diagnostics] → [CC IE Field diagnostics] 1 - 54 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 Check on the PLC Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6.6 Check if the fiber-optic cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Perform the line test from the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network to check the wiring state of the fiber-optic cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Checking the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable (For CC-Link system only) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Check if the CC-Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link system. Perform the line test from the master station of the CC-Link System to check the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manuals. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N 5 BUS CONNECTION CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 55 1 - 56 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1 5. BUS CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 1 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION . . . 11 - 1 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 - 1 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 - 1 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 1 2 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 11 2.5 MELSEC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12 2.6 MELSEC-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13 2.7 MELSEC-WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSEC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 5 BUS CONNECTION 2.2 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 . . . . . . . 2 - 8 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 2.1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2. 1 2-1 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi PLCs are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series. Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used. When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored. *1 *2 *3 2-2 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 *1 2.2 MELSEC-L 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * *2 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion*3 2.5 MELSEC-A 2.6 MELSEC-FX 2.7 MELSEC-WS The PLC names differ depending on the type of GOT. • GT11: MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR • GT10: MELSEC-QnU/DC The PLC names differ depending on the type of GOT. • GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6 * • GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q The PLC names differ depending on the type of GOT. • GT10: MELSEC-Q (MULTI) 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 When selecting buffer memory (G) with the following controllers MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 MELSEC-L MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (For MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 (For MELSEC-FX) Item Description Set the device name, device number, and bit number. The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word device. When setting buffer memory (BM) and (G), set the buffer memory address in the space for the device number. 5 GT Designer3 Version Set when the buffer memory (BM) is selected. Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module. Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number. Unit No. Set when the buffer memory (G) is selected. Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module. Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number. Mask type MELSECFX buffer memory 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Unit top I/O Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series. Set the mask type for monitoring or writing only specified bits of the buffer memory. 7 (4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) Unit No. Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series. Set the module No. of the special function unit or special function block to monitor or write. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Intelligent function module Screen Design Manual Set the block number of the extended file register. This item can be set only when the extended file register (ER) is selected. Block Device BUS CONNECTION Reading the device comment data created by GX Developer and confirming the device comment/device name are available during device setting. For details on the procedure to refer to the device comment, refer to the following. (5) Setting of the module No. (MELSEC-FX) Information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in [Device]. Set the station number of the controller to be monitored. Set the CPU No. of the controller. Network 8 (1) Setting of the CPU No. Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller. Other Select this for monitoring other controllers. After selecting the item, set the station number and network number of the controller to be monitored. NW No.: Set the network No. Station No.: Set the station No. 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET ETHERNET CONNECTION CPU No. 2-3 (For device BM and CPU No. 0) (1) Setting of the CPU No. (a) When monitoring a single CPU system Set to 0. (b) When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when monitoring a multiple CPU system. When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the connection method. Connection method (For device BM and CPU No. 1 to 4) Monitoring target • Direct CPU connection Connected PLC CPU • • • • • Control CPU Bus connection Computer link connection MELSECNET connection Ethernet connection CC-Link connection Device number Head I/O number of buffer memory Device name (2) When monitoring link relay (B) and link register (W) assigned in link parameter and network parameter. Set the device link relay (B) and link register (W) running cyclic communication as [Host]. If it is set as [Other] in the network setting, the cyclic transmission is changed to the transient transmission regardless of the network type, resulting in delay of the object display. Device number Head I/O number of buffer memory Device name CPU No. 1 to 4 (For device G and CPU No. 0) (3) Setting the device by inputting directly from the keyboard When setting the device by inputting directly from the keyboard, set the items as follows. (For devices except BM and G) Device number Device name Unit No. (For device G and CPU No. 1 to 4) Bit condition Device number Device name CPU No. PLC station number N/W No. Channel No. 2-4 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Device number Device name Unit No. CPU No. 1 to 4 (b) Mask type 1 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b0 to b3 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0001H when monitoring BM=4321H as mask type 1. BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 1 H 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 2 H Input value 4 3 2 1 H BM0 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 1 0 H (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) BM0 (After writing) 3 2 1 H 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 0 1 H • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b4 to b7 and b20 to 23 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00060002H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 2. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H BM0=00050001H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 1. BM0 BM0 (After writing) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 H Input value BM0 (Before writing) BM0 BM0=00500010H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 2. • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b0 to b3 and b16 to 19 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00050001H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 1. Input value 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H BM0 (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 H 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 3 H BM0=0100H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 3. Input value 4 3 2 1 H BM0 0 0 0 0 H 0 1 0 0 H (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 5 6 (d) Mask type 3 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b11 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0003H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 3. BM0 4 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION BM0 (Before writing) 4 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING BM0=0010H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 2. BM0=0001H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 1. Input value 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 4 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (a) Mask type 0 Monitor and write the buffer memory value directly. BM0 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Mask type The mask type is effective when using for the buffer memories divided per 4 bits, such as an analog input block. BUS CONNECTION HINT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Set the item for monitoring or writing only the specified bits of the buffer memory. 1 (c) Mask type 2 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b4 to b7 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0002H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 2. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) 2-5 • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b11 and b28 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00070003H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 3. BM0 Monitor value 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 4 7 0 3 0 2 0 1 H BM0 (Before writing) 8 7 0 0 6 5 0 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 2 1 H 3 H BM0=05000100H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 3. Input value (f) Mask type 5 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b0 to b7 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0021H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 5. 1 H BM0=0021H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 5. Input value 4 3 2 1 H BM0 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 2 1 H 0 H (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 H BM0 (After writing) (e) Mask type 4 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b12 to b15 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0004H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 4. • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b0 to b7 and b16 to 23 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00650021H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 5. BM0 4 3 2 1 H BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 0 4 H Monitor value 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H BM0=1000H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 4. BM0=00650021H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 5. Input value 4 3 2 1 H Input value BM0 0 0 0 0 H (Before writing) 1 0 0 0 H (After writing) (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) BM0 BM0 • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b12 to b15 and b28 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00080004H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 4. BM0 Monitor value 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 8 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 H BM0 (Before writing) 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 (After writing) 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 4 3 H 1 H 0 H BM0=2100H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 6. Input value 4 3 2 1 H BM0 0 0 0 0 H 0 H 2 1 0 0 H BM0 (After writing) 2-6 6 (g) Mask type 6 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b15 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0043H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 6. (Before writing) BM0 7 4 H BM0=50001000H for writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 4. Input value 8 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H Monitor value 0 0 8 7 0 0 4 3 H 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET BM0 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00870043H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 6. BM0=65002100H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 6. BM0 (Before writing) BM0 (After writing) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 6 5 0 0 2 1 0 0 H 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Input value (5) Setting of the module No. (MELSEC-FX) Set the module No. of the special function unit or special function block to monitor or write. The module No.0 to No.7 are assigned in order for the nearest module or block from the main unit. For details of the module No., refer to the following. User's Manual (Hardware) of MELSEC-FX (a) Direct specification Specify the module No. (No.0 to No.7) of the special function unit or special function block directly, to monitor or write when setting the devices. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 5 100 GD10 101 GD11 : : 114 GD24 115 GD25 Setting range 0 to 7 For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur. If a non-existent module No. is set, a timeout error occurs. 7 The module No. cannot be specified indirectly for the multidrop connection. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Compatible device 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Module No. BUS CONNECTION (b) Indirect specification*1 Specify the module No. of the special function unit or special function block indirectly, to monitor or write when setting the devices, by using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 corresponding to the module No. will be the module No. of the special function unit or special function block. 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2-7 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSECQnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700]*10 as the controller type. Device name Setting range Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF Internal relay (M)*4*6*11 M0 to M61439 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 (B)*4 Link relay Timer*6 Counter*6 Device No. representation Hexadecimal D0 to D4910079 Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2255 Link register (W)*4 W0 to W4AEBFF Timer (current value) (TN)*6 TN0 to TN32767 CN0 to CN32767 SN0 to SN32767 (CN)*6 Decimal Retentive timer (current value) (SN)*6 B0 to B9FFFF Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767 Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 0 to 255 CT0 to CT32767 Extension file register Block Contact (CT) Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 Device ER0 to ER32767 ZR0 to ZR4849663 Special relay (SM) Hexadecimal Setting range Data register (D)*4*6*11 Counter (current value) (ER)*1 Decimal SM0 to SM2255 Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 (ZR)*1*3*4 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19 Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 G0 to G65535 Ww*8*9 Ww0 to Ww1FFF Wr*8*9 Wr0 to Wr1FFF Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E0) U3E010000 to U3E024335 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E1) U3E110000 to U3E124335 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E2) U3E210000 to U3E224335 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E3) U3E310000 to U3E324335 Motion device (#) #0 Retentive timer *6 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Timer, Counter, Retentive timer, Index register and Buffer memory) Hexadecimal ― Extension file register Word device Bit device *7 Device name*7 Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal (BM)*5 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) (G)*4*5 Bit device word*8*12 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 2-8 Device No. representation 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 to #12287 Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer, Counter and Retentive timer) Hexadecimal Decimal ― Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous. Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. Available for file register of block No. of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction. GOT treats them in units of 32k (32768 points). Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified. Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the target intelligent function module. Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q system. Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. Even though Universal model QCPU processes 64-bit data, the GOT cannot monitor 64-bit data. This is not supported by GT10. This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop connection. For GT14, GT11 and GT10, the controller type is as follows. • GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR • GT10: MELSEC-QnU/DC For monitoring the internal relay (M) or data register (D) of a C Controller module, configure the settings related to the device functions in the device setting tab of the language controller setting utility. The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. X3FFF to Y3FFF Internal relay (M)*4*6 M0 to M61439 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B)*4 B0 to BEFFF TT0 to TT32767 Counter*6 Contact (TT) Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) Special relay (SM) to CC32767 to SM2047 Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 timer*6 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 Step relay (S) S0 to S8191 Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Timer, Counter, Retentive timer, Index register and Buffer memory) Word device bit Data register (D)*4*6 D0 to D421887 Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047 Link register (W)*4 W0 to W66FFF TN0 to TN32767 CN0 to CN32767 SN0 to SN32767 Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767 ZR0 to ZR393215 Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 G0 to G65535 Ww0 to Ww1FFF Wr0 to Wr1FFF Timer (current value) (TN)*6 Counter (current value) (CN)*6 Retentive timer (current value) (SN)*6 Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4 *2 *3 Decimal Hexadecimal *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 Decimal *9 Hexadecimal ― Decimal 5 Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal 6 Decimal 7 *7*8 Wr *7*9 Bit device word Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer contact and Counter contact) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (G)*4*5 Ww*7*8 3 4 (BM)*5 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) 2 Hexadecimal ― 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Word device CC0 SM0 Hexadecimal DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET to Y0 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM X0 Output (Y) Device No. representation BUS CONNECTION Input (X) Timer*6 Bit device Setting range Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous. Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. Available for file register of block No. of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction. GOT treats them in units of 32k (32768 points). Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified. Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the target intelligent function module. Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-L system. Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. (The data register (D) can be used for D32768 or later.) This is not supported by GT10. This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop connection. The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Device name *1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-L] as the controller type are as follows. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2.2 MELSEC-L 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.2 MELSEC-L 2-9 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*]*13 as the controller type are as follows. Device name*7 *8 *12 Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF Internal relay (M)*9 M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 Bit device Timer*9 Counter*9 Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047 Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 timer*9 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Timer, Counter, Retentive timer, Index register and Buffer memory) Word device bit Data register (D)*9 D0 to D32767 Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047 Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Timer (current value) (TN)*9 TN0 to TN32767 CN0 to CN32767 SN0 to SN32767 Counter (current value) (CN)*9 Retentive timer (current value) (SN)*9 Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF R0 to R32767 Block 0 to 255 Device R0 to R32767 ZR0 to ZR1042431 Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 G0 to G65535 Ww0 to Ww1FFF Wr0 to Wr1FFF File register Extension file register Word device Setting range (ER)*1*10*11 (R)*1*2 Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4*10*11 Device No. representation Hexadecimal *10*11 Wr Bit device 2 - 10 word*6*10 Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer, Counter and Retentive timer) *3 Decimal Hexadecimal *6 *7 *8 Decimal *9 *10 *11 Hexadecimal ― Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal (G)*4*5*10*11 Ww*10*11 *2 *4 *5 (BM)*5*10*11 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) *1 Hexadecimal ― 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * *12 *13 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of GX Developer.(Except MELSEC-QnA) Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous. Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. Available for file register of block No. of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction. GOT treats them in units of 32k (32768 points). Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified. Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the target intelligent function module. The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. When monitoring MELDAS C6/64, if a word device outside the range is set, the value becomes indefinite. When a bit device outside the range is set, the object may not be displayed or the set function may fail to operate. Check the set device using the device list of GT Designer3. Devices used by the MELDAS C6/64 system cannot be used. Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q system. Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. This is not supported by GT10. This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop connection. Only reading is possible from QS001CPU. For GT14, GT11 and GT10, the controller type is as follows. • GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6 * • GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q 1 X1FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF Internal relay (M)*12 M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) to B7FFF TT0 to TT32767 Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 SM0 to SM2047 Special relay (SM)*9 Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 timer*12 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Timer, Counter, Retentive timer, Index register and Buffer memory) Data register (D)*10*11*12 D0 to D32767 Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047 Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Timer (current value) (TN)*12 TN0 to TN32767 CN0 to CN32767 SN0 to SN32767 Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767 Extension file register Block 0 to 255 Device R0 to R32767 ZR0 to ZR1042431 Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 G0 to G65535 Ww*7*8 Ww0 to Ww7FF Wr*7*8 Wr0 to Wr7FF Motion device (#)*7*8 #0 to #8191 Counter (current value) (CN)*12 Retentive timer (current value) (SN)*12 (ER)*1*7*8 Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4*7*8 Decimal Hexadecimal (When using the QCPU/Q Motion) *12 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion system. Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. *13 For GT10, the controller type is [MELSEC-Q(Multi)]. Decimal 3 4 Hexadecimal ― Decimal 5 Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal 6 Decimal 7 *5*7*8 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (BM) (G)*4*5*7*8 Bit device word*6*7 Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer, Counter and Retentive timer) Hexadecimal 8 Decimal ― ETHERNET CONNECTION Bit device Counter*12 B0 Contact (TT) Hexadecimal 2 (When using the Q Motion) *9 When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM for the device name and set the value subtracted 9000 for the device number (0 to 255). *10 The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the special data register. *11 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid setting range. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET to HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM X0 Device No. representation BUS CONNECTION Input (X) Timer*12 Word device Setting range DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Device name (When using the QCPU) * For details of *1 to *6, refer to 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *. *7 This is not supported by GT10. *8 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop connection. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion]*13 as the controller type are as follows. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion 2 - 11 2.5 MELSEC-A The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows. (2) For GT10, GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION (1) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 Device name Input (X) X0 to X1FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF Internal relay/Special internal relay (M) M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) Contact (TT) Timer Counter Hexadecimal Decimal M9255 Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191 Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047 Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF TT0 to TT2047 Contact (TT) TC0 to TC2047 CT0 to CT1023 Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023 TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 CC32767 SB7FF Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Index register and Buffer memory) Hexadecimal ― to D32767 Decimal Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767 CN0 to CN32767 Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF File register (R) R0 to R32767 Extension file register Block 1 to 255 Device ER0 to ER32767 Index (Z) Z0 to Z15 register*2 (V) V0 to V6 Accumulator (A) A0 to A1 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 Decimal Hexadecimal Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF Wr0 to Wr7FF Bit device word*4*5 Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer and Counter) In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the extension file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, or A4UCPU is not available. When the bit specification writing of the word device is required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28. In the computer link connection, writing to the index register (e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is not available. Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified. Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the target intelligent function module. The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples of 16. Example: M9000, M9016, M9240 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.5 MELSEC-A Decimal ― D9255 Decimal Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF Hexadecimal Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN2047 Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN1023 File register (R) R0 to R8191 Index (Z) Z0 to Z6 register*1 (V) V0 to V6 A0 to A1 Accumulator (A) *2 ― Hexadecimal to *1 Hexadecimal Decimal D0 Decimal Decimal Device No. representation Data register/ Special data register (D) *2 Bit device word*3*4*5 (BM)*3 Wr Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Index register) Word device bit Hexadecimal D0 Timer Counter Decimal Data register/Special data register (D) 2 - 12 to Contact (CT) to *4 *5 M0 Coil (TC) to *3 Internal relay/ Special internal relay (M) TT32767 SB0 *2 Y1FFF B7FFF CC0 *1 X1FFF to to Coil (CC) (ER) to Y0 to Link special relay (SB) *1 X0 Output (Y) TT0 Coil (TC) Counter (current value) (CN) Input (X) B0 Word device bit Word device Device No. representation Bit device Setting range Word device Bit device Device name Setting range *3 *4 *5 Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer and Counter) Decimal ― In the computer link connection, writing to the index register (e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is not available. With the computer link connection, the GOT cannot read/ write data from/to the accumulator. This is not supported by GT10. The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples of 16. Example: M9000, M9016, M9240 Y377 Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M7679 Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8511 State (S) S0 to S4095 Timer contact (T) T0 to T511 Counter contact (C) C0 to C255 Word device bit*1 Specified bit of the following word devices (Except Timer (set value) and Counter (set value)) Data register (D) D0 to D0999 File register (D) D1000 to D7999 Special data register (D) D8000 to D8511 Timer (current value) (T) T0 to T511 Counter (current value) (C) C0 to C255 Timer (set value) (TS)*3*5 TS0 to TS511 CS0 to CS255 Extension register (R) R0 to R32767 Index register (V) V0 to V7 Index register (Z) Z0 to Z7 BM0 to BM32767 Counter (set value) (CS)*4*5 Buffer memory (BM)*7 Bit device word*2*6 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 Octal Decimal ― Decimal Converting the above bit devices into words (Except Timer contact and Counter contact) When executing the touch switch function set during the bit specification of the word device, do not write any data to the word device through the sequence program. The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed. For CS0 to CS199, only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed. For CS200 to CS255, only 32-bit (2-word) designation is allowed. Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode. In addition, setting values of the timer and counter, which are not used for the program, cannot be monitored. If monitoring is executed, a reading error occurs. This is not supported by GT10. Can be used only for special blocks or special units compatible with FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC. (Except FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD, and FX2N-2DA) POINT (1) Precautions when using the buffer memory • When the power supply of the special block or special module is turned off, the contents of the buffer memory are initialized, except for some keeping areas. • When the buffer memory is monitored by the GOT, the PLC scan time may increase instantly. • Use the 16 bit specification for the buffer memory of 16 bit data. Use the 32 bit specification for the buffer memory of 32 bit data. (3) Monitoring availability at each keyword protection level The following shows the device monitoring availability at each keyword protection level. When registering the keyword only When registering the keyword and 2nd keyword Keyword not registered Incorrect or All Incorrect All online Read/ write/ Write protection operation write operation write read protect cancelled protect protect protect protect protect Item Monitoring devices T, C set value and file register Changing (D1000 and the devices following) *1 *1 *1 When the T, C set values are specified indirectly, changing devices is available. (4) Difference between all online operations prohibition and all operations prohibition When specifying all online operations prohibition, displaying devices and inputting data with programming tools or GOT are all prohibited. When all operations are prohibited, displaying devices and inputting data with the GOT are enabled while all operations using programming tools are prohibited. 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.6 MELSEC-FX 3 4 5 6 7 Other than above *1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET X377 to ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING to Y0 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM X0 Output relay (Y) BUS CONNECTION Input relay (X) Device No. representation DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Setting range 2 - 13 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Word device Bit device Device name If using the 16 bit specification for a buffer memory of 32 bit data, monitoring and writing may not be executed normally. For the data size of each buffer memory, refer to the following. User's Manual of the special block or special module • When reading from/writing to the special block or special module by interrupt processing of the sequence program, monitoring/writing from GOT to the buffer memory may not be executed normally. (2) How to select a keyword protection level For equipment that are allowed to operate the FX PLC online, 3 levels of protection level can be set. When monitoring or changing settings by any online equipment is required, set a keyword referring to the following. (a) When setting the keyword only Select a protection level by the initial letter of the keyword. All operation protect: Set a keyword with the initial letter "A", "D" to "F", or "0" to "9". Incorrect write/read protect: Set a keyword with the initial letter "B". Incorrect write protect: Set a keyword with the initial letter "C". (b) When setting the keyword and 2nd keyword Select a protection level by [Registration condition]. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-FX] as the controller type are as follows. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2.6 MELSEC-FX 2.7 MELSEC-WS The device ranges that can be set when selecting (3) Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device representation of GT Designer3 The engineering software for MELSEC-WS and the device representation of GT Designer3 are different. Set the device by referring to the following table. [MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. Bit device Device Setting range Input (I) I1.1 to I12.8 Output (Q) Q1.1 to Q12.8 Logic result (LQ) LQ0.0 to LQ3.7 Logic input (LI) LI0.0 LI3.7 Decimal +Decimal Data (byte)(D) D0 to D99 Data (word)(W) W0 to W49 EFI input (byte)(EI) EI110 to EI233 Device GT Designer3 - I I*1 Decimal +Decimal +Decimal EFI output (byte)(EQ) EQ10 to EQ22 Logic input (byte)(LD) LD0 to LD3 Decimal Logic input (word)(LW) LW0 to LW1 Decimal . (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Input position Decimal Decimal +Decimal Q*1 . (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Output position ].Q : I/O model name (such as XTIO) (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Output position LQ LQ*1 . (0-3): Byte number LI LI*1 . (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position (2) Device settings of MELSEC-WS • Input(I), Output(Q) (1-2): EFI number (1-3): Device number (0-3): Byte number EQ Input position(1 to 8) EQ*1 (1-2): EFI number (0-2): Byte number • Logic result(LQ), Logic input(LI) D . : "Result" (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position [0] . D (0-99(Dec)): Byte number . : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1) (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position [0].EFI EI EI*1 Module number(1 to 12) (1-12(Dec)): Module number [ Q POINT (1) Devices of MELSEC-WS Only reading is possible for all devices. ].I : I/O model name (such as XTIO) (1-8): Input position (0-7): Bit position Device name Engineering software for MELSEC-WS [ Specified bit of the following word devices Word device bit Word device to Device No. representation : , Byte : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1) (1-2): EFI number (1-3): Device number (0-3): Byte number [0].EFI :1, Byte : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1) (1-2): EFI number (0-2): Byte number RS232 data (Safety controller to RS232) W Device name Bit position(0 to 7) W Byte number(0 to 3) • EFI input(EI) LD (0-49(Dec)): Word number Word virtualization of D device W0= (D1(Upper bits), D0(Lower bits)) LD (0-3): Byte number GOT independent device (Not available) RS232 data (Safety controller to RS232) LW Device name Byte number(0 to 3) Device number(1 to 3) EFI number(1 to 2) • EFI output(EQ) LW (0-1): Word number Word virtualization of LD device LW0= (LD1(Upper bits), LD0(Lower bits)) *1 Device name Byte number(0 to 2) EFI number(1 to 3) 2 - 14 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS GOT independent device (Not available) When the mapping position is changed by the MELSEC-WS engineering software, a mismatch occurs between virtual devices on GOT and MELSEC-WS mapping devices. When mapping is changed, use D devices or LD devices. +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8 +8 to +15 +16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8 +32 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3 I3.4 I3.5 I3.6 I3.7 I3.8 +48 I4.1 I4.2 I4.3 I4.4 I4.5 I4.6 I4.7 I4.8 +64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8 +80 I6.1 I6.2 I6.3 I6.4 I6.5 I6.6 I6.7 I6.8 +96 I7.1 I7.2 I7.3 I7.4 I7.5 I7.6 I7.7 I7.8 I8.8 +112 I8.1 I8.2 I8.3 I8.4 I8.5 I8.6 I8.7 +128 I9.1 I9.2 I9.3 I9.4 I9.5 I9.6 I9.7 I9.8 +144 I10.1 I10.2 I10.3 I10.4 I10.5 I10.6 I10.7 I10.8 +160 I11.1 I11.2 I11.3 I11.4 I11.5 I11.6 I11.7 I11.8 +176 I12.1 I12.2 I12.3 I12.4 I12.5 I12.6 I12.7 I12.8 +1 +2 +0 EQ10 EQ11 EQ12 +16 : +240 +256 +272 +3 to +15 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error Device range error 2 Fixed to 0 (OFF) 3 Device range error ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING +192 +0 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Offset 1 (f) EFI output(EQ) Offset (b) Output(Q) +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 Q1.1 Q1.2 Q1.3 Q1.4 Q1.5 Q1.6 Q1.7 Q1.8 +8 to +15 +16 Q2.1 Q2.2 Q2.3 Q2.4 Q2.5 Q2.6 Q2.7 Q2.8 +32 Q3.1 Q3.2 Q3.3 Q3.4 Q3.5 Q3.6 Q3.7 Q3.8 +48 Q4.1 Q4.2 Q4.3 Q4.4 Q4.5 Q4.6 Q4.7 Q4.8 +64 Q5.1 Q5.2 Q5.3 Q5.4 Q5.5 Q5.6 Q5.7 Q5.8 +80 Q6.1 Q6.2 Q6.3 Q6.4 Q6.5 Q6.6 Q6.7 Q6.8 +96 Q7.1 Q7.2 Q7.3 Q7.4 Q7.5 Q7.6 Q7.7 Q7.8 Q8.8 +112 Q8.1 Q8.2 Q8.3 Q8.4 Q8.5 Q8.6 Q8.7 +128 Q9.1 Q9.2 Q9.3 Q9.4 Q9.5 Q9.6 Q9.7 Q9.8 +144 Q10.1 Q10.2 Q10.3 Q10.4 Q10.5 Q10.6 Q10.7 Q10.8 +160 Q11.1 Q11.2 Q11.3 Q11.4 Q11.5 Q11.6 Q11.7 Q11.8 +176 Q12.1 Q12.2 Q12.3 Q12.4 Q12.5 Q12.6 Q12.7 Q12.8 +192 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Offset Fixed to 0 (OFF) 5 Device range error +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 LQ0.0 LQ0.1 LQ0.2 LQ0.3 LQ0.4 LQ0.5 LQ0.6 LQ0.7 +8 LQ1.0 LQ1.1 LQ1.2 LQ1.3 LQ1.4 LQ1.5 LQ1.6 LQ1.7 +16 LQ2.0 LQ2.1 LQ2.2 LQ2.3 LQ2.4 LQ2.5 LQ2.6 LQ2.7 +24 LQ3.0 LQ3.1 LQ3.2 LQ3.3 LQ3.4 LQ3.5 LQ3.6 LQ3.7 +32 BUS CONNECTION (c) Logic result(LQ) Offset 6 Device range error Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 LI0.0 LI0.1 LI0.2 LI0.3 LI0.4 LI0.5 LI0.6 LI0.7 +8 LI1.0 LI1.1 LI1.2 LI1.3 LI1.4 LI1.5 LI1.6 LI1.7 +16 LI2.0 LI2.1 LI2.2 LI2.3 LI2.4 LI2.5 LI2.6 LI2.7 +24 LI3.0 LI3.1 LI3.2 LI3.3 LI3.4 LI3.5 LI3.6 LI3.7 +32 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (d) Logic input(LI) Device range error 7 (e) EFI input(EI) +0 +1 +2 +3 +0 EI110 EI111 EI112 EI113 +16 EI120 EI121 EI122 EI123 +32 EI130 EI131 EI132 EI133 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 +256 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 +272 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI223 +288 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 8 Device range error Device range error ETHERNET CONNECTION +48 : +240 +8 to +15 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Offset +302 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (4) When using offset specification When setting devices using the offset function, the device values are as follows. (a) Input(I) 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS 2 - 15 2 - 16 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS 3 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17 3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU . . .3 - 18 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 19 5 BUS CONNECTION 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. 1 3-1 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network Bus connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. Control station GOT *1 Normal station Normal station Normal station • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CCLink IE controller network. Control station *1 Control station GOT Normal station Normal station Normal station • When connecting to the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to No.4. Normal station Normal station Control station Control station GOT Normal station Normal station Normal station Normal station Normal station • Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU. ■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1 to 2) • The motion controller CPU (Q Series) at other stations cannot be monitored. *1 3-2 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively. 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems *1 Control station *1 Normal station Normal station Normal station Control station Normal station Normal station Normal station • When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included, the master station and local stations can be monitored. • When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] for the PLC CPU of the connected station. (Even if designated, the parameter is ignored) Normal station 3 GOT Control station Control station Normal station M station Normal station L station Normal station L station • Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU. ■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1 to 2) The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively. 4 5 6 (3) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU • The GOT can monitor the control station on the network. When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned for the network parameter. • The GOT cannot monitor normal stations on the network. • The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks. Control station Normal station GOT Normal station Normal station 7 Control station GOT Normal station Control station Normal station Normal station Normal station Normal station COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION *1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Control station GOT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CCLink IE controller network. 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Normal station HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT BUS CONNECTION • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3-3 Direct CPU connection/computer link connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (1). (2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (2). (3) When connecting to QCPU (A mode)/AnUCPU • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. For monitoring devices (other than B and W assigned for the network parameter) of other stations, the GOT cannot monitor the devices of the PLC CPU that is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU. • If connected to a relay station, use data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] to designate the unit number that is connected to the network to be monitored. *1 Control station GOT Normal station Normal station *1 Normal station GOT Control station Control station Normal station M station Normal station L station Normal station L station (4) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (3). (5) When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via direct CPU connection Monitor the motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU system. Controller Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU CNC (CNC C70) Q173NCCPU Robot controller (CRnQ-700) Q172DRCPU *1 Relay CPU QCPU (Q mode) QnUCPU The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively. CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), CC-Link connection (via G4) • Only the station connected to the GOT can be monitored. ■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) • When the station connected to the GOT is in the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to No.4. • The GOT cannot monitor other stations. 3-4 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network When transmitting cyclic transmission with a GOT, even if link device X and/or Y are assigned to a GOT when setting the network parameter for the control station, the GOT cannot access the host station. When transmitting cyclic transmission, use link device B and/or W. • The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. When the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 by specifying CPU No. • When monitoring other networks, a CPU on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link field network is accessible via the PLC CPU. However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks. On the Ethernet network, only QCPU (Q mode) and QnACPU can be accessed. • When monitoring other networks in MELSECNET/10 connection, install the MELSECNET/H communication unit on the GOT. • To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals. Routing parameter setting for the GOT 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Precautions for cyclic transmission 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING POINT 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (MELSECNET/H network system, MELSECNET/10 network system) Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) BUS CONNECTION 5 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Field Network) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual • If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are monitored, monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored. ■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Controller Network) ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3-5 POINT Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring) Monitoring devices of other stations on the network If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore, monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the network parameter. Monitoring devices of other networks (Bus connection, CPU direct connection, computer link connection) • Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station. • If another network is monitored, the display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced. 3-6 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 1: When using bus connection Control station Control station AnU (1-1) QnA (2-1) Network No.2 AnN (2-3) (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station. (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.). Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU Network No.1 Network No.2 AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4) Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4) Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ── Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── Other (2-4) Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ── Other (1-1) ── ── Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Host (1-4) (2-2) QnA (2-1) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) How to read the table 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 5 BUS CONNECTION AnA (1-3) AnU (2-4) 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU AnU (1-4) (2-2) Network No.1 7 Upper line: Accessibility : Accessible : Not accessible Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number) POINT COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION QnA (1-2) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 8 For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3-7 ETHERNET CONNECTION Monitoring link device B or W Example 2: When using bus connection Control station Control station QnA (1-1) AnU (2-1) Network No.1 AnA (1-2) AnU (2-4) Network No.2 QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M) AnU (2-3) Data link system QnA (L1) AnA (L2) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station. (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.). Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Other (1-3) or Other (2-2) ── ── ── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ── ── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host (1-3) QnA (2-2) (M) AnU (2-1) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) ── *1 Other (0-2)*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0. How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility : Accessible Lower line: : Not accessible Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number) POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. 3-8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 1 Control station DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET AnN (2-3) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station. (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.). Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT AnU (1-1) Q (Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU Network No.1 Network No.2 AnU (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── ── Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4) Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ── Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── ── Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (2-2) ── Host (1-4) (2-2) QnA (2-1) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility : Accessible Lower line: : Not accessible Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number) POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3-9 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM AnA (1-3) 2 AnU (2-4) Network No.2 5 BUS CONNECTION AnU (1-4) (2-2) Network No.1 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Q(Q mode) (1-2) QnA (2-1) 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION AnU (1-1) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Control station PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Example 3: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection Example 4: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection Control station Control station AnU (2-1) Q(Q mode) (1-1) Network No.1 AnA (1-2) AnU (2-4) Network No.2 QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M) AnU (2-3) Data link system QnA (L1) AnA (L2) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. (1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station. (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.). Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Q (Q mode) (1-1) AnA (1-2) Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Other (1-3) or Other (2-2) ── ── ── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ── ── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ── ── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host Upper line: Accessibility (1-3) QnA (2-2) (M) AnU (2-1) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) *1 *1 Other (0-2) When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0. How to read the table : Accessible Lower line: : Not accessible Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number) POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. 3 - 10 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 1 QnA (2-2) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Network No. 2 AnN (2-3) GOT (1-3) • Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W) Station to be accessed Network No.1 QnA (1-1) Station connected to GOT Q (Q mode) (1-2) GOT (1-3) 3 Network No.2 GOT (1-3) AnU (1-4) Q (Q mode) (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) ―― : Accessible : Not accessible • Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device (a) Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter NW No.: 1, Station number: Host 4 POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. (b) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W) QnA (1-1) Q (Q mode) (1-2) GOT (1-3) AnU (1-4) GOT (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) ―― 1, Other (4) How to read the table 1, Other (2) ↑ ↑ NW No. Station number 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING AnU (1-4) (2-4) Network No. 1 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Q (Q mode) (1-2) Q (Q mode) (2-1) BUS CONNECTION QnA (1-1) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 11 Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) Image of CC-Link Connection GOT Network module CC-Link Master module (0 station) (1-2) Q(Q mode) (1-2) CC-Link System GOT AnA (1-3) QnA (1-1) AnN (1-4) GOT Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network System GOT QnA (1-1) Q (Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnN (1-4) QnA (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnN (1-4) : Accessible 3 - 12 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems : Not accessible Access range 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION • Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET/H network system, or MELSECNET/10 network system 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) • Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Controller Network 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING The PLC can be monitored via the Ethernet module set in the Ethernet setting on GT Designer3. The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link field network via the QCPU or QnACPU. However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks. (The GOT cannot monitor the AnNCPU on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H, and MELSECNET/10 networks) For monitoring CPUs on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link field network, set the routing parameter. For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals. • Routing parameter setting of the GOT DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 (1) MITSUBISHI PLC CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual • Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Field Network MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual Monitoring via the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B network cannot be performed. 5 BUS CONNECTION GOT Hub etc. Gateway (Router etc.) 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSECNET/H etc. (1) Host in the Ethernet connection While the GOT is handled as the host in MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the station (Ethernet module) set as the host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 is handled as the host in Ethernet connection. (2) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring) For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Various settings 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION POINT 3 - 13 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection Only connected stations can be monitored. When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (1) Access range The master station and local station can be monitored. : Can be monitored, Monitor target Monitoring by cyclic transmission : Cannot be monitored Monitoring by transient transmission Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode) Local station Station No.1 (Ver.1 compatible) *1 Local station Station No.6 (Ver.2 compatible) *1 Monitoring is available only when the CC-Link communication module is the GT15-J61BT13. All devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by the CC-Link parameter setting can be monitored. When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored. The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the setting of the number of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) occupied. For details on the number of CC-Link stations occupied, refer to the following manual . User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected (2) Setting device name and device number (a) Monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting Use the following device names. For devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr, designate the addresses allocated by station number setting. • In the case of CC-Link Ver.2 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.) Device name on PLC CPU Automatic refresh Device name on master station GT Designer3 settings Link scan Device name Set device range Input X ← Remote input RX ← X X0 to X1FFF Output Y → Remote output RY → Y Y0 to Y1FFF Register (write area) D ← Remote register (write area) RWw ← Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF Register (read area) D → Remote register (read area) RWr → Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF • In the case of CC-Link Ver.1 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.) Device name on PLC CPU 3 - 14 Automatic refresh Device name on master station Link scan GT Designer3 settings Device name Set device range Input X ← Remote input RX ← X X0 to X7FF Output Y → Remote output RY → Y Y0 to Y7FF Register (write area) D ← Remote register (write area) RWw ← Ww Ww0 to WwFF Register (read area) D → Remote register (read area) RWr → Wr Wr0 to WrFF 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (3) Setting NW No. and station number 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (a) When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (b) Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations Set the device name and device No. (b) When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n) (n: Station number of another station to be monitored (0: Master station, 1-64: Local station)) For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC-Link parameter, use the local device even if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. When using CC-Link connection (via G4) (Q series only) 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM (1) Access range GT16, GT15 and GT14 can monitor the master station and local stations. GT10 and GT11 can monitor the master station only. (2) Setting NW No. and station number (a) When monitoring master station NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0) 5 BUS CONNECTION (b) When monitoring local station NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64) (3) Setting device name and device number Set the device name and device No. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 POINT 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 3 - 15 Monitoring overview The following two methods are available for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit. Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission*2 Contents Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system master and local station are specified and monitored. Advantage The CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is required. However, the GOT communication sequence Monitoring by cyclic transmission*2 All remote inputs/outputs and remote registers assigned to the Master station by CC-Link parameter setting are specified and monitored. The data communication processing speed is high. program is not needed.*1 Disadvantage The data communication processing speed is lower than that of cyclic transmission. • Writing from the GOT (read command from the master station) can be performed only to remote outputs and remote registers assigned to the GOT of the master station and to the GOT internal registers. • GOT communication sequence program is required.*1 *1 *2 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program satisfy the following conditions. • Use a QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later as the PLC CPU of the master station. • Use GX Developer or SW2 -GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC-Link setting on the package. For details of the connection method, refer to the following manual . User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected For whether the data can be sent to/received from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by transient transmission and cyclic transmission, refer to the following. ■ When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) POINT In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline) intelligent device stations (GOTs and intelligent device units) reduces the data communication speed. To raise the data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and do not connect five or more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system. 3 - 16 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring (1) When connecting to the master station M GOT L3 L2 • The master station can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. • Other local stations cannot be monitored. L1 L3 L2 (3) When connecting to the master station on the third layer • The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. • Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored. 3 M GOT 4 M L3 L1 L2 m GOT 3 1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (2) When connecting to the local station 2 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM L1 5 Monitoring devices of other stations If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter. BUS CONNECTION • Local stations can be monitored. When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Bus connection, CPU direct connection, Computer link connection DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring 3 - 17 Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices . M L3 L1 L2 m 3 1 GOT 2 (1) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station. (2) Monitoring devices of other stations Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table. Setting of the station No. Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT M L1 L2 m L3 1 2 3 M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 ― ― ― L1 Other 0 Host ― ― ― ― ― L2 m Other 0 ― Host ― Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 L3 Other 0 ― ― Host ― ― ― 1 ― ― Other 0 ― Host ― ― 2 ― ― Other 0 ― ― Host ― 3 ― ― Other 0 ― ― ― Host POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. 3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU The access range that can be monitored for the direct CPU connection is only the connected CPU. (The GOT cannot monitor other stations.) The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and others. The access range that can be monitored for the multi-drop communication is only the CPU to which the serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly. 3 - 18 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU POINT (1) Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10 The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system. Network No.1 Station No.0 (master station) Empty Empty QJ71LP21-25 PLC CPU Power supply module Q33B PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 4 MELSECNET/H remote I/O Network Q33B 5 BUS CONNECTION Empty QJ71E71-100 QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Network No.1 Station No.1 (remote I/O station) 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Monitor target 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station. When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods. 1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/ H Network System Hub GOT GOT (1) Direct CPU connection (2) Computer link connection (3) Ethernet connection 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU GOT (2) Connection to GT11 and remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station). COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 3 - 19 Direct CPU connection (1) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only) The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) (3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Computer link connection (1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CMO) mounted on the remote I/O station. For the cables required for connection with the serial communication module or modem interface module and other details, refer to the following. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only) The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) (3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 3 - 20 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System (2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only) The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the remote I/O station. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) (3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. 3 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (1) Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/O station. For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Ethernet connection Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station. BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 3 - 21 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to the head module, use the following connection methods. Computer link connection Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Empty Empty QJ71GF11-T2 CLP CPU Power supply module Q33B CC-Link IE Field Network LY10R2 LX40C6 LJ71C24 LJ72GF15-T2 Power supply module Network No. 1, Station No. 1 GOT (1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2) mounted on the head module. For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (2) Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [Network No. 1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15, GT14 only) In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link field network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual (3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter setting of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual 3 - 22 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING POINT Connection between GT11, GT10 and head module of CC-Link IE Field Network GT11, GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network. GT11, GT10 can access only the connected host station (head module). 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Restrictions on connection to head module The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Works or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System 3 - 23 3 - 24 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System 4 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8 4.2 Direct CPU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) . . . . . . . . .4 - 18 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22 5 BUS CONNECTION 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 23 4.7 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit . .4 - 25 4.9 Q Redundant Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 29 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4-1 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT. Monitor target Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N Tracking cable QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Station No. 2 (remote I/O station) The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU. GOT CPU direct connection When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system. Monitor target Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 Tracking cable QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Standby system (System A) Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Control system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty CPU direct connection Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Station No. 2 (remote I/O station) GOT The GOT monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching. In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3. 4.9 4-2 Q Redundant Setting 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM (1) Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) (2) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) 4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station) (3) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system) 4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) 3 • Direct CPU connection ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Direct CPU Connection • CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) • CC-Link connection (Via G4) 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM CC-Link Connection (Via G4) • MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system) 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) • CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system) 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) 4.7 Ethernet Connection 5 • Ethernet connection • Connection to the redundant type extension base unit (1) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) 4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) (2) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) 4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) (3) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) BUS CONNECTION 4.4 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 4.3 7 4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) (4) CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) 4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT, refer to the following. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4.2 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET • Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Monitorable controllers of each chapter 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4-3 The following table shows the features of each connection method. Connection type • Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) • Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H network system) • Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system) Before system switching Control system After system switching Standby system Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Remote I/O station Serial communication module GOT1 GOT2 Direct CPU connection Ethernet module GOT3 Computer link Ethernet connection connection Standby system Control system Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub master station MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Remote I/O station Serial communication module GOT1 GOT2 Direct CPU connection Ethernet module GOT3 Computer link Ethernet connection connection The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU. • Direct CPU connection GOT GOT Control system Standby system Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub-master station MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Standby system Control system Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub-master station MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Remote I/O station Remote I/O station By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*1 GOT1 Control system Multiplexed remote master station GOT2 GOT2 Standby system Standby system Control system Multiplexed remote sub-master station Multiplexed remote master station Multiplexed remote sub-master station MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Remote I/O station Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1. 4-4 GOT1 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Remote I/O station Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2. 1 CC-Link Master station • MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection (Network system) GOT2 Standby master station Standby system Control system GOT Control system CC-Link Master station Station No.2 (normal station) Standby system GOT2 Standby master station Control system Standby system The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU. Station No.3 (normal station) MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Station No.1 (control station) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING AJ65BT-G4-S3 GOT 3 Station No.3 (normal station) MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Station No.1 (normal station) Station No.2 (sub control station) 4 Control system Standby system By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2 GOT Station No.3 (normal station) CC-Link IE Controller Network Station No.1 (control station) Control system Station No.2 (normal station) Standby system GOT Station No.3 (normal station) 5 CC-Link IE Controller Network Station No.1 (normal station) BUS CONNECTION • CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system) Station No.2 (sub control station) Control system Standby system By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system. Station No. 3 GOT Control system Station No. 2 Standby system Station No. 1 Station No. 2 Standby system 7 Control system By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Station No. 1 Station No. 3 Ethernet Ethernet 6 *2 • Ethernet connection GOT 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GOT1 GOT1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING • CC-Link connection (Via G4) Intelligent device station HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM • CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) After system switching DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Before system switching COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Connection type 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4-5 Connection type Before system switching • Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) *1 *2 Control system Standby system Control system Station No. 1 After system switching Station No. 2 CC-Link module Serial communication module GOT1 GOT2 CC-Link Computer link connection connection Ethernet module GOT3 Ethernet connection Station No. 1 CC-Link module GOT1 Serial Ethernet communication module module GOT2 CC-Link Computer link connection connection GOT3 Ethernet connection To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundant setting, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching. To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundancy setting, refer to the following. 4.10Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4-6 Station No. 2 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system (1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system. When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system." When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." However, even if the error occurs, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in the monitoring operation. (2) The system alarm is displayed when the system is switched due to cable disconnection etc. (when the path is changed). The system alarm is not displayed when the system is switched by the user. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET POINT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (7) A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when the system switching occurs while an option function such as the ladder monitor is used. (8) In the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, when the control station of the MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU redundant system, the timeout is detected as the system alarm. If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down. (9) In the direct CPU connection, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following cases. • When the power supply to the CPU where the GOT is connected is OFF • When the cable connecting the GOT with the CPU is broken • When the tracking is disabled (10) If the Q redundant setting is made for a system that is not a QCPU redundant system, no error occurs at the start up of the GOT and the GOT operates normally. In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC CPU for which the Q redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the monitoring target change mode that was set in the Q redundant setting. (11) If the QCPU redundant system is in the debug mode, do not make the Q redundant system setting for the GOT side when connecting the GOT. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION (6) For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102". Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later. 4 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (5) When the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected. In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device writing error. Correct device." is not detected. 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (4) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 (3) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT can monitor only the following GOT functions. Monitoring function System monitoring function ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4-7 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/ H Network System 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Monitor target Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station) CPU direct connection GOT (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Q Redundant Setting Host Host Remote master station Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network), Station No. 0 (master station)) Do not set the item. In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master. 4-8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Standby system (System B) 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station) 4 Computer link connection GOT (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Q Redundant Setting Host Host Remote master station Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network), Station No. 0 (master station)) 5 6 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) BUS CONNECTION Monitor target 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET This section explains the computer link connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station) 7 Do not set the item. In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4.1.2 8 When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 4-9 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system 4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the MELESCNET/H network system. Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Monitor target Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71E71-100 QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station) Network No. 2, Station No. 2 Ethernet Network No. 2, Station No. 3 GOT (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Other station Q Redundant Setting Routing Information Setting Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network), Station No. 0 (master station)) Do not set the item. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master. 4 - 10 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GOTs, are available. CPU direct connection GOT Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) 3 Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Monitor target Standby system (System B) 4 Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station) (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Q Redundant Setting Host 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET When using one GOT BUS CONNECTION 4.2.1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4.2 Direct CPU Connection Host 7 4.9 Q Redundant Setting POINT To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT cannot change the monitoring target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station). As a countermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 11 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching takes over the host station operation. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system 4.2.2 When using two GOTs Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching. CPU direct connection CPU direct connection GOT2 GOT1 Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station) (1) Connection method Connect GOTs to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Host Q Redundant Setting Host Do not set the item. (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the system switching. The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring. Different from the case using one GOT, no cable reconnection is required. POINT To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT, make the Q redundant settings. 4.9 4 - 12 Q Redundant Setting 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection (2) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is directly connected to the GOT can be monitored. (3) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GOT to a device in the connected PLC CPU is not reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system. In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system. When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GOT writes to the standby system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others). GOT2 2) Tracks D100=5 from control system to standby system. Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Standby system (System B) 5 1) D100=100 MELSECNET/H remote I/O network PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 4 1) Numerically input D100=100 from the GOT. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT1 Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module 2) D100=5 As countermeasures to the above, perform the following. • Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GOT when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU. • To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU, use the special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU. (When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system) • Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition. • For the screen switching device, use a GOT internal device. If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function. BUS CONNECTION CPU direct connection 3 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU CPU direct connection 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (1) As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system. To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable between the GOT and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GOTs connected to each PLC CPU. 1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system without making Q redundant setting 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4.2.3 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 13 The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GOT GOT Control system (System A) Standby Q25PRH Q25PRH QJ71 Station system CPU CPU BR11 No. 0 (System B) QJ72 BR15 QJ71 Station BR11 No. 1 Station No. 2 Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a GOT to control system and standby system. 1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen. 2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of the connection cable. 1) When connecting to the control system 4 - 14 2) When connecting to the standby system 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Set the Status Observation. Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system (SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation]. Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system. Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1. 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab. BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 15 3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit). Device/Style tab Device : SM1515 Shape : None Comment tab : Comment Display Type Text (ON) : Basic Comment The operation status is control system. Touch the screen to display the next screen. Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system. Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU. 1) Device/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status) 3) Comment tab screen (OFF status) 4 - 16 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function. Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation. 2 Screen Type : Base Go To Screen : Fixed 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Next Screen tab Style tab Display Style : None (Shape) Trigger tab : ON Trigger Device : SM1515 3 2) Style tab screen ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Trigger Type 3) Trigger tab screen HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 5 BUS CONNECTION The following shows the created base screen 1. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1) Next Screen tab 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 4. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 17 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. CC-Link connection Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (Standby master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) GOT CC-Link Monitor target Network No. 0, Station No. 2 (Intelligent device station) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module (1) Connection method Connect the CC-Link network system to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Controller Type Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Master station Q Redundant Setting Other (NW No. 0, Station No. 0 (master station)) Do not set the item. As the monitoring method, "monitoring by transient transmission" and "monitoring by cyclic transmission" are available. Each monitor method has advantages and disadvantages. For details, refer to the following. 3.3 4 - 18 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) (Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control system, or due to switching by the user When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the standby master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new control system after system switching. To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching, switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program of the new control system. For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual. 2 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new control system after system switching. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system POINT CC-Link network setting To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection, set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B. For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5 BUS CONNECTION CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) 4 - 19 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. Network No. 0, Station No. 2 (AJ65BT-G4-S3) Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (Standby master station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) GOT CC-Link Monitor target Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module (1) Connection method Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* MELSEC-QnA/Q Device setting (Network setting) Q Redundant Setting *1 4 - 20 Master station Host Local station Other (Local station in other than redundant system) Do not set the item. Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10.The setting of GT Designer3 is not necessary. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) *1 QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) (Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control system, or due to switching by the user When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the standby master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new control system after system switching. To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching, switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program of the new control system. For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual. 2 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new control system after system switching. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system POINT CC-Link network setting To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection, set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B. For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5 BUS CONNECTION CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4 - 21 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network system. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station) GOT Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station) MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Monitor target Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empty Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module (1) Connection method Connect the MELSECNET/H network system to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Controller Type Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Other station Q Redundant Setting Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of PLC to PLC network), Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1, in the above example)) 4.9 Q Redundant Setting (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2. POINT To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function. 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 22 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CCLink IE controller network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station) GOT Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station) Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71GP21-SX QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Standby system (System B) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Empty Connect the GOT to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. For details, refer to the following. 5 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as described below. Setting item Settings Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network) Other (NW No.1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network), Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1 in the above example)) Q Redundant Setting Model BUS CONNECTION Empty QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module (1) Connection method Other station PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 4 MELSECNET/H remote I/O network 6 4.9 Q Redundant Setting (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as the control system. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Power supply module Empty QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71GP21-SX QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING CC-Link IE Controller Network Monitor target 2 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station) 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) 4 - 23 4.7 Ethernet Connection This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 GOT Network No. 1, Station No. 2 Network No. 1, Station No. 1 Ethernet Monitor target Empt y QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empt y QJ61BT11N QJ71E71-100 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Standby system (System B) MELSECNET/H remote I/O network Empt y Empt y QJ71C24N QJ72LP25-25 Power supply module (1) Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Q Redundant Setting Other station Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of Ethernet), Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1, in the above example)) Host Host 4.9 Q Redundant Setting (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. Since the GOT monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet module station No. 2. POINT When monitoring control system without Q redundant setting (Only GT16, GT15 and GT14) When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function. 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 24 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.7 Ethernet Connection This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Standby system (System B) Empty Empty Empty QJ71C24N Power supply module 4 Computer link connection Redundant type extension base unit GOT Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (2) GT Designer3 setting 6 Set GT Designer3 as follows. Settings Model DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Setting item MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Q Redundant Setting Host BUS CONNECTION 5 (1) Connection method Device setting (Network setting) 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Monitor target PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) 7 Host Do not set the item. (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4.8.1 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 - 25 4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. Monitor target Standby system (System B) Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Empty Empty Empty QJ71E71-100 Power supply module Ethernet connection Network No. 2, Station No. 2 GOT Redundant type extension base unit Network No.2, Station No.1 (Ethernet module) (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Q Redundant Setting Host Host Do not set the item. (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system. 4 - 26 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit Monitor target Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Standby system (System B) Empty Empty Empty QJ61BT11N Power supply module ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 CC-Link connection Redundant type extension base unit Network No. 0, Station No. 1 GOT Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) (1) Connection method Connect the GOT to the CC-Link module (QJ61BT11N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Device setting (Network setting) Q Redundant Setting Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Master station 4 5 (2) GT Designer3 setting Controller Type 2 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING This section explains the CC-Link connection for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) Other (NW No. 0, Station No. 0 (master station)) Do not set the item. BUS CONNECTION 4.8.3 6 When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 - 27 4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. Monitor target Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Empty Empty QJ71BR11 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module Control system (System A) Standby system (System B) Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station) Empty Empty Empty QJ61BT11N Power supply module CC-Link connection Redundant type extension base unit GOT Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (AJ65BT-G4-S3) (1) Connection method Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Settings Model MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Device setting (Network setting) Q Redundant Setting Master station Other (NW No.0, Station No.0 or FF (master station)) Do not set the item. (3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system. 4 - 28 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a QCPU redundant system. Before making the Q redundant setting In the Q redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs. 1. Select [Common] 2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation. [Q Redundant] from the menu. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Make the settings for the Q redundant setting. In the Q Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 (Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4) Contents Select a tab of the CH No. for the Q redundant setting. Target at its own Station (0-FF) Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station. (In Ethernet connection, not available even when selected) NW No. Set the network No. (1 to 225) for each of pair numbers (1 to 64). Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU. Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU. (The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed) Station No. Set the station No. (1 to 63) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64). Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU. Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU. (The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed) Pair No.*1 New Create a new pair No. Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line. Delete Deletes one setting of the selected pair. After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number. Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers. Copy All Copies the Q redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab. Paste All 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU CH1 to CH4 Model 7 *2 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Item BUS CONNECTION 5 Pastes the copied Q redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab. 8 For details of *1, refer to the explanation below. *2 GT14, GT12, GT11 are applicable to built-in serial interface only. ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. [Controller Setting] 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET POINT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4.9 Q Redundant Setting 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.9 Q Redundant Setting 4 - 29 *1 Pair number Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair. Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2) Redundant CPU pair (No.1) Station No.1 QJ71E71-100 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module QJ71E71-100 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module GOT Station No.2 Station No.5 Ethernet (Network No.1) Redundant CPU pair (No.2) Station No.3 Station No.4 QJ71E71-100 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module QJ71E71-100 Q25PRHCPU Power supply module POINT Precautions for making Q redundant setting Pay attention to the following items when making the Q redundant setting. • In the setting, station Nos. of the System A CPU and System B CPU must be adjacent numbers to be set as a pair. As long as adjacent numbers are used, allocation of them to the System A CPU and System B CPU may be determined as desired. • Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed. • Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which Q redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU. If any of the QCPUs to which the Q redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched. • When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual network module station Nos. are not matched, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched. • The redundant pair number setting is necessary in the Q redundant setting when the monitoring target changes automatically at the system switching with the host station specified in Ethernet connection. (The "Target at its own Station (0-FF)" function of the Q redundant setting is not valid in Ethernet connection.) • GOT supports the backup mode (separate mode), which is the operation mode of the QCPU redundant system, and does not support the debug mode. 4 - 30 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.9 Q Redundant Setting 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function Advantage Station number switching function The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one screen. Disadvantage Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched. Screen switching function All objects can be used since monitor screens are created for each station number. Monitor screens must be created separately for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system). The following explains how to use each function. • As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one screen. • If the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the same monitor screen. • To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device. • Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched. Screen Design Manual Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection) System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection 6 QJ71 BR11 Station No. 1 Connected module Q25PRH QJ71 CPU BR11 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Network No. 1 Q25PRH CPU Standby system (System B) Station No. 2 Network No. 5 7 Station No. MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1 MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2 1 GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Station GOT No. 3 Control system (System A) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Method for using the station number switching function GT Designer3 Version 3 BUS CONNECTION 4.10.1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Function 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING The following explains how to create a script screen, to be used for the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 connection (network system), or Ethernet connection, that automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.) at the occurrence of system switching even if the Q redundant setting is not made. The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function. The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen switching function. 3 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 31 1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled. Set here. 2. Set the status observation. Make the settings so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation]. Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Station No. is changed to 2. : GD100=2 Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Station No. is changed to 1. : GD100=1 Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab. POINT Setting for the status observation function For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used. To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN]. (For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device]) Example: When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H) Set "257". When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) Set "2570". 4 - 32 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen. [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to 1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 4. Create a monitor screen. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Check here. Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. BUS CONNECTION • Screen script for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection: 5 // If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){ if([w:GD100]==1){ [w:GD100]=2; 6 }else{ [w:GD100]=1; DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU } } Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 33 HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the control station. Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection Station No. 3 GOT Ethernet Network No. 1 Control system Q25PRH (System A) CPU QJ71 E71 Q25PRH CPU Station No. 1 Connected module QJ71 Standby system (System B) E71 Station No. 2 Network No. Ethernet module of control system Ethernet module of standby system 1 1 2 GOT connected to the Ethernet network 1. 3 Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled. Set here. 4 - 34 Station No. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Station No. is changed to 2. : GD100=258(0102H) Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Station No. is changed to 1. : GD100=257(0101H) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Set the status observation. Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON. (For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, set "258"(0102H)) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2. Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Setting for the status observation function For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used. To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN]. (For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device]) Example: When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H) Set "257". When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) Set "2570". 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Create a monitor screen. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. 5 BUS CONNECTION POINT 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 35 4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the station No. 1 to the station number switching device. After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0". For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number switching device value is "0". Therefore, set the switch for writing the station number to the station number switching device and the switch for shifting to the monitor screen on the screen 1. To make this setting, select [Object] [Switch] [Switch]. The following shows an example of setting GD100=257 (0101H: Network No. 1, Station No. 1) and base screen=2 to one switch.(Base screen 2 is the actually monitoring screen) 5. Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen. However, do not make this setting on the screen 1 created in the item above. Check here. 4 - 36 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function • Screen script for Ethernet connection: 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET // If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){ if([w:GD100]==0x0101){ // Station No. 1 to 2 [w:GD100]=0x0102; }else{ 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. // Station No. 2 to 1 [w:GD100]=0x0101; 3 } ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING } For the Ethernet connection, create a script so that the network No. and station number are set to the station switching device. For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, create "[w:GD100]=0x0102". 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab. BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 37 4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function • As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number. When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen. • To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the screen switching devices. • Precautions: There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be used. (1) Base screen switching device (2) Overlap window 1 switching device (3) Overlap window 2 switching device (4) Overlap window 3 switching device (5) Overlap window 4 switching device (6) Overlap window 5 switching device (7) Superimpose window 1 switching device (8) Superimpose window 2 switching device Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection) System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection Station No. 3 GOT MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Network No. 1 Q25PRH CPU Control system Q25PRH QJ71 CPU BR11 (System A) Station No. 1 Connected module QJ71 BR11 Standby system (System B) Station No. 2 Network No. MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1 MELSECNET/H network module of standby system GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network 1. 4 - 38 Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] GD100 as the base screen switching device. Station No. 1 2 3 [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 2. : GD100=2 Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 1. : GD100=1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Set the status observation. Set the status observation so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation]. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 2. : GD100=2 Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 1. 5 BUS CONNECTION : GD100=1 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2. 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 39 3. 4. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 2 (1-2). Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen scripts for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection: The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet connection. // Script of Screen No. 1 // If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2. if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=2; } // Script of Screen No. 2 // If Station 2 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 1. if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=1; } Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2 HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the screen switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the control station. 4 - 40 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection Ethernet Network No. 1 Station No. 3 GOT QJ71 E71 Q25PRH QJ71 E71 CPU Station No. 1 Connected module Standby system (System B) Network No. Station No. Ethernet module of control system Ethernet module of standby system 1 1 GOT connected to the Ethernet network Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] GD100 as the base screen switching device. 2 3 [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 1. 2 Station No. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Control system Q25PRH CPU (System A) Set the status observation. Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON. Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 2. : GD100=2 Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal. Operation Screen No. is changed to 1. : GD100=1 5 BUS CONNECTION 2. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 2 (1-2). 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4 - 41 4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen script for Ethernet connection: The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet connection. // Script of Screen No. 1 // If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2. if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=2; } // Script of Screen No. 2 // If Station 2 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 1. if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=1; } Script screen of Screen No. 1 4 - 42 Script screen of Screen No. 2 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 5 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 5. 1 BUS CONNECTION ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 5.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30 5.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 5-1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU*1 Q00CPU*2 Q01CPU*2 Q02CPU*2 Q02HCPU*2 Bus connection Q06HCPU*2 Q12HCPU*2 *3 5.2.1 Q25HCPU*2 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) - Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) - Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU*1 Q00UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*5 Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Bus connection *3 5.2.1 Bus connection *3 5.2.1 Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*4 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V - - (Continued to next page) *1 5-2 *2 When using the bus extension connector box, attach it to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed.) For the multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *3 *4 *5 Only GT115 -Q BDQ can be connected. Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. When a slim base is used, a bus connection cannot be established. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List Model name Clock Refer to - - L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT Q02HCPU-A - - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Bus connection *1 5.2.2 Q4ARCPU*2 3 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Bus connection *1 5.2.3 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU 4 A2ACPU HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU Bus connection *1 5.2.2 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 6 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU 7 A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 Bus connection *1 5.2.3 Bus connection *1 5.2.4 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU*3 A1SJCPU-S3*3 8 A1SJHCPU*3 MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 5 BUS CONNECTION A1NCPUP21 MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING MELSEC-Q (A mode) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 L02SCPU Q02CPU-A COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC-L Only GT115 -Q BDA can be connected. Bus-connect the GOT on the last redundant extension base A68RB (version B or later) for the Q4ARCPU redundant system. When an extension base unit is connected, a bus connection cannot be established. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5-3 ETHERNET CONNECTION Series PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Communication type Series Model name Clock A0J2HCPUR21 Communication type Bus connection A0J2HCPU-DC24 Refer to *1 5.2.4 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*3*4 Q173CPU*3*4 Q172CPUN*3 Q173CPUN*3 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU Bus connection Q172DCPU *2 5.2.1 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*5 MR-MQ100 - - A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 Bus connection *1 5.2.5 Bus connection *1 5.2.6 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU*6 A171SCPU-S3*6 A171SCPU-S3N*6 A171SHCPU*6 A171SHCPUN*6 A172SHCPU*6 A172SHCPUN*6 A173UHCPU*6 A173UHCPU-S1*6 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC C70 Robot controller WS0-CPU0 - - - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - NZ2GF-ETB - - Q173NCCPU Bus connection *2 5.2.1 CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) Bus connection *2 5.2.1 WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 *1 Only GT115 *2 *3 Only GT115 -Q BDQ can be connected. When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. *4 *5 *6 5-4 -Q BDA can be connected. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later Connect Q170MCPU to QC30B directly, or to the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). When using an extension base, use the A168. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 5.2 System Configuration When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the equipment, make a distance of 100mm or more from the equipment. Connecting to QCPU When one GOT is connected 3 Bus extension connector box Main base unit Extension base unit GOT Communication driver Bus(Q) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 5.2.1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET POINT Connection cable PLC Extension cable *1 box*2 Main base Extens ion base Bus extension connector - - - - Extension cable (13.2m or less) Extens ion base - A9GT - - Extension cable (13.2m or less) *1 *2 *3 *4 - Extens ion base Option device*4 Max. distance Model 5 box*2 - -QCNB*3 Connection cable GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2 - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT: 13.2m (Including the extension cable length) 6 - A9GT -QCNB GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2 - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT: 37m (Including the extension cable length) 7 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032). When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is required. Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit. Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box. When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit. When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage. When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed) When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Bus extension connector 5-5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Main base GOT Extension base 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Main base BUS CONNECTION Extension cable HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 When 2 to 5 GOTs are connected Bus extension connector box Main base unit Extension base unit 1st GOT Connection cable 1) Extension cable Connection cable 2) Main base Bus extension Extension cable Connection cable 3) GOT (1st)*5 PLC Main base GOT (Terminating station) Intermediary GOT Extension base connector box*2 *1 Extension base - - - Connection cable 1) Bus extension connector box*2 - Option device *6*7 Model GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) - Extension cable (13.2m or less) Extension base - A9GT-QCNB*3 - - - - Extension cable (13.2m or less) Extension base A9GT-QCNB GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2 Main base *1 *2 *3 5-6 GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032). When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is required. Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit. When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit. When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage. Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box. Set the bus extension connector box to the same Stage No. as that of the GOT unit. For details on the Stage No. setting, refer to the following. 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed) 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration Communication driver 2 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 - (Built into GOT) GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2 - (Built into GOT) GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2 3 Between main base and GOT (1st): 13.2m Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m Between main base and GOT (1st): 13.2m (Including the extension cable length) Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m (Including the extension cable length) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m (Including the extension cable length) - (Built into GOT) *5 *6 *7 When connecting 3 or more GOTs, the overall cable length is restricted. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs The connection of multiple GOTs When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. The bus connection unit GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *4 4 5 - (Built into GOT) GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING *6*7 Max. distance Model HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Option device BUS CONNECTION *6*7 Connection cable 3) Model DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Option device GOT (terminal)*4*5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Connection cable 2) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Bus(Q) GOT (intermediary)*4*5 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5-7 5-8 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU When one GOT is connected GOT Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Main base Extension cable *1 - Extens ion base - GOT Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion Connection cable 2) Option device 3 Max. distance Model box*2 - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 6.6m - (Built into GOT) Main base - - GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m) - A7GT -CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 36.6m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m *3 - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) Extension cable GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m) A7GT -CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT: 36.6m Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) *1 *2 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 When using GT15-C *4 EXSS-1, follow the precautions below. 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 4 5 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Main base Extens ion base Between main base and GOT: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING PLC HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Connection cable 1) Extension cable 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Communication driver BUS CONNECTION Bus extension connector box DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Extension base unit Main base unit COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 5.2.2 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5-9 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box Connection cable 1) Extension cable 1st GOT 2nd GOT Connection cable 3) Connection cable 2) PLC*5 Main base Extension *1 cable - Connection cable 1) - - Extension base - - Connection cable 4) GOT (1st)*3 Extension base Extension cable 3rd GOT Bus connector conversion box Connection cable 2) *2 *6*7 GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) - Option device - Model GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Main base Extension cable Extension base - - GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m) A7GT-CNB - - *4 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) Main base Extension cable Extension base - - GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *1 *2 *3 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. *4 When using GT15-C *5 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 10 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration Communication driver GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *4 Option device *6*7 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *4 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *4 3 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) - - Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Max. distance Model Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) - - Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length) - (Built into GOT) *7 About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 4 5 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *6 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) Connection cable 4) Model HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *6*7 BUS CONNECTION Option device DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Connection cable 3) GOT (3rd)*3*5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION GOT (2nd)*3*5 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Bus(A/QnA) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 11 5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU When one GOT is connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 1) Extension cable Connection cable 2) PLC Extens ion base Extension cable *1 Main base GOT Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box Connection cable 2) Option device*4 Model Max. distance *2 - - - - Main base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 5m - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 30m *3 - (Built into GOT) GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) 5 - 12 - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration A7GT -CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 35m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m *3 Connection cable 2) Option device*4 Max. distance Model *2 - Main base - - - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *3 - (Built into GOT) GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) A7GT -CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *3 - (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT: 6m (Including the extension cable length) Between extension base and GOT: 36m (Including the extension cable length) Between extension base and GOT: 36m Between extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including the extension cable length) *1 *2 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024). When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 When using GT15-C 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 3 4 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *4 EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions. 2 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Extension cable GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Extens ion base - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET *1 Main base ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Extension cable HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Extens ion base 1 GOT BUS CONNECTION PLC 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 13 When two GOTs are connected Extension base unit Bus extension connector box Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) PLC*5 Extension base - Extension *1 cable - Main base GOT (1st)*3 Connection cable 1) Main base Bus connector conversion box - - - - Connection cable 2) *6*7 GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4 GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) Extension base Extension cable Main base A7GT-CNB*2 - - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4 GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4 Model GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *1 *2 *3 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. *4 When using GT15-C *5 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 14 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4 - Option device 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT (2nd)*3*5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING - (Built into GOT) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) 3 Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m 4 Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Max. distance Model - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m 5 Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m BUS CONNECTION *4 Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m 6 Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length) - (Built into GOT) *4 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) *6 *7 Extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including extension cable length) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length) About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 15 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *6*7 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Option device 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Connection cable 3) When three GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Extension cable 2nd GOT 1st GOT Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) 3rd GOT Connection cable 4) PLC*3 Extension base Extension cable *1 - - Extension base Extension cable Main base Connection cable 1) Main base *1 *2 *3 GOT (1st)*2 Main base Bus connector conversion box - - Option device *5*6 - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Model For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). The connection of multiple GOTs When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 16 Connection cable 2) 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration Communication driver GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *5*6 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4 *4 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *4 *4 *5 *6 When using GT15-C GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Max. distance 3 Model Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 35m - (Built into GOT) 4 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between extension base and GOT (3rd): 36m (Including the extension cable length) 5 BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *4 Option device 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Connection cable 4) Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING *5*6 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Option device 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Connection cable 3) GOT (3rd)*2*3 BUS CONNECTION GOT (2nd)*2*3 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Bus(A/QnA) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 17 5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU Power supply module PLC GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) GOT1000 series*1 PLC Model name Connection cable 1) A0J2HCPU A0J2C03(0.3m) A0J2C06(0.55m) A0J2C10(1m) A0J2C20(2m) *1 *2 5 - 18 Power supply module A0J2-PW Connection cable 2) Max. distance Option device*2 GT15-J2C10B(1m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Model Between PLC and GOT: 6.6m Between power supply module and GOT: 1m - (Built into GOT) The number of connectable GOTs is restricted depending on the number of intelligent function modules mounted to the A0J2HCPU. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Connection to motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) When one GOT is connected Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Main base Extens ion base Extension cable 3 GOT1000 Series Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion Connection cable 2) Option device *3 Max. distance Model box*1 - - GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 2.5m (Built into GOT) Main base - - GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) A7GT -CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *2 - Main base GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) - (Built into GOT) GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) Extens ion base GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m) A7GT -CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *2 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT: 32.5m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m Between main base and GOT: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between main base and GOT: 36.6m Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) *1 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *2 When using GT15-C *3 EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions. 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 19 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING PLC 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Connection cable 1) 5 BUS CONNECTION Extension cable DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Bus extension connector box 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Extension base unit Main base unit 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2.5 When two GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box 2nd GOT 1st GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Extension cable PLC*4 Main base Main base Main base GOT (1st)*2 Extension base Extension cable - Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box - - GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) A7GT-CNB*1 - - GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m) A7GT-CNB*1 Option device*5*6 GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 - GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *3 GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Extension base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *3 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *1 *2 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. *3 When using GT15-C *4 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 20 Connection cable 2) 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration Model PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT (2nd)*2*4 Connection cable 3) Max. distance GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) 3 Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Option device*5*6 Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m 4 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *3 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m *3 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) 5 BUS CONNECTION GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT (1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including extension cable length) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) *5 *6 Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length) The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *3 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 *3 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 21 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*2 Extension base unit Main base unit 1st GOT Connection cable 3) Connection cable 2) Extension cable 2nd GOT 3rd GOT Connection cable 4) PLC*2 GOT (1st)*1 Connection cable 2) Extension base Extension cable Main base Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box - - Main base - - GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Extension base GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) Main base - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *1 *2 The connection of multiple GOTs When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 22 Option device*4*5 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration Model Communication driver GOT (3rd)*2*3 Connection cable 4) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3 *3 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *3 *3 *5 - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) 4 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length) BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *4 When using GT15-C Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 32.5m 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION *3 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 3 Model 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Max. distance Option device*4*5 Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Option device*4*5 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Connection cable 3) BUS CONNECTION GOT (2nd)*2*3 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Bus(A/QnA) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 23 5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1)) When one GOT is connected Main base unit Extension base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) PLC Main base Extension cable Extens ion *1 base*2 GOT1000 Series Connection cable 1) - Bus connector conversion box - Connection cable 2) GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) Option device*5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Model Max. distance Between main base and GOT: 3m - (Built into GOT) Main base - GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 30m *4 - - (Built into GOT) GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) 5 - 24 - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration A7GT -CNB*3 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT: 33m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m *4 *2 - Bus connector conversion box - Connection cable 2) GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) Option device*5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) Extens ion base - - *4 - (Built into GOT) GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) A7GT -CNB*3 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *4 - (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT: 33m (Including the extension cable length) Between extension base and GOT: 33m Between extension base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including the extension cable length) *1 *2 *3 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024). Use the A168B for the extension base unit. When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *4 When using GT15-C 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 3 4 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *5 EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions. 2 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Extension cable GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between extension base and GOT: 3m (Including the extension cable length) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Main base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) Max. distance Model PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING base Connection cable 1) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET *1 Extens ion ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Extension cable HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Main base 1 GOT1000 Series BUS CONNECTION PLC 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 25 When two GOTs are connected Extension base unit Main base unit Bus extension connector box 1st GOT 2nd GOT Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) PLC*5 Main base Main base Extension Extension cable*1 base*2 - GOT (1st)*4 Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box - - - - - Connection cable 2) Option device*7*8 GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5 Main base Extension cable GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) A7GT-CNB*3 - - - - Extension base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5 GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5 GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) A7GT-CNB*3 *5 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). Use the A168B for the extension base unit. When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. *6 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 26 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) Model 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT (2nd)*4*6 Max. distance GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) Model 3 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Option device*7*8 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m *5 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) 5 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT (1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length) BUS CONNECTION *5 Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 *5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m 7 *5 *7 *8 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including extension cable length) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION - (Built into GOT) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 27 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Connection cable 3) When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*4 Extension base unit Main base unit 1st GOT Connection cable 2) Extension cable 2nd GOT Connection cable 3) PLC*3 Main base Extension *1 cable Extension base *2 3rd GOT Connection cable 4) GOT (1st)*3 Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box Connection cable 2) Option device*6*7 Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 Main base Extension cable Extension base - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *1 *2 *3 *4 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). Use the A168B for the extension base unit. The connection of multiple GOTs When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal. The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs 5 - 28 Model 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration Communication driver GOT (3rd)*3*4 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5 *5 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2 *5 *5 *7 - (Built into GOT) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 - (Built into GOT) 4 Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 33m (Including the extension cable length) BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT) When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *6 When using GT15-C Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 33m 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION *5 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 3 Model 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Max. distance Option device*6*7 Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Connection cable 4) Option device*6*7 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Connection cable 3) BUS CONNECTION GOT (2nd)*3*4 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Bus(A/QnA) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 29 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 5.3.2 Communication detail settings (1) Bus(Q) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 2. 3. 4. Item 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. 1 to 7 Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 9 Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal) Timeout Time (Sec.) Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 12) *1 [Controller Setting] from the *2 The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set the option according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Set either of the following option according to the Controller Type to be connected. BUS (Q) BUS (A/QnA) The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 5.3.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 5 - 30 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings Range (Default: 1) Click! 1. Description Number of Stages High*1/Normal/ Low*2 12 to 90 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the monitor screen. However, the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/ Q00/Q01CPU. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High]. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.) Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/ Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced. (2) Bus(A/QnA) Item Number of Stages Description Range (Default: 1) 1 to 7 Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 7 Timeout Time (Sec.) Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3) 3 to 90 (1) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Set an additional stage (16 points 10 slots) for GOT connection, and assign a GOT to one of the I/O slots. (The GOT cannot be assigned to empty slots of the main base unit or extension base unit.) Extension base unit Q68B BUS CONNECTION Empty Empty Stage No. setting connector Stage No. Slot No. :2 :0 Stage No. Slot No. :2 :1 Stage No. Slot No. 6 :2 :2 7 POINT When using the bus extension connector box Set the Stage No. switch on the bus extension connector box to the same Stage No. as the GOT. For setting details, refer to the following manual: A9GT-QCNB Bus Extension Connector Box User's Manual 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 4 5 Extension stage 1 For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. 3 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Disconnect the faulty station Empty Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Empty Main base unit Q312B HINT 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Before setting Stage No. and Slot No. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows. • QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points • Other than QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 32 I/O points At the [Detail setting], assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the PLC CPU. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. (3) When changing Stage No. and Slot No. Change these settings with the PLC CPU turned OFF, and then reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT. Failure to do so may generate a system alarm (No.487). POINT HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION POINT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Setting Stage No. and Slot No. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5 - 31 POINT HINT When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot No. in the communication interface settings, set "10" to [2nd Stage]. Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points number of empty slots" for other purposes. For details on I/O assignment settings, refer to the following manual: QnU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) Example: I/O assignment (when 16 points are assigned to each of all modules installed with the PLC CPU) Main base unit Q35B · · · · Slot No. 9 10 11 12 XC0 to XCF X40 to X4F X30 to X3F 4 XB0 to XBF 3 XA0 to XAF 2 X20 to X2F 1 X10 to X1F 0 X00 to X0F CPU Extension base unit Q68B X60 to X6F X70 to X7F X80 to X8F X90 to X9F 13 14 15 16 17 X100 to X10F X110 to X11F 8 X50 to X5F 7 XE0 to XEF 6 XD0 to XDF 5 XF0 to XFF Q65B Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 Stage No. setting connector 3 2 1 5 4 X140 to X14F X150 to X15F X160 to X16F 2 3 4 5 24 25 26 27 X1B0 to X1BF X130 to X13F 1 23 X1A0 to X1AF 22 X190 to X19F 21 X180 to X18F 19 20 X170 to X17F 18 X120 to X12F Schematic image of Stage No. for GOT connection viewed from PLC CPU (16 points x 10 slots occupied) Extension stage 3 Set Empty (0 points) to unused I/O slots. 5 - 32 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (2) Other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit. When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O slots are left on an extension base unit, set an additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O slots. (Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base unit is not allowed.) (a) When there is an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Empty 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Empty Main base unit A1S35B Extension base unit · · · · Slot No. Empty 4 :1 Stage No. :1 Stage No. :1 Slot No. :2 Slot No. :3 Slot No. :4 5 BUS CONNECTION Stage No. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 1 Empty 0 Empty A1S65B (b) When there are no empty I/O slots on the extension base unit Main base unit A1S35B DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Empty Empty 6 Extension base unit 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION A1S65B Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2 Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5 - 33 5.4 Precautions 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS (b) When using GT15-C BS Follow the GOT side grounding steps in (a) above for both GOTs. (1) Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1 It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15C BS (10 to 30m). Calculate the cable length based on GT15-C100EXSS1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15C300EXSS-1(30m). (2) GT15-C EXSS-1 connector Connect the connectors as follows: GT15-EXCNB PLC CPU side GT15-C BS GOT side PLC side (GT15-C□BS) (a) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 PLC Not connected 5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs (4) Power-up sequence for connection of the Q4ARCPU redundant system (GT15-C□BS) 5.4.14 (2)Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system (GT15-EXCNB) GOT 2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less 4. 5. 6. 5 - 34 Screen Design (3) Power-up sequence for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less 3. The PLC CPU remains in the reset status until the GOT is started. Therefore, no sequence program will run until then. The system configuration, in which the GOT is turned on from a sequence program, is not available. GT Designer3 Version Manual FG LG N L 2. (1) System configuration The following time is taken from when the GOT is powered on until when the PLC runs. • QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more • MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. (3) Grounding 1. Turning the GOT ON (2) Time taken until the PLC runs after power-on of the GOT GOT side (GT15-EXCNB) 5.4.2 OUT IN L N LG FG Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable. Use the GT15-C or less. BS's FG cable of 28cm Do not connect the GT15-EXCNB's FG ground cable. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power's terminal block. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC's power supply module. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions (5) Power-up sequence for cases other than (3) and (4) The GOT and PLC can both be started up whichever of these devices is turned ON first. (There is no specific sequence in which they are powered ON) Note, however, that operation is as follows when the GOT is turned ON followed by the PLC: When the PLC power is OFF with the GOT turned ON, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated. Upon power-on of the PLC CPU, the GOT automatically starts monitoring. Use System Information to reset the alarm. For the System Information, refer to the following manual: GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design (2) When turning OFF the GOT before display of the user creation screen When the GOT is turned OFF before the user creation screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent communications may be no longer possible. In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT. (3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs 5.4.4 GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design (2) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC CPU before display of the user creation screen When the PLC CPU is turned OFF or reset before the user creation screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent communications may be no longer possible. In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT. (3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs 5.4.6 Position of the GOT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Operations causing automatic reboot of the GOT1000 Series Since the GOT1000 Series is automatically rebooted in the following cases, the power does not need to be reapplied to the GOT (OFF to ON). • When an OS is written from GT Designer3 or a CF card • When utility settings have been changed When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated. When the PLC CPU is restored, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring. Use System Information to reset the alarm. For the System Information, refer to the following manual: 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING HINT (1) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring 1 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Do not power-cycle the GOT (OFF to ON) while the PLC is ON. Before doing so, be sure to turn off the PLC first. Powering OFF or resetting the PLC 5 Always connect the GOT to the last base unit. Connecting a GOT between base units is not allowed. Reset switch on GOT When bus connection is used, the reset switch on the GOT does not function. BUS CONNECTION (1) Precautions for reapplying the power to the GOT (OFF to ON) 5.4.5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 5.4.7 When the GOT is busconnected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the standard monitor OS and the communication driver for the bus connection being written onto the GOT, the PLC CPU is reset. (GX Developer cannot communicate with the PLC CPU) In this case, disconnecting the bus connection cable from the GOT will cancel the reset status of the PLC CPU. 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 35 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.4.3 5.4.8 When designing the system When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply module on the main base unit).(The GOT does not operate when it is OFF.) Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption of the modules on the main base unit and the total current consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use. When connecting to When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Other than QCPU (Q mode) 5.4.9 No. of GOTs Total current consumption 5 2200mA 4 1760mA 3 1320mA 2 880mA 1 440mA 3 360mA 2 240mA 1 120mA When assigning GOT I/O signals Do not use the I/O signals assigned to the PLC CPU in sequence programs, as these signals are used by the GOT system. When these signals are used, GOT functions cannot be assured. 5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU (Q mode) (3) When using a Q00J/Q00UJ/Q00/Q00U/Q01/Q01U/ Q02UCPU When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, number of extension stages including the GOT must be 2 or less. When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU or Q02UCPU, number of extension stages including the GOT must be 4 or less. Main base unit Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU Extension base unit Extension stage 1 Stage No. setting connector GOT Stage No. :2 Main base unit Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU Extension base unit Extension stage 1 (1) Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs The following restrictions apply when 3 of more GOTs are connected: Number of GOTs Overall Cable Length 1 Restriction Overall Cable Length Restriction (No restrictions) 2 3 Less than 25m 4 Less than 20m 5 Less than 15m 25 to 37m (No restrictions) 20 to 37m 15 to 37m The bus extension connector box can be connected only to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed) Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions Extension stage 3 Use the same power supply for the PLC and all GOTs, and turn these devices ON and OFF simultaneously. (2) When using a Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU 5 - 36 Extension stage 2 Stage No. setting connector GOT Stage No. :4 Stage No. Slot No. A1 CPU/A2USCPU(-S1) /QnAS(H)CPU(-S1) 1 2 0 A2 CPU/Q2ACPU 3 4 0 A3 CPU/A4 7 3 Cannot be used When connecting to QA1S68B Extension base unit Communication interface setting Max. stage No. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Q38B Main base unit Q68B Extension base unit 2 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Stage No. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Even if the max. number of stages are used with no empty I/O slots, when there is a free space of 32 I/O points or more, a GOT can be connected under the following communication interface setting. For the communication interface setting, refer to the following. A GOT is physically connected to the last of all extension base units. In the Stage No. setting, however, assign the GOT as a stage next to the last Q B type extension base unit. Assign the QA1S6 B type extension base unit as a stage next to the GOT. Connection method 1 (4) In the case of CPUs other than (2) (3) above DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (4) When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit CPU Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU 7 A0J2HCPU 1 5.4.11 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 When connecting to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type 5 BUS CONNECTION (1) When connecting with a QnASCPU type and an AnSCPU type A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on only one side of the main base unit. (Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension connectors on both sides is not allowed) DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 (2) In the case of Q4A(R)CPU, Q3ACPU, A3 CPU, A4UCPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Empty I/O slots are required within the max. number of extension stages. (3) For A0J2HCPU Assign the GOT to the I/O slots 0 to 3 of extension stage 1. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 37 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs (1) System including different GOT series The GOT1000 series can be connected with GOT-A900 series in a system. When using them together, refer to the following Technical News. Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series with GOT1000 Series (GOT-A-0009) The GOT1000 series cannot be used with GOTs other than GOT-A900 series in a system. GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800 5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode Note that when the I/O control mode of the PLC CPU is the direct mode, and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O slot cannot be used. No restrictions apply when the I/O control mode is the refresh mode. On PLC CPUs whose I/O control mode can be selected by a switch, set the I/O control mode to the refresh mode before use. POINT (2) Restrictions on No. of GOTs The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. When connecting to QCPU(Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q Series) QCPU (A mode) QnACPU ACPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) *1 *2 5 - 38 Number of connectable GOTs Up to 5 Total number of connectable GOTs and intelligent function modules*1 5 GOTs + 6 intelligent function modules*2 Not connectable ――――― Up to 3 6 in total AnUCPU, AnACPU, A2US(H)CPU Up to 3 6 in total AnNCPU, AnS(H)CPU, A1SJ(H)CPU Up to 2 2 in total A0J2HCPU Up to 1 2 in total A1FXCPU Not connectable ――――― A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3), A173UHCPU(-S1) Up to 3 6 in total A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPUN Up to 2 2 in total Indicates the following models: AD51(S3), AD51H(S3), AD51FD(S3), AD57G(S3), AJ71C21(S1), AJ71C22(S1), AJ71C23, AJ71C24(S3/S6/ S8), AJ71UC24, AJ71E71(-S3), AJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only), A1SJ71C24(-R2/PRF/R4), A1SJ71UC24(-R2/PRF/R4), A1SJ71E71-B2/B5(-S3), A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SD51S, A1SJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only) Only the A1SD51S can be connected to the QCPU (Q Mode). 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions In the cases where input X of an empty I/O slot is used (1) When input X is assigned on the MELSECNET/10 network (2) When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned ON/ OFF by the computer link module (3) When input X of the I/O slot is turned ON/OFF by the touch switch function (Bit SET/RST/Alternate/ Momentary) of GOT (1) When the GOT is bus-connected to a Q4ARCPU redundant system Connect the GOT to the last redundant extension base unit (A68RB) of the Q4ARCPU redundant system. For the redundant extension base units, use version B or later. The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the rating plate. 5.4.15 1 When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING When connecting to a Q4ARCPU redundant system 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 5.4.14 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Caution Version of redundant extension base unit 5.4.16 Precautions for Q4ARCPU redundant system configurations The GOT does not operate normally in the following system configurations. (1) When the GOT is bus connected to the bus switching module (A6RAF) on a redundant main base unit (A32RB/A33RB) (2) When the GOT is bus connected to a version-A redundant main base unit (A68RB) For the troubleshooting, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using. 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU POINT Troubleshooting 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (2) Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system Apply the power to the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system in the following sequence. Turn ON the GOT. After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT, turn ON the Q4ARCPU redundant system. At this time, a timeout is displayed on the system alarm. Use System Information to reset the alarm. For the system alarm, refer to the following manual: GT Designer3 Version Manual 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. 2. BUS CONNECTION 5 Enlarged view of rating plate Screen Design 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 39 5 - 40 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 6 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22 6.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25 6.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 6-1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 6.2.1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU RS-232 RS-422 *3 *3 - *3 *3 Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU RS-232 RS-422 6.2.1 Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 6.2.1 RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 6.2.1 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*4 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V - - (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 6-2 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. Exclude the GT10 from the multiple CPU system configuration. Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List Communication type Refer to L02CPU*1 L26CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 *1 L02CPU-P 6.2.2 L26CPU-PBT*1 2 L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A 6.2.1 Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*3 Q2ACPU-S1 RS-422 Q3ACPU 6.2.3 Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU 3 RS-422 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU)*3 Q2ASHCPU RS-422 6.2.3 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU 4 A4UCPU A2ACPU HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT*1 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Clock ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Model name 5 A3ACPUR21 RS-422 *2 A1NCPU 6.2.4 A1NCPUP21*2 A1NCPUR21*2 A2NCPU*2 A2NCPUP21*2 A2NCPUR21*2 BUS CONNECTION Series 6 A2NCPU-S1*2 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU A2NCPUP21-S1*2 A2NCPUP21-S1*2 A3NCPU*2 A3NCPUP21*2 A3NCPUP21*2 A2USCPU RS-422 6.2.4 *1 *2 *3 When connecting in direct CPU connection, the adapter L6ADP-R2 is required. When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later • A2SCPU: Version H or later GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later. PLC type HW/SW Version PLC type HW/SW Version Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL Q4ARCPU AL - - 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION (Continued to next page) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) 6-3 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU*1 A2SCPU-S1*1 RS-422 6.2.4 RS-422 6.2.4 RS-422 6.2.4 RS-232 RS-422 6.2.1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU*1 A0J2HCPUP21*1 A0J2HCPUR21*1 A0J2HCPU-DC24*1 A2CCPU*1 MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*2*3 Q173CPU*2*3 Q172CPUN*2 Q173CPUN*2 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 RS-232 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 6.2.1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU RS-232 6.2.7 MR-MQ100 RS-422 6.2.7 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 6-4 When monitoring A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later • A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later • A2CCPU, A2SCPU: Version H or later When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List Refer to RS-422 A273UHCPU RS-422 A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU 2 RS-422 A171SCPU-S3 6.2.4 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU RS-422 A172SHCPUN 3 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 RS-232 WS0-CPU1 6.2.6 MELSECNET/ H Remote I/O station QJ72LP25G CC-Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 6.2.1 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 6.2.1 FX0 RS-422 QJ72LP25-25 *1 RS-232 6.2.1 4 RS-422 *4 RS-422 *4 6 *4 RS-422 FX0N FX1 FX2 *3 FX2C FX1S FX1N RS-232 RS-422 FX2N 6.2.5 FX1NC *3 FX2NC RS-232 RS-422 7 FX3G FX3GC RS-232 RS-422 FX3U FX3UC *1 *2 *3 *4 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station). Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC-FX 5 BUS CONNECTION FX0S HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM QJ72BR15 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING A273UCPU Communication type DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Clock ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Model name COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Series 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6-5 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10, when connecting to QCPU(Q mode)) ( For GT10, when connecting to QCPU(A mode)) RS-422 connector conversion cable QCPU Communication driver GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable RS-422 connector conversion cable Communi cation type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment*5 - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) - 3m RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*4 GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *2 3m *7 - (Built into GOT) GT16-C02R4-9S MELSEC-Q GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) FA-CNV2405CBL (0.5m) GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS-422 GT01-RS4-M*4 GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC *6 30m - (Built into GOT) - *8 *3 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT155 *2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( *3 *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *5 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *6 *7 *8 6-6 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Applicable to the QnUCPU only Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration . RS232 connection diagram 3)) 1 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 6.2.2 LCPU RS-422 connector conversion cable Adapter DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 GOT Connection cable Adapter Communi cation type Max. distance Cable model Option device Model Number of connectable equipment*5 4 - (Built into GOT) L6ADP-R2 - 3m HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*4 GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *2 3m *6 - (Built into GOT) 5 GT16-C02R4-9S MELSEC-L GT15-RS2T4-9P FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m) GT15-RS4-9S 30m - (Built into GOT) RS-422 GT01-RS4-M*4 GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m 6 - DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU L6ADP-R2 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC *1 *7 - (Built into GOT) *3 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( *3 *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *5 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. . RS232 connection diagram 3)) 7 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *6 *7 BUS CONNECTION RS-422 connector conversion cable GOT COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Model name Connection cable ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 PLC 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6-7 6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU QnACPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Communication type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable Model equipment*4 GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) MELSEC-QnA GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT01-RS4-M GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m *3 - (Built into GOT) - *5 *2 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *5 6-8 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration . Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 MELSEC-A ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET ACPU Communication driver GOT Connection cable Model name Connection cable Communication type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device 3 Number of connectable Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING PLC equipment*4 GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT15-RS4-9S 4 - (Built into GOT) RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC *3 GT01-RS4-M GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m - (Built into GOT) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSEC-A GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m - *5 5 *2 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. . 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-422 connection model. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *5 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Connecting to ACPU BUS CONNECTION 6.2.4 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6-9 6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU Function expansion board FXCPU Function adapter GOT Communication driver Connection cable MELSEC-FX When connecting to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2 or FX2C PLC Model name Function expansion Connection cable Function adapter*5 board*5 Communi cation type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment*4 GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) FX0 FX0S FX0N - - RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) 30m GT01-RS4-M*3 - - (Built into GOT) *6 1 GOT for 1 PLC *2 FX0S FX0N - - RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL 3m *6 - (Built into GOT) *2 GT16-C02R4-9S FX1 FX2 FX2C GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - - GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS-422 GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m GT01-RS4-M*3 - - (Built into GOT) *6 *7 6 - 10 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *5 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *6 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-422 connection model. *7 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration . RS422 connection diagram 2)) board Function adapter*7 *4*7 GOT Max. distance Cable model Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *6 GT16-C02R4-9S GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 2 GT15-RS4-9S 30m - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*5 FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - - RS-422 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) - 30m - (Built into GOT) *8 3m - (Built into GOT) *8 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2 *3 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2 *3 GT16-C02R4-9S GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) 30m GT15-RS4-9S 5 - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*5 - RS-422 30m - (Built into GOT) *8 3m - (Built into GOT) *8 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board *3 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU FX1N-422-BD FX2N-422-BD - 7 *1 *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) can be available for FX1S, FX1N and FX2N. *3 *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU to be connected. Use the applicable function expansion board shown in the following table. Item . Function expansion board to be used When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series FX1N-422-BD FX2N-422-BD RS-422 communication *5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION *3 8 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. ETHERNET CONNECTION FX1S FX1N FX2N GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Model name Connection cable Communi cation type BUS CONNECTION PLC Function expansion PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-422 connection) 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 11 *6 6 - 12 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *7 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *8 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration - RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 4) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX1S FX1N FX2N FX2NC -232ADP RS232 connection RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) GT01-C30R2-25P(3m) or FX0N -232ADP RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 5) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 4) - GT01-C30R2-25P(3m) or FX0N -232ADP RS-232 RS232 connection 15m diagram 5) - (Built into GOT) *5 3 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*2 15m - (Built into GOT) *5 4 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*2 15m - (Built into GOT) *5 1 GOT for 1 function adapter 5 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*2 15m - (Built into GOT) *5 6 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 2) RS232 connection *1 GT01-RS4-M*2 diagram 1) RS232 connection FX1NC FX2NC 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board GT15-RS2-9P diagram 2) RS232 connection FX2NC -232ADP 15m diagram 1) FX1N-CNV-BD FX2N-CNV-BD 2 - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) RS232 connection equipment*3 GT01-RS4-M*2 15m - (Built into GOT) *5 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU. Select the function expansion board from the following table. Item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET FX1N-232-BD FX2N-232-BD Model ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or Option device HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM board Max. distance Number of connectable BUS CONNECTION adapter*4 *1*4 GOT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Function Cable model Connection diagram number 7 Function expansion board to be used When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series RS-232 communication FX1N-232-BD FX2N-232-BD When the function adapter is used FX1N-CNV-BD FX2N-CNV-BD *2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *3 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *4 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *5 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-232 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 13 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Model name Connection cable Communi cation type 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION PLC Function expansion PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-232 connection) When connecting to FX3G (RS-422 connection) PLC Model name Function expansion Connection cable Function adapter*6 board*6 Communi cation type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *5 GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*3 - - RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) - 30m - (Built into GOT) *7 3m - (Built into GOT) *4*7 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port *2 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *2 FX3G GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*3 FX3G-422-BD - RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) - 30m - (Built into GOT) *7 3m - (Built into GOT) *4 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board *2 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *2 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 *5 6 - 14 . 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When connecting FX3G series to GT10 (input power supply: 5V), they cannot be connected to standard built-in port (RS-422) and function expansion board (FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously. When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually. GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *6 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *7 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration - RS-232 diagram 4) FX3G GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP - RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) *1 *2 2 15m GT15-RS2-9P 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board 3 - (Built into GOT) 15m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter GT15-RS2-9P diagram 1) RS232 connection *2 - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) RS232 connection Model DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET FX3G-232-BD RS232 connection Option device 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or Max. distance Number of connectable equipment 4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually. GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *3 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *4 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-232 connection model. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Cable model Connection diagram number 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION board Function adapter*3 *3 Communi cation type GOT 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Model name Connection cable BUS CONNECTION PLC Function expansion PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 When connecting to FX3G (RS-232 connection) 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 15 When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GCPLC Model name /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Communication type GOT Max. distance Cable model Option device Number of connectable Model equipment*4 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*3 FX3GCFX3GC- /D /DSS RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) - 1 GOT for 1 PLC builtin port 30m - (Built into GOT) *5 3m - (Built into GOT) *5 *2 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *2 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *5 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-422 connection model. When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- PLC Model name FX3GC- /D /DSS adapter*3 FX3U-232ADP Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) *2 6 - 16 GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment*2 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 1) RS232 connection *1 /DSS) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Function GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3GC- . 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 1 GOT for 1 function adapter For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually. GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *3 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *4 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-232 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration Max. distance Cable model Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *5 GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m 2 GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*4 - RS-422 - 30m - (Built into GOT) *7 3m - (Built into GOT) *7 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2 *3 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *3 GT16-C02R4-9S -LT(-2)) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 30m GT15-RS4-9S 5 - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*4 FX3U-422-BD - RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) 30m - (Built into GOT) 3m - (Built into GOT) - *7 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2 *3 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) 7 *2 *3 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 GT10-C10R4-8PL can be used for FX3U or FX3UC- *3 *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (FX3UC- 4 GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2 FX3U FX3UC 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING - GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING *6 GOT DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET board*6 Commu nication type BUS CONNECTION Model name Connection cable Function adapter -LT(-2). 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually. GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *6 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *7 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 17 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION PLC Function expansion 1 -LT(-2)) (RS-422 connection) 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UCPLC Model name Function expansion board *3 -LT(-2)) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Function adapter*3 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3U-232-BD - RS232 connection RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3U-422-BD FX3U-232-BD FX3U-CNV-BD FX3U-232ADP RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) *1 *2 - (Built into GOT) 15m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter GT15-RS2-9P diagram 1) RS232 connection 6 - 18 Max. distance diagram 1) FX3U FX3UC (FX3UCLT(-2)) GOT 15m GT01-RS4-M*1 - - (Built into GOT) *4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually. GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *3 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *4 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-232 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration /DS, FX3UC- 1 /DSS) (RS-422 connection) GOT Max. distance Number of connectable Option device equipment*4 Model 2 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) 30m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*3 FX3UC- /D /DS FX3UC- GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) RS-422 /DSS - 3 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port 30m *5 - (Built into GOT) 4 3m HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *2 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *5 - (Built into GOT) *2 *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 *2 *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *5 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-422 connection model. When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- . /DSS) (RS-232 connection) PLC Model name Connection cable Function adapter*3 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or FX3UCFX3UCFX3UC- /D /DS FX3U-232ADP /DSS RS-232 RS232 connection GOT Max. distance Option device *1 *2 equipment*2 15m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*1 RS232 connection Model Number of connectable - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) diagram 4) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING FX3UC- DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) 15m - (Built into GOT) *4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually. GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *3 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. *4 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter Use the RS-232 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 19 5 BUS CONNECTION Cable model 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Model name Connection cable Commun ication type 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION PLC PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING /D, FX3UC- 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- 6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU Communication driver WSCPU GOT MELSEC-WS Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Communication type GOT Cable model Connection diagram number Max. distance WS0-C20R2(2m) 2m Option device Number of connectable equipment Model - (Built into GOT) MELSEC-WS RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT15-RS2-9P WS0-C20R2(2m) + 2.3m RS232 connection *1 - (Built into GOT) diagram 6) *1 6.2.7 Use the RS-232 connection model. Connecting to the motion controller CPU Communication driver Motion controller CPU GOT A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) Connection cable Communication driver QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT10) Motion controller CPU Model name Connection cable Communication type GOT Cable model Max. distance GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m Option device Number of connectable Model equipment*4 - (Built into GOT) Q170MCPU RS-232 1 GOT for 1 motion controller CPU GT15-RS2-9P GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *1 3m - (Built into GOT) *5 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m) + RS422 connection GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 30m diagram 3) MR-MQ100 GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 motion controller CPU RS-422 Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m) + RS422 connection 30m - (Built into GOT) *6 1m - (Built into GOT) *6 diagram 4) Q170MIOCBL1M-A(1m)*3 *1 *2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3)) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT155 . *3 *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 5)) GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. *5 *6 6 - 20 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration POINT When connecting to the motion controller CPU (Q Series) other than Q170MCPU, MR-MQ100 A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connecting a GOT to a motion controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 21 6.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 6.3.1 RS-232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1) RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT side (terminal block) FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin) SD 2 RD 3 ER 6 DR 8 SG 5 RS 4 CS 7 NC 1 NC 9 GOT side FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin) 1 1 2 3 3 2 4 6 5 5 6 8 RS232 connection diagram 5) 7 4 FX PLC side (D-sub 25-pin) 8 7 GOT side (terminal block) 9 9 SD 3 RD 2 RS232 connection diagram 2) FX PLC side (D-sub 25-pin) ER 5 GOT side DR 20 2 2 SG 7 3 3 RS 6 8 5 CS 4 6 NC 5 7 NC 6 20 RS232 connection diagram 6) GOT side (terminal block) WS0-C20R2(male)side (D-Sub 9-pin) SD 3 RD 2 RS232 connection diagram 3) ER GOT side (terminal block) Untied wire color of GT10-C30R2-6P DR SD Brown SG RD Red RS ER Blue CS DR Yellow NC SG Green NC RS Purple CS NC NC 6 - 22 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagram 5 1 RS422 connection diagram 2) GOT side (terminal block) Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-25P PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications RS-422 cable Connection diagram Brown SDB Red RDA Orange RDB Yellow SG Green RSA Blue RSB Purple CSA Black CSB White 2 Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-8P RS422 connection diagram 3) GOT side Q170MIOCBL1M-B side SDA Brown SDA 1 1 SDA SDB Red RDA 2 2 RDA RDA Orange RSA 3 3 RSA RDB Yellow CSA 4 4 CSA SG Green SG 5 5 SG RSA Black SDB 6 6 SDB RSB White RDB 7 7 RDB CSA RSB 8 8 RSB CSB CSB 9 9 CSB GT10 (input power supply : 5V) GOT side (terminal block) RS422 connection diagram 4) Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-8P GOT side (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-B side Brown SDA 1 SDA SDB Red SDB 6 SDB RDA Orange RDA 2 RDA RDB Yellow RDB 7 RDB SG Green SG 5 SG RSA Black RSA 3 RSA RSB White RSB 8 RSB CSA 4 CSA CSB 9 CSB 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION INPUT DC5V + 5 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION SDA 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT side (terminal block) BUS CONNECTION GT10 (input power supply : 24V) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 RS422 connection diagram 1) DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3.2 SDA DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagram 6 - 23 RS422 connection diagram 5) GOT side (terminal block) United wire color of Q170MIOCBL1M-A SDA Yellow(Dot mark:Black) SDB Yellow(Dot mark:Red) RDA Pink(Dot mark:Black) RDB Pink(Dot mark:Red) SG White(Dot mark:Black) RSA White(Dot mark:Red) RSB CSA CSB Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to "330 ". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 6 - 24 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagram 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. GOT Multi- Drop Connection When using the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 6.4.2Communication detail settings POINT Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT 3 The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 2. 6.4.2 3. 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 4. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 6.4.1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6.4 GOT Side Settings BUS CONNECTION 5 Click! The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Set either of the following according to the Controller Type to be connected. For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 MELSEC-FX MELSEC-WS For GT10 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX MELSEC-WS 6 Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 (ms) 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6 - 25 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 3. [Controller Setting] from the 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 2. Select [Common] menu. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. Item Description Format*3 Select the communication format. (Default: 1) Monitor Speed (GT16 only) Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal) *1 *2 *3 Range (b) For GT10 1, 2 High*1 Normal Low*2 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However, when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High". (High performance is hardly affected) Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the "Normal" setting when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced. Set the format to "1". Item (2) MELSEC-FX (a) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 Transmission Speed Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. Range 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps (3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 (ms) 6 - 26 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings Item Description Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. Range 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Transmission Speed Range 9600bps 3 HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station (5) MELSEC-WS ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Item 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET POINT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (4) MELSEC-A (GT10) For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. Item Description Range 6 Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) BUS CONNECTION 5 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 5ms) 0 to 300 (ms) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6 - 27 6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (1) When connecting to FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/ FX3UC series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O check again. ( ■ Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/ O check is normal, check the status of keyword registration. (2) When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter When a sequence program and settings that the FXCPU communicates with devices other than the GOT are set with software, including GX Developer, the FXCPU cannot communicate with the GOT. (a) Settings with sequence program Check the sequence program and delete the following. FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER'S MANUAL - Data Communication Edition • No protocol communication (RS instruction) • Sequence program with the computer link, N:N network, and parallel link • Parameter setting • Set the following special registers to 0. Except FX3U, FX3UC: D8120 FX3U, FX3UC: D8120, D8400, D8420 FX3G, FX3GC: D8120, D8400, D8420, D8370 (b) Settings with GX Developer Select [PLC parameter] in [Parameter], and then click the PLC system(2) tab on the FX parameter screen. Uncheck [Operate communication setting], and then transfer the parameter to the programmable controller.After the transfer, turn off the programmable controller, and then turn on the programmable controller again. Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. • QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more • MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Connection to basic model QCPU Do not set the serial communication function of Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU, Q00/Q01CPU. If the function is set, the communication may not be performed. Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device (3) Connection to GT1020-L L , GT1030- L When connecting GT1020-L L or GT1030L to FX3G series, they cannot be connected to standard built-in port (RS-422) and function expansion board (FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously. 6 - 28 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.5 Precautions 7 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 4 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7 7.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 7.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19 7.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22 5 BUS CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7. 1 7-1 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. 7.1.1 Series PLC/Motion controller CPU Model name Clock Communication Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU*1 7.2.1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU RS-232 RS-422 *2 *2 - *2 *2 RS-232 RS-422 *2 *2 7.2.1 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - 7.2.1 Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.1 Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 7-2 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List QS001CPU Refer to RS-232 RS-422 7.2.1 - - L02CPU 2 L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P RS-232 RS-422 7.2.2 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.3 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A 3 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) *3 Q3ACPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.4 Q4ACPU RS-232 RS-422 Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU *3 Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.5 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU 5 A2ACPUP21 BUS CONNECTION A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.6 A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 7 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Q24DHCCPU-V*2 Communication ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING MELSEC-QS Q12DCCPU-V*1*2 Clock Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU. If the A series computer link module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices in the same range on AnACPU. However, the following devices cannot be monitored. • Devices added to QnACPU • Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.) • File register (R) 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7-3 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION C Controller module Model name 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Series PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU*1 MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU*1 A2SCPU-S1*1 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.7 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.7 A2SHCPU*1 A2SHCPU-S1*1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU*1 A0J2HCPU*1 A0J2HCPUP21*1 A0J2HCPUR21 *1 A0J2HCPU-DC24*1 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 - - A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU RS-232 RS-422 - 7.2.7 - Q172CPU*2*3 Q173CPU*2*3 Q172CPUN*2 Q173CPUN*2 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU RS-232 RS-422 Q172DCPU 7.2.1 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*4 MR-MQ100 - - (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 7-4 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU. In addition, A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used. When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.6 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU*2 A171SHCPUN*2 RS-232 RS-422 7.2.7 A172SHCPU*2 3 A172SHCPUN*2 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 - QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G RS-232 RS-422 *1 RS-232 RS-422 *3 7.2.1 4 QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 *3 *3 7.2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 RS-422 7.2.1 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) RS-232 RS-422 7.2.1 - FX0 FX0S - FX0N FX1 FX2 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU FX1S FX1N - - FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - 7 FX3G FX3GC - FX3U FX3UC *1 *2 *3 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station). For computer link connection of A171SHCPU(N) and A172SHCPU(N), use the computer link module whose software version is version U or later. GT11,GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE field network system. GT11,GT10 can access only the connected host station (head module station). 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC-FX 5 6 - FX2C DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 A171SCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING A273UHCPU-S3 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Communication HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Clock BUS CONNECTION Model name COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Series 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7-5 7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module Model name*1 CPU series MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MELSECNET/H remote I/O station CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71C24*2, QJ71C24-R2*2 MELSEC-L LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2 MELSEC-Q (A mode) QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4 QJ71CMO*3, QJ71CMON*3 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF AJ71QC24*4, AJ71QC24-R2*4, AJ71QC24-R4*4 AJ71QC24N*4, AJ71QC24N-R2*4, AJ71QC24N-R4*4 A1SJ71QC24*4, A1SJ71QC24-R2*4 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) A1SJ71QC24N*4, A1SJ71QC24N-R2*4 A1SJ71QC24N1*4, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2*4 AJ71UC24*4*6 A1SJ71C24-R2*6, A1SJ71C24-R4*6, A1SJ71C24-PRF*6 A1SJ71UC24-R2*6, A1SJ71UC24-R4*6, A1SJ71C24-PRF*6 AJ71UC24*4*5 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) MELSEC-A Motion controller CPU (A Series) A1SJ71UC24-R2*5, A1SJ71UC24-R4*5, A1SJ71UC24-PRF*5 A1SJ71C24-R2*5, A1SJ71C24-R4*5, A1SJ71C24-PRF*5 A1SCPUC24-R2*5 A2CCPUC24*4, A2CCPUC24-PRF*4 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 7-6 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used. Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or later. Only CH2 can be connected. Either CH1 or CH2 can be used. The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU. The module operates in the device range on AnACPU. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 7.2 System Configuration Serial communication module GOT Connection cable RS232 connection 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 1) RS232 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 2) 15m - (Built into GOT) 1200m - RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication - (Built into GOT) module*3 1 GOT for 1 modem interface module GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1200m 5 *6 GT16-C02R4-9S QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N-R4 equipment*5 - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*4 MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Model 6 GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 1) RS422 connection diagram 3) *1 500m GT01-RS4-M*4 1200m - (Built into GOT) *7 7 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic) For details on the system configuration on the modem interface module side, refer to the following manual. Modem Interface Module User's Manual *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Option device 4 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or RS-232 Max. distance HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24-R2 QJ71C24N-R2 QJ71CMO QJ71CMON Cable model Number of connectable BUS CONNECTION module *1 Communi cation type GOT COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Model name Connection cable Serial communication DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU PLC 3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . Two GOTs can be connected with the function version B or later of the serial communication module. For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to four GOTs. However, when using modem interface modules or serial communication modules (function version A), up to two GOTs can be connected. 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7-7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION QCPU (Q mode) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU Serial communication module LCPU Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Serial communication module*1 Communi cation type Cable model GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or LJ71C24 LJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection RS-232 GOT Max. distance Option device 15m GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*3 diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 2) MELSEC-L Model - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) RS232 connection Number of connectable equipment 15m - (Built into GOT) 1200m - (Built into GOT) *4 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module GT16-C02R4-9S LJ71C24 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1200m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 1) RS422 connection diagram 3) 500m GT01-RS4-M*3 1200m - (Built into GOT) *5 *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. *2 *3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 *5 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic) 7-8 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration . 1 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 AJ71C24/UC24 ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.2.3 2 Computer link module DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GOT Connection cable module A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF Commun ication type Cable model GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 2) A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or 4 GT15-RS2-9P 15m - (Built into GOT) 500m - (Built into GOT) *3 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT16-C02R4-9S GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 500m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) diagram 3) Model - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection RS422 connection Option device 15m diagram 1) RS232 connection MELSEC-Q (A mode) Max. distance ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING *1 Number of connectable equipment 500m - (Built into GOT) 5 BUS CONNECTION Computer link 3 GOT 6 *4 *1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. *2 *3 *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual . COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Model name Connection cable DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU PLC HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM QCPU (A mode) 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7-9 7.2.4 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type) Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 QnA/L/Q CPU (GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (When connecting to a computer link module) ( For GT10) Serial communication module /Computer link module QnACPU (QnACPU type) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable Serial communication module*1 AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24-R2 AJ71QC24N-R2 Commun ication type Cable model GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or RS-232 RS232 connection GOT Max. distance diagram 4) Model - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 2) RS232 connection Option device Number of connectable equipment GT01-RS4-M*3 15m - (Built into GOT) *4 GT16-C02R4-9S GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) AJ71QC24-R4 AJ71QC24N-R4 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 30m - (Built into GOT) GT01-RS4-M*3 RS-422 GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) or MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) GT15-RS4-9S 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module 30m - (Built into GOT) 1200m - (Built into GOT) *5 RS422 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 2) AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24-R4 AJ71QC24N-R4 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GT16-C02R4-9S GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1200m - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 1) RS422 connection diagram 3) GT15-RS4-9S 500m GT01-RS4-M*3 1200m - (Built into GOT) *5 *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. *2 *3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 *5 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. Serial Communications Module User’s Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) 7 - 10 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration . AJ71UC24 RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 2) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) AJ71UC24 RS-422 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 2) RS232 connection GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GT01-RS4-M*3 15m - (Built into GOT) 500m - (Built into GOT) 7.2.5 *4 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT15-RS2T49P*2 GT15-RS4-9S 500m 3 - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) diagram 3) 2 - GT16-C02R4-9S RS422 connection RS422 connection Model GT01-RS4-M*3 500m *5 - (Built into GOT) *1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. *2 *3 Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24]. Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 *5 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 4 . 5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 QnA/L/Q CPU (GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (When connecting to a computer link module) ( For GT10) Serial communication module /Computer link module QnACPU (QnACPU type) 6 GOT Connection cable Model name MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Connection cable Serial communication module*1 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24-R2 A1SJ71QC24N-R2 A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 Commun ication type Cable model GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or RS-232 RS232 connection GOT Max. distance diagram 3) Number of connectable equipment Model - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P diagram 1) RS232 connection Option device GT01-RS4-M*2 15m - (Built into GOT) - 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module 8 *3 *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. *2 Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *3 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Use the RS-232 connection model. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION PLC PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or Option device DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Max. distance ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Cable model 1 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM module*1 Number of connectable equipment BUS CONNECTION Computer link GOT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Model name Connection cable Commun ication type COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION PLC 7 - 11 PLC Connection cable Serial communication Model name module /Computer link module*1 Commun ication type Cable model RS422 connection diagram 2) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GOT Max. distance Option device 1200m - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 3) A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or RS-232 RS232 connection GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1200m diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 2) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or 500m GT01-RS4-M*3 - 1200m - (Built into GOT) *5 - (Built into GOT) 15m - 15m - (Built into GOT) *4 500m - (Built into GOT) *1 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT16-C02R4-9S GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 500m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) diagram 3) GT15-RS2-9P GT01-RS4-M*3 RS422 connection RS422 connection 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) RS232 connection Model GT16-C02R4-9S RS422 connection diagram 1) 500m GT01-RS4-M*3 - - (Built into GOT) *5 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. 7 - 12 Number of connectable equipment *2 *3 Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24]. Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. *4 *5 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration . 1 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) Computer link module ACPU (AnCPU type) GOT Communication driver PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.2.6 2 Connection cable Cable model GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or RS232 connection AJ71UC24 RS-232 diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 2) AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GT15-RS2-9P 15m - (Built into GOT) 500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 500m 5 GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) 500m - (Built into GOT) 3 4 *3 GT16-C02R4-9S diagram 1) diagram 3) Number of connectable equipment Model - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection RS422 connection Option device 15m diagram 2) RS232 connection MELSEC-A (AnCPU) Max. distance ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING *1 Commun ication type HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Computer link module GOT *4 *1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. *2 *3 *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. 6 Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU . COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Model name Connection cable BUS CONNECTION PLC DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET AJ71C24/UC24 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 13 7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) ACPU (AnSPU type) (A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC) Computer link module GOT Communication driver Connection cable AJ71C24/UC24 PLC Model name Connection cable Computer link module *1 A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF A1SCPUC24-R2 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF Commun ication type Cable model GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 2) A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4 RS-422 Max. distance GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or GT15-RS2-9P 15m - (Built into GOT) 500m - (Built into GOT) *3 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT16-C02R4-9S GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 500m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) diagram 3) Number of connectable equipment Model - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection RS422 connection Option device 15m diagram 1) RS232 connection MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) (A0J2H) (A2CCPUC) GOT 500m - (Built into GOT) *4 *1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. *2 *3 *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Use the RS-232 connection model. Use the RS-422 connection model. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual 7 - 14 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration . 1 PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin For GT16, GT15 PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin For GT16, GT15 GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side CD 1 4 RS(RTS) RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CD 1 7 RS(RTS) SG 5 7 SG RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD 8 5 CS(CTS) 9 1 FG ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CS(CTS) SG 5 5 SG - DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 1 CD CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) - 9 9 - GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side NC 1 7 RS(RTS) RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) SG 5 5 SG DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 1 CD CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) - 9 9 - For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module) GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side NC 1 1 CD RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) SG 5 5 SG DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 7 RS(RTS) CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) - 9 9 - GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) 4 PLC side NC 1 4 RS(RTS) RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) SG 5 7 SG DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS) - 9 1 FG 5 6 For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module) GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) 3 PLC side RS(RTS) NC 1 4 RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) SG 5 7 SG DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS) - 9 1 FG 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit (When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module) For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit (When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET RS232 connection diagram 1) 2 PLC side ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Connection diagram HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) BUS CONNECTION RS-232 cable DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7.3.1 RS232 connection diagram 2) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.3 Connection Diagram 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connection Diagram 7 - 15 RS232 connection diagram 3) RS232 connection diagram 4) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin For GT1030, GT1020 (When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module) For GT1030, GT1020 (When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module) GOT side (terminal block) GOT side (terminal block) PLC side PLC side SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD) RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD) ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR) DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR) SG 5 SG SG 7 SG RS 1 CD RS 8 CD CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS) NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS) NC 9 - NC 1 FG For GT1030, GT1020 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module) For GT1030, GT1020 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module) GOT side (terminal block) GOT side (terminal block) PLC side PLC side SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD) RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD) ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR) 20 ER(DTR) DR 4 ER(DTR) DR SG 5 SG SG 7 SG RS 1 CD RS 8 CD CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS) NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS) NC 9 - NC 1 FG Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 7 - 16 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connection Diagram GOT side (terminal block) PLC side RS422 connection diagram 1) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ), Serial Multi-Drop Unit GOT side PLC side SDA RDA RDA SDA RSA R SDA 1 RDA CSA RDA 2 SDA SG SG RSA 3 - SDB RDB CSA 4 - RDB SDB SG 5 SG RSB - SDB 6 RDB CSB - RDB 7 SDB RSB 8 - CSB 9 - FG - FG FG RS422 connection diagram 4) (For GT1030, GT1020) RS422 connection diagram 2) (For GT16) Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-25P Brown SDA GOT side PLC side R SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDA SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RDB RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDA RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDB SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG SDB2(TXD2-) 6 FG RDA2(RXD2+) 7 RDB2(RXD2-) 8 RSA(RTS+) 9 RSB(RTS-) 10 CSA(CTS+) 11 CSB(CTS-) 12 SG 13 NC 14 SDB Red RDA Orange RDB Yellow SG Green RSA Blue RSB Purple CSA Black CSB White 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GOT side (terminal block) 3 5 BUS CONNECTION R - 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Connection diagram ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING (For GT1030, GT1020) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 RS422 connection diagram 3) RS-422 cable 6 Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7.3.2 7 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Shell ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connection Diagram 7 - 17 Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT (2) Serial communication module or computer link module side Connect the terminating resistors (330 1/4W (orange/ orange/brown/ ) ) on the serial communication module or computer link module side. For details, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the serial communication module or computer link module (a) Other than A2CCPUC24(-PRF) Connect the terminating resistors supplied with the module across RDA and RDB. (b) A2CCPUC24(-PRF) Set TXD and RXD on the terminating resistor setting pin to "A". 7 - 18 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connection Diagram 1 POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 2. 3. 7.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 4. (1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 7.4.1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.4 GOT Side Settings HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Click! 4. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Set either of the following according to the Controller Type to be connected. For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 For GT10 QnA/L/Q CPU AJ71C24/UC24 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range BUS CONNECTION The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 5 Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times 7 Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 (ms) Format*3 Select the communication format. (Default: 1) 1, 2 7.4.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 3. [Controller Setting] from the COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 2. Select [Common] menu. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. 7 - 19 Item Description Monitor Speed (GT16 only) *1 *2 *3 Range Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal) (2) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* High*1 Normal Low*2 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However, when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High". (High performance is hardly affected) Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the "Normal" setting when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced. Refer to the following POINT. POINT Item Setting [Format] This setting is required for replacement of F900 series with GOT1000 series. (1) To change the communication settings of the serial communication module which is connected to F900, set as follows. The value of Transmission Speed can be set to 115200bps. (a) [Intelligent function module switch setting] of PLC Switch No. CH1 side CH2 side Switch 1 0000H - Switch 2 0000H - Switch 3 - 0000H Switch 4 - 0000H Switch 5 0000H 0000H Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit) 8bit (fixed) Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed) Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd) Odd (fixed) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 (ms) 1 (2) To maintain the communication settings of the serial communication module which is connected to F900, set the communication setting of the GOT as follows. The value of Transmission Speed remains 38400bps. 7 - 20 Format Transmission Speed 2 38400bps 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings Range 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps 7.5 PLC Side Setting (b) GOT communication settings Format Description 1 (4) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (3) AJ71C24/UC24 8bit (fixed) Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed) Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd) Odd (fixed) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 (ms) Transmission Speed 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit) Range 4 POINT (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 5 BUS CONNECTION Transmission Speed Item 6 HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Range 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 8 For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7 - 21 ETHERNET CONNECTION Item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 7.5 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates under the following transmission specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi PLC in the computer link connection. Transmission specifications Connecting serial communication module (Q, L Series) Setting Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes (Odd) Stop bit 1bit Sum check Yes Transmission speed (Baud rate) Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC. POINT The PLC side settings (the serial communication module, computer link module) are explained in Section 7.5.1 to Section 7.5.3. Refer to Model QJ71C24N, QJ71C24 Serial communication module (Q Series) 7.5.1 QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24-R2 7.5.1 QJ71C24N-R4 Modem interface module QJ71CMO, QJ71CMON 7.5.1 Serial communication module (L Series) LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2 7.5.1 AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24 (1) Serial communication module (Q, L Series) For details of the serial communication module (Q, L Series), refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic) (2) Modem interface module For details of the modem interface module, refer to the following manual. Modem Interface Module User's Manual [Intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer [The intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer is not necessary. (When no [intelligent function module switch setting] is made, the module runs in the GX Developer connection mode.) A module can be also connected to a GOT by making the following [intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer. (1) When connecting to the CH1 side AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24-R2 Serial communication module (QnA Series) AJ71QC24N-R4, AJ71QC24-R4 7.5.2 A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24 Bit Switch No. A1SJ71QC24N1-R2, A1SJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24-R2 AJ71UC24 Computer link module 7 - 22 7.5.3 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF 7.5.3 A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4 7.5.3 A1SCPUC24-R2 7.5.3 A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF 7.5.3 Switch 1 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting Positi on Specifi ed value b0 OFF Operation setting b1 OFF Data Bit b2 OFF Parity Bit b3 OFF Even/Odd parity b4 OFF b5 OFF b6 OFF Write during RUN b7 OFF Setting modifications b8 to b15 ― Set Description CH1 Stop bit transmiss Sum ion check settings*1 code value*3 (Operates according to the GOT side specificatio ns.) 0000H CH1 transmission speed setting*2 Switch 2 ― CH1 Communication protocol setting GX Developer connection 0000H Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station 0000H b0 OFF Operation setting b1 OFF Data bit b2 OFF Parity bit b3 OFF Even/odd parity b4 OFF b5 OFF Set Description b6 OFF Write during RUN b7 OFF Setting modifications b8 to b15 ― Model QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) (Operates according to the GOT side specificatio ns.) - LJ71C24(-R2) : 2 GOTs connectable, 0000H : 1 GOT connectable, -: Not applicable (3) When connecting to the modem interface module When the modem interface module is connected, only CH2 can be used. 3 4 5 GX Developer connection 0000H 0000H Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station BUS CONNECTION speed setting*2 CH2 Communication protocol setting The module operates under the following transmission specifications. 6 Setting details Operation setting Independent Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes Even/odd parity Odd Stop bit 1bit Sum check code Yes DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Transmission specifications 7 The serial communication module operates at the transmission speed set on the GOT. When the value of switch setting is other than "0", the setting of [Format] and [Transmission Speed] on the GOT side are required to be changed. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION *3 Function version B CH2 transmission ― *2 Function version A QJ71C24(-R2) Switch 4 *1 Connection of 2 GOTs HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM CH2 transmiss Stop bit ion Sum settings*1 check code value*3 2 7.4.2 Communication detail settings 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Switch 3 Positi on Specifi ed value DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Bit Switch No. (1) When the [intelligent function module switch setting] has been set After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. (2) Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models, two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING POINT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 (2) When connecting to the CH2 side 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 23 7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) POINT When connecting a GOT to CH2 Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0" (interlocked operation). POINT CH1 CH2 Serial communication module (QnA Series) For details of the serial communication module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) MODE (2) Transmission specifications setting switch Transmission specifications setting switch Switch setting on serial communication module Set the Station number switches, the Mode setting switch for the channel used for GOT connection, and the Transmission specifications switches. AJ71QC24(N) (-R2/R4) ON AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4,AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4 AJ71QC24N CH1.ERR. CH2.ERR. NEU ACK NAK C/N P/S PRO SIO CH.1 NEU ACK NAK C/N P/S PRO SIO SD.WAIT SD RD RUN ERROR ERR. C.R/W SW.E ERR. C/N NEU NEU C/N P/S ACK ACK P/S PRO NAK NAK PRO SID SD.W. CH.2 SD.W. SD SD RD RD CH1 SD.WAIT SD RD SIO DISPLAY STS 10 0 CH2 8 8 0 4 CH1 (1) C MODE C C C (1) MODE 4 8 4 0 CH2 8 0 4 0 CH1 (3) 0 No. 0 (3) STATION 09 10 11 12 1 5 STATION NO. 0 SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW 09 10 11 ON (2) (N1)(-R2)*1 SG RS-232C SDB (FG) RDA SW (NC) CH2 RDB RS422 OFF SW02 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW03 Parity bit enable/disable setting Enable ON SW04 Even/odd parity Odd setting OFF SW05 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW06 Sum check enable/disable setting Enable ON SW07 Write during RUN enable/ disable setting Enable ON SW08 Setting change enable/disable Disable (prohibit) OFF SW09 to SW12 Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT See (a) side specifications) CH2 RS-422/RS-485 SDA CH1 Independent operation A1SJ71QC24(N) 9 10 11 12 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RS485 9 10 11 12 ON SDA RDA CH1 RS-232-C SDB A1SJ71QC24N RDB NC SG FG SW13 to SW15 (1) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch*1 *1 Description ― The switch is located on the left side of the module. (only on AJ71QC24 (R2/R4)) All OFF The following shows the layout of switches in the case of the following hardware versions for the module. Switch settings and switch ON/OFF directions are the same. Set value CH CH1/2 MODE Dedicated protocol (Format 5) (Binary mode) 5 SW *1 Set value Operation setting ON AB ERR. 5 5 Description SW01 CH2 1 10 5 SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2 A1SJ71QC24N RUN CPUR/W Setting switch The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/ R4). 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 6 7 8 ON Target unit A1SJ71QC24 Version E hardware or earlier A1SJ71QC24-R2 Version D hardware or earlier A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2 7 - 24 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting Hardware version Version A hardware SW09 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON SW10 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SW11 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON SW12 *1 *2 Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission specifications switches and the Station number setting switches. AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF AJ71UC24 RUN 2 - SD 2 - RD L1 L2 L3 2-C/N 2-P/S 2 - PRO 2 - SIO 4-C/N 4-P/S 4 - PRO 4 - SIO 2 - NEU 2 - ACK 2 - NAK 4 - NEU 4 - ACK 4 - NAK 4 - SD 4 - RD L4 L5 L6 CPUR / W COM M.D.M M.D.L B0 B1 B2 MD NEU ACK NAK C/N P/S PRO SIO COM NEU NEU ACK ACK NAK NAK C/N C/N (1) MODE SCAN SET E. SCAN E. SIO E. ST. DWN MD / L SW P/S 01 PRO 02 SIO 03 SIO 04 (2) STATION NO. 7 8 STATION NO. 10 10 1 (3) 05 (3) 06 7 8 07 08 1 09 10 ON SW 03 04 (2) 21 22 23 24 MODE 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 (1) (2) 1.FORM1 2.FORM2 3.FORM3 4.FORM4 5.MOFORM B CD 11 F0 SW11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 12 MODE (1) SDA SG SDB FG RDA RS-232-C NC RS-232-C RDB SDA A1SJ71UC24-R2 SG SDB FG RDA NC RDB MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2 MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2 STOP STOP L CLR RESET RUN RUN Set value L CLR RESET RESET RUN RESET ERROR MITSUBISHI STATION No. *5 Set the station number of the serial communication module to which an access is made from the GOT. (2) 0 The station number switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/R4). PULL 7 When the cover is open A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF (1) (3) When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 8 (2) ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 1 4 6 MITSUBISHI (1) 10 3 5 RS - 422 / 485 A1SJ71UC24 - R4 RS - 422 RS - 485 RUN Station number switch RUN SD RD CPU A1SJ71UC24-R2 ERROR Contents A1SJ71UC24 - R4 A1SCPUC24-R2 (3) Station number switch (for both CH1 and CH2) *5 A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4 0 *4 Switch setting on the computer link module 0 *3 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. When the software version of AJ71QC24 (-R2/R4) and A1SJ71QC24 (-R2) is "L" or earlier, and when 2 devices are connected to the two interfaces individually, make the setting so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 19200bps. When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 19200bps, a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module. When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 19200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected.In this instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side. When 3 devices are connected to the two interfaces individually in the case of AJ71QC24N(-R2/R4), A1SJ71QC24N(-R2), and A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2), make the setting so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)). When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)), a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module. When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected.In this instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side. This can be set only in the case of AJ71QC24N (-R2/R4), A1SJ71QC24N (-R2) or A1SJ71QC24N1 (-R2). 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET bps*4 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING bps*4 BUS CONNECTION bps*4 Computer link module For details of the computer link module, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 115200 5 57600 5 38400 89 19200 bps 23 9600 bps HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM POINT Transmission speed*1*2*3 4800 bps 1 Connecting computer link module 34 Setting Switch 7.5.3 2 3 (a) Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. When the cover is open 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 25 (b) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF (1) Mode setting switch Contents BCD Dedicated protocol type 1 012 67 EF 8 9A Mode setting switch Set value RS-232 connection 1 RS-422 connection 5 345 (2) Transmission specifications switch Setting switch SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18 RS-422 connection ON Data bit setting 8bits ON Transmission speed setting (Consistent See with the GOT descripti side ons specifications) below. SW16 Parity bit setting Set ON SW17 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF SW18 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW05 ON SW06 SW12 Main channel setting SW13 SW15 ON SW21 Sum check setting Set SW22 Write during RUN Enabled enabled/disabled setting ON SW23 Computer link/multi-drop Computer selection link ON SW24 Master station/Local station setting OFF *1 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW13 OFF ON OFF SW14 OFF OFF ON SW15 *1 7 - 26 ON ON Unused ― SW04 Write during RUN Enabled enabled/disabled setting SW05 Transmission speed setting OFF ON (Consistent See with the GOT descripti side ons specifications) below. SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW12 Sum check setting Set ON Transmission speed*1 Setting switch 4800bps SW07 9600bps 19200bps OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. (c) A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4 (Setting ignored) Transmission speed SW03 • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. *1 • Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW15) Set the transmission speed (SW13 to SW15) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. Setting switch Set value Description SW07 OFF SW14 SW21 SW22 SW23 SW24 Set value Description Setting switch SW06 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 RS-232 connection SW11 ON SW ON 03 04 ON (a) AJ71UC24 Transmission specifications switch Transmission specifications switch ON Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting Transmission specifications switch SW ON 01 02 03 04 ON 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Setting switch Description SW01 Master station/Local station setting SW02 Computer link/multi-drop Computer selection link ON SW03 Unused OFF SW04 Write during RUN Enabled enabled/disabled setting SW05 (Setting ignored) Set value ― OFF ON Transmission speed setting (Consistent See with the GOT descripti side ons specifications) below. SW08 Data bit setting 8bits SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW12 Sum check setting Set ON SW06 SW07 ON OFF ON OFF SW06 OFF OFF ON SW07 ON ON ON Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. (d) A1SCPUC24-R2 Enabled Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specification s) 5 Data bit setting 8bits ON 6 Parity bit setting Set ON 7 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF 8 Stop bit setting 1bit 9 Sum check setting Set See description s below. Set ON SW16 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW18 Sum check setting Set ON SW19 Main channel setting RS-232 OFF SW20 Write during RUN enabled/ disabled setting Enabled ON Transmission speed*1 Setting switch 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF SW13 ON ON ON ON *1 Transmission speed*2 2 OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON 4 ON ON ON Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. Station number switch*2 Description Set value Set the station number of the computer link module to which an access is made from the GOT. 0 STATION NO. 7 8 7 8 9 01 19200bps (3) Station number setting switch 9 01 9600bps Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. 10 1 *2 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Parity bit setting SW11 4800bps *2 SW15 SW12 • Transmission speed setting (2 to 4) Set the transmission speed (2 to 4) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. Setting switch ON 2 3 4 5 6 The station number setting switch in the figure is for the A1SJ71UC24-R4. 7 POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4 8bits • Transmission speed setting (SW11 to SW13) Set the transmission speed (SW11 to SW13) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 ON 4 5 6 2 ON Set value Write during RUN enabled/ disabled setting 1 Data bit setting 2 3 Description SW 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 OFF 2 3 Setting switch SW14 SW13 ON DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET SW05 See descriptio ns below. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 19200bps Transmission specifications switch (Consistent with the GOT side specifications) ON 9600bps *1 Transmission speed setting SW12 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM SW11 4800bps Set value Description BUS CONNECTION Setting switch DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Transmission specifications switch Transmission speed*1 Setting switch 1 (e) A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 27 POINT When connecting the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and the computer link unit When the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and the computer link unit are connected via RS-232C, set the buffer memory in the computer link unit using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked. Examples of the CPU units equipped with built-in computer link are explained below also. (1) In the case of A computer link Refer to the program example below in which the I/O signals of the computer link unit are 80 to 9F (H). Write to buffer memory Computer link unit connection point X87 TO P H8 H10B K1 K1 10B(H):CD terminal will be checked K1:CD terminal will not be checked (2) In the case of CPU equipped with built-in computer link (a) A1SCPUC24-R2 Write to buffer memory Computer link unit connection point (Fixed values) X0E7 TO P H0E H10B K1 K1 10B(H):CD terminal will be checked Fixed values K1:CD terminal will be checked (b) A2CCPUC2 Write to buffer memory Computer link unit connection point (Fixed values) X1E7 TO P K61 H10B K1 K1 10B(H):CD terminal will be checked Fixed values 7 - 28 K1:CD terminal will not be checked 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 7.6 Precautions Time taken until the PLC runs when connected in the multiple CPU system The following time is taken until the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM GT Designer3 Version Manual 4 Screen Design When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). 5 BUS CONNECTION When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. 6 Screen Design DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU GT Designer3 Version Manual Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions 7 - 29 7 - 30 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions 8 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7 8.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15 8.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20 8.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 8-1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type *3 Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Ethernet 8.2.1 Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU 8.2.1 Ethernet 8.2.2 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*2 Q24DHCCPU-V Ethernet 8.2.2 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 8-2 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List Refer to Ethernet 8.2.1 L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT 8.2.2 Ethernet L02CPU-P 8.2.1 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU Q02CPU-A*3 MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02HCPU-A*3 Q06HCPU-A Ethernet 8.2.1 *3 Q2ACPU*3 3 Q2ACPU-S1*3 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q3ACPU*3 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1 8.2.1 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1 8.2.1 Q4ACPU*3 Q4ARCPU*3 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 5 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 Ethernet A3ACPUR21 8.2.1 A1NCPU 6 A1NCPUP21 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) 2 BUS CONNECTION MELSEC-L 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING *2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Communication type ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING QS001CPU Clock A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 7 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU. However, the following devices cannot be monitored. • Devices added to QnACPU • Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.) • File register (R) GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *3 Combination with the Ethernet module is restricted. 8.1.2 Ethernet module 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8-3 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC-QS Model name 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Series Series Model name Clock Communication type *4 Refer to A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU Ethernet 8.2.1 Ethernet 8.2.1 A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Ethernet 8.2.1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU 8.2.1 Ethernet 8.2.5 Q170MCPU*3 MR-MQ100 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 8-4 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later When using Ethernet module, only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List Clock Communication type *3 Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N Ethernet 8.2.1 A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU-S1 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 - QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G Ethernet 8.2.1 QJ72BR15 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 A173UHCPU MELSEC-WS DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 A171SCPU 4 LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - - CC-Link IE 8.2.4 Ethernet Ethernet 8.2.3 Ethernet*2 8.2.1 FX0 FX0S - FX0N FX1 FX2 - FX2C HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Motion controller CPU (A Series) 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Model name 5 BUS CONNECTION Series 6 - FX1N - FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - FX3G*1 Ethernet FX3UC*1 The supported version of the main units varies depending on the Ethernet module to be used as shown below. Ethernet module *2 *3 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8.2.1 FX3U*1 *1 7 Ethernet FX3GC*1 FX3U(C) FX3G(C) FX3U-ENET Ver. 2.21 or later FX3U-ENET is supported. FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 3.10 or later Ver. 2.00 or later 8 The Ethernet connection of robot controller can be established only via the Ethernet module (QJ71E71) or Built-in Ethernet port of QnUDE. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8-5 ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC-FX DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU FX1S 8.1.2 Ethernet module Ethernet module*1 CPU series MELSEC-Q (Q mode) MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71E71-100 AJ71QE71N3-T*2 AJ71QE71N-B5T MELSEC-QnA *2 MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-A Motion Controller CPU (A Series) QJ71E71 AJ71QE71N-B5*2 AJ71QE71N-B2*2 AJ71QE71N-T*2 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T*2 AJ71QE71 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71-B2 AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-T FX3U-ENET-ADP MELSEC-FX FX3U-ENET NZ2GF-ETB MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100 *2 QJ71E71-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B5 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module *1 8-6 *2 QJ71E71-B5 *2 *2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T*2 AJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5 A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU. However, the following devices cannot be monitored. • Devices added to QnACPU • Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.) • File register (R) Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module and PLC CPU. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 1 Connection to Ethernet module When connecting to MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller MELSEC-QS Motion controller length*3 MELSEC-A MELSEC-Q (A mode) Motion controller CPU (A Series) Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71 Ethernet *8*9 100m AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QE71N-T AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2 AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71E71N-T AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5 A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 *2 - (Built into GOT) Ethernet *8 100m Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e Ethernet LJ71E71-100 GT15-J71E71-100 128 GOTs*7 (recommended to 16 units or less) *2 - (Built into GOT) 6 *8 100m GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet 100m 7 - (Built into GOT) *8 GT15-J71E71-100 *1 *2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 5 *2 MELSEC-L 3 4 GT15-J71E71-100 CPU (Q Series)*6 MELSEC-QnA GOT HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSEC-Q (Q mode) *4*5 Cable model Maximum segment DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Model name Communication type Ethernet module BUS CONNECTION Connection cable*1 Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Connection cable PLC 2 Communication driver GOT The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8-7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Ethernet module PLC CPU 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2.1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 8.2 System Configuration *3 *4 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual *5 8-8 For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual Select one of the following [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. • Ethernet module (Q Series): QJ71E71 • Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71 • Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71 For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. *6 8.3.3 Ethernet setting When using the peripheral I/F of Q170MCPU, Q17nDCPU-S1 or MR-MQ100, refer to the following. *7 *8 *9 8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most). GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. GT14 cannot be connected with MELSEC-QS. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 1 Ethernet module PLC CPU PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING When connecting to MELSEC-FX Communication driver GOT Connection cable Ethernet (FX), Gateway Model name Ethernet module Communication type *4*5 Connection cable*1 Maximum segment Cable model length*3 GOT Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) FX3U-ENET Ethernet 3 *7 100m ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING MELSEC-FX (FX3U, FX3G) GT15-J71E71-100 2 GOTs *2 - (Built into GOT) Ethernet FX3U-ENET*6 MELSEC-FX (FX3U) FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-232-BD, + Ethernet FX3U-ENET-ADP*8*9 MELSEC-FX (FX3UC) Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e Ethernet 4 GT15-J71E71-100 *2 - (Built into GOT) *7 100m GT15-J71E71-100 *2 - (Built into GOT) FX3U-ENET-ADP *7 100m HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM FX3UC-1PS-5V, FX2NC-CNV-IF + 5 *7 100m 4 GOTs BUS CONNECTION MELSEC-FX (FX3UC, FX3GC) GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 *1 *2 - (Built into GOT) *7 100m Ethernet 6 GT15-J71E71-100 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) *3 *4 *5 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals. 8 For FX Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual Select one of the following [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. • Ethernet module (FX Series): FX For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.3 Ethernet setting 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC-FX (FX3GC) *2 FX3G-CNV-ADP, + ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSEC-FX (FX3G) DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU PLC DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 8-9 *6 *7 *8 *9 8 - 10 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series, FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, or FX3U-232-BD is required. FX3U-ENET-ADP occupies one extension communication adapter CH (Max. 2 CHs) of the FX3U(C). One CPU allows the connection of only one FX3U-ENET-ADP. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration Connection cable*1*2 Maximum segment length*4 GOT Option device Number of connectable equipment Model *3 - (Built into GOT) MELSEC-QnUDE(H) Ethernet *5*6 *9 16 GOTs 100m GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet 4 *3 - (Built into GOT) *9 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM C Controller module Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e 16 GOTs 100m GT15-J71E71-100 *3 - (Built into GOT) *7*8 Ethernet MELSEC-L 100m 5 *9 16 GOTs GT15-J71E71-100 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. A straight cable is available. When connecting QnUDE(H) and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, connection by cross cable is available. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) Select [QnUDE(H)] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 7 8 8.3.3 Ethernet setting For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function) Select [LCPU] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.3 Ethernet setting GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 6 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Communication type 2 BUS CONNECTION PLC Model name Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 Connection cable DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Communication driver GOT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8.2.2 8 - 11 8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F CNC C70 PLC CPU GOT Communication driver Connection cable Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 PLC Model name CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) Communication type Ethernet *4*5 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 8 - 12 *1 Connection cable Maximum segment length*3 Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e GOT Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) *6 16 GOTs for 1 network 100m GT15-J71E71-100 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. For the system configuration of the CNC C70, refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP MANUAL Select [Q17nNC] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.3 Ethernet setting GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Motion Controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71GF11-T2 Doubleshielded twisted pair Max. distance 100m Commu nication type CC-Link IE cable*4 *1 *2 *3 *4 Model name NZ2GF -ETB Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted Ethernet pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e Maximu m segment GOT Option device Model Number of connectable equipment length*3 4 *2 - (Built into GOT) 100m GT15J71E71-100 *7 128 GOTs*6 (recommend ed to 16 units or less) 5 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. Use cables with the following specifications. Connector Category 5e or higher Shielded RJ-45 Range Cable that satisfies the following specifications: IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B(Category 5e) *5 For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network module side, refer to the following manual. *6 *7 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most). GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Cable model Connection cable 2) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 3 *1 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Model name Connection cable 1) CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Connection cable 2) BUS CONNECTION PLC *4 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Connection cable 1) GOT COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION QCPU 2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CC-Link IE Field Network Master/ Local module PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 8.2.4 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 13 8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) Communication driver Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU PLC CPU GOT Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 Connection cable Q170MCPU MR-MQ100 PLC Communi cation type Model name*3 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU MR-MQ100 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Ethernet *1 Connection cable GOT Maximum segment Option device length*4 Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e Model Number of connectable equipment *2 - (Built into GOT) *5 16 GOTs for 1 network 30m GT15-J71E71-100 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) When using the PERIPHERAL I/F, set as shown below. • Use the GT Designer3 Version1.12N or later. • Select [QnUDE(H)] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.3 Ethernet setting A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. HINT Direct connection between PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT The PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT can be directly connected by using a cross cable for the Ethernet connection cable. 8 - 14 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 8.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. GT16, GT14 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Set the channel of the connected equipment. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 8.3 GOT Side Settings 2. 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3. 4. GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 2. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 3. Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet download. (Default: 5014) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, and CRnD-700 (Default: 5001) • For Ethernet(FX), Gateway (Default: 5019) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) 4. Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 255sec Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 10000 ( 10ms) IP Address*2 Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 Ethernet(FX), Gateway The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 8.3.2 Communication detail settings Subnet Mask*2 Default Gateway*2 Ethernet Download Port No.*2 Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting Timeout Time *1 Delay Time 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 5 BUS CONNECTION 1 to 239 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION GOT NET No. GOT 1. Range 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Click! Description HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 Item 8 - 15 *1 *2 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set [Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer. Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen. GT15 Item Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP address Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.0.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network.(Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected.(Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ethernet Download Port No. Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet download. (Default: 5014) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, and CRnD-700 (Default: 5001) • For Ethernet(FX), Gateway (Default: 5019) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 255sec Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 10000 ( 10ms) *1 Delay Time *1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings Range GOT NET No. Timeout Time 8 - 16 Description To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set [Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer. 8.3.3 1 Ethernet setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING POINT (1) Example of [Detail setting]. For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following. 8.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. Range Host The host is displayed.(The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)) - N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 1 to 239 PLC No. Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 1 to 64 Type*1 Set the type of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: QJ71E71/LJ71E71) QnUD(V/EH), QnD(H)CCPU, LCPU, Q17nNC, QJ71E71/LJ71E71, AJ71QE71, AJ71E71 FX NZ2GF-ETB IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Port No.*2 Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 5001) 1024 to 65534 Communication*3 UDP UDP, TCP *2 *3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 Select one of the following [Controller Type]. • Connection to Built-in Ethernet port QCPU: QnUD(V/EH) • Connection to Built-in Ethernet port Q170MCPU, Q172/ Q173DCPU: QnUDE(H) • C Controller module: QnD(H)CCPU • Connection to Built-in Ethernet port LCPU: LCPU • Ethernet module (NZ2GF-ETB): NZ2GF-ETB • Q17nNCCPU: Q17nNC • Ethernet module (Q, L Series): QJ71E71/LJ71E71 • Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71 • Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71 • Ethernet module (FX Series): FX For the applicable Ethernet module, refer to the following. 8.2System Configuration Set only when selecting "AJ71E71" in [Controller Type]. When other than [AJ71E71] is selected, the port No. is as follows. • [QnUDE(H)]:5006(fixed) • [Q17nNC],[QJ71E71],[AJ71QE71]:5001(fixed) • [FX]: 5551 (When using FX3U-ENET) 5556 (When using FX3U-ENET-ADP) When selecting the FX in [Controller Type], the communication type is the TCP (fixed). HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Description 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Item 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GT User's Manual (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 2 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 17 8.3.4 POINT Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. (1) Example of [Ethernet setting] For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the following. 8.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. (b) When the settings of N/W No., PLC No., type or IP address are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted. However, if the combination of the N/ W No. and the PLC No. or the IP address overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. (3) Changing the host on the GOT main unit The host can be changed by the utility function of the GOT main unit. For the detailed connection method, refer to the following manual. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application) User's Manual of GOT used. (When using GT16) Item Transfer Network No. *1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 1 to 239 Relay Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Station No.*1 1 to 64 *1 8 - 18 Range When accessing to other networks relaying a Build-in Ethernet port CPU, set the virtual network No. and PLC No. set in the Ethernet settings on GT Designer3. 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING POINT (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. 2 8.4 PLC Side Setting DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. (b) When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted.However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. (c) The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 BUS CONNECTION 5 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 19 8.4 PLC Side Setting Model Reference Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU 8.4.1 8.4.2 C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V 8.4.4 Built-in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT 8.4.1 8.4.2 Ethernet module (Q Series) QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71 Ethernet module (L Series) LJ71E71-100 Ethernet module (QnA Series) AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) 8.4.3 MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (BuiltIn Ethernet Function) System configuration 8.4.5 For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to one GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to the GOT. ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 8.4.6 Ethernet module (FX Series) FX3U-ENET, FX3U-ENET-ADP 8.4.7 CNC C70 Q173NCCPU 8.4.8 Ethernet module (A Series) 8.4.1 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) :1 Network No. PLC No. :1 : 192.168.3.1 IP address : 5001 Port No. Communication : UDP (fixed) format *1 (The following settings are set to the default) : 1 (virtual) *2 Network No. : 2 (virtual) *2 PLC No. : 192.168.3.39 IP address : 5006 (fixed) Port No. Communication : UDP (fixed) format *1 *2 For the settings when using system devices including a hub and a transceiver, refer to the following. 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 8 - 20 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Ethernet setting When connecting Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or LCPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, these virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No.. Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual. GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 GOT NET No. Set value (Use default value) 1 GOT PLC No. 1 Default Gateway Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 5 BUS CONNECTION Item MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) 255.255.255.0 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Retry (4) Ethernet setting Host *1 *2 N/W No. 1*1 PLC No. 2*2 Type 7 * QnUDE(H), LCPU IP address 192.168.3.39 Port No. 5006 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) 8 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No. ETHERNET CONNECTION Ethernet setting No.1 Set value COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Item 3 4 POINT (3) Controller setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING to Built-in Ethernet port CPU 1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Designer3 Checking communication state of Connecting HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 21 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting] for GX Developer (1) Built-in Ethernet port Example: [Q parameter setting] screen POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (BuiltIn Ethernet Function) System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) :1 Network No. PLC No. :1 : 192.168.0.18 IP address : 5001 Port No. Communication : UDP(fixed) format (The settings other than the following are set to the default) : 1 (virtual) *1 Network No. : 2 (virtual) *1 PLC No. : 192.168.0.1 IP address : 5006(fixed) Port No. Communication : UDP(fixed) format 1 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) : 1 (virtual) *1 Network No. : 3 (virtual) *1 PLC No. : 192.168.0.2 IP address : 5006(fixed) Port No. Communication : UDP(fixed) format 2 ■ [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting] for GX Developer *1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 8 - 22 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting Item Set value IP address Setting necessity at GOT connection 192.168.0.1 Subnet mask pattern - Default router IP address - Communication data code Enable online change (FTP, MC protocol) Disable direct connection to MELSOFT (Use default value) Do not respond to search for CPU (Built-in Ethernet port) on network Open settings Refer to (2). FTP settings (Use default value) Time settings : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Designer3 POINT (3) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. (4) Ethernet setting When connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, these virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No.. Host station port No. MELSOFT connection (fixed) (Use default value) 4 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Open system UDP (fixed) 5 Startup Time 3sec BUS CONNECTION Protocol Set value Timeout Time 3sec 6 Delay Time 0ms Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Item 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 (2) Ethernet setting Set value Item Host Ethernet setting No.1 *1 *2 7 * - N/W No. 1*1 1*1 PLC No. 2*2 3*2 QnUDE(H), LCPU QnUDE(H), LCPU Type IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2 Port No. 5006 (fixed) 5006 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed) Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 23 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. 1 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Open settings Checking communication state of Connecting 8.4.3 to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 Request timed out. This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT Ethernet module (Q/L Series) For details of the Ethernet module (Q/L Series), refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series) MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) System configuration (for Q series) ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) POINT Network No. :1 :1 PLC No. : 192.168.0.18 IP address : 5001 Port No. Communication format : UDP (fixed) Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual. *1 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) Network No. PLC No. IP address Port No. Communication format :1 :2 : 192.168.0.19 : 5001 : UDP(fixed) ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0". POINT When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "70". 8 - 24 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 1 (2) Operation setting PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Starting I/O No.*1 Send frame setting 0 (fixed) *3 Mode : As necessary : Not necessary Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the following setting without relations to the setting given here. Online (fixed) Operation setting 5 : Necessary *1 2 Station No. (Use default value) TCP Existence confirmation setting 1 Group No. Initial timing 192.168.0.19 *1 Enable Write at RUN time*1 0000H Network No.*2 IP address 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Ethernet (fixed) (Use default value) • Communication date code • Initial timing Refer to (2) Initial settings Open settings • Enable Write at RUN time Router relay parameter : [Binary code] : "Always wait for OPEN" (Communication is applicable while stopping the PLC CPU.) : [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing Data is applicable while running the PLC CPU.) Station No.<->IP information FTP Parameters (Use default value) POINT E-mail settings When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. Interrupt settings Redundant settings*4 Routing Parameters Refer to (3) : Necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU, set the start I/O to 0070H. Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. Set when using Ethernet module in a redundant QnPRHCPU system. 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 *2 *3 *4 : As necessary BUS CONNECTION Network type Communication data code*1 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Set value Set value COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Item Setting necessity at GOT connection Item Setting necessity at GOT connection ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 25 (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms (2) Ethernet setting Item Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239 Ethernet setting No.1 Set value Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type QJ71E71 Relay network No. 1 to239 IP address Relay station No. 1 to 64 Port No. 5001 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 8.3.4 Routing parameter setting (4) Communication confirmation The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. ■Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module *1 QJ71E71-100 RUN INIT. OPEN SD *1 8 - 26 ERR. COM.ERR. 100M RD The LEDs layout of QJ71E71-100. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 192.168.0.19 POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command 2 POINT C Controller module For details of C Controller module, refer to the following manual. C Controller Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Function Explanation) System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) :1 Network No. PLC No. :1 : 192.168.3.18 IP address : 5001 Port No. Communication : UDP(fixed) format POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual. (The settings other than the following are set to the default) : 1 (virtual) *1 Network No. : 2 (virtual) *1 PLC No. : 192.168.3.1 IP address : 5006(fixed) Port No. Communication : UDP(fixed) format 1 User's manual of the Ethernet module (The settings other than the following are set to the default) : 1 (virtual) *1 Network No. : 3 (virtual) *1 PLC No. : 192.168.3.2 IP address : 5006(fixed) Port No. Communication : UDP(fixed) format 2 ■ Utility setting for C Controller module These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 3 4 5 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out. This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module in the following case of the system configuration. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. BUS CONNECTION Ethernet module 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Connecting to C Controller module DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 8.4.4 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Confirming the communication state of 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 27 Utility setting for C Controller module (c) Detail settings (1) Q12DCCPU-V Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller setting utility. (a) Connection settings Item Set value Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) Write authority target Password*2 password Detailed settings *2 Item IP address Subnet mask - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. (b) Online operation Item Detailed settings Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Refer to (3) : Necessary 8 - 28 Set value Mark the checkbox User name*2 *1 Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary : Not necessary 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0 Default gateway - IP address settings CH2 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 1 (2) Q24DHCCPU-V Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller setting utility. (a) Connection settings PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (d) System settings Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 Remote reset Output mode at STOP to RUN WDT (Watchdog timer) setting IP Address*1 192.168.3.39 (Default) Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (Default) Error check Operation mode at the time of error Default Gateway Module synchronization Mark the checkbox Event history registration settings (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 5 - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address. *1 4 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 6 POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 7 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Ethernet setting When connecting C Controller module to a GOT, the setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, these virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No.. 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Built-in Ethernet port open settings Setting necessity at GOT connection BUS CONNECTION (Use default value) Set value DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Initial settings of intelligent function module Item COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Intelligent function module settings HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Points occupied by empty slot 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 29 8.4.5 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the system configuration. 192.168.3.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway POINT Ethernet module (QnA Series) For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual System configuration (2) Ethernet setting ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 Set value (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Item Host Ethernet setting No.1 *1 *2 * - N/W No. 1*1 1*1 PLC No. 2*2 3*2 QnD(H)CCPU QnD(H)CCPU IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 Port No. 5006 (fixed) 5006 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed) Network No. PLC No. IP address Port No. Communication format :1 :1 : 192.168.0.18 : 5001 : UDP(fixed) *1 Type Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. Checking communication state of C Controller module (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 Request timed out. (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • The IP address of C Controller module specified in the ping command 8 - 30 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. IP address Port No. Communication format :1 :2 : 192.168.0.19 : 5001 : UDP(fixed) ■ Switch settings of Ethernet module ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0". TEST TEST ERR. 0:ONLINE 1:OFFLINE 2:TEST1 3:TEST2 4:TEST3 5:TEST4 SW1 789 F01 (1) 2 3456 ON (1) SW2 SW2 (2) SW4 2 OFF (fixed) setting*2 Self start mode setting*3 ON SW4 SW5 SW6 ON Data code Setting necessity at GOT connection SW5 SW7 (Must not to be used) OFF (fixed) CPU exchange OFF (fixed) 3 SW6 SW8 10BASE-T SW7 10BASE-T SW8 timing setting*2 Initial timing setting OFF A1SJ71QE71N3-T : Necessary *2 *1 • Data code setting : [Binary code] • Enable Write at : [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing RUN time Data is applicable while running the PLC CPU.) (1) Operation mode setting switch Online 0 (fixed) : As necessary Setting necessity at GOT connection *3 When SW3 is ON, the initial processing is executed regardless of the initial request signal (Y19). In addition, communication is applicable while stopping the PLC CPU. For the initial processing by using the initial request signal (Y19), refer to the following manual. For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual POINT : Not necessary When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 5 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Set value 4 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Description : Necessary : Not necessary Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the following setting without relations to the setting given here. The figure of AJ71QE71N3-T and A1SJ71QE71N3-T. Operation mode setting switch : As necessary PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING OFF SW3 SW3 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 (2) ON SW1 Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error SW1 BCD ‚O EF 12 C AB DE OFF MODE MODE 0:ONLINE 1:OFFLINE 2:TEST1 3:TEST2 4:TEST3 5:TEST4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 Set value DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET RUN RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. TEST TEST ERR. CPU R/W Description ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. CPU R/W *1 A1SJ71QE71N3-T Setting switch HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *1 BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 6789A RUN 345 AJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 Exchange condition setting switch BUS CONNECTION Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5 1 (2) Exchange condition setting switch DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Switch settings of Ethernet module 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 31 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter (2) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Item Item Set value Network type Ethernet (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No.*1 Setting necessity at GOT connection 0 (fixed) Station No.*2 192.168.0.19 Station No.<->IP information Router relay parameter Refer to (2) : Necessary *1 *2 : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 8 - 32 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 64 8.3.4 Routing parameter setting (Use default value) FTP Parameters Routing parameters Relay network No. Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 2 IP address 1 to 239 POINT 1 Group No. Range Target network No. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. CPU R/W A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 RUN RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. TEST TEST ERR. CPU R/W BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 Ethernet module (A Series) For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to the following manual. For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Designer3 :1 Network No. PLC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.0.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed) (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway Subnet Mask *1 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. IP address Port No. Communication format : 1 (virtual)*2 : 2 (virtual)*2 : 192.168.0.19 : 5001 : UDP(fixed) 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms *1 *2 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0". These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 6 Set value Host * N/W No. 1 Type 2 7 AJ71QE71 IP address 192.168.0.19 Port No. 5001 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (2) Ethernet setting Item 4 5 ■ Switch settings of Ethernet module ■ Sequence program 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 Retry 3 System configuration TEST TEST ERR. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 POINT DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 8.3.4 ■Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the system configuration. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. 1 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) BUS CONNECTION 8.4.6 (3) Communication confirmation POINT 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 33 Switch settings of Ethernet module (1) Operation mode setting switch Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A J71E71N3-T RUN A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 *2 A1SJ71E71N3-T RUN RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. TEST TEST ERR. CPU R/W BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. CPU R/W BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 Operation mode setting switch Description Set value Online 0 (fixed) *2 Setting necessity at GOT connection TEST TEST ERR. (2) 8 0:ONLINE 1:OFFLINE 2:TEST1 3:TEST2 4:TEST3 BCD 345 0 4 ON (1) EF012 C 0:ONLINE 1:OFFLINE 2:TEST1 3:TEST2 4:TEST3 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 6789A MODE MODE SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 (1) (2) : Necessary : As necessary (2) Exchange condition setting switch*1 ON 10BASE-T Exchange condition setting switch Setting switch Description Set value SW1 Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error OFF SW2 Data code setting (binary code) OFF (fixed) (Must not to be used) OFF (fixed) SW7 CPU exchange timing setting (Enable write at RUN time) ON (fixed) SW8 Initial timing setting 10BASE-T A1SJ71E71N3-T OFF *2 The figure of AJ71E71N3-T and A1SJ71E71N3-T. : Not necessary ON SW1 SW3 SW2 SW4 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW5 SW6 SW6 SW7 SW8 : Necessary *1 OFF : As necessary : Not necessary The exchange condition setting switches of A1SJ71E71-B5S3 and A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 are specified as the below. Exchange condition setting switch ON SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Setting necessity at GOT connection OFF Setting switch Description Set value SW1 Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error OFF SW2 Data code setting (binary code) OFF (fixed) SW3 CPU exchange timing setting (Enable write at RUN time) ON (fixed) SW4 Initial timing setting : Necessary Setting necessity at GOT connection OFF : As necessary : Not necessary POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 8 - 34 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting D110 Application setting D111 Port No. of Ethernet module D112 to D113 IP address of GOT D114 Port No. of GOT D200 Initial fault code 100H 24 (18H) Port No. of Ethernet module 5001 IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH 27 (1BH) Port No. of GOT FFFFH (fixed) 80 (50H) Initial fault code ― *1 The details of the application setting are shown below. Settings 1), 2) and 3) can be changed by the user. 4), 5) and 6) are fixed. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 6) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5) 4) 3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 2) 1) 1) Fixed buffer application 0: For sending; no exchange 1: For receiving 2) Existence check 0: No 1: Yes 3) Pairing open 0: No 1: Yes 4) Communication format (Set to "1" (UDP/IP).) 0: TCP/IP 1: UDP/IP 5) Fixed buffer exchange (Set to "0" (With procedure).) 0: With procedure 1: Without procedure 6) Open method (Set to "00" (Active, UDP/IP). 00: Active, UDP/IP 10: Unpassive 11: Fullpassive PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 3 4 5 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU IP address of Ethernet module Application setting*1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Application D100 C0A80013H (192.168.0.19) 16 (10H) 25 to 26 (19 to 1AH) (b) Device used by user COM.ERR turned off command IP address of Ethernet module ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 0 to 1 (0 to 1H) For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual M102 Set value 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION This program performs the initial processing of the Ethernet module and the opening processing of connection No. 1 when the stopping PLC CPU starts running. (a) I/O signal of Ethernet module Item Dec (Hex) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM (1) Programming condition BUS CONNECTION Buffer memory address 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION The sequence program for initial processing and communication line opening processing are required. Device 1 (c) Buffer memory settings used in the present example Sequence program 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 35 (2) Example of sequence program * Initial processing Turned on WDT at first scan ERR only while detection running IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.19) Initial request Read the initial fault code. Initial WDT ERR fault detection detection COM. ERR turned off request COM. ERR turned off command Clear the initial fault code. * Opening processing of communication line Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU. Initial request Normal No. 1 completed open completed initial Communication format(UDP/IP) Port No. of Ethernet module(5001) IP address of GOT (When GOT is used, FFFFFFFFH) Port No. of GOT (When GOT is used, FFFFH) Request to open POINT When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 8 - 36 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 Subnet Mask 3 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms 4 (2) Ethernet setting Item Ethernet setting No.1 Set value Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type IP address Port No. Communication 5 AJ71E71 192.168.0.19 5001 UDP (fixed) POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION TEST TEST ERR. RUN RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. TEST TEST ERR. CPU R/W 2 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION RDY BSY SW.ERR. COM.ERR. CPU R/W BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING GOT NET No. Default Gateway RUN Set value (Use default value) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 Item ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 (1) Controller setting HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 8.4.3 ■Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module The BUF1 LED turns on when the opening processing of the connection No. 1 is completed in normal at executing of the sequence program example described at (2). Designer3 BUS CONNECTION The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. 1 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU (3) Communication confirmation 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 37 8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT Ethernet parameter settings of FX Configurator-EN (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter with FX Configurator-EN. For using FX Configurator-EN, install GX Developer Ver. 8.25B or later on the personal computer. For details on FX Configurator-EN, refer to the following manual. FX Configurator-EN Operation manual Ethernet module (FX Series) For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to the following manual. FX3U-ENET User's manual FX3U-ENET-ADP User's manual System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) PLC No. IP address Port No. Communication format :1 : 192.168.0.18 : 5019 : TCP (fixed) (The settings other than the following are set to the default) : 1 (virtual)*1 Network No. : 2 (virtual)*1 PC No. : 192.168.0.19 IP address : 5551 Port No. Communication : TCP (fixed) format ■ Ethernet parameter settings of FX Configurator-EN *1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 Setting (with GOT connected) Item Setting Module Module 0*1 Operational settings Refer to (2) Initial settings (Use default value.) Open settings Refer to (3) Router relay parameter (Use default value.) E-mail settings :Required *1 8 - 38 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting :Set if necessary Set the number of the Ethernet module. :Not required 1 (3) Open settings PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (2) Operational settings Setting (with GOT connected) Protocol TCP Open system MELSOFT connection 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Fixed buffer Fixed buffer communication procedure Item Communication date code*1 IP address Setting (with GOT connected) Setting Existence confirmation (Use default value.) 192.168.0.19 Transmission target device Port No. (DEC.) (Use default value.) :Required :Required *2 :Set if necessary 4 Transmission target device IP address TCP Existence confirmation setting *1 (Use default value.) Host station Port No. (DEC.) Initial timing*1 Send frame setting Pairing open :Not required Because the port No. 5551 is fixed, the GOT operates as follows, regardless of the setting for the item. • Communication date code : [Binary code] • Initial timing : [Always wait for OPEN] (Communications are enabled while the programmable controller CPU stops.) The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.254. Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration. :Set if necessary :Not required HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Setting 5 POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set. BUS CONNECTION Item DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing the Ethernet parameter to the programmable controller CPU, turn off and then on, or reset the programmable controller CPU. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 39 Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET- (2) Open settings ADP (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Works2. To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later is required. For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to the following manual. FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual Item Setting Protocol TCP Open System MELSOFT connection Setting (with GOT connected) POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set. \ Setting (with GOT connected) Item Setting Channel CH1 or CH2*1 IP Address 192.168.1.250*2 Open Settings Refer to (2). Communication Data Code Disable direct connection to MELSOFT (Use default value.) Do not respond to search for CPU on network :Required *1 *2 :Set if necessary :Not required Set a channel according to the installation position of FX3UENET-ADP on the CPU body. The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.250. Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration. POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again. 8 - 40 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting Setting (Use default value.) GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5019 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms Ethernet setting No.1 Setting Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type FX (fixed) IP address Port No. Communication *1 *2 Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out. (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command 2 3 4 POINT (2) Ethernet setting Item Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of FX ConfiguratorEN, refer to the following manual. 5 FX Configurator-EN Operation manual 192.168.0.19*1 BUS CONNECTION Item PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. (1) Controller setting DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Ethernet module ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Designer3 1 Confirming the communication state of HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT 5551*2 TCP (fixed) Set the value according to the IP address of the connected PLC. Set the value according to the Port No. of the connected PLC. For details, refer to the following. 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 8.3.3 Ethernet setting POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 41 8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70) (2) CNC monitor This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT Display I/F (CNC C70) For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP MANUAL System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. :1 PLC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.0.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed) (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. IP address Port No. Communication format ■ IP address settings of CNC C70 : 239 :2 : 192.168.0.19 : 5001 : UDP(fixed) Item Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value IP address 192.168.0.19 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 Gateway address Port number 64758 (fixed) Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) Communication check The CNC C70 can communicate with the GOT when INIT.LED of the CNC C70 is lit. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. IP address settings of CNC C70 ■Checking communication state of CNC C70 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (1) Remote monitor tool Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5012 Default Gateway Subnet Mask Item IP address Subnet mask Gateway address Port number Speed auto/10M Set value 192.168.0.19 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 64758 (fixed) 0 (fixed) : Necessary 8 - 42 Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary : Not necessary 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting Set value (Use default value) Retry 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms 1 Ethernet setting No.1 Set value Host * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type 2 Q17nNC IP address 192.168.0.19 Port No. 5001 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Item PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING (2) Ethernet setting POINT 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Checking communication state of CNC C70 (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out. BUS CONNECTION 5 (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Mounting condition of CNC C70 • Cable connecting condition • Switch settings and network parameter settings • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • IP address of the CNC C70 specified for the Ping command DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 43 8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module This section describes the settings of the GOT, Ethernet adapter module and the PLC in the following system configuration. System configuration GX Works2 network parameter Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/ Local Module User's Manual (1) Network Type, Network No., Total Stations setting Example: Master station setting (Use default value for settings other than the following.) :3 *1 Network No. PC No. :1 :192.168.3.18 IP address :5001 Port No. Communication :UDP (fixed) format Ethernet (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Ethernet setting :192.168.3.30 IP address CC-Link IE Field Network setting :1 Network No. :1 Station No. CC-Link IE Field Network Set value Item Master station Local station Network type CC IE Field (Master station) CC IE Field (Local station) Network No. 1 1 Total Stations 2 - 0 (fixed) 2 Station No. HUB *2 (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type : CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. :1 PC No. :0 Total Stations :2 (2) Routing parameter setting Set the followings as necessary. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. *2 (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type : CC IE Field (Local station) Network No. :1 PC No. :2 *1 *2 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. The CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network Master/ Local module is set at [0]. Item 8 - 44 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Station No. 1 to 64 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT PC No. 1 GOT IP Address Item 1*1 Network No. 1*2 Station No. *1 *2 Set value Set the same value as the network No. set on the PLC side. Set a value other than the network No. set on the PLC side. (2) Ethernet setting 192.168.3.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway 4 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3 times Startup Time 3 sec Timeout Time 3 sec Delay Time 0ms *1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. Host Ethernet Setting No.1 PC No. 30*2 Type 192.168.3.30*1 Set the IP address within the following range. *1 *2 192.168. 3. 30 *3 Set the fourth octet within the range from 1 to 64. NZ2GF-ETB 192.168.3.30*3 Port No. 5001(fixed) Communication UDP(fixed) Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. Set according to the Ethernet adapter module IP address. (3) Routing parameter setting Set the third octet within the range from 1 to 239. Item Set value Transfer Network No. 1*1 Relay Network No. 3*2 Relay Station No. 30*3 *1 *2 *3 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter module network No. Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 6 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION IP address *1 Set value * 3*1 IP address Item Set value N/W No. 5 BUS CONNECTION (2) Ethernet setting Item 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3*1 GOT NET No. 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (1) CC-Link IE Field Network setting POINT HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual Designer3 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module setting tool. For details of the setting method, refer to the following manual. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT 8 - 45 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Ethernet Adapter Module setting 8.4.10 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) System configuration Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU settings as default in the following system configuration. This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU in the following case of system configuration. ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) :1 Network No. PLC No. :1 : 192.168.3.1 IP address : 5001 Port No. Communication : UDP (fixed) format POINT (1) GOT type setting For details, refer to the following. 1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) (2) Setting [Controller Type] (2) CPU No. specification of Q170MCPU Set whether to monitor the PLC CPU area or the Motion CPU area of Q170MCPU, in the CPU No. specification. For details, refer to the following. 8.5 Precautions (3) PLC type of GX Works2/GX Developer When creating a program, set the following PLC type: • For Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU QnUD(E)(H)CPU • For Q170MCPU Q03UDCPU (4) Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of Q173D(S)CPU/ Q172D(S)CPU and Q170MCPU *1 (The following settings are set to the default) : 1 (virtual) *2 Network No. : 2 (virtual) *2 PLC No. : 192.168.3.39 IP address : MELSOFT connection (fixed) Open system *1 *2 For the settings when using system devices including a hub and a transceiver, refer to the following. 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. ■[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 Basic setting of MT Works2 Use the default values of the basic setting for the system configuration above. (1) Built-in Ethernet port Item IP address 8 - 46 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting Set value 192.168.3.39 (Default) Subnet mask pattern - Default router IP address - Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 GOT IP Address : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. 192.168.3.1 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway 2 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3 sec Timeout time 3 sec Delay Time 0ms 3 (4) Ethernet setting Item Set value Host Ethernet setting No.1 1*1 PC No. 2*2 Type IP address Protocol Open system Host station port No. Set value UDP (fixed) MELSOFT connection (fixed) - [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Ethernet setting The settings items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU side. However, these virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No.. *1 *2 *3 4 QnUDE(H) 192.168.3.39*3 Port No. 5006 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No. Set it to the IP address value of the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU side. Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out. (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the Ping command 5 6 7 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Item * N/W No. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING GOT PC No. Refer to (2) : Necessary 1 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (Use default value) ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Open settings Setting (Use default value.) HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Enable online change (MC protocol) Item GOT NET No. BUS CONNECTION Communication data code 1 (3) Controller setting DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Item 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 47 POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common) GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual 8 - 48 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting When connecting to multiple GOTs When the CPU No. is set to "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. (1) Setting PLC No. When the CPU No. is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the GOT connection destination. Refer to the following. GOT connection destination Monitoring target QJ71E71 module PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) PERIPHERAL I/F Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device 3 When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT. 8.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Setting IP address Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using multiple GOTs. A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address. (3) Setting for starting up multiple GOTs simultaneously (When connected to Built-in Ethernet port CPU) When connecting multiple GOTs to one Built-in Ethernet port CPU, adjust the timing of GOT communication start. When the communication concentrates on the PLC, the communication between GOT and PLC becomes difficult, and the monitoring by GOT may not start. As a method for adjusting the timing, communicating one GOT alone first, and then communicating the other GOTs is effective. Set the following items on each GOT. • [Startup Time] of [Controller Setting], or [Title Display Time] of [GOT Setup]. • [Timeout Time] of [Controller Setting] The following shows a setting example. HUB QnUDE(H)CPU Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual GOT1 GOT2 GOT10 Item Startup Time GOT1 3sec (default) GOT2 4sec GOT10 4sec Timeout Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec When connecting to the multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. • Using a switching hub • More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) • Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). 8 - 49 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Connection to Q170MCPU 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. 2 5 BUS CONNECTION The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Connection to QSCPU Connection to LCPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module (QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type). 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Connection to QnA (S) CPU type PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 8.5 Precautions When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller. When monitoring to another network No. on the same line When the network No. of the GOT does not match with that of the PLC on the same Ethernet, the PLC cannot be monitored. When monitoring, set the same network No. as that of the GOT, or connect a Ethernet module to the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other network. When the Multi-channel is supported for GT16, set each channel with the networks No. to monitor. Remote password for QCPU Do not set a remote password for QCPU. Monitoring with GOT becomes unavailable. When connecting to Built-in Ethernet port of Built-in Ethernet port CPU Connect to GOT after turning on the network equipment such as Built-in Ethernet port CPU or HUB to enable the communication. When the communication with Built-in Ethernet port CPU is not available, a communication error may occur on the GOT. The number of connectable CPUs for one GOT QCPU : 128 CPUs can be set (10 or less CPUs are recommended) FXCPU : 128 CPUs can be set (10 or less CPUs are recommended) 8 - 50 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12 9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 11 13 9.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 9-1 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List POINT (1) Connectable network When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. • MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system • MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system (2) MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type. 9.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) MELSECNE T/H Q25HCPU *1 *1 9.2 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - - Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU MELSECNE T/H 9.2 Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU (Continued to next page) *1 9-2 Use CPU function version B or a later version. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List Communication type Refer to Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2 MELSECNET/H 9.2 MELSECNET/H 9.2 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*1 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT - L02CPU-P - L26CPU-PBT Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A - - - - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU 13 Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) 11 12 L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Q26UDEHCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MELSEC-Q (Q mode) 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Model name Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU - - Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Series 14 A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 - - 15 A1NCPU INVERTER CONNECTION A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 16 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9-3 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-A (AnCPU) Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - - - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU MELSECNET/H Q172DCPU 9.2 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*3 MR-MQ100 - - (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. *2 • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *3 9-4 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List Model name Clock Communication type 9 Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU 10 A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) A171SCPU - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 - - - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) MELSECNET/H 9.2 CC-Link IE Field Network head module QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G 12 QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station WS0-CPU1 13 FX0 FX0S FX0N - 14 FX1 FX2 FX2C - FX1S FX1N FX2N - - 15 FX1NC FX2NC - FX3GC FX3U INVERTER CONNECTION FX3G - FX3UC 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-FX CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) MELSEC-WS CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Motion controller CPU (A Series) MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Series 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9-5 9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module Model name CPU series Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1 MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1 C Controller module QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1 *1 9-6 Optical loop Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9 Connecting to optical loop system GOT 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication driver Connection cable MELSECNET/H PLC Model name Connection cable MELSECNET/H network module Communication type QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MELSECNET/H QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MELSECNET/H *1 MELSEC-Q MELSEC-QS C Controller module GOT Cable model Max. distance Option device Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25 Model 63 GOTs Optical fiber cable*2 *3 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. *2 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. Connecting to the coaxial bus system MELSECNET/H network module QCPU GOT 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 9.2.2 11 12 GT15-J71LP23-25 *1 *3 Number of connectable equipment CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/H network module QCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 9.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration 14 Communication driver Connection cable Model name MELSECNET/H Network module *2 Connection cable Communication type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device *4 GT15-J71BR13 Model Number of connectable equipment MELSEC-Q *1 QJ71BR11 *1 *2 MELSECNET/H Coaxial cable *3 31 GOTs 16 Use a PLC CPU of function version B or a later version. For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION C Controller module MELSEC-QS Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Use a MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or a later version. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration 15 INVERTER CONNECTION PLC CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) MELSECNET/H 9-7 *3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For the coaxial cable connector connection method, refer to the following. *4 1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 9-8 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 9.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 3. Click! Network Type Description Set the network type. (Default: MNET/H mode) Range • MNET/H mode • MNET/10 mode • MNET/H Extended mode*1 4. Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: MELSECNET/H Mode Setting The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: 1.1.2 I/F communication setting slave station*2 • Self-loopback test*2 • Internal selfloopback • H/W test*2 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300ms Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT • Online (auto. reconnection) • Offline • Test between test*2 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 9.3.2 Communication detail settings Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto. reconnection)) 13 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.3 GOT Side Settings 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 3. [Controller Setting] from the 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 2. Select [Common] menu. 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Item CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 4. 1. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set the channel of the connected equipment. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 9.3.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 9.3 GOT Side Settings 9-9 Item Description Range Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) Valid when [Secured data send/ Secured data receive] Is marked by the control station side network parameters of the melsecnet/h network system. 1 to 1000times Transmission Speed Set the communication transmission speed. (Default: 25Mbps) When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as The network type, only 10mbps can be set applicable. 10Mbps/25Mbps *1 *2 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system. For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the GOT utility, refer to the following manual: GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT Relay Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Station No. 1 to 64 (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. 9.4 PLC Side Settings (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. (b) When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted.However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. (c) The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help. Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 9 - 10 Range 1 to 239 POINT POINT 9.3.3 Item Transfer Network No. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.3 GOT Side Settings 9 Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch. QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71LP21-25 X1 23 78 90 1 90 1 11 (1) IN 01 EF 2 01 EF 2 3 45 MODE BCD 89 A EXT.PW EXT.PW (2) 89 A 67 34 5 MODE 67 System configuration (2) BCD (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network type : MNET/H Mode Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) Network range assignment *2: LB0100H to LB01FFH LW0100H to LW01FFH Transmission speed : 10Mbps 24G 24G OUT OUT (FG) 24G QJ71LP21 -25 QJ71LP21 S-25 13 QJ71BR11 X1 90 1 X10 901 STATION NO. 23 23 89 A 01 EF 2 345 MODE 67 BCD (2) 14 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set at "0". The network type must be set according to the number of assignment of send points for each station. When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or less: MELSECNET/H mode When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or more: MELSECNET/H Extended Mode POINT CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *2 (1) 456 *1 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. 78 RUN T.PASS SD ERR. 456 Station No. :1 Mode : Online (10Mbps) Network type : MNET/H mode (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment *2: LB0000H to LB00FFH LW0000H to LW00FFH 9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer QJ71BR11 78 *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION +24V +24V 9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) 90 1 (1) 23 456 23 X10 IN 9.4.1 MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. STATION NO. 23 90 1 RUN T.PASS SD ERR. 456 X1 EXT.PW 456 X10 78 STATION NO. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) QJ71LP21S-25 MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. 456 MELSECNET/H network module For details of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. RUN T.PASS SD ERR. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 POINT 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module 78 When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type. 9.4.2 78 This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system configuration shown as 9.4.1. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 15 QJ71BR11 INVERTER CONNECTION When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70". SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 11 9.4.3 (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch 90 1 78 90 1 56 *1 23 4 X1 23 456 X10 78 STATION NO. Description Station number setting Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Parameter setting Connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter 1 (Station No.1)*1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. (2) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch BCD *2 89 A 01 EF 2 67 34 5 MODE Description Mode setting (Online: Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 0 10Mbps)*2 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Set the same mode setting and transmission speed as those of the GOT. POINT Item When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection MNET/H mode (Control station) (fixed) Network type Starting I/O No.*1 0000H Network No.*2 1 Total stations 2 Group No. 0 (fixed) *3 Online Mode Network range assignment Refer to (b). Refresh parameters Interrupt settings Control station return setting (Use default value) Redundant settings*4 Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters *1 *2 *3 *4 9 - 12 Refer to (c). : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (b) Network range assignment MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Send range for station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Send range for station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Target network No. 1 to 239 Disable Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 64 LB/LW setting*1 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 200 Pairing setting*2 LX/LY setting*1 No setting Specify I/O master station*1 No setting Specify reserved station No setting 12 Item Range 13 POINT Supplementary setting (Use default value) Station inherent parameters *1 *2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Monitoring time : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission. Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system. Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 9.3.3 Routing parameter setting POINT CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Set value 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item 11 Setting necessity at GOT connection 15 INVERTER CONNECTION When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 13 Connecting to C Controller module Item Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility. Operation settings (1) Connection settings Set value Network type MNET/H mode (Control station) Network No.*1 1 Group No. 0 Mode*2 Online Return (Use default value) Refresh parameters (Use default value) Total stations 2 Write authority Mark the checkbox User name*2 target Password*2 password Detailed settings - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. *1 *2 Send range for each station LB 192.168.3.3 (Default) LB/LW settings*3 Target module*1 Setting necessity at GOT connection Network range assignment Set value Sta. No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Sta. No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Sta. No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Sta. No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH (LX/LY) settings*3 (a) Parameter settings No setting Monitoring time Specify I/O master Sta. (2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Start/End Send range for each station LW Assignment method Item (Use default value) *3 Specify reserved Sta. Supplementary settings *1 *2 *3 Setting necessity at GOT connection No setting No setting (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it. Item Set value Number of modules 1 Link device refresh cycle Routing parameter Target module (Use default value) Refer to (b). 1 Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) 9 - 14 Setting necessity at GOT connection 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 Item Set value Network Type MNET/H mode Network No. 1: Network No.1 Station No. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 10 2: Station No.2 Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection) Retry count 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0sec (Use default value) Refresh Interval 1time (Use default value) Monitor Speed 10Mbs POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 13 Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 120 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Item 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 9.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4.4 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (b) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 9.3.3 Routing parameter setting INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 15 9.5 Precautions Network configuration Use MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) Network type setting When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more • Specify all the network modules on the same network as the same network type. (MELSECNET/H Mode and MELSECNET/H Extended Mode cannot be mixed.) • When connecting to MELSECNET/H in the QCPU redundant system, [MELSECNET/H Extended Mode] cannot be specified as the network type. Monitoring range Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be monitored in GOT. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Connection in the multiple CPU system Screen Design Manual GOT startup in the MELSECNET/H When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). connection When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. In the MELSECNET/H connection, the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. When a network error occurs in the system For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. alarm In the MELSECNET/H connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. GT Designer3 Version Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. MELSECNET/H network module version For version restrictions of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 9 - 16 Screen Design Manual 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.5 Precautions MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 9 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 13 10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 10.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 10 - 1 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List POINT (1) Connectable network The MELSECNET/10 connection includes the MELSECNET/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. • MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system • MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system (2) MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type. 10.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU MELSECNET/10 Q25HCPU *1 *1 10.2 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - - Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU (Continued to next page) *1 10 - 2 Use CPU function version B or a later version. 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List Communication type Refer to Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU 10 Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU 11 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*1 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name MELSECNET/10 10.2 MELSECNET/10 10.2 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Series 12 L02CPU - L02CPU-P - L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A MELSECNET/10 10.2 MELSECNET/10 10.2 MELSECNET/10 10.2 Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU 14 Q2ASHCPU-S1 (Continued to next page) Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *1 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) L26CPU-BT CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) MELSEC-L CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION L26CPU 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 10 - 3 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 - - A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 10.2 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU - - - - - - A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU (Continued to next page) 10 - 4 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List Communication type Refer to Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 10 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU MELSECNET/10 Q172DCPU 10.2 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 11 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*3 MR-MQ100 - - A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name MELSECNET/10 10.2 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Series 12 A373UCPU A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SHCPU - - 13 A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H remote I/O station WS0-CPU0 MELSECNET/10 10.2 - WS0-CPU1 - 14 QJ72LP25-25 - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) MELSECNET/10 10.2 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) QJ72BR15 15 (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22 or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. *2 • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *3 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CC-Link IE Field Network head module QJ72LP25G CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) A171SCPU-S3N INVERTER CONNECTION Motion controller CPU (A Series) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION A373UCPU-S3 10 - 5 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to FX0 FX0S - FX0N FX1 FX2 - FX2C FX1S MELSEC-FX FX1N - - FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - FX3G FX3GC - FX3U FX3UC 10.1.2 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module Model name CPU series Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1 MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1 C Controller module QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1 MELSEC-QnA AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-A Motion controller CPU (A Series) AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 *1 10 - 6 Optical loop Use function version B or later of the CPU and MELSECNET/H network module. 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system Communication driver Communication driver MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 10.2 System Configuration (When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used) MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module GOT PLC MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module Communication type Cable model GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *1 *2 *3 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable *4 GT15-75J71LP23-Z *5 C Controller module QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MELSECNET/10 MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MELSECNET/10 MELSEC-QnA AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S Optical fiber cable *2 Optical fiber cable *2 *3 *3 GT15-75J71LP23-25 *4 13 GT15-75J71LP23-25 *4 63 GOTs GT15-J71LP23-25 MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable *2 *3 *4 GT15-75J71LP23-Z *5 14 GT15-J71LP23-25 MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable *2 *3 *4 GT15-75J71LP23-Z *5 *1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals. *2 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual. *3 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. *4 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following. *5 Not available for the GT155 16 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.2 System Configuration 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-A AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) MELSEC-Q GT15-J71LP23-25 QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 12 INVERTER CONNECTION Model name Connection cable CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 Connection cable CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) PLC (When MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 10 - 7 10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system Communication driver Communication driver MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 (When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used) MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module PLC (When MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module Connection cable Communication type Cable model Max. distance GOT Option device Model Number of connectable equipment *2 MELSEC-Q *1 QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10 C Controller module MELSEC-QS QJ71BR11*1 MELSEC-QnA AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET/10 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10 MELSEC-A MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable *3 Coaxial cable *3 Coaxial cable *3 Coaxial cable *3 GT15-J71BR13*5 *4 GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6 *4 GT15-J71BR13*5 GT15-J71BR13*5 *4 GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6 GT15-J71BR13*5 *4 GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6 *1 *2 Use a PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later. For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals. *3 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manuals. *4 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. *5 Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following. *6 Not available for the GT155 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 10 - 8 31 GOTs . 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.2 System Configuration 10.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 3. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 4. Item Click! Description Range • MNET/H mode • MNET/10 mode • MNET/H Extended Set the network type. Network Type (Default: MNET/H mode) mode*1 3. 4. [Controller Setting] from the Network No. 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit MELSECNET/H When using the MELSECNET/10 communication unit MELSECNET/10 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto. reconnection)) slave station*2 • Self-loopback test*2 • Internal selfloopback test*2 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received 0 to 5times after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) Delay Time 15 3 to 90sec Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination 0 to 300ms PLC. (Default: 0ms) POINT 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings 13 14 • H/W test*2 10.3.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. • Online (Auto Reconnect) • Offline • Test between CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 2. Select [Common] menu. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 12 INVERTER CONNECTION 1. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (1) MELSECNET/H Set the channel of the connected equipment. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 10.3.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 10.3 GOT Side Settings 10 - 9 Item Description Range Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) 1 to 1000times Valid when "Secured data send/ Secured data receive" is marked by the control station side network parameters of the MELSECNET/H network system. Refresh Interval Set the communication transmission speed. Transmission (Default: 25Mbps) 10Mbps/25Mbps Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as the network type, only 10Mbps can be set applicable. *1 *2 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system. For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (2) MELSECNET/10 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT (1) Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. (2) Selection of communication unit Routing parameters cannot be set in the GT1575J71LP23-Z and the GT15-75J71BR13-Z. When setting routing parameters, use the GT15J71LP23-25 or the GT15-J71BR13 according to the connection type to be used. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Item Description Range Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec POINT Item (1) When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the [MNET/10 mode] as a [Network Type]. (2) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual setting of MELSECNET/H network module (3) ■ Switch Precedence in communication settings ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 10 - 10 Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Station No. 1 to 64 POINT Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings 9 0 1 2 3 Set the station No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. Set to not duplicate other stations in the network. (Default: 01) 1 to 64: GT1575J71LP23-Z 1 to 32: GT1575J71BR13-Z 9 0 1 (4) Mode setting switch 89 CDE 23 67 AB MODE 45 Mode setting switch GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit User's Manual Description On-line (Default: 0) Set value F0 1 POINT POWER (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. D.LINK T.PASS DUAL SW.E M/S.E E PRM.E R CRC R OVER O R AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD GOT R/W E R CRC R OVER O AB.IF R TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD F.LOOP 7 8 GROUP No. 7 8 X100 7 8 X10 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 X1 (2) 2 3 23 4 5 6 F0 1 X10 7 8 X1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 9 0 1 STATION No. (1) NETWORK No. 4 5 6 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 45 9 0 1 89 9 0 1 MODE 67 CD AB E (4) (3) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (2) When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT. (3) Self check test Select "6" to "9" as the mode setting switch to provide a self check test of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. For details, refer to the following manual. R.LOOP 9 0 1 (1) Network number setting switch Network number setting switch 4 Description Set value GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit User's Manual 5 6 2 3 7 8 9 0 1 X1 NETWORK No. Set the network No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. (Default: 001) 1 to 239 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 15 4 5 6 Set value Set the group No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. (Default: 0) 0: No group setting (fixed)*1 16 The GOT does not use the group number. Specify "0". 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 2 3 7 8 9 0 1 *1 GROUP No. Description INVERTER CONNECTION (2) Group number setting switch Group number setting switch 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 7 8 2 3 7 8 X10 12 14 X100 4 5 6 10 11 0 GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z RUN PC MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 2 3 7 8 For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. X1 5 6 4 Switch setting of the communication unit When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit, the switch setting is not needed. 7 8 STATION No. X10 Set value MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 5 6 Description CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Station number setting switch 4 POINT 9 (3) Station number setting switch CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Switch setting (Only when MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 10.3.4 10 - 11 10.4 PLC Side Setting Reference POINT MELSECNET/H network module QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71BR11 10.4.1 MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, AJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QBR11 10.4.2 MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11, A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR1 10.4.3 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. QJ71LP21 S-25 QJ71BR11 MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. 90 1 23 (1) 456 X1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 23 78 X10 901 STATION NO. 78 RUN T.PASS SD ERR. 89 A 01 EF 2 67 345 MODE BCD Station No. :2 Mode : Online Network No. :1 Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH LW0100H to LW01FFH MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :1 Mode : Online (10Mbps) Network type : MNET/10 mode (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH LW0000H to LW00FFH 90 1 90 1 90 1 QJ71BR11 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set at "0". 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (2) 01 EF 2 01 EF 2 BCD QJ71LP21 -25 OUT BCD (FG) 24G 456 ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit 10 - 12 3 45 MODE 89 A 89 A 24G 24G OUT QJ71BR11 *1 EXT.PW EXT.PW (2) 67 67 POINT System configuration (1) IN +24V +24V Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 23 456 X1 23 456 23 X10 (1) 34 5 MELSECNET/H network module For details of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. MNG D.LINK RD L ERR. STATION NO. 23 IN MODE RUN T.PASS SD ERR. 456 X1 EXT.PW 456 X10 90 1 STATION NO. 78 RUN T.PASS SD ERR. This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of system configuration. When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type. QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71LP21-25 78 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch. 78 10.4.1 When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70". 78 Model name (2) Station number setting MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter 10 1 *1 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (Station No.1)*1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. (2) Mode setting switch Mode setting (Online: 10Mbps) 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Set value 12 : Not necessary POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection MNET/10 mode (Control station) (fixed) Network type Starting I/O No.*1 0000H Network No.*2 1 Total stations 2 Group No. 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Description 0 (fixed) Mode Online (fixed) Network range assignment 14 Refer to (b) Refresh parameters CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Mode setting switch 11 Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Description Setting necessity at GOT connection Interrupt settings Control station return setting (Use default value) Redundant settings*3 15 Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters *1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system. 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *2 *3 Refer to (c) INVERTER CONNECTION Station number setting switch 9 Parameter setting (when connecting to (1) Station number setting switch 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 13 (b) Network range assignment Item Set value Monitoring time Setting necessity at GOT connection 200 Send range for station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Send range for station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH LB/LW setting*1 (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Pairing setting*2 Disable LX/LY setting*1 No setting Specify I/O master station*1 No setting Specify reserved station No setting Supplementary setting (Use default value) Station inherent parameters *1 *2 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system. Item Target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 64 POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 10 - 14 Range 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting Network No.*1 1 Group No. 0 Mode Online Return (Use default value) Refresh parameters 2 Mark the checkbox User name*2 target Password*2 password Detailed settings - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. *1 *2 Send range for each station LB 192.168.3.3 (Default) Sta. No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Sta. No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Sta. No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Sta. No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH (LX/LY) settings*2 (Use default value) Sta.*2 Specify reserved Sta. (2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] (a) Parameter settings Supplementary settings *1 *2 12 No setting Monitoring time Specify I/O master 11 Start/End Send range for each station LW Write authority Setting necessity at GOT connection Network range assignment Target module*1 Set value LB/LW settings*2 Assignment method Item 10 (Use default value) Total stations MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MNET/10 mode (Control station) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (1) Connection settings Network type CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Operation settings Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility. Set value MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Item 9 No setting 13 No setting (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Controller module) Setting necessity at GOT connection 14 POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Parameter setting (when connecting to C Number of modules Link device refresh cycle Routing parameter Target module Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 16 (Use default value) Refer to (b). SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Item INVERTER CONNECTION 15 1 Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 15 (b) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value (Use default) Retry 3times Timeout Time 3sec POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1 Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) POINT Item Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 120 Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit, refer to the following. 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting 10 - 16 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. AJ71QLP21S A J71QLP21 10 100 In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations. E R R O R RUN PC REMOTE DUAL SW.E M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD - A J71QLP21S - POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA - UNDER - LOOP - SD - RD F.LOOP 1 10 100 E R R O R E R R O R R.LOOP RUN PC REMOTE DUAL SW.E M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD - (1) (2) STATION NO. X10 (3) SD RD - NETWORK NO. X100 (1) OFF ON OFF ON PC REMOTE N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K) SW X1 (2) GROUP NO. (3) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (6) (2) GROUP NO. STATION NO. X10 11 (3) X1 (5) MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE OFF ON OFF ON PC REMOTE N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K) (1) X10 X1 (5) 10 1 R.LOOP STATION NO. X10 X1 MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual E R R O R X1 GROUP NO. - POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - CPUR/W SW.E M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER - 100 X10 X1 RUN PC REMOTE - 10 NETWORK NO. X100 X10 MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. AJ71QBR11 - POWER - MNG - S.MNG 1 - D.LINK - T.PASS - EX.POWER - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER E - AB.IF R - TIME R - DATA - UNDER O - LOOP R - SD - RD F.LOOP NETWORK NO. X100 POINT AJ71QBR11 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) AJ71QLP21 This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the following case of system configuration. SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (6) (5) MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE OFF ON OFF ON SW PC REMOTE 1 2 N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM 3 STATION SIZE 4 (8.16.32.64) 5 6 LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K) 7 8 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connecting to MELSECNET/ 10 network module (QnA Series) (6) 24V 24G FG FRONT SIDE IN OUT A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21 ‚d ‚q ‚q ‚n ‚q 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 23 456 78 78 78 DISPLAY 23 23 23 45 23 3 24G (6) 4 5 6 7 FG 01 EF MODE MODE 0 : ONLINE(A.R) 2 : FOFFLINE FRONT SIDE 8 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is set at "0". L (F.L) BCD 2 FRONT SIDE 78 89 67 A 456 456 23 456 X1 {24V (4) R (R.L.) SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF ON PC REM. N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM ST,SIZE 8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE 2,4,6,8k OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 (6) 6 7 8 IN OUT OUT A1SJ71QLP21S CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 RUN MNG S.MNG PW PC REM. SWE. M/S.E. PRM E. D.LINK T.PASS CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD CPU R/W ‚d ‚q ‚q ‚n ‚q 15 NETWORK 456 456 456 456 89 67 A BCD 45 23 MODE L R (R.L.) (4) MODE 0 : ONLINE (A.R) 2 : OFFLINE SW OFF ON 1 PC REM. 2 N.ST MNG 3 PRM D.PRM 4 ST,SIZE 5 8,16,32,64 6 LB/LW SIZE 7 2,4,6,8k 8 INVERTER CONNECTION 78 23 456 23 456 78 01 EF (5) 23 X1 901 X10 78 901 ST.NO. (3) 23 GR.NO. 78 DISPLAY (F.L) 901 (2) 78 901 X1 78 901 X10 901 X100 23 NO. (1) 13 14 IN (5) 23 OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 (6) 16 6 7 8 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 X10 EXT.PW 78 45 23 23 456 ST.NO. 1 01 EF 89 67 A GR.NO. SW MODE 0 : ONLINE(A.R) 2 : OFFLINE ■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) (3) OFF ON BCD MODE X1 OFF ON PC REM. N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM ST,SIZE 8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE 2,4,6,8k 78 901 78 901 X1 (5) 78 X10 901 X10 (3) 78 901 ST.NO. X100 (1) 901 GR.NO. (4) R (R.L.) 901 (2) SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 901 :1 Station No. : Online Mode : MNET/10 (Control station) Network type :1 Network No. :2 Total stations Network range assignment: B0000H to B00FFH W0000H to W00FFH 78 NO. L 901 X1 ‚d ‚q ‚q ‚n ‚q 901 X10 DISPLAY (F.L) 901 (1) 78 901 *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD NETWORK 78 901 X100 23 NETWORK NO. PW PC REM. SWE. M/S.E. PRM E. R.E. CPU R/W RUN MNG S.MNG DUAL D.LINK T.PASS F.E. EXT.P W 23 :2 Station No. : Online Mode :1 Network No. Network range assignment: B0100H to B01FFH MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) W0100H to W01FFH A1SJ71QLP21S CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD PW PC REM. SWE. M/S.E. PRM E. R.E. CPU R/W 23 RUN MNG S.MNG DUAL D.LINK T.PASS F.E. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION A1SJ71QLP21 23 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 12 FRONT SIDE IN OUT 23 ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit 23 System configuration CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 10.4.2 A1SJ71QBR11 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 17 (1) Network number setting switch Network number setting switch NETWORK NO. X100 Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 78 4 5 6 90 1 23 4 5 6 9 0 1 78 X10 23 4 5 6 1 (Network No.1)*1 9 0 1 78 X1 Network No. setting 23 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *1 (2) Group number setting switch Group number setting switch 4 5 6 GROUP.NO. 90 1 78 Description Group No. setting (No group setting) 23 : Necessary Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 0 (fixed) : As necessary : Not necessary (3) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch 4 5 6 78 9 0 1 STATION.NO. X10 23 4 5 6 X1 9 0 1 78 Description Station number setting Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 (Station No.1)*2 23 *2 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. (4) LED indication select switch LED indication select switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection DISPLAY L (F.L) LED indication select R (R.L.) : Necessary 10 - 18 L (F.L.) : As necessary : Not necessary 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 0 (fixed) 45 : Necessary : As necessary MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Mode setting (Online) Setting necessity at GOT connection (1) Network parameter 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Set value SW1 Network type (PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF (fixed) SW2 Station type (Control station (MNG)) ON (fixed) 11 12 Item Parameter SW3 for using*1 (common parameter (PRM)) SW4 No. of SW5 stations*1 SW6 B/W Total BW SW7 points*1 SW8 *1 Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Setting switch Not used OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated by default parameters. For details, refer to the following manual. For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual Set value Network type MNET/10 (Control station) (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No.*1 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT connection 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Condition setting switches Refer to (2) Refresh parameters Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters *1 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 23 67 Description (Use default value) 14 Refer to (3) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the network number setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module. POINT CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) BCD 01 EF MODE 0 : ONLINE(A.R) 2 : OFFLINE 89A Mode setting switch 9 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (5) Mode setting switch 15 INVERTER CONNECTION When the switch setting (other than the LED indication select switch) is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 19 (2) Network range assignment (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Item Set value Monitoring time Send range for each station (LB) BW setting*1 Send range for each station (LW) Setting necessity at GOT connection 200 Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH XY setting*1 No setting Specify I/O master station*1 No setting Specify reserved station No setting Supplementary setting (Use default value) Station inherent parameters *1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. Item Target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 64 POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 10 - 20 Range 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 3times Timeout Time 3sec This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the following case of system configuration. In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations. POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) POINT MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series), refer to the following manual. Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1 Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit, refer to the following. 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Station No. :1 Mode : Online Network type : MNET/10 (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH LW0000H to LW00FFH ■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer 11 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is set at "0". 13 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *1 10 12 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :2 Mode : Online Network No. :1 Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) LW0100H to LW01FFH POINT MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Retry MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value (Use default) 9 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connecting to MELSECNET/ 10 network module (A Series) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item 10.4.3 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 21 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network (1) Network number setting switch module Set for each setting switch. AJ71BR11 AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 - POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - CPUR/W SW.E M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER - 100 E R R O R NETWORK NO. X100 1 78 78 4 5 6 SD RD - R.LOOP X10 23 NETWORK NO. X100 X1 78 (1) X10 X1 X1 STATION NO. X10 STATION NO. X10 (3) X1 MODE MODE (5) 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE OFF ON OFF ON SW PC REMOTE 1 2 N.ST MNG 3 PRM D.PRM 4 STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) 5 6 LB/ LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K) 7 8 (2) GROUP NO. X1 (3) *1 *2 (5) 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE ON OFF ON SW OFF PC REMOTE 1 2 N.ST MNG PRM 3 D.PRM 4 STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) 5 6 LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K) 7 8 (6) No.1) 1 *1*2 23 (2) GROUP NO. Network No. setting (Network 9 0 1 (1) X10 4 5 6 NETWORK NO. X100 Setting necessity at GOT connection 23 F.LOOP RUN PC REMOTE - 10 9 0 1 - POWER - MNG - S.MNG 1 - D.LINK - T.PASS - EX.POWER - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER E - AB.IF R - TIME R - DATA - UNDER O - LOOP R - SD - RD Set value 90 1 RUN PC 10REMOTE DUAL SW.E 100M/S.E PRM.E CRC OVER E AB.IF R TIME R DATA O UNDER LOOP R R SD RD - Description 4 5 6 AJ71LP21 Network number setting switch (6) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Do not specify a number between 240 and 255. (2) Group number setting switch Group number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection FRONT SIDE IN OUT 4 5 6 GROUP.NO. 90 1 78 23 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71LP21 CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD PW PC REM. SWE. M/S.E. PRM E. R.E. CPU R/W RUN MNG S.MNG E R R O R D.LINK T.PAS. NO. 3 (6) 5 MODE 0 : ONLINE(A,R) 2 : OFFLINE 1 78 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 78 (6) X1 9 0 1 5 SW BCD MODE 789 (5) 2 4 OFF ON 345 1 STATION.NO. X10 78 X1 OFF ON 4 5 6 5 X10 OFF ON SW PC REM. 1 N.ST MNG 2 PRM D.PRM 3 ST,SIZE 4 8,16,32,64 5 6 LB/LW SIZE 2,4,6,8k 7 8 4 5 6 5 5 78 ST.NO. (3) 23 Description Station number setting Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 (Station No.1)*3 23 456 78 GR.NO. 23 23 23 456 Station number setting switch 9 0 1 23 23 89 67 (4) 23 (2) F01 45 23 FRONT SIDE R 0 456 23 456 23 X1 OFF ON PC REM. N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM ST,SIZE 8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE 2,4,6,8k 0 MODE 0 : ONLINE(A,R) 2 : OFFLINE L 78 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW CD AB E MODE X10 5 (1) 78 F01 (5) : Not necessary (3) Station number setting switch 78 23 456 23 78 901 X1 : As necessary DISPLAY 78 0 X10 X100 0 78 901 ST.NO. (3) : Necessary 0 GR.NO. 901 (2) (4) 5 R (R.L.) 78 901 X1 E R R O R 23 L (F.L) 78 0 456 DISPLAY 78 901 (1) X10 CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD NETWORK 901 X100 PW PC REM. SWE. M/S.E. PRM E. CPU R/W NETWORK NO. 0 (fixed) A1SJ71BR11 23 RUN MNG S.MNG DUAL D.LINK T.PAS. F.E. Group No. setting (No group setting) IN OUT A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 *3 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. (4) LED indication select switch LED indication select switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection DISPLAY L (F.L) LED indication select R (R.L.) : Necessary 10 - 22 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting L (F.L.) : As necessary : Not necessary 0 (fixed) MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Mode setting (Online) Setting necessity at GOT connection (1) Network parameter 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value 23 45 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Set value SW1 Network type (PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF (fixed) Station type (Control station (MNG)) ON (fixed) SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 *1 Item Parameter *1 for using (common parameter (PRM)) 11 Setting necessity at GOT connection OFF (fixed) Network type MNET/10 (Control station) (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No.*1 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment No. of stations*1 OFF (fixed) Total B/W points*1 OFF (fixed) Not used OFF (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated by default parameters. For details, refer to the following manual. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 13 Refer to (2) Refresh parameters Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters *1 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION OFF ON Setting switch (Use default value) Refer to (3) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the network number setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module. 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Condition setting switches CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 89 67 A BCD 01 EF MODE 0:ONLINE(A.R) 2:OFFLINE Description CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Mode setting switch 9 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (5) Mode setting switch Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual POINT 15 INVERTER CONNECTION When the switch setting (other than the LED indication select switch) is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 23 (2) Network range assignment (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Item Set value Monitoring time Send range for each station (LB) LB/LW setting *1 Send range for each station (LW) Setting necessity at GOT connection 200 Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Station No.2 Start 0100H End 01FFH Item Range LX/LY setting*1 No setting Target network No. 1 to 239 Specify I/O master station*1 No setting Relay network No. 1 to 239 Specify reserved station No setting Relay station No. 1 to 64 Supplementary setting (Use default value) Station inherent parameters *1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 10 - 24 POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 9 Item MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set value (Use default) Retry 3times Timeout Time 3sec 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Set value 1: Network No.1 Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Network number setting switch POINT Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit, refer to the following. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 25 10.5 Precautions Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. (1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. • MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) (2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the following. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Monitoring range Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be monitored in GOT. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Starting GOT with MELSECNET/10 connection With the MESLSECNET/10 connection, the data link starts approximately 10 seconds after the GOT starts. When a network error occurs in the system alarm When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs with the MELSECNET/10 connection, the system alarm is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error factor is removed. Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70, CRnQ-700 The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ700 are applicable to the MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) only. For connecting the GOT to the MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network), set the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) to the MELSECNET/10 mode. Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Connection to QCPU (Q mode) Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and QCPU (Q mode). 10 - 26 Screen Design 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.5 Precautions MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11 9 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2 11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 7 11.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 10 13 11.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 16 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 11.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 8 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 11 - 1 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU CC-Link IE *1 *1 11.2 *1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - - Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU CC-Link IE 11.2 Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU (Continued to next page) *1 11 - 2 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List Refer to Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU CC-Link IE 11.2 Q06UDVCPU 10 Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module MELSEC-QS Q12DCCPU-V*1 Q24DHCCPU-V QS001CPU CC-Link IE 11.2 CC-Link IE 11.2 L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P - - - - L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) - - - - Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU 11 12 Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication type MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Model name CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Series 13 Q2ASHCPU-S1 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 14 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 - - A1NCPU 15 A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 INVERTER CONNECTION A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 16 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 11 - 3 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-A (AnCPU) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) A2ACPUP21-S1 Series Model name Clock Communicati on type Refer to - - - - - - - - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 CC-Link IE 11.2 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*1 MR-MQ100 - - (Continued to next page) *1 11 - 4 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List Communication type Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 10 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Motion controller CPU (A Series) - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU 11 A172SHCPUN CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G - - 12 QJ72BR15 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link IE 11.2 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link IE 11.2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION LJ72GF15-T2 FX0 FX0S FX0N - FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1N FX2N - - FX1NC FX2NC - 15 FX3G FX3U INVERTER CONNECTION FX3GC 13 14 - FX1S FX3UC 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-FX 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Model name CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Series 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 11 - 5 11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit CPU series MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) *1 11 - 6 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit*1 QJ71GP21-SX QJ71GP21S-SX When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or later. 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 9 11.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11.2 System Configuration Connecting to optical loop system CC-Link IE controller network module QCPU GOT Communication driver Connection cable CC-Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Communication type MELSEC-Q C Controller module MELSEC-QS QJ71GP21-SX QJ71GP21S-SX CC-Link IE *3 *4 *5 *6 *2 *3 GT15-J71GP23-SX*6 Model 119 GOTs*4 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or later. For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Controller Network module side, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual When Universal model QCPUs is a control station, up to 119 GOTs can be connected. When a QCPU other than Universal model QCPU is the control station, the number of connectable GOTs is 63 units (at most). Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU cannot be used as the control station. When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, only MELSEC-Q series Universal model QCPU can be used. When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a module with the serial No. 02910908******* or later. 12 13 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *2 Optical fiber cable Option device Number of connectable equipment 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 Cable model Max. distance CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Model name*5 CC-Link IE controller network communication unit*1 GOT CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Connection cable CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) PLC CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.2 System Configuration 11 - 7 11.3 GOT side settings 11.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 11.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of connecting equipment. 2. 3. 4. Item Network Type*4 Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. Set the network Type (Default: CC IE Control) Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: CC-Link IE Controller Network The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 120 • Online (auto. reconnection) • Offline Set the operation mode of the GOT. Mode Setting (Default: Online (auto. reconnection)) test*1 • Internal self• Line test*1 • H/W test*1 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. 0 to 5times When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. 0 to 300ms (Default: 0ms) Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1ms) Valid when [Block data assurance 1 to 1000ms per station is available.] is checked by the control station side network parameters of the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. • Test station*1 • Self-loopback loopback test*1 11.3.2 Communication detail settings POINT Range • CC IE Control • CC IE Control extended mode Network No. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 11 - 8 Description 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings 3 to 90sec *4 For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. 12 Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Network No. 1 to 239 GT User’s Manual (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. (4) Network type Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU side and the GOT side. If the net work types of the CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side. POINT Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Relay Station No. *1 Universal model QCPU QCPU other than Universal model QCPU*1 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item 11.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. Routing parameter setting 10 11 POINT 11.3.3 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the monitor screen. However, the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/ Q00/Q01CPU. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High]. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.) Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/ Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced. When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, set to [CC IE Control extended mode]. The extended mode can be used in GT Designer3 version 1.22Y or later. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) *3 For details, refer to the following manual. Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION *2 High /Normal/Low *3 1 to 120 1 to 64 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included. (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. 11.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. (b) When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted.However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. (c) The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help. 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings 11 - 9 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) *1 POINT *2 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Monitor Speed 9 Range 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Description Set the monitor speed for the CCLink IE controller network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High) 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Item 11.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration. System configuration2 (Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode) (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) POINT CC-Link IE Controller Network module For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. Mode Network type :1 : Online : CC IE Control extended mode (Control station) Network No. :1 LB0000H to LB00FFH Total stations :2 Network range assignment : LW00000H to LW000FFH System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) ■ GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) CC-Link IE Controller Network Network type : CC IE Control Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH Monitor Speed : High *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :1 Mode : Online Network type : CC IE Control (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment : LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0]. POINT When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set to "70". 11 - 10 Network type : CC IE Control extended mode Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH Monitor Speed : High 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0]. 9 (b) Network range assignment MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Parameter settings (Connection to MELSECQ, QS series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter 2000 Station Start No.1 End 0000H 00FFH LB LB/LW setting(1) Station Start No.1 End *1 0100H 12 01FFH 00000H CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Station Start No.2 End 000FFH LW Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Starting I/O No.*1 1 Total stations 2 Group No. 0 (fixed) Station No. 1 Mode*3 13 No setting No setting (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. 14 When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. Refer to (b) Refresh parameters Interrupt settings 001FFH POINT Online Network range assignment station*1 Supplementary setting *1 00100H No setting Specify reserved station 0000H Network No.*2 LX/LY setting*1 Specify I/O master CC IE Control (Control station) (fixed) Network type Station Start No.2 End 15 (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters *2 *3 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 Refer to (c) INVERTER CONNECTION Routing parameters CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Monitoring time 11 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Set value CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item Setting necessity at GOT connection MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 11 (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC IE Control utility. (1) Connection settings between personal computer and C controller module Item Target module*1 Write authority Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 120 Mark the checkbox target Password*2 password Detailed settings *2 Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting 11 - 12 192.168.3.3 (Default) User name*2 *1 POINT Set value 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. 9 (b) Network range assignment MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (2) CC IE Control Utility's [Parameter Settings] (a) Parameter settings Number of modules Link device refresh cycle Routing parameter Target module Set value 1 Station Start No.2 End settings (1) Station Start No.1 End Refer to (c) 1 Station Start No.2 End 0000H Channel No. 151 LX/LY settings*1 CC IE Control (Control station) Monitoring time 1 Group No. 0 Station No. 1 Refresh parameters Network range assignment 12 00000H 000FFH 00100H 001FFH No setting No setting Specify reserved station No setting Supplementary settings (Use default value) *1 13 (Use default value) station*1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. (Use default value) 14 POINT Refer to (b) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it. 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *1 *2 Specify I/O master Online Network No.*2 01FFH 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Operation settings Mode*1 0100H LW Start I/O No. Network type 00FFH LB LB/LW (Use default value) 0000H CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item 2 Station Start No.1 End Setting necessity at GOT connection 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Total stations CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Set value CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item Setting necessity at GOT connection MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 13 (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) Item Network Type Network No. Set value CC IE Control 1: Network No.1 Station No. 2: Station No.2 Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection) Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value) Monitor Speed High (Use default value) POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 11.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Item Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 1 to 120 POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting 11 - 14 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting (a) Network parameter POINT (1) Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control extended mode]. For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Item Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value Network Type CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control station) (fixed) Start I/O No.*1 0000H Network No.*2 1 Total Stations 2 0 (Fixed) Station No. 1 Mode*3 12 Online 13 Same as the following setting [Network parameter] CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Network Range Assignment of GX Developer Refresh Parameters Interrupt Setting (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters 14 Same as the following setting Routing parameters 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Group No. 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Network type of the PLC side Only GX Works2 can set [CC IE Control extended mode (control station)] or [CC IE Control extended mode (ordinary station)]. The CPU which is compatible with the extended mode is Universal model QCPU only. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Works2 9 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Parameter settings (Connection to Universal model QCPU) of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) [Network parameter] : Necessary : As necessary CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) of GX Developer : Not necessary (2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set value Network type CC IE Control extended mode Network No. 1: Network No.1 2: Station No.2 Mode Online (auto. reconnection) Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 1ms (Use default value) Refresh Interval High (Use default value) Monitor Speed High (Use default value) 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting INVERTER CONNECTION Station No. 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Item 11 - 15 11.5 Precautions GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller Network connection For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the GOT startup. When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Connection in the multiple CPU system Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design CC-Link IE Controller Network module version For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. 11 - 16 Screen Design 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.5 Precautions MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 12 9 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2 12.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7 12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10 13 12.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 12 - 1 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU(Main base) Q25PRHCPU(Main base) Q12PRHCPU(Extension base) Q25PRHCPU(Extension base) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU (Continued to next page) 12 - 2 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List Refer to Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q04UDVCPU 12.2 Q06UDVCPU 10 Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*1 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU*3 Q24DHCCPU-V CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 12.2 L02CPU*2 L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT*2 12.2 L02CPU-P*2 L26CPU-PBT*2 L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A - - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU - - - - Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU 11 12 Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication type MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Clock CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Model name CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Series 13 Q2ASHCPU-S1 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 14 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 - - A1NCPU 15 A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU INVERTER CONNECTION A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 16 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. Use a module with the upper five digits later than 13012. Use a module with the upper five digits later than "13042". Use GX Developer of Version 8.98C or later. 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12 - 3 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-A (AnCPU) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) A2ACPUR21-S1 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - - - - - CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*1 *2 *2 12.2 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 12 - 4 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). For the PLC CPU area, use a module with the upper five digits later than 12012. Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored. 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List Model name Clock 9 Communication type Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU 10 A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Motion controller CPU (A Series) - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN 11 A172SHCPU CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 - - - - 12 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 13 CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 Robot controller CRnQ700(Q172DRCPU) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12.2 CC-Link IE Field Network head module 14 FX0 FX0N - CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) FX0S FX1 FX2 FX2C - 15 FX1S FX2N - - INVERTER CONNECTION FX1N FX1NC FX2NC - FX3G FX3GC FX3U 16 - SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-FX CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station WS0-CPU0 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Series FX3UC 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12 - 5 12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CPU series MELSEC-Q(Universal model) 12 - 6 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit QJ71GF11-T2, QD77GF16 MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2 MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 9 12.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 12.2 System Configuration Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication driver CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network unit PLC CPU GOT Connection cable Cable model*2 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard: Category 5e or higher, (double-shielded, STP) straight cable. Max distance*1 option device Model Number of connectable equipment QJ71GF11-T2 QD77GF16*3 MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2 MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network head module - Ethernet adapter module - *2 12100m GT15-J71GF13-T2 120 GOTs The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the connection method (line, star or ring), the system configuration, etc. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions. • Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) • Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function • Supporting the auto-negotiation function • Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.) Recommended switching hub (Mitsubishi electric products) Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8 13 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *1 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Communicatio n type 15 For details, refer to the following manual. *3 CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual When connecting to the QD77GF16, refer to the following manual. INVERTER CONNECTION MELSEC-Q (Universal model) Q170MCPU C Controller module CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GOT MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Model name Connection cable CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) PLC CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.2 System Configuration 12 - 7 12.3 GOT side settings 12.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 12.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of connecting equipment. 2. 3. 4. Item Network Type*4 Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: CC-Link IE Field Network The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting Range Set the network Type • CC IE Field Network No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 120 Set the operation mode of the GOT. Mode Setting (Default: Online (auto. reconnection)) • Online • Offline • H/W test*1 • Self-loopback test*1 Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in 1 to 1000ms station units during communication. (Default: 25ms) Set the hold/clear of input from the station where the data link is faulty Input for Error due to some reason such as turning Clear/Hold Station the power OFF. (Default: Clear) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. 0 to 300ms (Default: 0ms) Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed for the CCLink IE field network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High) 12.3.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Description High*2/Normal/Low*3 (Continued to next page) 12 - 8 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.3 GOT side settings MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Item (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. 12.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User’s Manual (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. (4) Network type Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU side and the GOT side. If the network types of the CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side. 12.3.3 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Network No. 1 to 239 Relay Station No. 0 to 120 *1 MELSEC-Q (Universal model) Q170MCPU C Controller Module Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included. POINT 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION POINT MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced. 12 (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. 12.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. (b) When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted. However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. (c) The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help. 13 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION *3 CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the monitor screen. However, the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High]. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) *2 9 For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *1 For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CC-Link IE Field Network Reference Manual 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.3 GOT side settings 12 - 9 12.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration. POINT Parameter settings (Connection to MELSECQ, QS series) of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) (1) Network parameter] of GX Works2 Use GX Works2 of Version 1.31H or later. (a) Network parameter CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) ■ GT Designer3 [Communication setting] of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Field) (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) CC-Link IE Field Network Network type : CC IE Field Network No. :1 Station No. :1 Mode Setting : Online Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00 to FFH RWW/RWr00 to FFH Monitor Speed : High *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. : 0 (fixed) Mode : Online (normal) Network type : CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. :1 Total stations :1 Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00H to FFH RWW/RWr00H to FFH Item Set value ■ [Network parameter] of GX Works2 *1 The CC-Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set at [0]. POINT CC IE Field (Master station) (fixed) Network type Starting I/O No.*1 Network No. *2 Total stations When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set to "70". Setting necessity at GOT connection 0000H 1 1 Station No. 0 (fixed) Online (Normal mode) Mode*3 Network Configuration Settings Refer to (b) Refresh parameters Interrupt settings (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters *1 *2 *3 12 - 10 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting Refer to (c) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (b) Network Configuration Settings MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Station No.1 Start 0000H End 00FFH RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 Start 00000H End 000FFH Reserved/Error Invalid Station *1 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION setting(1)*1 Rx/RY setting 11 12 No setting CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Rx/RY, RWw/RWr Set value : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT Item 13 Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239 Relay network No. 1 to 239 Relay station No. 0 to 120 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) (1) When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. (2) GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station. POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. 12.3.3 Routing parameter setting 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item Setting necessity at GOT connection INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting 12 - 11 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) Item Network Type Network No. Set value CC IE Field 1: Network No.1 Station No. 1: Station No.1 Mode Setting Online Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value) Monitor Speed High (Use default value) POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 12.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 12 - 12 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT startup. When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. CC-Link IE Field Network module version Data link failure in other stations at GOT startup At GOT startup, the data link failure may occur in other stations. However, after the failure occurrence, the GOT reconnects automatically and monitors the devices properly. To avoid such data link failure, start up the GOT 10 seconds earlier than the master station. However, if the master station does not complete startup when GOT starts monitoring (10 seconds after the GOT startup), the communication timeout occurs in the GOT side. For details, refer to the following manual. For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual Connection to Q170MCPU Data link failure in all stations at GOT startup 11 12 When the output is required to be held at the data link failure Set the GOT to hold the input from the data link faulty stations in the communication setting. Set "Input for Error Station" to "Hold". 12.3.2 Communication detail settings CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GOT startup GOT startup indicates the startups after the following operations: • Turning ON the GOT • Resetting the GOT main unit • Operating the utility • Downloading the project including the communication settings • Downloading the OS 14 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device POINT 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Screen Design INVERTER CONNECTION At GOT startup, the communication is broken temporarily between PORT1 and PORT2 in the CCLink IE Field module which is installed on the GOT. Thus, as the GOT or a station between the GOT and the master station is reconnected, the data link failure may occur on all stations. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION or cable connection/disconnection The Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) cannot be monitored. Set the CPU No. to "0" or "1". The device of the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) connection CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION GOT startup in CC-Link IE Field Network MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 12.5 Precautions 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.5 Precautions 12 - 13 12 - 14 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.5 Precautions MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 13 9 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 2 13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6 13.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12 13 13.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 39 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 13 - 1 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2 CC-Link(ID) 13.2 Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*2 Q24DHCCPU-V (Continued to next page) *1 *2 13 - 2 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List Communicati on type Refer to - - L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-B L02CPU-P CC-Link(ID) 13.2.2 10 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) QS001CPU Clock Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MELSEC-QS Model name 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Series 12 A3UCPU A4UCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A3ACPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 A2ACPUR21-S1 14 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 15 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 16 A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU (Continued to next page) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13 - 3 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) INVERTER CONNECTION A2USHCPU-S1 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU CC-Link(ID) Q172DCPU 13.2 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*3 MR-MQ100 - - A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1 A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. *2 • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *3 13 - 4 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station Clock Communication type Refer to WS0-CPU0 - WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link(ID) 13.2 QJ72BR15 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) CC-Link IE Field Network head module QJ72LP25G 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MELSEC-WS Model name FX0 FX0S - FX0N FX1 FX2 12 - FX2C 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Series FX1N - - FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - FX3G FX3GC 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) - FX3U FX3UC 13.1.2 CC-Link module 14 MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 MELSEC-QnA AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-A Motion controller CPU (A Series) AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) CC-Link module 15 INVERTER CONNECTION CPU series Transient communication can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later. 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION FX1S MELSEC-FX 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13 - 5 13.2 System Configuration 13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible Communication driver Communication driver CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID) (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link module PLC (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable CC-Link module *1 Communication type QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N CC-Link (Ver.1) C Controller module QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N CC-Link(Ver.1) MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 CC-Link(Ver.1) MELSEC-Q Cable model CC-Link dedicated cable GOT Max. distance *5 *3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z *3 GT15-J61BT13 *5 *2 CC-Link dedicated cable *3 GT15-J61BT13 *5 *2 MELSEC-L (L26CPU-BT) MELSEC-QnA MELSEC-A - CC-Link(Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable *3 GT15-J61BT13 A1SJ61QBT11*4 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11*4 CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link (Ver.1) *2 *5 *3 *2 CC-Link dedicated cable GT15-75J61BT13-Z GT15-J61BT13 *5 *3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manuals. *2 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. *3 *4 *5 CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual Transient transmission can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later. Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 13 - 6 26 GOTs *5 *2 AJ61QBT11 Model GT15-J61BT13 *2 CC-Link dedicated cable Option device Number of connectable equipment 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible Communication driver 10 CC-Link Ver2(ID) (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used) PLC *1 Communication type Cable model Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 MELSEC-L (L26CPU-BT) - CC-Link (Ver.2) CC-Link dedicated cable *3 GT15-J61BT13 *2 *4 *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. *2 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. *4 12 CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual Specify Ver.2 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 13 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *3 26 GOTs 11 15 INVERTER CONNECTION MELSEC-Q C Controller module CC-Link module GOT 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Model name Connection cable MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connection cable CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION GOT CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link module PLC CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2.2 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13 - 7 13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed Communication driver Communication driver CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID) (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link module QCPU (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable PLC Model name Connection cable CC-Link module *1 Communication type CC-Link (Ver.2) Cable model CC-Link dedicated cable GOT Max. distance *3 Option device GT15-J61BT13 *4 *2 MELSEC-Q CC-Link dedicated cable QJ61BT11N CC-Link (Ver.1) *3 GT15-J61BT13 *5 *2 CC-Link dedicated cable *3 Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-75J61BT13-Z 26 GOTs *2 CC-Link (Ver.2) C Controller module CC-Link dedicated cable *3 GT15-J61BT13 *4 *2 QJ61BT11N CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable *3 GT15-J61BT13 *2 *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. *2 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. *3 CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. *4 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Specify Ver.2 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. *5 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 13 - 8 *5 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 9 POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 2. 13.3.2 Communication detail settings 3. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 4. (1) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 13.3.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 13.3 GOT Side Settings CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 4. Item The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Range Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. (Default: 0) 0 to E Mode Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: Ver.1) Ver.1/Ver.2/ Additional/Offline Expanded Cyclic Set the cyclic point expansion. (Default: Single) Single/Double/ Quadruple/Octuple Occupied Station Set the number of stations occupied by the GOT. (Default: 1 Station) 1 Station/4 Stations Input for Error Station Set Clear/Hold at an error occurrence. (Default: Clear) Clear/Hold Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 (ms) Station No. Transmission Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used CC-Link Ver2 (ID) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used CC-Link (ID) Description Rate *1 13.3.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 3. [Controller Setting] from the 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 2. Select [Common] menu. 16 13 - 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 1. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Click! *1 Transmission speed settings The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CCLink communication. Set value (2) CC-Link(ID) Description 0 Online: 156kbps 1 Online: 625kbps 2 Online: 2.5Mbps 3 Online: 5Mbps 4 Online: 10Mbps A Hardware test: 156kbps B Hardware test: 625kbps C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps D Hardware test: 5Mbps E Hardware test: 10Mbps For details of the hardware test, refer to the following manual. Item Description Range Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link module to be used POINT (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 13 - 10 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings Description POINT For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps (4) Condition setting switches Condition setting switches GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual GT15-75J61BT13-Z Front side Left side Set value Setting switch Description Set value SW1 Specify input data status of the data link error station. (Default: OFF) OFF: Cleared ON: Held SW2 Specify the number of stations occupied. (Default: OFF) OFF: 1 station ON: 4 stations L RUN POINT SD 01 EF 2 11 78 ON 1 2 1 SW ON OFF 1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 1 3 DA 5 DG 2 4 DB 13.4 PLC Side Setting 7 NC NC 6 8 SLD (FG1) NC (1) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch Description Select the online mode. (Default: 0) Set value (2) When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit on the GOT, reset the GOT. 0 (fixed) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 901 78 78 901 BAUDRATE 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 901 BCD (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. STATION NO. 1 23 456 (4) L ERR. 10 23 456 (3) MODE 23 456 (2) 89 67 A (1) RD 10 12 RUN 345 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Transmission baudrate setting switch Specify the transmission speed. (Default: 0) Switch setting of the communication unit When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit, the switch setting is not needed. 9 (3) Transmission baudrate setting switch MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 13.3.3 14 Description Set value 15 1 to 64 INVERTER CONNECTION Specify the station No. of the CCLink communication unit. (Default: 01) 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Station number setting switch CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (2) Station number setting switch 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings 13 - 11 13.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system. Station data HINT Description Station type Intelligent device station, Ver.1 intelligent device station or Ver.2 intelligent device station Number of stations occupied Station 1 or Station 4 The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in 13.4.1 to 13.4.7. Model name CC-Link module (Q Series) Refer to Connecting with Ver.1 compatible QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N Connecting with Ver.2 compatible QJ61BT11N 13.4.2 Connecting with Ver.1/ Ver.2 compatibles mixed QJ61BT11N 13.4.3 13.4.1 Number of stations occupied The number of stations occupied is setting for determining number of link device points (RX/RY/ RWw/RWr) used by the GOT. To use multiple numbers of link device points in the case of cyclic transmission between the GOT and CCLink module, set the number of stations occupied as the exclusive station 4. The number of link device points at the exclusive station 1 and 4 is shown below. CC-Link Ver.2 Expanded cyclic setting Single CC-Link module (QnA Series) AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11 13.4.6 CC-Link module (A Series) AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11 13.4.7 Link device Double Quadruple Octuple Exclu sive statio n1 Exclu sive statio n4 Exclu sive statio n1 Exclu sive statio n4 Exclu sive statio n1 Exclu sive statio n4 Exclu sive statio n1 Exclu sive statio n4 Remote input (RX) 32 points 128 points 32 points 224 points 64 points 448 points 128 points 896 points Remote output (RY) 32 points 128 points 32 points 224 points 64 points 448 points 128 points 896 points Remote register (RWw) 4 points 16 points 8 points 32 points 16 points 64 points 32 points 128 points Remote register (RWr) 4 points 16 points 8 points 32 points 16 points 64 points 32 points 128 points CC-Link Ver.1 Link device 13 - 12 Number of stations occupied Exclusive station Exclusive station 4 Remote input (RX) 32 points 128 points Remote output (RY) 32 points 128 points Remote register (RWw) 4 points 16 points Remote register (RWr) 4 points 16 points 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 0 11 (2) 0 8 C MODE CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 4 System configuration NC 1 NC ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit Station type DA 2 DB 4 3 SLD (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 5 (FG) *1 (Use the default value for the settings other than the following.) Master station Station No.0 Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 1 156kbps 12 6 DG 7 : Intelligent device station : Station No.1 Station No. Number of : Exclusive station 1 stations occupied Transmission speed : 156kbps : : : : : 5 (1) X1 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed 0 X10 5 STATION NO. CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch ■ Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 10 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" Description Set value Station number setting (master station) 0 (fixed) : Necessary Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Transmission rate/mode setting switch Description Transmission rate/ mode setting (Online: MODE 156kbps) Setting necessity at GOT connection 13 14 15 0 *1 : Necessary *1 Set value CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION POINT L RUN S MST RD L ERR. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) RUN MST SD ERR. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CCLink module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the following system configuration. 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. POINT When the switch setting is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 13 INVERTER CONNECTION Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 13.4.1 Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (b) Station information setting (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter Item*1 Set value Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1 Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 *2 Item Set value No. of boards in module Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 Start I/O No. 0000H Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count X400 Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 Remote register (RWw) D200 Special relay (SB) SB0 Special register (SW) SW0 When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. Automatic reconnection station count (Use default value) PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial settings Refer to (b). (Use default value) Interrupt setting : Necessary 13 - 14 : As necessary : Not necessary POINT Retry count Stand by master station No. : As necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the GOT. 1 Remote input (RX) Setting necessity at GOT connection : Not necessary 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 9 (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Parameter setting (when connecting to C (a) Parameter settings Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CCLink utility. (1) Connection settings MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1 Target module 1 target Password*2 password Start I/O No. 0000H - Channel No. (Use default value) Detailed settings *2 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded cyclic setting Occupied number Refresh (Use default value) All connect count 14 1 Station Type Sta. No.1 Intelligent device station Occupied number*2 Sta. No.1 Exclusive station 1 Reserve/invalid station select Sta. No.1 No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) : Necessary *2 13 Single Clear Other settings *1 12 Exclusive station 1 Error event: input data status CPU stop: data link status Station information settings *1 Operation settings User name CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Set value 192.168.3.3 (Default) Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) *2 Item*1 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Write authority Setting necessity at GOT connection 15 (Use default value) : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the GOT. POINT 16 When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting INVERTER CONNECTION Target module*1 Set value 13 - 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Item CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used Item 13.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink module (Q Series) in the following case of system configuration. POINT CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N System configuration ■ [Communication settings] of GT Designer3 Set value (Use default value) Retry (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 3times Station type Timeout Time 3sec POINT *1 (Use the default value for the settings other than the following.) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the CC-Link communication unit (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) Item Set value Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1 Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps Condition setting switches Station No. Expanded cyclic setting Number of stations occupied Transmission speed SW1 (Input data status of the data link error station) OFF: Cleared SW2 (Number of occupied stations) OFF: 1 station Type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed : : : : : : Exclusive station 1 : 156kbps Master station Station No.0 Remote net (Ver.2 mode) 1 156kbps ■ Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" POINT When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "70". POINT Setting of the CC-Link communication unit For the setting method of the CC-Link communication unit, refer to the following. 13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) 13 - 16 : Intelligent device station : Station No.1 : Single 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. 9 Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST RD L ERR. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 0 0 5 (1) X1 11 (2) 0 8 C MODE CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 4 NC 1 NC DA 2 DB 4 3 SLD 5 (FG) DG 12 6 7 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module Start I/O 1 No.*1 Station number setting (master station) 0 (fixed) (Use default value) Type Master station Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Transmission rate/mode setting switch Description Transmission rate/mode setting (Online: Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection *1 1 X400 Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 Remote register (RWw) D200 Special relay (SB) SB0 Special register (SW) SW0 14 Retry count Automatic reconnection station count 0 Stand by master station No. 15 (Use default value) PLC down select 156kbps)*1 : Necessary 13 0000H Operation setting CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Description : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. Scan mode setting Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. INVERTER CONNECTION Station number setting switch Set value CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (1) Station number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION X10 5 STATION NO. Refer to (b) (Use default value) Interrupt setting : Necessary *1 : As necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 17 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION RUN MST SD ERR. (b) Station information setting Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CCLink utility. (1) Connection settings Item*1 Set value Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1 Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 *2 Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary Item Target module*1 : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. Write authority *2 13 - 18 Mark the checkbox target Password*2 password POINT *1 *2 Setting necessity at GOT connection 192.168.3.3 (Default) User name Detailed settings When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. Set value - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting [Communication settings] of GT Designer3 Item Station No. Transmission Rate Mode Number of stations occupied Item Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Channel No. (Use default value) Type Master station Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) 0ms (Use default value) 12 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 Clear Refresh Other settings (Use default value) 14 Sta. No.1 Ver.2 intelligent device station Sta. No.1 Single Occupied number*2 Sta. No.1 Exclusive station 1 Remote station points Sta. No.1 32 points Reserve/invalid station select Sta. No.1 No setting Station Type Expanded cyclic setting*2 Intelligent buffer select (word) : Necessary CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 1 15 INVERTER CONNECTION All connect count Station information settings 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time Exclusive station 1 CPU stop: data link status *2 Timeout Time [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Single Error event: input data status *1 Clear 3times (Use default value) 11 (Use default value) : As necessary : Not necessary 16 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Operation settings 0000H Occupied number Retry 1 Station POINT Start I/O No. Expanded cyclic setting Input for Error Station Single CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value 0: Online 156kbps Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded Cyclic *1 Set value 1: Station No.1 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION POINT (a) Parameter settings MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] 13 - 19 13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11N This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. QJ61BT11N RUN MST SD ERR. POINT L RUN S MST RD L ERR. 0 X10 CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. 5 STATION NO. 0 5 (1) X1 4 System configuration NC 1 NC ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit DA 2 DB 4 3 SLD (Use default value for settings other than the following.) 5 (FG) DG 6 7 Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No. 1 Number of stations : Exclusive station 1 occupied Transmission speed : 156kbps (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No. 2 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of stations : Exclusive station 1 occupied *1 Transmission speed : 156kbps (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed : : : : : (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Master station Station No. 0 Remote net (Ver.2 mode) 2 156kbps ■ Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 (2) 0 MODE 8 C CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" POINT Description Set value Station number setting (master station) 0 (fixed) : Necessary Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Transmission rate/mode setting switch Description Transmission rate/ mode setting (Online: When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "70". Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 0 156kbps)*1 : Necessary *1 : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 13 - 20 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 9 (b) Station information setting MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter • Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT) Ver.1 intelligent device station (fixed) 11 Exclusive station 1 Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary • Station information setting of station No.2 (GOT) Item Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value No. of boards in module *1 Set value Item Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed) Station type 1 Start I/O No.*1 Expanded cyclic setting*2 0000H Operation setting *2 Exclusive station 1 (Use default value) Exclusive station count Master station (fixed) Remote net (Ver.2 mode) No setting Mode Reserve/invalid station select Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) 2 Remote input (RX) X400 Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 Remote register (RWw) D200 Special relay (SB) SB0 Special register (SW) SW0 : Necessary *1 *2 : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. POINT Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No. : As necessary When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. (Use default value) PLC down select Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Refer to (b) (Use default value) : As necessary : Not necessary SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION : Necessary 15 16 Interrupt setting *1 14 INVERTER CONNECTION Scan mode setting 12 13 Single Type All connect count Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Exclusive station count *2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Station type CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Set value CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item*1 Setting necessity at GOT connection MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 21 Parameter setting (when connecting to C (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] (a) Parameter settings Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CCLink utility. (1) Connection settings Target module*1 Write authority *2 *2 Password Detailed settings *2 Setting necessity at GOT connection *1 Set value Item 192.168.3.3 (Default) Mark the checkbox target User name *1 Set value Number of modules 1 Target module 1 password Start I/O No. 0000H - Channel No. (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. Operation settings Item Type Master station Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded cyclic setting Occupied number Exclusive station 1 Error event: input data status Clear CPU stop: data link status Other settings Station information settings Expanded cyclic setting*2 Occupied number*2 Remote station points 13 - 22 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting Refresh (Use default value) All connect count Station Type Single 2 Sta. No.1 Ver.1 intelligent device station Sta. No.2 Ver.2 intelligent device station Sta. No.1 Single Sta. No.2 Single Sta. No.1 Exclusive station 1 Sta. No.2 Exclusive station 1 Sta. No.1 32 points Sta. No.2 32 points Setting necessity at GOT connection Sta. No.2 No setting 2: Station No.2 Transmission Rate Mode 0: Online 156kbps Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded Cyclic (Use default value) Single Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. *1 *2 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) Setting of the CC-Link communication unit (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) POINT Item When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 10 Set value Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1 Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps Condition setting switches SW1 (Input data status of the data link error station) OFF: Cleared SW2 (Number of occupied stations) OFF: 1 station Item Station No. Set value 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate Mode 0: Online 156kbps Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Number of stations occupied Input for Error Station POINT Setting of the CC-Link communication unit For the setting method of the CC-Link communication unit, refer to the following. 13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) 1 Station 0: Clear 14 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) (b) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used 15 3times 3sec INVERTER CONNECTION Timeout Time Set value (Use default value) 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Item Retry 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Retry Single (Use default value) 11 12 (1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT) (a) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) No setting MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value (Use default value) 9 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Station information settings Item Station No. Sta. No.1 Intelligent buffer select (word) (2) Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Set value Item Reserve/invalid station select Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) *1 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 23 13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the following case of the system configuration. POINT (1) CC-Link module (L Series) For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (2) CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual System configuration Item (Example when using CC-Link module (L Series)) Set value ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 No. of boards in module (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station type Station No. Expanded cyclic setting Number of stations occupied Transmission speed *1 (Use the default value for the settings other than the following.) Type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed : : : : : Master station Station No.0 Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 1 156kbps ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer : Intelligent device station : Station No.1 : Single : Exclusive station Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 Start I/O No.*1 0000H Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) : 156kbps All connect count 1 Remote input (RX) X400 Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 Remote register (RWw) D200 Special relay (SB) SB0 Special register (SW) SW0 Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No. (Use default value) PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Refer to (2) (Use default value) Interrupt setting : Necessary *1 13 - 24 : As necessary : Not necessary Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the system configuration. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the following case of the system configuration. Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Exclusive station count*2 No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (2) CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. Exclusive station 1 Reserve/invalid station select : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. *2 (1) CC-Link module (L Series) For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Station No. Set value 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No.1 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of : Exclusive station stations occupied Transmission speed : 156kbps *1 (Use the default value for the settings other than the following.) : : : : : Master station Station No.0 Remote net (Ver.3 mode) 1 156kbps 13 14 ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Retry CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Mode 0: Online 156kbps (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed 11 12 System configuration (Example when using CC-Link module (L Series)) POINT MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value POINT CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Setting necessity at GOT connection 10 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item *1 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4.5 (2) Station information setting POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 16 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 13 - 25 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Station information setting (1) Network parameter Item*1 Set value Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Expanded cyclic setting*2 *2 Single Exclusive station count Exclusive station 1 Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary *1 Item Set value No. of boards in module *1 Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 0000H Start I/O No. Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. *2 POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU either turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 1 Remote input (RX) X400 Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Remote register (RWw) D200 Station No. Special relay (SB) SB0 Transmission Rate Special register (SW) SW0 Mode Number of stations occupied Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No. Input for Error Station (Use default value) PLC down select Scan mode setting 0: Online 156kbps Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded Cyclic Retry count Set value 1: Station No.1 Retry Single 1 Station 0: Clear 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Refer to (2) (Use default value) Interrupt setting *1 13 - 26 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the system configuration. POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting Set for each setting switch. A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 (2) 456 B RATE 2 3 4 CLR HLD 3 45 (4) 11 8 1 625K 2 2. 5M 4 10M NC ON S MST CLEAR HOLD 1/2 1/4 3/4 2/3 ON SW 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 (4) NC 2 NC 4 NC 6 NC 8 3 DB 5 DG 1 NC 2 NC 4 NC 6 9 3 DB (FG) 10 5 DG 12 7 SLD NC DA CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 2/3 7 SLD A1SJ61QBT11 8 NC 9 (FG) 10 : Master station : Station No.0 : Remote net mode :1 : 156kbps 13 (1) Station number setting switch The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" Station number setting switch 456 78 Station number setting (master station) 14 0 (fixed) 456 23 1 Set value 901 x Description Setting necessity at GOT connection 78 901 x 10 23 ■ Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA Series) ■ Parameter setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Mode setting switch 23 789 CD AB E 456 MODE Description Mode setting (Online: Remote net mode) F0 1 0 (fixed) : As necessary 15 : Not necessary 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION : Necessary Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection INVERTER CONNECTION Mode setting switch CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) : Intelligent device station : Station No.1 Station No. Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 : 156kbps Transmission speed 3/4 1/4 7 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 4 56 (3) 23 Station type 1/2 6 3 5M OFF M/L (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 5 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 4 56 8 9A 67 456 4 56 23 23 10M 23 5M 4 901 2. 5M 3 (3) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 78 (2) SW OFF ON 1 M / L S. M 0 156K 78 9 01 156K 625K BCD 01 EF 2 0 : ONLINE (A. R. ) 1 : ONLINE (RIM ) 2 : OFFLINE 0 1 9 01 MODE 901 9 01 x1 (1) DA ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit *1 1 78 B RATE Station type Station No. Mode setting All connect count Transmission speed 78 x 78 89 A 67 ON (1) STATION NO. x10 MODE 78 BCD 10 10 SD RD STATION NO. SD RD x Control & Communication Link System Master/ Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual System configuration T E S T 345 L RUN L ERR. TEST S0 S1 S2 E R R O R SW M/S PRM TIME LINE 901 CC-Link module (QnA Series) For details of the CC-Link module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. R A T E 456 SW M/S PRM TIME LINE E R R O R RUN ERR. MST S MST LOCAL CPU R / W L RUN L ERR. B 156K 625K 2. 5M 5M 10M MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) AJ61QBT11 RUN ERR. MST S MST LOCAL CPU R / W POINT MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Series) 23 This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink module (QnA Series) in the following case of system configuration. 9 Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA 23 Connecting to CC-Link module (QnA Series) 1 EF0 2 13.4.6 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 27 Parameter setting (3) Transmission speed setting switch Transmission speed setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 901 456 78 23 Transmission speed B RATE 1 625K Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the CC-Link module use the function version B or later. (1) Setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer 0 setting (156kbps)*1 0 156K There are two methods for the parameter setting: perform the setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer and the sequence program. (a) Network parameter 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M : Necessary *1 : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. (4) Condition setting switches Condition setting switches Setting switch SW1 SW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW OFF ON SW3 Description Set value Station type (Master station/Local station) OFF (fixed) Not used OFF (fixed) Setting necessity at GOT connection Item Set value 1 M / L S. M 2 3 4 CLR HLD 5 1/2 3/4 6 1/4 2/3 SW4 7 8 Input data status of the data link error station (clear) SW5 Number of stations SW6 occupied*2 SW7 SW8 Not used : Necessary *2 OFF No. of boards in module 1 Start I/O No. Master station (fixed) All connect count OFF (fixed) : As necessary 0000H Type OFF (fixed) : Not necessary Will be valid when the CC-Link module is the local station. In the case of the master station, turn off it. POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. Setting necessity at GOT connection 1 Remote input (RX) X400 Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 Remote register (RWw) D200 Special relay (SB) B0 Special register (SW) W0 Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Wait master station No. (Use default value) PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay information setting Station information setting : Necessary 13 - 28 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting Refer to (2) : As necessary : Not necessary The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module (b) Device used by user Flag for data link startup Exclusive station 1 Number of connected modules D1 Number of retry D2 Automatic reconnection station count D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 11 Reserve/invalid station select No setting D4 Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) D5 Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) D6 Station data (first module) : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same number of occupied stations as that of the GOT. D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure (c) Buffer memory settings used in the present example POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. Buffer memory address Item Set value 13 Decimal (Hex) 1(11 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module) 2(22 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times) 3(33 (3H) Automatic reconnection station count 1 (1 station) 6(66 (6H) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 0 (stop) 16(1016 (10H) Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification) 20(1420 (14H) Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification) 32(2032 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H b15 *1 Details for the station data are shown below. For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station occupied as those of the GOT. For 3), the setting is fixed. to b12 b11 3) 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION : Necessary *1 to b8 b7 2) to b0 14 15 1) 1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT) 01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64 2) Number of stations occupied (Set the number of station occupied as that of the GOT) 1H: Exclusive station 1 2H: Exclusive station 2 3H: Exclusive station 3 4H: Exclusive station 4 3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station) 0H: Remote I/O station 1H: Remote device station 2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Exclusive station count*1 D0 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION M102, M103 Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Application Flag for parameter setting CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Set value Device M100, M101 13 - 29 INVERTER CONNECTION Item Setting necessity at GOT connection 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Control & Communication Link System Master/ Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (2) Setting from sequence program 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION (b) Station information setting (d) Example of sequence program Parameter setting Module error Module ready Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification) Error invalid station specification (No specification) Station data (Intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1) Refresh insruction Refresh insruction Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN Data link with buffer memory parameter Module error Module ready Data link start up request (buffer memory address) Data link startup normal completion (buffer memory) Error code reading (SW0068) Data link startup abnormal completion (buffer memory) POINT When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 13 - 30 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used Item 10 POINT CC-Link module (A Series) For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to the following manual. Control & Communication Link System Master/ Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual 3times (Use default value) System configuration ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit Set value (Use default value) Retry (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 3times Timeout Time 3sec : Intelligent device station : Station No.1 Station No. Number of station occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission : 156kbps speed Station type POINT *1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Station type Station No. Mode setting All connect count Transmission speed Module mode : Master station : Station No.0 : Remote net mode :1 : 156kbps : Intelligent mode The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" Setting of the CC-Link communication unit (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) 14 0: Online (fixed) Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1 Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps SW1 (Input data status of the data link error station) OFF: Cleared SW2 (Number of occupied stations) OFF: 1 station CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Set value Mode setting switch Condition setting switches 12 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Item 11 13 ■ Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) ■ Sequence program *1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Station No. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set value This section describes the settings of the GOT and CCLink module (A Series) in the following case of system configuration. 9 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Item Connecting to CC-Link module (A Series) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used 13.4.7 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 POINT Setting of the CC-Link communication unit For the setting method of the CC-Link communication unit, refer to the following. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 31 Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) (3) Transmission speed setting switch Set for each setting switch. T E S T SD RD STATION NO. SD RD MODE 4 5 0 5 5 8 4 78 3 5M 4 10M B RATE 1 625K 2 2. 5M SW OFF ON 1 M / L S. M 3 5M 2 3 4 CLR HLD 5 1/2 3/4 6 1/4 2/3 (4) 2 2. 5M 5 4 10M CLEAR HOLD 1/2 1/4 3/4 2/3 ISFM SFM *1 8 ISM SFM (4) Condition setting switches 3 5M ON S MST ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. 7 NC 1 DA OFF M/L 4 10M 1 625K (3) 23 2. 5M 0 625K 2 5 23 23 0 156K 1 (2) NC 2 3 DB (4) NC Condition setting switches 4 5 DG NC 6 NC 8 Setting switch Description Set value SW1 Station type (Master station/Local station) OFF (fixed) Not used OFF (fixed) 7 SLD NC 1 DA 2 NC 9 3 DB (FG) 4 NC 10 5 DG 6 NC 7 SLD SW2 9 (FG) 10 SW3 Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection ON Station number setting switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (1) Station number setting switch SW OFF ON 1 M / L S. M 2 SW4 3 4 CLR HLD 5 1/2 3/4 6 1/4 2/3 7 8 456 x 901 78 23 456 x 1 Station number setting (master station) Number of stations SW6 *2 23 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Mode setting switch 23 789 CD AB E 456 MODE Description Mode setting (Online: Remote net mode) F0 1 : Necessary 13 - 32 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 0 (fixed) : As necessary OFF (fixed) Not used OFF (fixed) SW8 Module mode (Intelligent mode) OFF (fixed) : Necessary *2 (2) Mode setting switch occupied OFF SW7 0 (fixed) 901 78 Input data status of the data link error station (clear) SW5 ISM SFM STATION NO. 10 Setting necessity at GOT connection A1SJ61BT11 8 NC 0 setting (156kbps)*1 0 156K 0 156K B RATE 0 (3) 0 0 C MODE 0 : ONLINE (A. R. ) 1 : ONLINE (RIM ) 2 : OFFLINE 5 0 (1) 78 x1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x ON (1) 78 (2) C 0 10 Transmission speed B RATE 8 x STATION NO. x10 78 456 TEST S0 S1 S2 E R R O R SW M/S PRM TIME LINE Setting necessity at GOT connection 23 L RUN L ERR. R A T E Set value 901 SW M/S PRM TIME LINE E R R O R RUN ERR. MST S MST LOCAL CPU R / W L RUN L ERR. B 156K 625K 2. 5M 5M 10M Description switch A1SJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 RUN ERR. MST S MST LOCAL CPU R / W Transmission speed setting A1SJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 : As necessary : Not necessary Will be valid when the CC-Link module is a local station. In the case of the master station, turn off it. POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. : Not necessary 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Sequence program The parameter setting and the sequence program of the data link startup request is required. (1) Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated instructions) The program sets the network parameter and automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Control & Communication Link System Master/ Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual 11 Device Application M0 RLPA instruction normal completion flag M1 RLPA instruction error completion flag M100 Network parameter setting flag M101 Automatic refresh parameter setting flag Number of connected modules D2 Station data D3 Send buffer size D4 Receive buffer size D400 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION D1 D5 12 Synchronous mode valid/invalid Automatic update buffer size 13 Error code in the case of error completion of RLPA instruction Automatic refresh setting (RX) D104 to D107 Automatic refresh setting (RY) D108 to D111 Automatic refresh setting (RW) D112 to D115 Automatic refresh setting (SB) D116 to D119 Automatic refresh setting (SW) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) D100 to D103 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) D0 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (b) Device used by user INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 33 (c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction) * Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction Module error Module ready Synchronous mode (Invalid) Number of connected modules (1 module) Station data (intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1) Send buffer size (64 words) Receive buffer size (64 words) Automatic update buffer size (128 words) Dedicated instruction (RLPA) CC-Link module head I/O No. (0000H) Parameter storage head device (D0) Turning on during 1 scan in the case of instruction completion ON (M0) Error code reading (SW0068) RLPA error completion * Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRPA instruction Module error Module ready RLPA error completion (Continued to next page) 13 - 34 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting RY head number (RY0) RY refresh destination (Y) RY refresh destination device head No. (400) No. of refresh points (32) RW head No. (RW0) RW refresh destination (D) RW refresh destination device head No. (200) No. of refresh points (260) SB head No. (SB0) SB refresh destination (B) SB refresh destination device head number (0) No. of refresh points (512) SW head number (SW0) SW refresh destination (W) SW refresh destination device head No. (0) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) No. of refresh points (32) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION RX refresh destination device head No. (400) 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION RX refresh destination (X) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Head No. of RX (RX0) MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 14 Dedicated instruction (RRPA) CC-Link module head I/O No. (0000H) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Parameter storage head device (D100) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) No. of refresh points (512) When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 35 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION POINT (2) Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction) This program writes parameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communication Link System Master/ Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual (b) Devices used by user Device Application M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting M102, M103 Flag for data link startup D0 Number of connected modules D1 Number of retry D2 Automatic reconnection station count D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure D4 Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) D5 Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) D6 Station data (first module) D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure (c) Buffer memory settings used in the present example Buffer memory address Item Set value Decimal (Hex) 1 (1H) 2 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3H) Automatic reconnection station count 6 (6H) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 1 (1 module) 3 (3times) 1 (1 station) 0 (stop) 16 (10H) Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification) 20 (14H) Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification) 32 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 *1 b15 Number of connected modules to Details for the station data are shown below. For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station occupied settings as those of the GOT. For 3), the setting is fixed. b12 3) b11 to 2) 1) 2) 3) 13 - 36 2101H b8 b7 to b0 1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT.) 01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64 Number of stations occupied (Set the same setting of the number of station occupied as that of the GOT.) 1H: Exclusive station 1 2H: Exclusive station 2 3H: Exclusive station 3 4H: Exclusive station 4 Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station.) 0H: Remote I/O station 1H: Remote device station 2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (d) Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction) Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification) Error invalid station specification (No specification) Station data (Intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No. 1) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Module ready 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Module error 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION * Parameter setting * Refresh instruction Refresh instruction Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN * Data link with buffer memory parameters Module ready Data link startup request (buffer memory address) Data link startup normal completion (buffer memory) Error code reading (SW0068) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Data link startup abnormal completion (buffer memory) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 16 POINT When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 37 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Module error CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used Item Set value (Use default value) Retry 3times Timeout Time 3sec POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 13.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the CC-Link communication unit (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) Item Mode setting switch Set value 0: Online (fixed) Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1 Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps Conditio n setting switches SW1 (Input data status of the data link error station) OFF: Cleared SW2 (Number of occupied stations) OFF: 1 station POINT Setting of the CC-Link communication unit For the setting method of the CC-Link communication unit, refer to the following. 13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) 13 - 38 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Access range that can be monitored The monitoring range of remote I/O (RX and RY) and that of the remote registers (RWr and RWw) vary according to the mode in the master station of the CCLink system. Applicable of monitoring Mode of master station Data for each station compatible with CC-Link ver.1 Data for each station compatible with CC-Link ver.2 Remote net mode - Remote net ver.1 mode - Remote net ver.2 mode *1 Remote net additional mode *1 : Applicable *1 : N/A(All "0") -: N/A of system configuration Monitoring is applicable only when MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used. (3) When GOT malfunctions, the cyclic output status remains the same as before becoming faulty. For transient transmission (1) CC-Link module of target station Mount the CC-Link module of function version B or later and software version J or later to the PLC CPU when performing the following CC-Link modules and transient transmission. Only cyclic transmission can be communicated with the CC-Link module of function version A or before and software version I or before. • AJ61BT11 • A1SJ61BT11 • AJ61QBT11 • A1SJ61QBT11 alarm In the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70, CRnQ-700 The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2 only For connecting to the CC-Link (ID) network system, set the CC-Link (ID) network system to the CC-Link Ver.2 mode. (2) Access range that can be monitored 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.5 Precautions 11 12 13 14 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION The GOT can access to the PLC CPU mounting the master and local station of the CC-Link System. It cannot access another network via the CC-Link module. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) When a network error occurs in the system 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual For CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit User’s Manual (intelligent device station) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) GOT startup in the CC-Link connection (1) I/O signal for master station INVERTER CONNECTION Using cyclic transmission MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 13.5 Precautions 13 - 39 Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device 13 - 40 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.5 Precautions CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 6 14.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8 14.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9 14.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 11 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 14.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 17 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 14.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 2 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 14. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 14 9 14 - 1 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 Q02HCPU*1 CC-Link (G4) *2 *2 *2 CC-Link (G4) *2 *3 *3 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q02UCPU 14.2.1 Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU CC-Link (G4) Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU *2 *2 *2 Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 14 - 2 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10. For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration. 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List C Controller module Q12DCCPU-V*2 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Q24DHCCPU-V Clock Refer to *1 CC-Link(G4) *1 *1 - 14.2.1 - L02CPU L26CPU-BT *1 CC-Link(G4) L02CPU-P *1 *1 14.2.2 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02HCPU-A - - - - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASHCPU - CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) 11 12 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 L26CPU MELSEC-L MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Series 9 Communication type Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU 13 A4UCPU CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 14 A3ACPU A3ACPUR21 - - A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU 15 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 INVERTER CONNECTION A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU 16 A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10. Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List 14 - 3 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSEC-A (AnCPU) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) A3ACPUP21 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to - - - - - - A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU*1*2 Q172CPUN*1 Q173CPUN*1 Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU CC-Link (G4) Q172DCPU *4 *4 *4 14.2.1 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU*3 MR-MQ100 - - (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 14 - 4 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10. 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List Clock Communication type Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 10 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Motion controller CPU (A Series) - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN 11 A173UHCPU WS0-CPU0 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS - - - - LJ72GF15-T2 - - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link (G4) *1 14.2.1 CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link (G4) *1 14.2.1 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module Robot controller WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 12 - FX0N FX1 FX2 - FX2C FX1S FX1N - - FX2N FX1NC FX2NC - FX3G FX3GC - FX3U 15 FX3UC CC-Link module/peripheral module Model name CPU series CC-Link module MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 16 Peripheral module SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 14.1.2 Only master station can be monitored in GT11. INVERTER CONNECTION *1 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) MELSEC-FX 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) FX0 FX0S 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Series AJ65BT-G4-S3 AJ65BT-R2N 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List 14 - 5 14.2 System Configuration 14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) QCPU Peripheral connection module CC-Link module Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) PLC Model name Connection cable 1) CC-Link module Max. dista nce Cable model *1 Peripheral connection module Model name Commu nication type Connection cable 2) Cable model Connection diagram number GT09-C30R2-9P or AJ65BT -R2N RS232 connection RS-232 diagram 2) C Controlle r module CC-Link dedicated cable QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N GOT Max. dista nce Option device 15m - (Built into GOT) 15m - (Built into GOT) Model GT16-C02R4-9S *3 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) *2 AJ65BT -G4-S3 Number of connectable equipment diagram 1) RS232 connection MELSEC -Q GOT GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 GT15-RS4-9S 30m 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module - (Built into GOT) RS-422 GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m - (Built into GOT) *4 *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. *2 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. *3 CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. *4 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. *5 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 RS422 connection diagram 1) 14 - 6 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration . 9 Connection cable 2) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) CC-Link module Cable model *1 Max. dista nce Model name Commu nication type Connection cable 2) Cable model Connection diagram number GT09-C30R2-9P or AJ65BT -R2N RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 2) LJ61BT11 CC-Link dedicated cable Max. dista nce Option device 15m - (Built into GOT) 15m - (Built into GOT) Model GT16-C02R4-9S *3 *2 AJ65BT -G4-S3 RS-422 Number of connectable equipment 11 diagram 1) RS232 connection L02CPU L26CPU -BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT GOT GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 GT15-RS4-9S 30m - (Built into GOT) 30m - (Built into GOT) 15m - (Built into GOT) 15m - (Built into GOT) 13 *4 AJ65BT -R2N RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1) RS232 connection diagram 2) L26CPU -BT L26CPU-PBT CC-Link dedicated cable - CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) GT09-C30R2-9P or GT16-C02R4-9S *3 *2 AJ65BT -G4-S3 RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 GT15-RS4-9S 30m - (Built into GOT) 30m 12 14 15 - (Built into GOT) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*4 *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. *2 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. *3 CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. *4 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. *5 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 RS422 connection diagram 1) . 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration 14 - 7 INVERTER CONNECTION Model name Peripheral connection module CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connection cable 1) PLC 10 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Connection cable 2) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) GOT CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Peripheral connection module CC-Link module LCPU MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting to LCPU 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 14.2.2 14.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 14.3.1 RS-422 cable Connection diagram RS-232 cable RS422 connection diagram 1) Connection diagram GOT side (terminal block) RS232 connection diagram 1) GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side CD 1 7 RS(RTS) RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) SG 5 5 SG DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 1 CD CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) - 9 9 - Untied wire color of GT10-C□□□R4-25P SDA Brown SDB Red RDA Orange RDB Yellow SG Green RSA Blue RSB Purple CSA Black CSB White Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length RS232 connection diagram 2) GOT side (terminal block) 14.3.2 The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less. PLC side (2) GOT side connector SD 2 RD(RXD) For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. RD 3 SD(TXD) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications ER 6 DR(DSR) DR 4 ER(DTR) SG 5 SG RS 1 CD CS 7 RS(RTS) NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 9 NC Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 14 - 8 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.3 Connection Diagram Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 14.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: CC-Link (G4) The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 14.4.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Range 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication 3 to 30sec to time out.(Default: 3sec) Delay time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300ms POINT (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. POINT 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Click! Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for Transmission communication with the connected Speed equipment. (Default: 9600bps) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Item 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 4. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 3. 1. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 14.4.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 14.4 GOT Side Settings 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.4 GOT Side Settings 14 - 9 HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 14 - 10 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.4 GOT Side Settings 9 14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration. module Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting DIP switch. (2) MITSUBISHI (1) B RATE STATION NO. x 10 x1 AJ65BT-G4-S3 0 1 90 1 01 2 8 2 2 3 7 3 3 4 654 654 PW RUN L RUN SD RD L ERR. SW1 OFF ON OFF ON SW6 MODE A OFF OFF QnA Q ON ON non-used SW 12345678 RESET ON (3) (1) Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual. Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BTG4-S3 User's Manual (detail volume) (2) CC-Link module For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (3) CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch STATION NO. ×10 ×1 01 90 1 2 8 2 3 7 3 654 654 AJ65BT-G4-S3 station number setting : Necessary Set value 1 to 64 Description 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 B RATE 01 2 3 4 Data link transmission speed setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps : As necessary : Not necessary 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Setting example Transmission speed: 9600bps Setting example : Intelligent device station Station type Station No. : Station No. 1 Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 : 156kbps Transmission speed ■ Switch setting of peripheral connection module 16 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 12 13 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 Setting example : Master station Station type Station No. : Station No. 0 : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Mode :1 All connect count Transmission speed : 156kbps Setting necessity at GOT connection (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch Data link transmission speed setting switch System configuration Description 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION RS-422 POINT 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) AJ65BT-R2N Switch setting of peripheral connection CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 14.5.1 14.5.1 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Peripheral connection module Reference AJ65BT-G4-S3 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Model MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 11 14.5.2 (3) Operation setting DIP switch Operation setting DIP switch SW 12345678 ON Setting Switch Description SW1, SW6 Operation mode SW2 Peripheral transmissi SW3 on speed*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection SW1 = OFF SW6 = ON (fixed) (Q mode) OFF (fixed) SW4 SW5 Not used OFF (fixed) SW7 SW8 *1 Test mode OFF (fixed) (Online mode) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT. Connecting AJ65BT-R2N This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration. POINT (1) Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual. Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BTR2N User's Manual (2) CC-Link module For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N (3) CC-Link built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual POINT Operation mode of peripheral connection module Be sure to set the "Q mode" as an operation mode of the peripheral connection module. System configuration 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer *1 Setting example : Master station Station type Station No. : Station No. 0 : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Mode :1 All connect count Transmission speed : 156kbps 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Setting example Transmission speed: 9600bps Setting example : Intelligent device station Station type Station No. : Station No. 1 Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 : 156kbps Transmission speed ■ Switch setting of peripheral connection module *1 14 - 12 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" RS-232 transmission setting switch Setting switch Set value Description Setting necessity at GOT connection SW1 (2) 2 (1) SW2 SW3 Peripheral transmission speed *1 10 OFF (fixed) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (3) SW4 SW5 SW6 4 (4) SW7 SW8 (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection *1 Data bit length OFF (fixed) Parity bit length OFF (fixed) Stop bit length OFF (fixed) 11 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT. 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 12 POINT : Necessary Precautions when setting peripheral connection module 1 to 64 : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch Data link transmission speed setting switch Description Set value Data link transmission speed setting 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps : Necessary : As necessary Setting necessity at GOT connection (1) mode setting switch Be sure to set the Operation mode setting switch to "5" (MELSOFT/connection mode). (2) RS-232 transmission setting switch Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS-232 transmission setting switch. If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON, setting error will occur (RUN LED turns off). 14 : Not necessary (3) Mode setting switch Mode setting : Necessary Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Description 5 (fixed) (MELSOFT/ connection mode) : As necessary 16 : Not necessary SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Mode setting switch 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) AJ65BT-R2N station number setting CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting DIP switch. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION module MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (4) RS-232 transmission setting switch CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Switch setting of peripheral connection 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 13 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N RUN MST SD ERR. L RUN S MST RD L ERR. 0 X10 5 STATION NO. 0 5 (1) X1 (2) 0 8 C MODE 4 NC 1 NC DA 2 DB 4 3 SLD 5 (FG) DG 6 7 Item Set value No. of boards in module (1) Station number setting switch 1 Start I/O No. Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 1 X400 X1 Station number setting (master station) 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Transmission rate/ mode setting switch C 0 8 Remote output (RY) Y400 Remote register (RWr) D300 Remote register (RWw) D200 0 5 0 5 Remote input (RX) X10 MODE 0000H All connect count STATION NO. Description Set value Transmission rate/mode setting 4 : Necessary Special relay (SB) SB0 Special register (SW) SW0 Retry count Setting necessity at GOT connection Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No. (Use default value) PLC down select Scan mode setting 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps : As necessary Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting : Not necessary Refer to (2) (Use default value) Interrupt setting : Necessary POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 14 - 14 Setting necessity at GOT connection 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings : As necessary : Not necessary Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller module setting utility. 10 Intelligent device station (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) Item : Necessary *2 11 Exclusive station 1 (fixed) : As necessary Set value : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT. When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)] or [Remote net - Additional mode], set to [Ver. 1 Intelligent device station]. POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. Target module*1 Write authority *2 192.168.3.3 target Password*2 password *1 *2 12 Mark the checkbox User name Detailed settings Setting necessity at GOT connection CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Number of stations occupied - : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed user name and password. (3) Completion confirmation After initial communications of CC-Link are completed, the L RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on. The GOT starts to monitor after the L-RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on. It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Station type*2 *1 Setting necessity at GOT connection 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Set value MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) (1) Connection settings Item*1 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 14.5.5 (2) Station information setting CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 PW RUN L RUN SD RD L ERR. INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 15 14.5.6 (2) [Parameter Setting] of CC-Link utility (a) Network parameter [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Transmission Speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Retry Count 0 to 5times Timeout Time 3 to 30sec Delay Time 0 to 300ms POINT Item Set value Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) type Master station(fixed) Mode*1 Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded cyclic station Single(fixed) Operation Occupied number setting Error event : input data status CPU stop: data link status Other settings All connect count Exclusive station 1 (fixed) Clear Refresh (Use default value) 1 Ver.1 Intelligent device station(fixed) Station type Expanded cyclic station Station information Occupied number*2 settings Remote station points Single Exclusive station 1 32 points Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) *1 *2 Setting necessity at GOT connection : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the CC-Link module [Mode] is [Remote net -Ver.1 mode], [Remote station points] cannot be set. Set the same setting as that of the GOT. POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and then ON or reset it. 14 - 16 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 14.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Connection to Q170MCPU When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design Connection to LCPU For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION GT Designer3 Version Manual 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connection in the multiple CPU system MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 14.6 Precautions Screen Design Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70, CRnQ-700 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2 only. For connecting to the CC-Link (Via G4) network system, set the CC-Link (G4) network system to the CC-Link Ver.2 mode. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.6 Precautions 14 - 17 14 - 18 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.6 Precautions MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 15. INVERTER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15 9 INVERTER CONNECTION 15. 15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 21 15.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 29 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 31 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 44 15.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 47 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 3 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 15.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 15 - 1 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L RS-422 15.2.1 RS-422 15.2.2 RS-422 15.2.3 RS-422 15.2.4 RS-422 15.2.5 FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FREQROL FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 FREQROL-F700P MELIPM 15 - 2 MD-CX522- K(-A0) 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List 9 15.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.2 System Configuration Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L When connecting to one inverter Computer link option Inverter GOT MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Model name Connection cable Computer link option Communi cation type Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable equipment Model 12 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) RS422 connection diagram 1) - GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 500m CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION FREQROLA500/A500L F500/F500L V500/V500L GT15-RS4-9S RS-422 - (Built into GOT) *2 13 RS422 connection diagram 10) 500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) RS422 connection diagram 2) FR-A5NR 500m GT15-RS4-9S 14 RS-422 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 11) - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. . 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *1 *2 500m 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION FREQROLA500/A500L F500/F500L V500/V500L GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Inverter CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 3 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Inverter Model name GOT Commun ication type Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 FREQROLA500/A500L F500/F500L V500/V500L RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 9) RS422 connection diagram 3) BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) RS422 connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*4 *2 BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) *1 *2 *3 *4 RS422 connection diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . Connect to the PU port of the inverter. The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD 15 - 4 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 C or later 31 B or earlier 10 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION INVERTER CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15 - 5 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 Computer link option Inverter Computer link option Inverter GOT Connection cable Inverter Model name Connection cable Computer link option Communi cation type GOT Connection diagram number Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 FREQROLA500/A500L F500/F500L V500/V500L RS422 connection FR-A5NR GT15-RS4-9S diagram 4) RS-422 500m - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 12) *1 *2 - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD 15 - 6 Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD F or later 31 E or earlier 10 GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 31 inverters for one GOT*2 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ When connecting to one inverter GOT 10 Communication driver MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Model name Connection cable Communi cation type Connection diagram number 11 GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 500m 12 GT15-RS4-9S 1 GOT for 1 inverter CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION RS-422 diagram 1) - (Built into GOT) *2 RS422 connection diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) 13 . CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *1 *2 500m 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION FREQROLE500/S500/S500E F500J/D700/F700PJ RS422 connection CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 15.2.2 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 7 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Connection cable 1) Terminal cable Inverter Model name GOT Commu nication type Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 FREQROLE500/S500 S500E/F500J D700 RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 9) RS422 connection diagram 3) BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) RS422 connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*4 *2 BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) *1 *2 *3 *4 RS422 connection diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . Connect to the PU port of the inverter. The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD 15 - 8 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 C or later 31 B or earlier 10 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION INVERTER CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Model name 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15 - 9 15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700 When connecting to one inverter Control terminal option Inverter GOT Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Model name Connection cable Control terminal option Commun ication type Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable equipment Model GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) RS422 FREQROLE700 connection diagram 1) - GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 500m GT15-RS4-9S RS-422 - (Built into GOT) *2 RS422 connection diagram 10) 500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) RS422 FREQROLE700*3 connection diagram 7) *3 FR-E7TR GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 500m GT15-RS4-9S RS-422 - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 15) *1 *2 *3 15 - 10 500m - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration . Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Distributor Distributor Inverter Model name Commun ication type Terminating cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 RS422 connection diagram 3) - (Built into GOT) *2 BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) *1 *2 *3 *4 RS422 connection diagram 10) 500m 31inverters for one GOT*4 14 - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . Connect to the PU port of the inverter. The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD F or later 31 E or earlier 10 GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 INVERTER CONNECTION RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 9) 13 GT15-RS4-9S 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION FREQROLE700 BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) RS422 connection diagram 1) 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Terminal cable 11 GOT CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Connection cable 1) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Connection cable 1) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 15 - 11 15 - 12 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 Inverter MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter 10 Control terminal option GOT 11 Connection cable Inverter Model name Connection cable Control terminal option Communi cation type GOT Connection diagram number Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Control terminal option MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the control terminal option) 12 GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 RS422 connection GT15-RS4-9S diagram 8) RS-422 500m - (Built into GOT) 31 inverters for one GOT*3 13 diagram 16) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time. For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD 14 Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 D or earlier 10 GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD GT1020-L D 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *1 *2 *3 - (Built into GOT) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) RS422 connection 15 INVERTER CONNECTION E700*2 FR-E7TR*2 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION FREQROL- CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) 15 - 13 15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P When connecting to one inverter Inverter GOT Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Model name Connection cable Communi cation type Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable equipment Model GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 RS422 connection FREQROLA700/F700/F700P (PU port) RS-422 diagram 1) 500m GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 10) 500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 RS422 connection FREQROLA700/F700/F700P (Built-in RS485 terminal block) RS-422 diagram 5) GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 13) *1 15 - 14 500m 500m - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration . Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) 10 Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Terminal cable MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter GOT Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Terminal cable Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *2 Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment 13 GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 RS422 connection diagram 3) - (Built into GOT) BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) *1 *2 *3 RS422 connection diagram 10) 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*3 - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 9) GT15-RS4-9S 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION FREQROLA700/F700 (PU port) BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) RS422 connection diagram 1) CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Model name Commun ication type Connection cable 1) INVERTER CONNECTION Inverter CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 15 - 15 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 D or earlier 10 GT1020-L 15 - 16 D 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration Inverter Communication driver GOT FREQROL 500/700 Connection cable MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Inverter 9 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block) Model name Connection cable Communi cation type Connection diagram number GOT Option device Max. distance Model Number of connectable equipment GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 FREQROLA700/F700 (Built-in RS485 terminal block) RS-422 diagram 6) 12 GT15-RS4-9S 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION RS422 connection - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 14) - (Built into GOT) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 D or earlier 10 GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD GT1020-L D 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) GT1155-QTBD Hardware version 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Model name 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 *2 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 Inverter 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 17 15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522- K(-A0) When connecting to one inverter Inverter GOT Communication driver Connection cable FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Connection cable Communication type Model name Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Number of connectable Model name equipment Model GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 RS422 connection MD-CX522- K RS-422 (-A0)*2 diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S 1 GOT for 1 inverter - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 10) *1 *2 15 - 18 20m 20m - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration . Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Distributor Distributor Inverter Model name Commu nication type Terminating cable Connection cable 1) Distributor Connection diagram number Model name *3 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable Model name equipment GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 K(-A0) RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 3) - (Built into GOT) *2 BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) *1 *2 *3 *4 RS422 connection diagram 10) 20m 31 inverters for one GOT*4 14 - (Built into GOT) Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . Connect to the PU port of the inverter. The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual. GT11 User’s Manual GT10 User’s Manual Model name GT1155-QTBD GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 C or later 31 B or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 INVERTER CONNECTION - RS422 connection diagram 9) 13 GT15-RS4-9S 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MD-CX522 BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) RS422 connection diagram 1) 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Terminal cable 11 GOT CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Connection cable 1) CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Connection cable 1) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 15 - 19 15 - 20 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration Distributor side (Modular connector) Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) Inverter or Distributor side (Modular connector) GOT side*1 RDA 2 5 SDA RDB 7 4 SDB SDA 1 3 RDA SDB 6 6 RDB RSA 3 2 P5S RSB 8 8 P5S CSA 4 - - CSB 9 - - SG 5 1 SG FG - *1 Inverter side or distributor side (Modular connector) SDA 5 5 SDA SDB 4 4 SDB RDA 3 3 RDA RDB 6 6 RDB P5S 2 2 P5S P5S 8 8 P5S SG 1 1 SG 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS422 connection diagram 2) ) FR-A5NR side (terminal block) RDA 2 SDA RDB 7 SDB SDA 1 RDA SDB 6 RSA 3 RSB 8 9 SG 5 FG - *1 *2 RDR 15 SG INVERTER CONNECTION 4 RDB Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR.The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor to "Disable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor to "330 ". 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CSA CSB *1 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) GOT side*2 , GT104 11 12 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor to "Disable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor to "330 ". (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION RS-422 cable CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 15.3.1 RS422 connection diagram 3) MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the inverter. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 15.3 Connection Diagram 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram 15 - 21 RS422 connection diagram 4) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 SG 5 RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 FG - ) FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.0 GOT side*2 SDA , GT104 FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.1 RDA RDA RDB RDB SDA SDA SDB SDB SG SG RDR RDR FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.n RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR *1 *1 *2 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS422 connection diagram 5) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 GOT side*1 , GT104 ) Inverter side RS485 terminal block (built into the inverter)*2 RDA 2 SDA1(TXD1+) RDB 7 SDB1(TXD1-) SDA 1 RDA1(RXD1+) SDB 6 RDB1(RXD1-) RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 SG 5 FG - *1 *2 15 - 22 SG(GND) For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor to "Disable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor to "330 ". 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RDA2, RDB2, SDA2 and SDB2 terminals of the RS485 terminal block (built into the inverter) cannot be used. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram ". 9 ) *2 Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.1 Built-in RS-485 terminal block*1 Station No.n SG 5 GND SDA2 SDA1 SDB 6 RDB1 SDB2 SDB1 SDA 1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1 RDB 7 SDB1 RDB2 RDB1 RDA 2 SDA1 GND GND RSA 3 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2 RSB 8 SDB2 SDB1 SDB2 CSA 4 RDA2 RDA1 RDA2 CSB 9 RDB2 RDB1 RDB2 - GND GND GND *1 *2 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) GOT side , GT104 Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.0 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 6) Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ). For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ". 12 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) FR-E7TR side (terminal block)*2 RDA 2 SDA RDB 7 SDB SDA 1 RDA SDB 6 RDB RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 SG 5 FG - 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GOT side*1 14 SG CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) *1 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION RS422 connection diagram 7) For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor to "Disable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor to "330 ". 15 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT ) the terminator switch for the FR-E7TR. INVERTER CONNECTION Turn ON (100 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *2 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram 15 - 23 RS422 connection diagram 8) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.0 GOT side*2 FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.1 FR-E7TR side terminal block*1 Station No.2 RDA 2 SDA SDA SDA RDB 7 SDB SDB SDB SDA 1 RDA RDA RDA SDB 6 RDB RDB RDB RSA 3 SDB SDB SDB RSB 8 SDA SDA SDA RDB RDB RDA RDA CSA 4 RDB CSB 9 RDA SG 5 FG - SG SG *1 *2 SG SG SG SG Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT. For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable". For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ". 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS422 connection diagram 9) RS422 connection diagram 11) (For GT1030, GT1020) Distributor side SDA 5 SDB 4 RDA 3 RDB 6 P5S 2 P5S 8 SG GOT side*2 (terminal block) Terminating resistor 100Ω 1/2W FR-A5NR side (terminal block) SDA RDA SDB RDB RDA SDA RDB SDB SG SG 1 RSA *1 RDR RSB RS422 connection diagram 10) CSA (For GT1030, GT1020) GOT side*1 (terminal block) CSB Inverter side or distributor side (Modular connector) SDA 3 RDA SDB 6 RDB RDA 5 SDA RDB 4 SDB SG 1 SG RSA 2 P5S RSB 7 SG CSA 8 P5S CSB *1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 15 - 24 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram ". *1 *2 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 12) (For GT1030, GT1020) SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.1 FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.n RDA RDA RDA RDB RDB RDB SDA SDA SDA SDB SDB SDB SG SG SG RDR RDR 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) FR-A5NR side (terminal block) Station No.0 GOT side*2 (terminal block) RDR *1 RSB CSB *1 *2 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ". 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 CSA 12 RS422 connection diagram 13) Inverter side RS485 terminal block (built into the inverter) SDA RDA1(RXD1+) SDB RDB1(RXD1-) RDA SDA1(TXD1+) RDB SDB1(TXD1-) SG SG(GND) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GOT side*1 (terminal block) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION (For GT1030, GT1020) RSA RSB 14 CSA Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT INVERTER CONNECTION 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) CSB 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram 15 - 25 RS422 connection diagram 14) (For GT1030, GT1020) Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.0 GOT side (terminal block) Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.1 Built-in RS-485 terminal block*1 Station No.n SG GND SDA2 SDA1 SDB RDB1 SDB2 SDB1 SDA RDA1 RDA2 RDA1 RDB SDB1 RDB2 RDB1 RDA SDA1 GND GND RSA SDA2 SDA1 SDA2 RSB SDB2 SDB1 SDB2 CSA RDA2 RDA1 RDA2 CSB RDB2 RDB1 RDB2 GND GND GND *1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS422 connection diagram 15) (For GT1030, GT1020) GOT side*1 (terminal block) FR-E7TR side (terminal block) SDA RDA SDB RDB RDA SDA RDB SDB SG SG RSA RSB CSA CSB *1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 15 - 26 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram ". ". ). 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 16) (For GT1030, GT1020) FR-E7TR side terminal block*1 Station No.2 SDA RDA RDA RDA SDB RDB RDB RDB RDA SDA SDA SDA RDB SDB SDB SDB SG SG SG SG RSA SDB SDB SDB RSB SDA SDA SDA CSA RDB RDB RDB CSB RDA RDA RDA SG SG SG *1 Turn ON (100 *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.1 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.0 GOT side*2 (terminal block) ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT. ". CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram 15 - 27 Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length (4) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link option Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series. The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Terminal block Screw size: M3 B A SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG (3) Inverter connector specifications C Terminal symbol (a) Pin layout in the PU port When seen from the front of the inverter (receptacle side) Connected to the GOT (5) Terminal block layout in the FR-E7TR control terminal option Mount the FR-E7TR to the E700 series. 2 (P5S) 3 RXD+ (RDA) 4 TXD- (SDB) 5 TXD+ (SDA) 6 RXD- (RDB) 7 GND (SG) 8 (P5S) Not used Connector Modular ceiling rosette (Distributor) Cable 15 - 28 5-554720-3 BMJ-8 FM 0.5mm 4P 22 RL RM RH MRS RES SD PC STF STR SD SD Not used Specifications RJ45 connector - SGLPEV SDB RDA RDA RDB SDA SDB SDA SG RDB SG SDA SDB RDA RDB RDB RUN SDA SDB RDA RUN FU FU SE SE (b) Connector of cable between FREQROL Series inverters Use the commercial connectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products.(Refer to the manual for the inverter.) Model name 4 O N The contents inside ( ) indicate symbols described in the inverter manual. The pins number 2 and 8 (P5S) are connected to the power supply for an operation panel or a parameter unit. Do not use them in RS-422 communication. Name 100 10 SOURCE GND (SG) To the GOT or the previous inverter SINK 1 Remark I Signal name V Pin No. Set the terminal 2/SG switch to the right position (ON) to change the terminal 2 to the terminal SG. OPEN Modular jack Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as cable 10BASE-T) A B C To the next inverter Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch. (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector switch. Manufacturer Tyco International, Ltd HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. TEL(03)-3806-9171 MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 15.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 2. 3. 4. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: FREQROL 500/700 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits) 7bits/8bits Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit/2bits Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd) None Even Odd Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 10ms) 0 to 300ms Click! Select [Common] menu. Description 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 4. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 3. 1. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15.4.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 15.4 GOT Side Settings 15 15.4.2 Communication detail settings The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 GOT Side Settings 15 - 29 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION POINT (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manuals. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. INVERTER CONNECTION POINT Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 15 - 30 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 GOT Side Settings 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series. Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters 11 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.30 (Extended function selection) to 1 [With display] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No.*4 Set value Communication station number n1 (331) 0 to 31 Communication speed*2 n2 (332) 192*3 19200bps Stop bit length*2 n3 (333) 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Parity check presence/absence*2 n4 (334) 1 Odd Number of communication retries n5 (335) --(65535) The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. Communication check time interval n6 (336) --- Communication check suspension Wait time setting n7 (337) 0 0ms CRLF selection n11 (341) 1*3 With CR, without LF Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 External operation mode at power on Link start mode selection n10 (340) 1 Computer link operation n12 (342) 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM E2PROM *3 *4 *5 15.5.12 Station number setting 12 13 14 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-S500, S500E, and F500J series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) When being monitored from the GOT, the parameter n1 through n7 correspond with Pr.331 through Pr.337, and the parameter n10 through n12 correspond with Pr.340 through Pr.342. Numbers in brackets show the parameter number when the parameter unit is in use. There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 *2 write selection Contents of setting CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Pr.79, n1 to n7, n10 to n12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION RS-485 port CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Parameters corresponding to inverter CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) GOT connection destination INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5.1 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 31 15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.146, Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT.If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 (65535) The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 *3 Protocol selection*4 ― ― ― Operation mode selection Pr.79 1*3 PU operation mode Communication startup mode selection*4 ― ― ― 2 E PROM write selection Pr.342 Frequency setting command selection*5 Pr.146 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 15 - 32 1 0 *3 9999 Contents of setting 15.5.12 Station number setting With CR, without LF Written to RAM and EEPROM Built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E500 series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (user group read selection) to 0 [All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU connector FR-A5NR Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 Communication check suspension Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms With CR, without LF ― Stop bit length/data length Stop bit length*2 CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― Operation mode selection Pr.79 15.5.12 Station number setting PU connector 1 PU operation mode FR-A5NR 0*3 External operation mode at power on ― Pr.340 1 Computer link operation E2PROM write selection*6 ― Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F500 and F500L series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used. 13 14 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *3 *4 *5 *6 11 12 Link start mode selection*6 *1 *2 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) FR-A5NR (Option unit) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION PU connector 10 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Parameters corresponding to inverter CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) GOT connection destination INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5.3 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 33 15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342 FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Contents of setting FR-A5NR Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 Communication check suspension Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― ― Operation mode selection Link start mode selection*6 E2PROM write selection *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 15 - 34 Set value PU connector Pr.79 ― Pr.340 Pr.342 15.5.12 Station number setting PU connector 1 PU operation mode FR-A5NR 0*3 External operation mode at power on 1 Computer link operation 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A500 and A500L series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (Extended function display selection) to 1 [All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU connector FR-A5NR Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 Communication check suspension Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms With CR, without LF ― Stop bit length/data length Stop bit length*2 CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― Operation mode selection Link start mode selection*6 E2PROM write selection *3 *4 *5 *6 ― Pr.340 Pr.342 11 12 PU connector 1 PU operation mode FR-A5NR 0*3 External operation mode at power on 1 Computer link operation 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-V500 and V500L series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used. 13 14 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 *2 Pr.79 15.5.12 Station number setting MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) FR-A5NR (Option unit) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION PU connector 10 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Parameters corresponding to inverter CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) GOT connection destination INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5.5 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 35 15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector FR-E7TR (RS-485 terminal block) Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 PU operation mode Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode. Pr.342 *3 Communication EEPROM write selection *1 *2 *3 15 - 36 0 Contents of setting 15.5.12 Station number setting Written to RAM and EEPROM Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E700 series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting FREQROL-D700 series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1 *3 Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 PU operation mode Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode. Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM 12 13 With CR, without LF Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-D700 series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *3 15.5.12 Station number setting 11 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 *2 Contents of setting MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION PU connector 10 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Parameters corresponding to inverter CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GOT connection destination CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15.5.7 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 37 15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342 RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS-485 Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd Number of PU communication retries/ RS-485 communication retry count Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. PU communication check time interval/ RS-485 communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4 Communication check suspension PU communication waiting time setting/ RS-485 communication waiting time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms PU communication CR/LF selection/ RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF Protocol selection ― Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol PU communication station number/RS-485 communication station number PU communication speed/RS-485 communication speed*2 PU communication stop bit length/ RS-485 communication stop bit length*2 PU communication parity check/ RS-485 communication parity check*2 Operation mode selection Communication startup mode selection Communication EEPROM write selection *1 *2 *3 *4 15 - 38 Parameter No. Pr.79 Pr.340 Pr.342 15.5.12 Station number setting PU connector 1 PU operation mode RS-485 0*3 External operation mode at power on PU connector 0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings. RS-485 1 Network operation mode. 0 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings HINT Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FREQROL-F700P series only) Parameter No. Operation in parameter setting mode GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO]→[GOT]→[1]Write 11 GOTInitial settings (RS-485 terminal) - When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION *1 Description 10 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Pr.999*1 Set value 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 39 15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps PU communication stop bit length Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123 0 0ms Pr.124 1 *3 With CR, without LF *3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol PU communication CR/LF selection Contents of setting 15.5.12 Station number setting Protocol selection Pr.549 0 Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode. Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM *1 *2 *3 External operation mode at power on Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) HINT Automatic setting with Pr.999 If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side. Parameter No. Set value Description Pr.999*1 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) *1 15 - 40 Operation in parameter setting mode [AUTO] When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings [GOT] [1]Write 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS-485 Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd Number of PU communication retries/ RS-485 communication retry count Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. PU communication check time interval/ RS-485 communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 PU communication waiting time setting/ RS-485 communication waiting time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms PU communication CR/LF selection/ RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF Protocol selection ― Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol PU communication station number/RS-485 communication station number PU communication speed/RS-485 communication speed*2 PU communication stop bit length/ RS-485 communication stop bit length*2 PU communication parity check/ RS-485 communication parity check*2 Operation mode selection Communication startup mode selection Communication EEPROM write selection *3 *4 Pr.340 Pr.342 12 Communication check suspension *4 PU connector 1 PU operation mode RS-485 0*3 External operation mode at power on PU connector 0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings. RS-485 1 Network operation mode. 0 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A700 series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. 13 14 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 *2 Pr.79 9999 15.5.12 Station number setting CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Setting item*1 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (2) Communication settings of inverter CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342 Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) PU connector RS-485 terminal MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 Parameters corresponding to inverter INVERTER CONNECTION GOT connection destination 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 41 HINT (1) Automatic setting with Pr.999 If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side. Parameter No. Pr.999*1 *1 Set value Description 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) 11 GOT Initial settings (RS-485) Operation in parameter setting mode [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write ― When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored. (2) Inverters available for automatic batch setting Parameters are not automatically set in a batch depending on the SERIAL (production number) symbol of the inverter to be used. For details, contact your local distributor. 15.5.11 Connecting MD-CX522- K(-A0) Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124 (2) Communication settings of inverter • Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). • After setting the parameters for the communication settings, reset the inverter. • Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps Stop bit length/data length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd 15.5.12 Station number setting Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop. Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms CRLF presence/absence selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF *1 *2 *3 15 - 42 Contents of setting Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of MELIPM series. Settings on the GOT can be changed. When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. Inverter default values (No need to change) 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.5.12 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.21 10 Station No.6 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Station No.3 GOT Examples of station number setting 11 (1) Direct specification CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION When setting the device, specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed. Specification range 0 to 31 12 (2) Indirect specification 101 GD11 102 GD12 103 GD13 104 GD14 105 GD15 106 GD16 107 GD17 108 GD18 109 GD19 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GD10 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 100 Setting range 0 to 31 For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur. 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Compatible device 13 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Specification station NO. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 155 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the inverter. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 - 43 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set Inverter (FREQROL 500/700 series) Device name Bit device The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series. Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used. When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored. Inverter status monitor (RS)*3 Alarm definition (A) *2*3 Word device Parameter (Pr) *1*2 Programmed operation (PG)*1*2 Special parameter (SP)*2*4 Item *1 Description Set the device name, device number, and bit number. The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word device. Monitors the inverter of the specified station No. 0 to 31: To monitor the inverter of the specified Station station No. 100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the inverter No. to be monitored by the value of GOT data register Device *2 *3 *4 (GD).*1 Information *1 Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device]. The following shows the relation between the inverter station numbers and the GOT data register. Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range 100 GD10 101 GD11 0 to 31 (If setting a value outside the range above, a device range error occurs) : : 114 GD24 115 GD25 (1) Setting the device by inputting directly from the keyboard When setting the device by inputting directly from the keyboard, set the items as follows. Station No. Device number Device name 15 - 44 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set *5 Setting range RS0: 0 RS0: 100 to to RS15: 31 RS15: 115 WS0: 0 WS0: 100 to to RS15: 31 RS15: 115 A0: 0 A0: 100 to to A7: 31 A7: 115 Pr0: 0 Pr0: 100 to to Pr999: 31 Pr999: 115 PG0: 0 PG0: 100 to to PG89: 31 PG89: 115 SP108: 0 SP108: 100 to to SP127: 31 SP127: 115 Decimal Run command (WS) *4*5 Setting item Device No. represen tation Decimal When creating the screen, designate only either of programmed operation (PG) device or parameter (Pr) device. Do no designate both PG (PG0 to PG89) and Pr (Pr900 to Pr905) devices. Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is possible. Only reading is possible. Precautions for PU operation mode When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the multispeed operation (W3 to W7, SP121, SP122) cannot be used. For using the multi-speed operation, follow either of the operations as below. • Connect the GOT to the RS-485 terminal and set the operation mode to the NET operation mode (Computer link operation mode), and then operate the inverter. • Change the motor speed with the set frequency (SP109, SP110), and then operate the inverter with the forward or reverse rotation (WS1, WS2, SP121, SP122). Precautions for WS devices Only writing is possible for WS devices. More than one WS cannot turn on at once. (Except the turned on WS device, the other WS devices turn off.) Bits of SP122 (word device) and SP121 (word device) are assigned to WS0 to WS7 and WS8 to WS15 respectively. When more than one WS turns on at once, convert the values for the bit devices that are assigned to the word device into values for the word device. Write the converted values into SP122 or SP121. • Setting High speed operation command (WS5), Middle speed operation command (WS4), and Low speed operation command (WS3) When setting High speed operation command (WS5), Middle speed operation command (WS4), and Low speed operation command (WS3), write numerical values to device SP122 as necessary. As the following figure shows, each operation mode is assigned to device SP122. The following shows an example for Forward rotation command (WS1) and Low speed operation command (WS3). An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown below. For the setting items of other than the FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the used inverter (communication function (setting item and set data)) Forward rotation command (STF) WS2 Reverse rotation command (STR) WS3 Low speed operation command (RL) WS4 Middle speed operation command (RM) WS5 High speed operation command (RH) WS6 Second function selection (RT) WS7 Output stop (MRS) WS8 Jog operation (JOG) WS9 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (CS) WS10 Start self-holding (STOP) WS11 Reset (RES) WS12 - WS13 - WS14 - WS15 *1 Description*1 Device name The data (function of input terminal) may be changed by the parameter of the inverter side. Check the function of the inverter used. Inverter running (RUN) RS1 Forward rotation (STF) RS2 Reverse rotation (STR) RS3 Up to frequency (SU) RS4 Overload (OL) A0 Second alarm in past RS5 Instantaneous power failure (IPF) A1 Latest alarm RS6 Frequency detection (FU) A2 Fourth alarm in past RS7 Fault (ABC1) A3 Third alarm in past RS8 ABC2 A4 Sixth alarm in past RS9 - A5 Fifth alarm in past RS10 - A6 Eighth alarm in past RS11 - A7 Seventh alarm in past RS12 - RS13 - RS14 - RS15 Fault occurrence Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication operation and setting Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication operation and setting (3) Alarm definition Device name*1 *1 Description MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 13 14 15 Only reading is possible for A0 to A7. These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical input etc.). (4) Parameter The numbers of virtual devices for inverter (parameter (Pr)), used by GOT, correspond to the inverter parameter numbers. For the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter being used 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION The description (function of input terminal) may be changed by the parameter of the inverter side. Check the function of the inverter used. 11 12 RS0 *1 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) WS1 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Current input selection (AU) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION (1) Inverter status monitor WS0 10 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) The following shows correspondences between virtual inverter devices used in the GOT and data of the inverter. Description*1 Device name CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) b0 Write [1] to each bit corresponding to Forward rotation command (WS1) and Low speed operation command (WS3) of device SP122. The value will be 000AH in this example. When writing the value to device SP122 actually, convert 000AH to decimal number and write the value [10]. When using a WS device, [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. User's Manual of the used inverter (Communication function (Setting item and set data)) INVERTER CONNECTION b7 An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown below. For the setting items of other than the FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual. WS0: Current input selection(AU) WS1: Forward rotation command(STF) WS2: Reverse rotation command(STR) WS3: Low speed operation command(RL) WS4: Middle speed operation command(RM) WS5: High speed operation command(RH) WS6: Second function selection(RT) WS7: Output stop(MRS) Device SP122 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 b15 9 (2) Run command 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 - 45 (6) Special parameter POINT (1) Monitoring Pr.37 GOT cannot monitor the parameter (Pr.37) of FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/ E700. (2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) "8888" and "9999" designate special function. To set these numbers from GOT, designate a number as shown below. Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT to Set frequency (RAM) 6DH EDH Set frequency (RAM, E2PROM) 6EH EEH *1*2 Output frequency 6FH - *2 Output current 70H - SP113*2 Output voltage 71H - SP111 SP112 SP114*2 Special monitor 72H - SP115 Special monitor selection No. 73H F3H - F4H Latest alarm, second alarm in past 74H - SP117 Third alarm in past, fourth alarm in past 75H - SP118 Fifth alarm in past, sixth alarm in past 76H - SP119 Seventh alarm in past, eights alarm in past 77H - 79H F9H 7AH - Value to be set to extension second parameter (SP108) Description SP116 H00 Offset/gain H01 Analog H02 Analog value at terminal Program set 1 (time) SP125 SP127 Program set 1 (rotation direction) PG30 to PG39 Program set 2 (running frequency) PG40 to PG49*1 Program set 2 (time) PG50 to PG59 Program set 2 (rotation direction) PG60 to PG69 Program set 3 (running frequency) PG70 to PG79*1 Program set 3 (time) PG80 to PG89 Program set 3 (rotation direction) Run command Communication mode *3 *2 Time to be set 13H 35M Remark Convert "hour" and "minute" into hexadecimal. H0D H23 HEX - 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set All parameter clear Inverter reset Link parameter extended setting *1 To set the start time (PG10 to PG19, PG40 to PG49, PG70 to PG79), set hour or minute in the upper 8bits, and minute or second in the lower 8bits. Example) To set 13 hour 35 minute Input H0D23 or 3363. Inverter status monitor SP122 SP124*3 Program set 1 (running frequency) PG29 Combine upper and lower 8bit values. Inverter status monitor (extended) Run command (extend) SP123 Description PG19*1 Alarm definition all clear SP121 to 15 - 46 ECH *1 SP110*1 PG20 *1 Write 6CH SP109 PG9 Instruction code Read 65535 Device name Description Second parameter changing SP108 65520 The devices below correspond to the parameters (Pr.201 to Pr.230) of FREQROL-A500 series. PG10 Device name 9999 (5) Programmed operation to Manual of the inverter used 8888 (3) Precautions for setting calibration parameter (Pr900 to Pr905) When setting a calibration parameter (Pr900 to Pr905), it is necessary to set the value below for extension second parameter (SP108), depending on the device number to be used and the inverter model. PG0 The numbers of the inverter’s virtual devices (SP) used for the GOT correspond to instruction codes of the inverter communication function. For instruction details, and values to be read and written, refer to the following, *3 - FAH 7BH FBH - FCH - FDH 7FH FFH GOT cannot monitor SP109 to SP111 if the conditions below are satisfied at the same time. (Only FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/E700 series) • Pr37 0 • SP127 = 1 Only reading is possible for SP111 to SP114. These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical input etc.). Only writing is possible for SP124 and SP125. These devices cannot be used for read object. 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 15.7 Precautions Station No. of inverter system Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0 station. Number of inverter 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Up to 31 inverters can be connected. For GT11 and GT10, refer to the following manual for the procedure to check the connectable inverter depending on the version. GT11 User's Manual, GT10 User's Manual C or later 31 B or earlier 10 F or later 31 E or earlier 10 C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D B or later 31 GT1030-H D A or earlier 10 E or later 31 GT1020-L D D or earlier 10 GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION GT1155-QSBD GT1150-QLBD Number of connectable Inverter 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION GT1155-QTBD Hardware version 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Model name Parameter setting (1) Communication parameter change Do not make any change for each communication parameter of the inverter side from GOT. If changed, the communication to the inverter cannot be made. 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) "8888" and "9999" designate special function. When specifying from the GOT, it will be as follows. Value specified by GOT 8888 65520 9999 65535 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Set value of inverter side Screen switching devices, system information devices Make sure to use GD for screen switching devices and system information devices when the GOT is connected to only the inverter. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 GOT clock control Since the inverter does not have a clock function, the settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by GOT clock control will be disabled. 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.7 Precautions 15 - 47 15 - 48 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.7 Precautions SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 16. 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 16 9 16.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 3 16.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 8 16.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 14 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17 16.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 45 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 16.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 16 - 1 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name MELSERVO-J2-Super MELSERVO-J2M MELSERVO-J3 MELSERVO-J4*1 MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2MMR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J4- A *1 16 - 2 DU Clock Communication type Refer to RS-232 RS-422 16.2.1 RS-232 RS-422 16.2.2 RS-232 RS-422 16.2.3 RS-232 RS-422 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of software version A3 or a later version. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List 9 Communication driver GOT MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Connection cable CHARGE Servo amplifier Connection cable Commun ication type Series name GOT Cable model Connection diagram number Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-RS2-9P 15m RS232 connection diagram 1) MELSERVO- RS-232 J2-Super*1 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or RS232 connection diagram 1) + RS232 connection diagram 2) RS232 connection diagram 3) *1 (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. 13 When connecting via RS-422 communication Communication driver Servo amplifier Servo amplifier MITSUBISHI MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M MITSUBISHI GOT CHARGE 14 CHARGE Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Communi cation type Series name Connection diagram number RS422 connection diagram 1) GOT Option device Model Max. distance Number of connectable equipment GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 RS-422 *1 RS422 connection diagram 2) GT15-RS4-9S Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT (multi-drop communication) 30m - (Built into GOT) *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 7) 15 - (Built into GOT) GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) MELSERVO-J2-Super 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or 11 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) MITSUBISHI 10 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Servo amplifier MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) When connecting via RS-232 communication CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series INVERTER CONNECTION 16.2.1 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 3 16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series When connecting via RS-232 communication Communication driver Servo amplifier GOT MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Connection cable Servo amplifier Series name Connection cable Commun ication type GOT Cable model Connection diagram number Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-RS2-9P MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or 15m (Built into GOT) RS232 connection diagram 1) MELSERVO -J2M 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier RS-232 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or *1 + RS232 connection diagram 1) RS232 connection diagram 2) RS232 connection diagram 3) *1 15m (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. When connecting via RS-422 communication Communication driver Servo amplifier Servo amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M MITSUBISHI GOT CHARGE Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Communic ation type Series name Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance RS422 connection Option device Number of connectable equipment Model - (Built into GOT) diagram 1) GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 MELSERVO-J2M RS-422 *1 RS422 connection diagram 2) 30m 0 to 31 stations for 1 GOT GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 7) 16 - 4 - (Built into GOT) *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration . RS-422/232 converter MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M GOT Connection cable Series name Connection cable RS-422/232 interface converter RS-422/232 conversion cable Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-RS2-9P DSV-CABV(1.5m)*2 or FA-T-RS40VS - 15m - (Built into GOT) RS-232 12 *3 RS232 connection diagram 2) 15m MELSERVO- - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) J4*1, J3*1 GT15-RS2T4-9P*4 RS422 connection - RS-422 11 diagram 3) 13 GT15-RS4-9S 30m - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 8) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Servo amplifier 10 - (Built into GOT) *1 *2 *3 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation. FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together. Use the provided cables to connect devices. *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Servo amplifier MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Communication driver CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION When connecting to one servo amplifier MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 16.2.3 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 5 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-422 connection) Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Servo amplifier Series name Commu nication type Terminating cable Connection cable 1) Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Distributor *2 Model name Connection cable 2) Connection diagram number GOT Connection cable 3) Distributor *2 Model name Connection cable 3) Connection diagram number GOT Option device Model Max. dista nce Number of connectable equipment 30m Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 MELSERVOJ4*1, J3*1 RS422 connection diagram 6) RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 5) BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) RS422 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 3) BMJ-8 (Recomm ended) - (Built into GOT) RS422 connection diagram 8) *1 *2 16 - 6 GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-232 connection) 10 Servo amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor 11 RS-422/232 converter Connection cable 2) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Terminal cable MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Servo amplifier GOT Connection cable 3) Connection cable 1) Series name Connecti on diagram number Connecti on diagram number Distributor *3 Model name Connection cable 2) Connecti on diagram number Distributor *3 Model name RS-422/232 interface Model name converter*2 Commun ication type Connection cable 3) GOT Connection diagram number Option device Model Max. dista nce Number of connectable equipment 30m Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT GT15-RS2-9P J3*1 RS422 connection diagram 5) BMJ-8 (Recom mended) RS422 connection diagram 4) BMJ-8 (Recom mended) FA-TRS40VS (Built into GOT) RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 2) *1 *2 *3 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) VO-J4*1, RS422 connection diagram 6) (Built into GOT) Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together. Use the cables packed together to connect. The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 15 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION MELSER 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Terminating cable INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 7 16.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the servo amplifier. 16.3.1 (1) Cable length RS-232 cable The length of the cable RS-232 must be 15m or less. Connection diagram (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. RS232 connection diagram 1) Connector for interface unit's or servo amplifier's CN3 GOT side CD/NC*1 1 Plate FG SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD - 9 1 LG RD(RXD) 2 12 TXD SG 5 11 LG RS(RTS) 7 CS(CTS) 8 DR(DSR) 6 ER(DTR) 4 RS232 connection diagram 2) GOT side Connection cable side SD(TXD) 1 3 TXD RD(RXD) 2 2 RXD ER(DTR) 3 1 - DR(DSR) 4 4 DTR SG 5 5 GND RS(RTS) 6 6 DSR CS(CTS) 7 7 RTS NC 8 8 CTS NC 9 9 - RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT side Connector for interface unit's or servo amplifier's CN3 SD(TXD) 1 2 RXD RD(RXD) 2 1 LG ER(DTR) 3 12 TXD DR(DSR) 4 11 LG Plate FG SG 5 RS(RTS) 6 CS(CTS) 7 NC 8 NC 9 16 - 8 Precautions when preparing cable 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 9 RS-422 cable MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 16.3.2 Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1) RDA1(RXD1+) 3 RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDA1(TXD1+) 1 SDB1(TXD1-) SDP SDN RSB(RTS-) 10 CSA(CTS+) 11 CSB(CTS-) 12 SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SDB2(TXD2-) 6 RDA2(RXD2+) 7 RDB2(RXD2-) 8 NC 14 15 LG 11 LG 1 TRE SD 10 Plate SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD 9 9 SDP 19 19 SDN 5 5 RDP 15 15 RDN 11 11 LG 1 1 LG 10 10 TRE Plate Plate SD 10 11 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 9 5 RDN 13 RSA(RTS+) 19 RDP 2 SG 9 Connector for interface unit's or 32nd axis (last axis)*1 servo amplifier's CN3 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) GOT side Connector for interface unit's or 2nd axis servo amplifier's CN3 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Connector for interface unit's or 1st axis servo amplifier's CN3 Shell *1 13 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN. RXD-(RDB) 7 TXD+(SDA) 1 TXD-(SDB) SDN RDP RDN 6 SG(GND) 5 RTS+(RSA) 3 RTS-(RSB) SDP 2 LG LG TRE 8 CTS+(CSA) 4 CTS-(CSB) 9 SD *1 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD 9 9 SDP 19 19 SDN 5 5 RDP 15 15 RDN 11 11 LG 1 1 LG 10 10 TRE Plate Plate SD 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) RXD+(RDA) Connector for interface unit's or 32nd axis (last axis) servo amplifier's CN3 *1 15 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN. 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION GOT side Connector for interface unit's or 2nd axis servo amplifier's CN3 INVERTER CONNECTION Connector for interface unit's or 1st axis servo amplifier's CN3 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) RS422 connection diagram 2) 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram 16 - 9 RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 6) GOT side Distributor side (Modular connector) SDA 1 3 RDP LG 1 RDA 2 5 SDP P5D 2 RSA 3 2 P5D RDP 3 CSA 4 7 LG SDN 4 SG 5 1 LG SDP 5 SDB 6 6 RDN RDN 6 RDB 7 4 SDN LG 7 RSB 8 8 NC NC 8 CSB 9 FG - *1 RS422 connection diagram 4) Distributor side (Modular connector) Distributor side (Modular connector) LG 1 1 LG P5D 2 2 P5D RDP 3 3 RDP SDN 4 4 SDN SDP 5 5 SDP RDN 6 6 RDN LG 7 7 LG NC 8 8 NC RS422 connection diagram 5) Servo amplifier side (Modular connector) Distributor side (Modular connector) *1 LG LG 1 1 P5D 2 2 P5D RDP 3 3 RDP SDN 4 4 SDN SDP 5 5 SDP RDN 6 6 RDN LG 7 7 LG NC 8 8 NC *1Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible. 16 - 10 Distributor side (Modular connector) 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram *1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP (3pin) and RDN (6-pin) with a 150 resistor. 9 RXD+(RDA) SDP 3 RXD-(RDB) 4 TXD+(SDA) 1 TXD-(SDB) Distributor SDN RDP RDN 2 SG(GND) 5 RTS+(RSA) 6 RTS-(RSB) 7 CTS+(CSA) 8 CTS-(CSB) 9 LG LG TRE Distributor SDP 9 SDN 19 RDP 5 RDN 15 LG 11 LG 1 TRE 10 Plate 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate *1 Distributor SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE 9 19 5 10 15 11 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) GOT side MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) RS422 connection diagram 7) 1 10 Plate *1 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN. RS422 connection diagram 8) Distributor side (Modular connector) 1 3 RDP TXD-(SDB) 2 6 RDN RXD+(RDA) 3 5 SDP RXD-(RDB) 4 4 SDN SG 5 1 LG RTS+(RSA) 6 7 LG RTS-(RSB) 7 2 P5D CTS+(CSA) 8 8 NC CTS-(CSB) 9 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION TXD+(SDA) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) GOT side Precautions when preparing cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less. 14 (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications (3) Servo amplifier connector Use the connector compatible with the servo amplifier. For details, refer to the following. See the technical data of the servo amplifier to be used. 15 Connecting terminating resistors INVERTER CONNECTION (1) GOT side When connecting a servo amplifier to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "No". (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram 16 - 11 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 16.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 2. 3. Item 4. Transmission Speed Data Bit Click! Stop Bit Parity 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 16.4.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 16 - 12 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 GOT Side Settings Retry Timeout Time Host Address Delay Time Station No. Selection Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit) Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even) Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 3times) Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) Specify the station number of the servo amplifier in the system configuration. (Default: 0) Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) Specify whether to use the station No. during communication. If [Yes] is selected, the station No. is fixed to "0." (Default: Yes) Range 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps 115200bps 8bit (fixed) 1bit (fixed) Even (fixed) 0 to 5times 3 to 30sec 0 to 31 0 to 300 (ms) Yes or No POINT (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16 - 13 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side Model name Refer to MELSERVO-J2-Super Series 16.5.1 MELSERVO-J2M Series 16.5.2 MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 16.5.3 16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series POINT Parameters of MELSERVO-J2-Super Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series. Item Set value Basic parameter No. 15 Station number setting: 0 to 31 (Default: 0)*1 Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000) Basic parameter No. 16 (3) (2) 0 (1) (1) Serial communication baud rate Basic parameter No. 16 selection*2 0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps (2) Serial communication I/F selection 0: RS-232 1: RS-422 (3) Communication response delay time selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid (Response after 800 delay) s or longer Function selection 8 In case of MR-J2S- : (Default: 0000)*3 Expansion parameter 2 No. 53 Expansion parameter 2 No. 53 or No. 57 In case of MR-J2S- CP: 0 (1) 0 0 Expansion parameter 2 No. 57 (1) Station No. selection for protocol In case of MR-J2S- CL: 0: With station No. Expansion parameter 2 No. 57 1: Without station No. *2 *3 16 - 14 (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. MODE MELSERVO-J2-Super Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVOJ2-Super Series servo amplifiers. *1 POINT Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other axes. Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) To change the set value, enter "000E" to basic parameter No. 19. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side UP DOWN SET Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier (2) When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter. POINT MELSERVO-J2M Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the following manual. 9 POINT (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. See the technical manual for the MELSERVOJ2M Series servo amplifiers. MODE Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2M Series. Item DOWN SET (2) When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter. Set value Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000) Basic IFU parameter No. 0 (3) (2) 0 (1) (1) Serial communication baud rate selection*1 0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps (2) Serial communication I/F selection 0: RS-232 1: RS-422 (3) Communication response delay time selection 12 13 0: Invalid Interface unit serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 0) *2 Basic IFU parameter No. 11 Slot 1 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 12 Slot 2 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 13 Slot 3 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 14 Slot 4 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 15 Slot 5 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 16 Slot 6 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 17 Slot 7 serial communication station No. selection: Basic IFU parameter No. 18 Slot 8 serial communication station No. selection: *2 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 0 to 31 (Default: 2) *2 0 to 31 (Default: 3) *2 0 to 31 (Default: 4) *2 15 0 to 31 (Default: 5) *2 0 to 31 (Default: 6) *2 0 to 31 (Default: 7) *2 0 to 31 (Default: 8) *2 16 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 0 to 31 (Default: 1) *2 INVERTER CONNECTION Basic IFU parameter No. 10 s or longer CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 1: Valid (Response after 800 delay) 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Basic IFU parameter No. 0 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Parameter of MELSERVO-J2M Series UP Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 16.5.2 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16 - 15 16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series 16.5.4 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. POINT MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVOJ4, J3 Series servo amplifiers. Station NO.3 Item Station number setting: 0 to 31 (Default: 0)*1 Basic parameter No. PC21 (1) Direct specification Specification range *1 *2 (1) Serial communication baud rate selection*2 0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps 4: 115200bps (2) Communication response delay time selection 0: Invalid s or longer Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other axes. Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) POINT (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. MODE UP DOWN SET Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier (2) When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter. 16 - 16 0 to 31 (2) Indirect specification (2) (1) 1: Valid (Response after 800 delay) Station NO. 6 Examples of station number setting Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000) Basic parameter No. PC21 Station NO.21 When setting the device, specify the station number of the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed. Set value Basic parameter No. PC20 Station NO.1 GOT Parameters of MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series. Station NO.0 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3,the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No.specification will be the station No.of the servo amplifier. Specification station NO. Compatible device 100 GD10 101 GD11 102 GD12 103 GD13 104 GD14 105 GD15 106 GD16 107 GD17 108 GD18 109 GD19 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 Setting range 0 to 31 For the setting other than the above, a communication timeout error will occur. (3) All station specification Target station differs depending on write-in operation or read-out operation. • For write-in operation, all station will be a target. • For read-out operation, only one station will be a target. (a) Device Definition dialog box When setting a device on the Device dialog box and click the [Device Definition...] button, the correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier and the definition of the servo amplifier is displayed. 1. 2. 3. 3. (1) Servo amplifier 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series. Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used. When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 Clicking the button displays the dialog box indicating the correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier and the definition of servo amplifier. If selecting an item on the displayed dialog box, remember that the servo amplifier definition is displayed in the text box below. Device 2. 3. 4. Informat Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in ion [Device]. Set the monitor target of the set device. Select this item when writing data to all servo amplifiers connected. During a monitoring, the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is monitored. When inputting data by Numerical Input, the data is written to all servo amplifiers connected during inputting; the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is monitored during other than inputting (displaying). All Network Selection Select this item when monitoring the servo amplifier of the Station No. specified. After selecting, set station numbers of servo amplifiers in the following range. 0 to 31: The servo amplifier of the Station No. specified will be monitored. 100 to 115: Specify the Station No. of the servo amplifier to be 5. 6. Select and input a key item for searching. Click the [Search] button. The items that matches to the specified condition are displayed. The display contents are as follows. Device : The GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier is displayed. Definition : The definition of the servo amplifier is displayed. Symbol : The abbreviated name for the servo amplifier is displayed. Select a device to be set. Clicking the [OK] button reflects the device selected by step 4 to the Device dialog box. POINT When selecting [All] in the Network setting The network No. 0 and Station No. FF are displayed on Device List and when printing. (Device List screen) GD10 101 GD11 : : 114 GD24 115 GD25 Setting range SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 100 14 16 For details of *1, refer to the following. GOT data register (GD) 13 15 monitored with a GOT data register (GD).*1 Station No. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Description Set the device name, device number, and bit number. The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Item Select a key item for searching. Function Name Search: Select this item when searching a device with the function name. Text Search: Select this item when searching a device with the character string. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 1. 12 6. INVERTER CONNECTION 4. 5. The device can be searched with the servo definition or other items on this dialog box to set a device. 0 to 31 (If setting a value out of the range above, a timeout error occurs.) 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 17 (2) MELSERVO-J2M-P8A If the above data length was not set, data would not be set to the servo amplifier correctly or the GOT can not monitor normally. (a) Monitoring • When the 16-bit data is handled as 32-bit data, the upper 16bits are displayed as 0. • When the 32-bit data is handled as 16-bit data, the lower 16bits only are displayed as 0. (b) Writing The GOT writes within the range of data length set. Note that the servo amplifier responds correctly while the written data is invalid in the servo amplifier side when the written data is outside the range of values which can be set by the servo amplifier. (3) Memory area for writing parameters Parameters are written to RAM or E2PROM of servo amplifier. (a) When written to RAM Remember that written parameters are cleared when power supply to the servo amplifier is turned off. (b) When written to E2PROM Written parameters are not cleared even when power supply to the servo amplifier is turned off.However, there are limits in the number of writing to E2PROM. If the data is frequently updated (more than once in an hour), write the parameters to the RAM. For details, refer to the manual of the servo amplifier used. 16 - 18 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set Device name Bit device Monitoring servo amplifier Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be connected and fully understand the operating procedures before monitoring. Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unexpected operation. The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable. (1) Parameters with * in front of it's abbreviated name For the parameter with * in front of it's abbreviated name, powering off the servo amplifier after setting then on makes the parameter valid. (2) Data length for setting virtual devices for servo amplifier Set the following data length for setting devices. • PRM, ST, AL, PA, PB, PC, PD, POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX : 16bits or 32bits (depends on the data of servo amplifier) • DI, DO, TMI, TMO, TMD: 32bits *2 Servo amplifier request (SP) Setting range available SP1 to SP2 Operation mode selection OM0 (OM) to OM4 Basic parameter Expansion parameter PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM29 PRM1029 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST2 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to AL13 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI)*3 DI0 to DI2 External output (DO) DO0 to DO1 *1 (PRM) Word device POINT Device No. represent ation Decimal Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) TMO0 (TMO) *1 *2 *3 Use PRM0 to PRM29 when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1029 are used when writing parameters to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Only reading is possible. POINT Precautions for SP, OM, and TMO devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. (b) Operation mode selection Device name Item Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― (c) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 *BPS PRM1, PRM1001 Regenerative brake option selection *REG PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output MD1 PRM4, PRM1004 Analog monitor 2 output MD2 PRM5, PRM1005 Analog monitor 3 output MD3 PRM6, PRM1006 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PRM7, PRM1007 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PRM8, PRM1008 Analog monitor 3 offset MO3 PRM9, PRM1009 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM10, PRM1010 Interface unit serial communication station No. selection *ISN PRM11, PRM1011 Slot 1 serial communication station No. selection *DSN1 PRM12, PRM1012 Slot 2 serial communication station No. selection *DSM2 PRM13, PRM1013 Slot 3 serial communication station No. selection *DSM3 PRM14, PRM1014 Slot 4 serial communication station No. selection *DSN4 PRM15, PRM1015 Slot 5 serial communication station No. selection *DSN5 PRM16, PRM1016 Slot 6 serial communication station No. selection *DSN6 PRM17, PRM1017 Slot 7 serial communication station No. selection *DSN7 PRM18, PRM1018 Slot 8 serial communication station No. selection *DSN8 PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter write inhibit *BLK PRM20, PRM1020 Serial communication time-out selection SIC *2 ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load factor ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs peak bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ― AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― (f) External I/O signal For manufacturer setting ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. Device name Item Symbol DI0 External input pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ― DI1 External input pin statuses CN5 ― DI2 External input pin statuses CN4A/CN4B ― DO0 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ― DO1 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ― Item Symbol ST0 Regenerative load ratio ― ST1 Bus voltage ― ST2 Peak bus voltage ― Device name TMO0 Item Forced output of signal pin 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (g) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (d) Status display Device name Current alarm number *2 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear PRM21 to PRM29 PRM1021 to PRM1029 AL0 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) ― Symbol MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Alarm history clear Item CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION SP2 Device name CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION ― CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Symbol Current alarm clear CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item SP1 INVERTER CONNECTION Device name 9 (e) Alarm Symbol ― 16 - 19 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION (a) Servo amplifier request (3) MELSERVO-J2M-*DU Bit device Device name *2 Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 Basic parameter Expansion parameter to to to SP6 OM4 TMB1 PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM84 PRM1084 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST10 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to AL21 AL205 AL215 AL235 (PRM) Word device Setting range *1 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) Device No. represent ation Decimal TMI0 *1 *2 TMD0 (a) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― SP6 External output signal resumed ― (b) Operation mode selection Forced output of signal pin TMO0 (for test operation) (TMO) Set data (for test operation) (TMD) The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. Device name Item Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) to Device name Item Symbol TMB0 Clears acceleration/ deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMB1 Temporary stop command (test mode) ― TMD2 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter POINT Device name Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. Item Symbol*1 PRM0, PRM1000 For manufacturer setting PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1 ― PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU PRM3, PRM1003 CMX Electronic gear numerator (Command pulse multiplying factor numerator) CMX PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear denominator (Command pulse multiplying factor denominator) CDV PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM7, PRM1007 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST PRM8 to PRM15, PRM1008 to PRM1015 For manufacturer setting ― PRM16, PRM1016 Alarm history clear PRM17 to PRM18, PRM1017 to PRM1018 For manufacturer setting PRM19, PRM1019 DRU parameter block *BLK PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM21, PRM1021 Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection) *OP3 PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4 PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain FFC *BPS ― (Continued to next page) 16 - 20 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set Symbol ― ST1 Servo motor speed ― *ENR ST2 Droop pulses ― TL1 ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ― ST5 Effective load ratio ― ST6 Peak load ratio ― ST7 Instantaneous torque ― ST8 Within one-revolution position ― ST9 ABS counter ― ST10 Load inertia moment ratio ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 PRM29 to PRM32, PRM1029 to PRM1032 For manufacturer setting PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2 PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2 PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 VG1 PRM37, PRM1037 Speed loop gain 2 VG2 PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC PRM40 to PRM41, PRM1040 to PRM1041 For manufacturer setting PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 PRM43 to PRM50, PRM1043 to PRM1050 For manufacturer setting PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 PRM52 to PRM53, PRM1052 to PRM1053 For manufacturer setting PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9 PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA PRM56 to PRM57, PRM1056 to PRM1057 For manufacturer setting PRM58, PRM1058 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1 PRM59, PRM1059 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2 PRM60, PRM1060 Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control LPF PRM61, PRM1061 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B PRM62, PRM1062 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B PRM63, PRM1063 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B PRM64, PRM1064 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP PRM66, PRM1066 Gain changing condition CDS PRM67, PRM1067 Gain changing time constant CDT PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting PRM69, PRM1069 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 CMX2 PRM70, PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PRM71, PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 PRM72 to PRM75, PRM1072 to PRM1075 For manufacturer setting PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 PRM77 to PRM84, PRM1077 to PRM1084 For manufacturer setting 10 (f) Alarm Device name 11 Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs servo motor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency ― AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs within onerevolution position ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio ― AL200 Alarm number from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― CMX4 AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ― 16 AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION ― MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Item Cumulative feedback pulses For manufacturer setting *1 Device name ST0 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION ZSP PRM25 to PRM26, PRM1025 to PRM1026 ― *OP6 ― ― ― TL2 ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 21 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION *DI1 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) ― 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Zero speed Symbol*1 15 INVERTER CONNECTION PRM24, PRM1024 Item MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (e) Status display Device name Item Symbol AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― (4) MELSERVO-J2S-*A ― *2 Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 to TMB1 Basic parameter /expansion parameter PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM84 PRM1084 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST14 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL25 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI)*3 DI0 External output (DO) DO0 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) TMI0 to TMD2 *1 (PRM) TMI0 Item Symbol Input signal for test operation ― (h) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 (i) Item Forced output of signal pin Symbol ― Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Word device (g) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) ― Device No. represent ation Decimal Forced output of signal pin TMO0 (for test operation) (TMO) Set data (for test operation) (TMD) Symbol Setting range Device name Bit device Device name *1 *2 *3 TMD0 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Only reading is possible. POINT Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. 16 - 22 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set VCM PRM26, PRM1026 Analog torque command maximum output TLC Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses SP2 Alarm history clear ― PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― PRM29, PRM1029 Analog speed command offset /limit offset VCO PRM30, PRM1030 Analog torque command offset /limit offset TLO PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2 PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2 PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 VG1 PRM37, PRM1037 Speed loop gain 2 VG2 PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC PRM40, PRM1040 For manufacturer setting PRM41, PRM1041 Input signal automatic ON selection *DIA PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1 SP5 External input signal resumed ― SP6 External output signal resumed ― (b) Operation mode selection Device name Item Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol *ENR ― TMB0 Clears acceleration/ deceleration time constant ― PRM43, PRM1043 Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5) *DI2 TMB1 Temporary stop command ― PRM44, PRM1044 Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14) *DI3 PRM45, PRM1045 Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8) *DI4 PRM46, PRM1046 Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7) *DI5 PRM47, PRM1047 Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8) *DI6 PRM48, PRM1048 Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9) *DI7 PRM49, PRM1049 Output signal selection 1 *DO1 PRM50, PRM1050 For manufacturer setting Function selection 6 (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM0, PRM1000 Control mode, regenerative brake option selection *STY PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM51, PRM1051 PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU PRM52, PRM1052 For manufacturer setting PRM53, PRM1053 Function selection 8 PRM3, PRM1003 Electronic gear numerator (Command pulse multiplying factor numerator) CMX PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9 Function selection A *OPA PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear denominator (Command pulse multiplying factor denominator) PRM55, PRM1055 CDV PRM56, PRM1056 Serial communication time-out selection SIC PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP PRM57, PRM1057 For manufacturer setting PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM58, PRM1058 NH1 PRM7, PRM1007 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant Machine resonance suppression filter 1 PST PRM59, PRM1059 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2 PRM60, PRM1060 Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control LPF PRM61, PRM1061 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B PRM62, PRM1062 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B PRM63, PRM1063 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B PRM64, PRM1064 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP PRM66, PRM1066 Gain changing condition CDS CDT PRM8, PRM1008 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1 PRM9, PRM1009 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2 PRM10, PRM1010 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3 PRM11, PRM1011 Acceleration time constant STA PRM12, PRM1012 Deceleration time constant STB PRM13, PRM1013 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant STC PRM14, PRM1014 Torque command time constant TQC PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM16, PRM1016 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear *BPS PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM67, PRM1067 Gain changing time constant PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM69, PRM1069 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 PRM21, PRM1021 Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection) *OP3 ― *OP6 ― *OP8 10 11 12 13 14 ― ― CMX2 (Continued to next page) 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Analog speed command maximum speed /limit maximum speed MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) PRM25, PRM1025 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION ZSP CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION FFC Zero speed 9 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Feed forward gain PRM24, PRM1024 Symbol *OP4 16 - 23 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) SP0 Item Symbol*1 PRM23, PRM1023 (a) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Function selection 4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Device name PRM22, PRM1022 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM70, PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PRM71, PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4 PRM72, PRM1072 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4 PRM73, PRM1073 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5 PRM74, PRM1074 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6 PRM75, PRM1075 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7 PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PRM77 to PRM84, For manufacturer setting PRM1077 to PRM1084 *1 (e) Status display Item Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ― ST1 servo motor speed ― ST2 Droop pulses ― ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ― ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― ST8 Effective load ratio ― ST9 Peak load ratio ― ST10 Instantaneous torque ― ST11 Within one-revolution position ― ST12 ABS counter ― ST13 load inertia moment ratio ― ST14 Bus voltage ― (f) Alarm Device name Symbol AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ― AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― (g) External I/O signal Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs servo motor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency ― AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque ― AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs within onerevolution position ― AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio ― 16 - 24 Item ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. Device name Device name Device name Symbol DI0 External input pin statuses ― DO0 External output pin statuses ― (h) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMI0 (i) Item Symbol Input signal status for test operation ― Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 (j) 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set Item Item Forced output status of signal pin Symbol ― Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) ― (PRM)*1 TMB0 to TMB1 PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM90 PRM1090 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST16 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL27 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 External output (DO) DO0 to DO1 Point table POS1 to POS1001 to POS31 POS1031 SPD1 to SPD1001 to SPD31 SPD1031 (position) (POS)*2 Point table Point table (speed) Word device OM4 (SPD)*2 Point table (acceleration time constant) (ACT)*2 Point table (deceleration time ACT1 ACT1001 to to DCT31 DCT1031 DWL1 to DWL1001 to DWL31 DWL1031 AUX1 to (auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 AUX1001 to AUX31 AUX1031 constant) (DCT)*2 Point table (dwell) (DWL)*2 Point table Input signal for test operation 11 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (a) Servo amplifier request Device name Decimal ACT31 ACT1031 DCT1 to DCT1001 to TMI0 (for test operation) (TMI) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (TMO) Set data (for test operation) (TMD) *1 *2 *3 *4 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Basic parameter /expansion parameter to Item Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― SP6 External output signal resumed ― (b) Operation mode selection Device name Item Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION (for test operation) (TMB) OM0 (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Instruction demand SP6 13 14 TMO0 (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) TMD0 to TMD2 Use PRM0 to PRM90 when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing parameters to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. When writing to a point table, use the area of 1001 to 1031 (E2PROM area) of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX. If writing to the area of 1 to 31 (RAM area) of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX, the value is not reflected. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. Device name Item Symbol TMB0 Clears the acceleration/ deceleration time constant ― TMB1 Temporary stop command ― CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (OM) to 15 INVERTER CONNECTION (SP) Operation mode selection SP0 Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Bit device Servo amplifier request Setting range POINT CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Device name*3 Device No. represent ation MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (5) MELSERVO-J2S-*CP 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 25 Device name (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item PRM46, PRM1046 Symbol*1 PRM47, PRM1047 PRM48, PRM1048 Item Symbol*1 Software limit + *LMP Software limit - *LMN Position range output address + *LPP Position range output address - *LNP PRM0, PRM1000 Command system/ regenerative brake option selection *STY PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM51, PRM1051 PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM52, PRM1052 PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM53, PRM1053 PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9 PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST PRM12, PRM1012 Rough match output range CRP PRM61, PRM1061 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1 PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG PRM62, PRM1062 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2 PRM14, PRM1014 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant *STC PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM63, PRM1063 LPF PRM16, PRM1016 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control *BPS PRM64, PRM1064 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B PRM65, PRM1065 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B PRM66, PRM1066 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B PRM67, PRM1067 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT PRM50, PRM1050 PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 PRM23, PRM1023 Serial communication time-out selection SIC Feed forward gain FFC PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR Ration of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment PRM24, PRM1024 PRM34, PRM1034 PRM35, PRM1035 PRM36, PRM1036 Position control gain 2 Speed control gain 1 PRM49, PRM1049 ― *OP4 PRM71 to PRM90, For manufacturer setting PRM1071 to PRM1090 *1 ― *OP8 ― ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. TL1 TL2 ― *OP6 (e) Status display Device name Item Symbol ST0 Current position ― ST1 Command position ― ST2 Command remaining distance ― GD2 ST3 Point table No. ― PG2 ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ― VG1 ST5 Servo motor speed ― Droop pulses ― PRM37, PRM1037 Position control gain 2 VG2 ST6 PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC ST7 Override ― PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation ST8 Torque limit voltage ― ST9 Regenerative load ratio ― ST10 Effective load ratio ― ST11 Peak load ratio ― ST12 Instantaneous torque ― ST13 Within one-revolution position ― ST14 ABS counter ― ST15 Load inertia moment ratio ― ST16 Bus voltage ― PRM40 to PRM41, For manufacturer setting PRM1040 to PRM1041 PRM42, PRM1042 PRM43, PRM1043 VDC ― Home position return position data *ZPS Moving distance after proximity dog DCT PRM44, PRM1044 Moving distance after proximity dog ZTM PRM45, PRM1045 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT 16 - 26 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs current position ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs command position ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs command remaining distance ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs point table No. ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs servo motor speed ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs override ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs torque limit voltage ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque ― AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs within onerevolution position ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs Load inertia moment ratio ― AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ― AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― DO0 Output device statuses ― DO1 External output pin statuses ― (h) Point table (position) Device name Item Symbol POS1 to POS31, POS1001 to POS1031 Point table (position) No. 1 to No. 31 ― SPD1 to SPD31, SPD1001 to SPD1031 Point table (speed) No. 1 to No. 31 ― ACT1 to ACT31, ACT1001 to ACT1031 Point table (acceleration time constant) No. 1 to No. 31 ― DCT1 to DCT31, DCT1001 to DCT1031 Point table (deceleration time constant) No. 1 to No. 31 ― DWL1 to DWL31, DWL1001 to DWL1031 Point table (dwell) No. 1 to No. 31 ― AUX1 to AUX31, AUX1001 to AUX1031 Point table (auxiliary function) No. 1 to No. 31 ― (i) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMI0 (j) Item Symbol Input signal for test operation ― Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 Item Forced output of signal pin Symbol ― MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) ― 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) ― Detailed data of current alarms 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Current alarm number AL1 Symbol 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION AL0 Item 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Device name Symbol 14 (k) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) ― 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Item 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Device name 9 (g) External I/O signal CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) (f) Alarm 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 27 (6) MELSERVO-J2S-*CL Bit device Device name *2 Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 Basic parameter /expansion parameter to TMB1 PRM0 to PRM1000 to PRM90 PRM1090 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST17 Alarm (AL) AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL28 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 External output(DO) DO0 to DO1 (PRM) Word device Setting range *1 Device No. represent ation (RR) *3 RR1 RR1001 The value of the generalRD1 purpose register (Dx) (RD) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) to to RR4 RR1004 to RD4 Decimal *1 *2 *3 *4 to TMD2 PRM0 to PRM90 are used when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing parameters to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Use the integer number when writing parameters to Rx. Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. POINT Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. 16 - 28 Item Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― SP6 External output signal resumed ― Item 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) Device name TMI0 TMD0 Device name Device name Forced output of signal pin TMO0 (for test operation) (TMO) Set data (for test operation) (TMD) (a) Servo amplifier request (b) Operation mode selection Current position latch data LD1 (LD) The value of the generalpurpose register (Rx) The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. Item Symbol TMB0 Clears the acceleration/ deceleration time constant ― TMB1 Temporary stop command ― *LPP Position range output address- *LNP Command system/ regenerative brake option selection *STY PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM53, PRM1053 PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9 PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF PRM61, PRM1061 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1 PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST PRM62, PRM1062 For manufacturer setting Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2 PRM12, PRM1012 PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant PRM63, PRM1063 LPF PRM14, PRM1014 *STC Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM64, PRM1064 Ratio of load inertia moment to Servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B PRM16, PRM1016 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear PRM65, PRM1065 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B PRM66, PRM1066 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B VICB PRM52, PRM1052 ― *BPS PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD ― *OP6 ― *OP8 ― PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK PRM67, PRM1067 Speed integral compensation changing ratio PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting ― PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4 PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT PRM23, PRM1023 Serial communication time-out selection SIC PRM71 to PRM73, For manufacturer setting PRM1071 to PRM1073 PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain FFC PRM74, PRM1074 OUT1 output time selection OUT1 PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO PRM75, PRM1075 OUT2 output time selection OUT2 PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO PRM76, PRM1076 OUT3 output time selection OUT3 PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 PRM77, PRM1077 Selected to program input polarity selection 1 SYC1 PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR PRM34, PRM1034 Ration of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2 PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 ST0 Current position ― PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 2 VG1 ST1 Command position ― PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2 ST2 Command remaining distance ― PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC ST3 Program Number ― PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC ST4 Step Number ― ST5 Cumulative feedback pulses ― PRM40, PRM1040 JOG operation acceleration/ deceleration time constant JTC ST6 Servo motor speed ― ST7 Droop pulses ― PRM41, PRM1041 Home position return operation acceleration/ deceleration time constant ZTS ST8 Override ― ST9 Torque limit voltage ― ST10 Regenerative load ratio ― PRM42, PRM1042 Home position return position data *ZPS ST11 Effective load ratio ― PRM43, PRM1043 Moving distance after proximity dog ST12 Peak load ratio ― ST13 Instantaneous torque ― PRM44, PRM1044 Stopper type home position return stopper time ST14 Within one-revolution position ― ST15 ABS counter ― PRM45, PRM1045 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ST16 Load inertia moment ratio ― ST17 Bus voltage ― PRM46, PRM1046 PRM47, PRM1047 Software limit+ TL1 TL2 DCT ZTM ZTT PRM78 to PRM90, For manufacturer setting PRM1078 to PRM1090 *1 ― ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (e) Status display Device name Item 10 11 12 13 14 Symbol *LMP 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Position range output address+ PRM0, PRM1000 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) *LMN CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION PRM51, PRM1051 PRM50, PRM1050 Software limit- CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION PRM49, PRM1049 9 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Symbol*1 Symbol*1 16 - 29 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item Item 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Device name PRM48, PRM1048 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Device name (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name (f) Alarm Device name Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Command remaining distance ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs Program Number AL15 Item Symbol AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past ― (g) External I/O signal Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― ― DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― Servo status when alarm occurs Step Number ― DO0 Output device statuses ― AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative feedback pulses ― DO1 External output pin statuses ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs Torque limit voltage ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs Regenerative load ratio ― AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs Effective load ratio ― AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load ratio ― AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs Instantaneous torque AL25 (h) Current position latch data Device name LD1 (i) Item Symbol Current position latch data ― The value of the general-purpose register (Rx) Device name Item Symbol RR1, RR1001 The value of the generalpurpose register (R1) ― ― RR2, RR1002 The value of the generalpurpose register (R2) ― Servo status when alarm occurs Within onerevolution position ― RR3, RR1003 The value of the generalpurpose register (R3) ― AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― RR4, RR1004 ― The value of the generalpurpose register (R4) ― AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs Load inertia moment ratio AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past AL203 (j) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx) Device name Item Symbol RD1 The value of the generalpurpose register (D1) ― ― RD2 The value of the generalpurpose register (D2) ― Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past ― RD3 The value of the generalpurpose register (D3) ― AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past ― RD4 The value of the generalpurpose register (D4) ― AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ― AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past ― 16 - 30 (k) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMI0 (l) Symbol ― Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set Item Input signal for test operation Item Forced output of signal pin Symbol ― (m) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant(test mode) ― TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses(test mode) ― to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― TMB1 to TMB6 SP3 External input signal prohibited ― PA1 PA1001 to to PA19 PA1019 SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― PB1 PB1001 to to PB45 PB1045 SP6 External output signal resumed ― PC1 PC1001 to to PC50 PC1050 I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 PD1 PD1001 to to PD30 PD1030 Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST14 Alarm (AL)*3 AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL25 AL205 AL215 AL235 External input (DI) DI0 to DI2 External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1 (PA)*1 Gain filter parameter (PB)*1 Extension setting parameter (PC)*1 *4 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) TMI0 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (TMO) TMO0 Set data (for test operation) (TMD) TMD0 TMD3 *1 *2 *3 *4 to (b) Operation mode selection Device name Decimal TMD1 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing data to the servo amplifier RAM. 1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Only reading is possible. Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. POINT Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― 12 (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) Item Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command ― TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command ― TMB3 Forward rotation direction ― TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ― TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ― TMB6 Remaining distance clear ― (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item Symbol*1 PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator (command pulse multiplying factor numerator) CMX PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator (command pulse multiplying factor denominator) CDV Auto tuning mode ATU PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR PA16 to PA18, PA1016 to PA1018 For manufacturer setting PA19, PA1019 Parameter block TLN *PLSS ― *BLK For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 13 14 *AOP1 PA8, PA1008 *1 10 11 Item Device name MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) OM0 Item MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Operation mode selection (OM) Device name CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION SP6 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION to CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) SP0 (a) Servo amplifier request 16 - 31 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Servo amplifier request (SP) Basic setting parameter Word device Setting range Device No. represen tation 9 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Bit device Device name *2 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION (7) MELSERVO-J3-*A (e) Gain filter parameter Device name (f) Extension setting parameter Item PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) PA2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control filter tuning mode (Advanced vibration suppression control) Symbol*1 FILT Device name Item Symbol*1 PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant STC PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1 PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2 PC7, PC1007 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3 SC4 VRFT Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5 PB6, PB1006 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2 PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6 PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7 PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 PC12, PC1012 VCM PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2 Analog speed command maximum speed /limit maximum speed PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PC13, PC1013 TLC PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC Analog torque command maximum output PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 PC15, PC1015 PC16, PC1016 PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 Electromagnetic brake sequence output Machine resonance suppression filter 2 PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP PB15, PB1015 PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS PB16, PB1016 Notch form selection 2 PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection PC20, PC1020 Station number setting PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1 PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2 PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3 PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 PC27 to PC29, PC1027 to PC1029 For manufacturer setting PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2 PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2 PC32, PC1032 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 CMX2 PC33, PC1033 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PC34, PC1034 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4 PB3, PB1003 PB17, PB1017 For manufacturer setting PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting ― NH1 NHQ1 NH2 NHQ2 ― LPF VRF1 VRF2 PB21 to PB22, PB1021 to PB1022 For manufacturer setting ― PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control selection *MVS PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1 PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT PB29, PB1029 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment at changing gain PB30, PB1030 Position loop gain at changing gain PG2B PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain at changing gain VG2B PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation at changing gain VICB PB33, PB1033 Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting for changing gain VRF1B PB34, PB1034 Vibration suppression control vibration resonance setting for changing gain VRF2B PB35 to PB45, PB1035 to PB1045 For manufacturer setting *1 16 - 32 GD2B ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set MBR *ENRS *SNO *SOP ― *COP5 ― PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD PC37, PC1037 Analog speed command offset /limit offset VCO PC38, PC1038 Analog torque command offset /limit offset TPO PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PC41 to PC50, PC1041 to PC1050 For manufacturer setting *1 TL2 ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs servo monitor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency ― AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command voltage /limit voltage ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command voltage /limit voltage ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque ― AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs within onerevolution position ― AL23 Load inertia moment ratio ABS counter ― *DO4 AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio ― ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ― AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past ― AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past ― AL235 Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past ― *DI1 PD4, PD1004 Input signal device selection 2 (CN1-16) *DI2 PD5, PD1005 Input signal device selection 3 (CN1-17) *DI3 PD6, PD1006 Input signal device selection 4 (CN1-18) *DI4 PD7, PD1007 Input signal device selection 5 (CN1-19) *DI5 PD8, PD1008 Input signal device selection 6 (CN1-41) *DI6 PD9, PD1009 For manufacturer setting PD10, D1010 Input signal device selection 8 (CN1-43) *DI8 PD11, PD1011 Input signal device selection 9 (CN1-44) *DI9 PD12, PD1012 Input signal device selection 10 (CN1-45) *DI10 PD13, PD1013 Output signal device selection 1 (CN1-22) *DO1 PD14, PD1014 Output signal device selection 2 (CN1-23) *DO2 PD15, PD1015 Output signal device selection 3 (CN1-24) *DO3 PD16, PD1016 Output signal device selection 4 (CN1-25) PD17, PD1017 For manufacturer setting PD18, PD1018 Output signal device selection 6 (CN1-49) *DO6 PD19, PD1019 Response level setting *DIF PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 For manufacturer setting PD25 to PD30, PD1025 to PD1030 For manufacturer setting *1 ― ― *DOP3 ― *DOP5 ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (h) Status display Device name Item Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ― ST1 Servo motor speed ― ST2 Droop pulses ― ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ― ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― ST8 Effective load ratio ― ST9 Peak load ratio ― ST10 Instantaneous torque ― ST11 Within one-revolution position ― ST12 ABS counter ― ST13 Load inertia moment ratio ― ST14 Bus voltage ― 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 33 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) AL11 Input signal device selection 1 (CN1-15) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION ― Detailed data of current alarms PD3, PD1003 Function selection D-5 Symbol AL1 For manufacturer setting PD24, PD1024 Item Current alarm number PD2, PD1002 PD23, PD1023 Device name AL0 *DIA1 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Input signal automatic ON selection 1 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Symbol*1 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Item 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Device name PD1, PD1001 9 (i) Alarm 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION (g) I/O setting parameter (j) External input Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― (k) External output Device name Item Symbol DO0 Output device statuses ― DO1 External output pin statuses ― (l) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMI0 Item Symbol Input signal for test operation ― (m) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 Item Forced output of signal pin Symbol ― (n) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/ deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMD2 For manufacturer setting ― TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ― 16 - 34 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set OM5 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 PA1 PA1001 to to PA19 PA1019 PB1 PB1001 to to PB45 PB1045 PC1 PC1001 to to PC50 PC1050 PD1 PD1001 to to PD30 PD1030 (PO)*1 PO1 PO1001 to to PO35 PO1035 Status display (ST)*4 ST0 to ST17 Alarm (AL)*4 AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL28 AL205 AL215 AL235 (PA)*1 Gain filter parameter (PB) *1 Extension setting parameter (PC)*1 I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 Option unit parameter External input (DI)*6 DI0 to DO0 Point table POS1 to POS1001 to POS255 POS1255 SPD1 to SPD1001 to SPD255 SPD1255 ACT1 ACT1001 ACT255 ACT1255 (position) (POS)*2 Point table (speed) (SPD)*2 Point table (acceleration time constant) (ACT) *2 Point table (deceleration time constant) (DCT)*2 Point table (dwell) (DWL)*2 Point table (auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 Point table (M code) (MCD)*2*3 to to DCT1 to DCT1001 to AUX1 to AUX1001 to AUX255 AUX1255 MCD1 to MCD1001 to MCD255 MCD1255 to (a) Servo amplifier request Device name Decimal DCT255 DCT1255 DWL255 DWL1255 Input signal for test operation TMI0 (for test operation) (TM0) The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. DO4 DWL1 to DWL1001 to TMI2 Item Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― SP6 External output signal resumed ― (b) Operation mode selection Device name Item Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― OM5 One step sending ― (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command ― Test operation (positioning operation) start command ― Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (TMO) TMO0 to TMO1 TMB2 Set data (for test operation) (TMD) TMD0 TMD3 to TMD1 TMB3 Forward rotation direction ― TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ― TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ― TMB6 Remaining distance clear ― *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 10 11 DI7 External output (DO)*4 to Decimal MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) to Use 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. Use 1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. When the GOT writes data to point tables, use 1001 to 1255 of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX, and MCD (E2PROM area). MCD cannot be used as a real number. Only reading is possible. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI4. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION OM0 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Operation mode selection (OM) (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) SP6 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) to Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 Basic setting parameter Word device Setting range POINT 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Bit device Device name*5 Device No. represen tation MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (8) MELSERVO-J3-*T 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 35 Device name (d) Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol*1 Item PB29, PB1029 Gain changing, Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Symbol*1 GD2B PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY PB30, PB1030 Gain changing, Position loop gain PG2B PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG PB31, PB1031 Gain changing, Speed loop gain VG2B PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PB32, PB1032 Gain changing, Speed integral compensation VICB PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 PA5, PA1005 Feeding function selection *FTY PB33, PB1033 VRF1B PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator *CMX Gain changing, Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU PB34, PB1034 VRF2B PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP Gain changing, Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP For manufacturer setting PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP PB35 to PB45, PB1035 to PB1045 PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit TLN *AOP1 PA13, PA1013 For manufacturer setting PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR PA16 to PA18, PA1016 to PA1018 For manufacturer setting PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *1 ― ― *BLK For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (e) Gain filter parameter Device name Item PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) PA2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control filter tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control) PB3, PB1003 For manufacturer setting PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting PB6, PB1006 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Symbol*1 FILT VRFT ― FFC ― GD2 PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2 PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 PB16, PB1016 Notch form selection 2 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (f) Extension setting parameter Device name Item For manufacturer setting ― PC2, PC1002 Home position return type *ZTY PC3, PC1003 Direction of home position return *ZDIR PC4, PC1004 Home position return speed ZRF PC5, PC1005 Creep speed CRF PC6, PC1006 Home position shift distance ZST PC7, PC1007 Home position return position data *ZPS PC8, PC1008 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT PC9, PC1009 Hold time home position return hold time ZTM PC10, PC1010 Hold time home position return torque limit value ZTT PC11, PC1011 Rough match output range CRP PC12, PC1012 Jog speed JOG PC13, PC1013 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant *STC PC14, PC1014 Backlash compensation *BKC PC15, PC1015 For manufacturer setting ― PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output Zero speed ZSP PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS Encoder output pulse selection Station number setting PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection NH1 PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 NHQ1 PC23, PC1023 For manufacturer setting PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 NH2 PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting NHQ2 PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 ― PC27, PC1027 For manufacturer setting LPF PC28, PC1028 Function selection C-7 PC29 to PC30, PC1029 to PC1030 For manufacturer setting For manufacturer setting PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting VRF1 PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting VRF2 PB21 to PB22, PB1021 to PB1022 For manufacturer setting PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control selection *MVS PB25, PB1025 For manufacturer setting ― PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT ― 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set MBR PC17, PC1017 PC20, PC1020 ― Symbol*1 PC1, PC1001 PC19, PC1019 PB17, PB1017 16 - 36 *1 ― *ENRS *SNO *SOP *COP1 ― *COP3 ― *COP5 ― *COP7 ― PC31, PC1031 Software limit + Low LMPL PC32, PC1032 Software limit + High LMPH PC33, PC1033 Software limit - Low LMNL PC34, PC1034 Software limit - High LMNH PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 PC36, PC1036 Status display selection TL2 PC37, PC1037 Position range output address + Low *LPPL PC38, PC1038 Position range output address + High *LPPH PC39, PC1039 Position range output address - Low *LNPL *DMD (Continued to next page) Symbol 9 PO7, PO1007 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 6 (CN10-35, 36) *ODI6 PO8, PO1008 MR-J3-D01 Output signal device selection 1 (CN10-46, 47) *ODO1 PO9, PO1009 MR-J3-D01 Output signal device selection 2 (CN10-48, 49) *ODO2 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) PO10, PO1010 Function selection 0-1 *OOP1 PO11, PO1011 For manufacturer setting PO12, PO1012 Function selection 0-3 *OOP3 *DIA1 PO13, PO1013 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1 ― PO14, PO1014 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 PO15, PO1015 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 offset M01 PO16, PO1016 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2 offset M02 PO17 to 20, PO1017 to PO1020 For manufacturer setting PO21, PO1021 MR-J3-D01 Override offset VCO PO22, PO1022 MR-J3-D01 Analog torque limitation offset TLO PO23 to 35, PO1023 to PO1035 For manufacturer setting ― Item Symbol PC41 to PC50, PC1041 to PC1050 For manufacturer setting *1 *LNPH ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (g) I/O setting parameter Device name Item Symbol*1 PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic ON selection 1 PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting PD3, PD1003 Input signal automatic ON selection 3 *DIA3 PD4, PD1004 Input signal automatic ON selection 4 *DIA4 PD5, PD1005 For manufacturer setting PD6, PD1006 Input signal device selection 2 (CN6-2) *DI2 PD7, PD1007 Input signal device selection 3 (CN6-3) *DI3 PD8, PD1008 Input signal device selection 4 (CN6-4) *DI4 PD9, PD1009 Output signal device selection 1 (CN6-14) *DO1 PD10, D1010 Output signal device selection 2 (CN6-15) *DO2 PD11, PD1011 Output signal device selection 3 (CN6-16) *DD3 PD12 to PD15, PD1012 to PD1015 For manufacturer setting PD16, PD1016 Input polarity selection PD17 to PD18, PD1017 to PD1018 For manufacturer setting ― (i) ― ― Status display Device name ― ST0 Current position ― *DIAB ST1 Command position ― ST2 Command remaining distance ― ST3 Point table No. ― ― PD19, PD1019 Response level setting *DIF ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ― PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 ST5 Servo monitor speed ― PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting ― ST6 Droop pulses ― PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 ST7 Override voltage ― PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting ― ST8 Override ― PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5 ST9 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― PD25 to PD30, PD1025 to PD1030 For manufacturer setting ST10 Regenerative load ratio ― ST11 Effective load ratio ― ST12 Peak load ratio ― ST13 Instantaneous torque ― ST14 Within one-revolution position ― ST15 ABS counter ― ST16 load inertia moment ratio ― ST17 Bus voltage ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (h) Option unit parameter Item Symbol PO1, PO1001 For manufacturer setting ― PO2, PO1002 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 1 (CN10-21, 26) *ODI1 PO3, PO1003 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 2 (CN10-27, 28) *ODI2 PO4, PO1004 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 3 (CN10-29, 30) *ODI3 PO5, PO1005 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 4 (CN10-31, 32) *ODI4 PO6, PO1006 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 5 (CN10-33, 34) *ODI5 12 13 14 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Device name 11 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION *1 ― 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Position range output address High CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION PC40, PC1040 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Device name Item CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Device name Symbol*1 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 37 (j) Alarm Device name (k) External input Item Device name Symbol Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― DI0 Input device statuses 1 ― AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― DI1 Input device statuses 2 ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ― DI2 Input device statuses 3 ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ― DI3 External input pin statuses 1 ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Command remaining distance ― DI4 External input pin statuses 2 ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs Point table No. ― DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 1 ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative feedback pulses ― DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 2 ― Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed ― DI7 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 3 ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs Override voltage ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs Analog torque limit voltage ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs Regenerative load ratio ― AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs Effective load ratio ― AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load ratio ― AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs Instantaneous torque ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs Within onerevolution position ― AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs Load inertia moment ratio ― AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from alarm history, Most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from alarm history First alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from alarm history Second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from alarm history Third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from alarm history Fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from alarm history Fifth alarm in past ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Most recent alarm ― AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history First alarm in past ― AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Second alarm in past ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Third alarm in past ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Fourth alarm in past ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Fifth alarm in past ― AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history Most recent alarm ― AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history First alarm in past ― AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history Second alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history Third alarm in past ― AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history Fourth alarm in past ― Detailed alarm from alarm history Fifth alarm in past ― AL16 AL235 16 - 38 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (l) External output Device name Item Symbol DO0 Output device statuses 1 ― DO1 Output device statuses 2 ― DO2 Output device statuses 3 ― DO3 External output pin statuses 1 ― DO4 External output pin statuses 2 ― (m) Point table (position) Device name Item Symbol POS1 to POS255, POS1001 to POS1255 Point table (position) No.1 to 255 ― SPD1 to SPD255, SPD1001 to SPD1255 Point table (speed) No.1 to 255 ― ACT1 to ACT255, ACT1001 to ACT1255 Point table (acceleration time constant) No.1 to 255 ― DCT1 to DCT255, DCT1001 to DCT1255 Point table (deceleration time constant) No.1 to 255 ― DWL1 to DWL255, DWL1001 to DWL1255 Point table (dwell) (DWL) No.1 to 255 ― AUX1 to AUX255, AUX1001 to AUX1255 Point table (auxiliary function) No.1 to 255 ― MCD1 to MCD255, MCD1001 to MCD1255 Point table (M code) No.1 to 255 ― (n) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 ― TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 ― TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 ― (o) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMO0 Forced output from signal pin (CN6) ― TMO1 Forced output from signal pin (CN10) ― (p) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ― OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 PA1 PA1001 to to PA32 PA1032 PB1 PB1001 to to PB64 PB1064 PC1 PC1001 to to PC80 PC1080 PD1 PD1001 to to PD48 PD1048 PE1 PE1001 to to PE64 PE1064 parameter (PF)*1 PF1 PF1001 to to PF48 PF1048 Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST41 Alarm (AL)*3 AL0 AL11 AL200 AL210 AL230 to to to to to AL1 AL25 AL205 AL215 AL235 Alarm (ALM)*3 ALM0 ALM11 ALM200 ALM220 ALM240 to to to to to ALM1 ALM52 ALM215 ALM235 ALM255 External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1 (PB) *1 Extension setting parameter (PC)*1 I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 Extension setting 2 parameter (PE)*1 Extension setting 3 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (a) Servo amplifier request Device name Decimal Input signal for test operation TMI0 (for test operation) (TM0) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (TMO) TMO0 Set data (for test operation) (TMD) TMD0 TMD3 *1 *2 *3 *4 to Item Symbol SP0 Status display data clear ― SP1 Current alarm clear ― SP2 Alarm history clear ― SP3 External input signal prohibited ― SP4 External output signal prohibited ― SP5 External input signal resumed ― SP6 External output signal resumed ― Item 12 13 (b) Operation mode selection Device name 11 Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ― OM1 JOG operation ― OM2 Positioning operation ― OM3 Motorless operation ― OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― 14 TMD1 Use 1 to 80 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, and PF when the GOT writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. Use 1001 to 1080 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, and PF when the GOT write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive devices. Only reading is possible. Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command ― TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command ― TMB3 Forward rotation direction ― TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ― TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ― TMB6 Remaining distance clear ― CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Gain filter parameter 15 INVERTER CONNECTION (PA)*1 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Operation mode selection (OM) (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices Only writing is possible. Numerical input cannot be used. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION SP6 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION to Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 Basic setting parameter Word device Setting range POINT 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Bit device Device name*2 Device No. represen tation MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 (9) MELSERVO-J4-*A 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 39 Item Symbol*1 PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency VRF11 PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency VRF12 *AOP1 PB21, PB1021 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency dumping VRF13 PB22, PB1022 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF14 PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1 PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP Gain switching condition CDL CDT Device name (d) Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY PA2, PA1002 Regenerative option *REG PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator (command pulse multiplication numerator) CMX PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator (command pulse multiplication denominator) CDV *1 PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU PB27, PB1027 PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP PB29, PB1029 Forward rotation torque limit TLP Load to motor inertia ratio after gain switching GD2B PA11, PA1011 PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN PB30, PB1030 Command pulse input form *PLSS Position loop gain after gain switching PG2B PA13, PA1013 PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain after gain switching VG2B PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2 PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation after gain switching VICB PA17 to 18, PA1017 to 1018 For manufacturer setting ― PB33, PB1033 VRF1B PA19, PA1019 Parameter writing inhibit *BLK Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency after gain switching PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 PB34, PB1034 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency after gain switching VRF2B PB35, PB1035 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency dumping after gain switching VRF3B PB36, PB1036 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency dumping after gain switching VRF4B PB37 to 44, PB1037 to 1044 For manufacturer setting PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter PB46, PB1046 Machine resonance suppression filter 3 PB47, PB1047 Notch shape selection 3 PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5 PB52, PB1052 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency VRF21 PB53, PB1053 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency VRF22 PB54, PB1054 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency dumping VRF23 PB55, PB1055 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF24 PB56, PB1056 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency after gain switching VRF21B PB57, PB1057 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency after gain switching VRF22B PB58, PB1058 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency dumping after gain switching VRF23B PB59, PB1059 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency dumping after gain switching VRF24B *TDS *AOP3 PA22, PA1022 For manufacturer setting PA23, PA1023 Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger setting DRAT PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 *AOP4 PA25, PA1025 One-touch tuning - Overshoot permissible level OTHOV PA26 to 32, PA1026 to 1032 For manufacturer setting *1 ― ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. (e) Gain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol*1 PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive filter II) PB2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control II) VRFT PB3, PB1003 Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― PB6, PB1006 Load to motor inertia ratio GD2 PB7, PB1007 Model loop gain PG1 PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2 PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1 PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 16 - 40 PB1 NHQ1 NH2 NHQ2 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ― CNHF NH3 NHQ3 NH4 NHQ4 NH5 PC38, PC1038 For manufacturer setting ― PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2 PC41 to 42, PC1041 to 1042 For manufacturer setting ― *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. Item PC43, PC1043 Symbol*1 PC44 to 50, PC1044 to 1050 For manufacturer setting PC51, PC1051 Forced stop deceleration time constant PC52, PC1052 For manufacturer setting ― PC53, PC1053 For manufacturer setting ― PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant STC PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC PC54, PC1054 Vertical axis freefall prevention compensation amount SC1 PC55 to PC59, PC1055 to PC1059 For manufacturer setting SC2 PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D SC3 PC61 to PC80, PC1061 to PC1080 For manufacturer setting PC5, PC1005 PC6, PC1006 PC7, PC1007 PC8, PC1008 PC9, PC1009 PC10, PC1010 PC11, PC1011 PC12, PC1012 Internal speed command 1 Internal speed limit 1 Internal speed command 2 Internal speed limit 2 Internal speed command 3 Internal speed limit 3 Internal speed command 4 Internal speed limit 4 Internal speed command 5 Internal speed limit 5 Internal speed command 6 Internal speed limit 6 Internal speed command 7 Internal speed limit 7 Analog speed command Maximum speed Analog speed limit - Maximum speed TPO Error excessive alarm detection level (f) Extension setting parameter Device name Analog torque limit offset *1 SC4 SC5 RSBR RSUP1 ― *COPD ― (g) I/O setting parameter Device name VCM ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. SC6 SC7 ERZ Item Symbol*1 PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic on selection 1 PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ― PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 2L *DI2L PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2H *DI2H Analog torque command maximum output TLC PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1 PD9, PD1009 Input device selection 4L *DI4L PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 5L *DI5L PD12, PD1012 Input device selection 5H *DI5H PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 6L *DI6L PD14, PD1014 Input device selection 6H *DI6H ― Zero speed ZSP PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS *ENRS PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 3L *DI3L PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 3H *DI3H PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO PD15 to 16, PD1015 to 1016 For manufacturer setting PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 8L *DI8L PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1 PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 8H *DI8H PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2 PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 9L *DI9L PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3 PD20, PD1020 Input device selection 9H *DI9H PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ― PD21, PD1021 Input device selection 10L *DI10L PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5 PD22, PD1022 Input device selection 10H *DI10H PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-6 *COP6 PD23, PD1023 Output device selection 1 *DO1 PC28, PC1028 For manufacturer setting ― PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2 PC29, PC1029 For manufacturer setting ― PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3 PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2 PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4 PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2 PD27, PD1027 For manufacturer setting ― PC32, PC1032 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 2 CMX2 PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6 PC33, PC1033 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 3 CMX3 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 4 PD31, PD1031 For manufacturer setting PC34, PC1034 CMX4 PD32, PD1032 Function selection D-3 PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PD33, PD1033 For manufacturer setting PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD PD34, PD1034 Function selection D-5 VCO PD35 to 48, PD1035 to 1048 For manufacturer setting PC37, PC1037 Analog speed command offset Analog speed limit offset PD29, PD1029 Input filter setting PD30, PD1030 Function selection D-1 *1 *DIF *DOP1 ― *DOP3 11 12 13 14 15 16 ― *DOP5 ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 *DIA1 PC13, PC1013 PC17, PC1017 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) PG1B MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) PB60, PB1060 PB61 to 64, PB1061 to 1064 9 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Symbol*1 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Item Analog torque command offset CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Device name CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Symbol*1 INVERTER CONNECTION Item Model loop gain after gain switching 16 - 41 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Device name Device name (h) Extension setting 2 parameter Device name Item PE1 to 40, PE1000 to 1040 For manufacturer setting PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 PE42 to 64, PE1042 to 1064 For manufacturer setting (i) Symbol ― EOP3 ― ST33 Setting time ― Oscillation detection frequency ― ST35 Number of tough drives ― ST36 to 39 For manufacturer setting ― ST40 Unit power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 W) ― ST41 Unit total power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 Wh) ― (k) Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J3-*A) Device name Item Symbol Device name PF1 to 8, PF1001 to 1008 For manufacturer setting PF9, PF1009 Function selection F-5 PF10 to 14, PF1010 to For manufacturer setting 1014 Electronic dynamic brake operating time PF16 to 20, PF1016 to For manufacturer setting 1020 ― Current alarm number ― Detailed data of current alarms ― *FOP5 AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative feedback pulses ― ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ― AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency ― DRT AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― ― AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs Instantaneous torque ― AL22 Servo states when alarm occurs Within onerevolution position(1 pulse unit) ― AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past ― AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past ― AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past ― DBT ― PF22, PF1022 For manufacturer setting PF23, PF1023 Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection level OSCL1 PF24, PF1024 Vibration tough drive function selection OSCL2 PF25, PF1025 Instantaneous power failure tough drive - Detection time CVAT Machine diagnosis function - Friction judgement speed PF32 to 48, PF1032 to For manufacturer setting 1048 (j) ― FRIC ― Status display Device name Item Symbol AL1 Drive recorder switching time setting PF26 to 30, PF1026 to For manufacturer setting 1030 Item AL0 PF21, PF1021 PF31, PF1031 Symbol ST34 Extension setting 3 parameter PF15, PF1015 Item Symbol ST0 Comulative feedback pulse ― ST1 Servo motor speed ― ST2 Droop pulse ― ST3 Cumulative command pulse ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ― ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― AL211 ― ST8 Effetive load ratio ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past ST9 Peak load ratio ― AL212 ― ST10 Instantaneous torque ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past ST11 Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) ― AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past ― ST12 ABS counter ― ST13 Load inertia moment ratio ― AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past ― ST14 Bus voltage ― ST15 to 31 For manufacturer setting ― AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past ― ST32 Internal temperature of encoder ― AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm ― 16 - 42 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ― AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past ― ALM205 Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in past ― AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past ― ALM206 AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past ― ALM207 AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past ― ALM208 Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in past ― ALM209 Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in past ― ALM210 Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm in past ― ALM211 Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm in past ― ALM212 Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in past ― ALM213 Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm in past ― ALM214 Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm in past ― ALM215 Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm in past ― ALM220 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― ALM221 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st alarm in past ― ALM222 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd alarm in past ― ALM223 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd alarm in past ― ALM224 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th alarm in past ― ALM225 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th alarm in past ― ALM226 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th alarm in past ― ALM227 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th alarm in past ― ALM228 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th alarm in past ― Alarm (extended for MELSERVO-J4-*A) Device name ALM0 Item Symbol ― ― Current alarm number ― ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms ― ALM11 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative feedback pulses ― ALM12 Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed ― ALM13 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ― ALM14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ― ALM15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency ― ALM16 Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― ALM17 Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― ALM18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― ALM19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― ALM20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― ALM21 Servo status when alarm occurs Instantaneous torque ― ALM22 Servo states when alarm occurs Within onerevolution position(1 pulse unit) ― ALM23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― ALM24 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio ― ALM229 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th alarm in past ― ALM25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― ALM230 ― ALM 26 to 42 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th alarm in past For manufacturer setting ― ALM231 ― ALM43 Servo states when alarm occurs Internal temperature of encoder Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th alarm in past ― ALM232 ― ALM44 Servo states when alarm occurs Setting time ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th alarm in past ALM45 Servo states when alarm occurs Oscillation detection frequency ― ALM233 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th alarm in past ― ALM46 Servo states when alarm occurs Number of tough drives ― ALM234 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th alarm in past ― ALM235 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th alarm in past ― ALM240 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm ― ALM241 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm in past ― ALM242 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past ― ALM243 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past ― ALM244 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm in past ― ALM245 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm in past ― ALM 47 to 50 For manufacturer setting ― ALM51 Servo states when alarm occurs Unit power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 W) ― ALM52 Servo states when alarm occurs Unit total power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 Wh) ― ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm ― ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past ― ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past ― ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past ― 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 43 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in past 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) ALM204 11 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION ― 9 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm in past Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm in past Symbol 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) AL231 (l) Item 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Symbol 15 INVERTER CONNECTION Device name Item 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Device name Device name Item Symbol ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in past ― ALM247 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in past ― ALM248 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in past ― ALM249 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in past ― ALM250 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in past ― ALM251 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in past ― ALM252 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 12th alarm in past ― ALM253 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 13th alarm in past ― ALM254 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 14th alarm in past ― ALM255 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm in past ― (m) External input Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― (n) External output Device name Item Symbol DO0 Output device statuses ― DO1 External output pin statuses ― (o) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Device name TMI0 Item Symbol Input signal for test operation ― (p) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name TMO0 Item Forced output from signal pin Symbol ― (q) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ― TMD2 For manufacturer setting ― TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ― 16 - 44 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 16.7 Precautions Station number setting in the servo system Make sure to establish servo system with the station number set with the host address. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) GOT clock function Since the servo amplifier does not have a clock function, the settings of [Adjust] or [Broadcast] by GOT clock control will be disabled. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 Servo amplifier/test operation using the GOT During the servo amplifier/test operation, when the communication between the GOT and the servo amplifier is interrupted for 0.5[ms] or more, the servo amplifier decelerates, stops, and then gets into the servo lock status. During the servo amplifier/test operation, continue the communication constantly by monitoring the status display of the servo amplifier on the GOT screen, etc. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.7 Precautions 16 - 45 16 - 46 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.7 Precautions ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 17.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2 17.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 3 17.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 6 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8 17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 17.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 17 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model name Robot controller Clock CRnD-700 Communication type Refer to Ethernet 17.2.1 For details on the connection with CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to 13). 17.2 System Configuration 17.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) Robot controller GOT Communication driver Connection cable Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 Robot controller Model name CRnD-700*5*6 Communication type Ethernet *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 Connection cable *1*2 Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e GOT Option device *3 length Model Number of connectable equipment *3 - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT 100m GT15-J71E71-100 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. A straight cable is available. When connecting QnUDE(H) and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, remember that the by cross cable is available. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. For the system configuration of CRnD-700, refer to the following manual. CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 17.3.3 Ethernet setting 17 - 2 Maximum segment 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 17.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. GT16 2. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 3. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 IP Address*1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network.(Only for connection via router) *1 Subnet Mask If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) Default Gateway*1 Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. *1 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) 1024 to 5010 to GOT Set the GOT port No. for the 5014 to 65534 Communication connection with the Ethernet module. (Except for 5011, 5012, Port No. (Default: 5001) 5013 and 49153) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. 0 to 5times When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the 3 to 255sec communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec) Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT 1.1.2 I/F communication setting Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected.(Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet Download Port download. No. (Default: 5014) 17.3.2 Communication detail settings The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: Range GOT NET No. GOT Click! Description Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 3 to 90sec 0 to 10000 ( 10ms) 17 - 3 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Item 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 4. 1. 18 CNC CONNECTION Set the channel of the connected equipment. 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 17.3.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 17.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen. GT15, GT12 Item Description Range GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.0.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet Download Port download. No. (Default: 5014) 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) 1024 to 5010 to GOT Set the GOT port No. for the 5014 to 65534 Communication connection with the Ethernet module. (Except for 5011, Port No. (Default: 5001) 5012, 5013 and 49153) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. 0 to 5times When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the 3 to 255sec communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec) Timeout Time *1 Delay Time 17 - 4 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 3 to 90sec 0 to 10000 ( 10ms) 17.3.3 17 Ethernet setting ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT Example of [Detail setting]. For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following. 17.4 PLC Side Settings Range Host N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239 (Default: blank) PLC No. Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 1 to 64 Type*1 Set the type of the connected Ethernet module. CRnD-70(fixed) CRnD-70(fixed) IP address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 5001) 1024 to 65534 *1 UDP (fixed) 20 21 Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type]. POINT (1) Example of [Ethernet] For examples of [Ethernet], refer to the following. 17.4 PLC Side Settings (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Communication UDP (fixed) ― 17 - 5 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Description The host is displayed. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*)) 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Item CNC CONNECTION 18 17.4 PLC Side Settings Model Robot controller 17.4.1 Reference CRnD-700 17.4.1 (2) For R32TB or R56TB Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration. POINT Robot controller (CRnD-700) For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to the following manual. CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL (For R56TB) System configuration Item ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. :1 PLC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.0.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed) Setting necessity at GOT connection Set value NETIP 192.168.0.19 GOTPORT 5001 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Communication settings (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. :1 PLC No. :2 IP address : 192.168.0.19 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed) ■2Parameter settings for CRnD-700 Parameter settings for CRnD-700 Item GOT NET No. 1 GOT PLC No. 1 GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway (1) For RT ToolBox2 Set value 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms (2) Ethernet setting Item Host Item NETIP GOTPORT Set value 192.168.0.19 5001 : Necessary 17 - 6 Setting necessity at GOT connection : As necessary : Not necessary 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 PLC Side Settings Ethernet setting No.1 Set value * N/W No. 1 PLC No. 2 Type CRnD-700 IP address 192.168.0.19 Port No. 5001 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 17.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) CNC CONNECTION 18 Confirming communication state of CRnD700 (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Windows®. (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION (2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Cable connecting condition • Parameter settings • Operation state of the CRnD-700. (faulty or not) • The IP address of the CRnD-700 specified for the Ping command. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17 - 7 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 17.6 Precautions When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller. When connecting to the multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. • Using a switching hub • More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) • Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 17 - 8 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set 18. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 18 17 CNC CONNECTION 18.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7 18.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 8 18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 16 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23 18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 18.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 3 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 18.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 18 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series MELDAS C6/C64 *1 Model name FCA C6 FCA C64 *1 *2 Clock Communication type RS-232 RS-422 18.2.1 MELSECNET/10*2 18.2.2 CC-Link(ID) 18.2.3 Ethernet 18.2.4 Use the NC system software version D0 or later. Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.. For the connection to CNC C70, refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to Chapter 13). 18 - 2 Refer to 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List 17 18.2.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration Direct connection to CPU MELDAS C6/C64 F311 cable GOT Communication driver Connection cable AJ71C24, MELDAS C6* CNC CONNECTION 18 F311 cable Communi cation type - RS-232 MELDAS C6/C64 *1 Cable model RS232 connection diagram GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment 20 - (Built into GOT) 15m GT15-RS2-9P 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) MELDAS C6/C64 *3 *2 RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*4 30.5m 21 GT15-RS4-9S - (Built into GOT) *1 *2 *3 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERMINAL. Connect the connector of the CNC side to SIO. To be prepared by the user, referring the following. *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Model name Connection cable MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) F311 Cable Production Drawing 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION . MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION CNC GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18 - 3 18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) POINT (1) Connectable network MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. • MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system • MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system (2) MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type. Communication driver MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H (When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used) MELDAS C6/C64 Expansion unit Communication driver (When MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used) GOT Connection cable CNC Model name Connection cable Expansion unit Communication type Cable model FCU6-EX878 MELSECNET/10 (Coaxial bus system) Coaxial cable MELSECNET/10 (Optical loop system) Optical fiber cable *3 GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-J71BR13*2 31 GOTs *1 GT15-75J71BR13-Z MELDAS C6/C64 FCU6-EX879 *1 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25*2 63 GOTs *1 GT15-75J71LP23-Z The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manuals. C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 *2 C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following. *3 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) For the coaxial cable and optical fiber cable, refer to the following manuals. C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 18 - 4 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 17 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Communication driver Communication driver CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID) MELDAS C6/C64 Expansion unit 18 CNC CONNECTION (When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link communication unit is used) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.2.3 GOT Connection cable Connection cable Model name Expansion unit Communication type MELDAS C6/C64 FUC6-HR865 CC-Link(ID) Cable model CC-Link dedicated cable *3 *1 GOT Max. distance Option device Model Number of connectable equipment GT15-J61BT13*2 26 GOTs *1 20 GT15-75J61BT13-Z The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manuals. C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 21 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION *3 C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION *2 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION CNC GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18 - 5 18.2.4 Ethernet connection Expansion unit MELDAS C6/C64 GOT Communication driver Connection cable Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 Connection cable*1 CNC Model name MELDAS C6/C64 Expansion unit FUC6-EX875 *4*5 *1 *2 *3 *4 Commun ication type Cable model Ethernet Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e GOT Maximum segment Option device length*3 *2 - (Built into GOT) 100m GT15-J71E71-100 GT16 User's Manual A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. For the system configuration of the expansion unit, refer to the following manuals. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 Select [AJ71QE71] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3. For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 18.4.3 Ethernet setting 18 - 6 128 GOTs (recommended to 16 units or less) The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 *5 Model Number of connectable equipment 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the CNC. 18 RS-232 cable CNC CONNECTION 18.3.1 Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram MELDAS C6/C64 side*1 (20 pin half pitch) 1 1 GND RD(RXD) 2 6 SD SD(TXD) 3 16 RD ER(DTR) 4 - - SG 5 11 GND DR(DSR) 6 - - RS(RTS) 7 - - CS(CTS) 8 18 ER(DTR) - 9 - - *1 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION CD 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION GOT side For details of the MELDAS C6/C64 side connection, refer to the following manuals. MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373 Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector 22 For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.3 Connection Diagram 18 - 7 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Set the channel of the connected equipment. 2. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 3. 4. 18.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: For GT16, GT15 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* For GT14, GT11 MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: For direct connection to CPU AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* For ELSECNET/10 connection MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 For CC-Link (ID) connection CC-Link Ver2 (ID) CC-Link (ID) For Ethernet connection Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 18.4.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 18 - 8 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit) 8bit (fixed) Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed) Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during Odd (fixed) communication. (Default: Odd) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. 3 to 30sec (Default: 3sec) Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 5times 0 to 300ms 17 (3) MELSECNET/10 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (2) MELSECNET/H • MNET/H mode • MNET/10 mode • MNET/H EXT mode Network Type Set the network type. (Default: MNET/H mode) Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto. reconnection)) slave station*1 • Self-loopback test*1 • Internal selfloopback test*1 • H/W test *1 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after 0 to 5times retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) Retry Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) Range Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec 20 POINT When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network using the MELSECNET/H communication unit, specify [MELSECNET/10 mode] as [Network Type]. 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination 0 to 300ms PLC. (Default: 0ms) Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) 1 to 1000times Valid when [Secured data send/ Secured data receive] is marked by the control station side network parameters of the MELSECNET/H network system. 21 22 Set the communication transmission speed. Transmission (Default: 25Mbps) 10Mbps/25Mbps Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as the network type, only 10Mbps can be set applicable. *1 19 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Mode Setting • Online (auto. reconnection) • Offline • Test between Description GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Range MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Description MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Item Item CNC CONNECTION 18 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 9 (4) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) Item (5) CC-Link(ID) Description Range Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. (Default: 0) 0 to E Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: Ver.1) Ver.1/Ver.2/ Additional/ Offline Expanded Cyclic Set the cyclic point expansion. (Default: Single) Single/ Double/ Quadruple/ Octuple Occupied Station Set the number of stations occupied by the GOT. (Default: 1 Station) 1 Station/4 Stations Input for Error Station Set Clear/Hold at an error occurrence. (Default: Clear) Clear/Hold Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300ms Station No. Transmission Rate*1 Mode *1 Transmission speed settings The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CCLink communication. Set value Description 0 Online: 156kbps 1 Online: 625kbps 2 Online: 2.5Mbps 3 Online: 5Mbps 4 Online: 10Mbps A Hardware test: 156kbps B Hardware test: 625kbps C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps D Hardware test: 5Mbps E Hardware test: 10Mbps For details of the hardware test, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link module to be used 18 - 10 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings Item Description Range Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec *1 (6) Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (a) GT16, GT14 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen. CNC CONNECTION 18 19 Range GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Description GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network.(Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected.(Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 21 Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet download. (Default: 5014) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Item Subnet Mask*1 Default Gateway *1 Ethernet Download Port No.*1 Set the GOT port No. for the GOT connection with the Ethernet Communication module. Port No. (Default: 5001) 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION IP Address*1 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION GOT 0 to 10000 ( 10ms) 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 11 (b) GT15, GT12 POINT (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Item Description Range GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.0.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network.(Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected.(Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Ethernet Download Port No. Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet download. (Default: 5014) 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) Set the GOT port No. for the GOT connection with the Ethernet Communication module. Port No. (Default: 5001) 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms) 18 - 12 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 0 to 10000 ( 10ms) 75JBR13-Z) POINT Switch setting of the communication unit When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit, the switch setting is not needed. Description Range Host The host is displayed. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*)) ― N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) PLC No. Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) CNC*1 RUN PC R.LOOP GROUP No. X100 X10 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 X1 (2) UDP (fixed) 2 3 23 4 5 6 F0 1 UDP (fixed) 45 9 0 1 5001 MODE 89 67 CD AB E (4) Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 5001) 4 5 6 2 3 2 3 X10 4 5 6 4 5 6 2 3 7 8 X1 2 3 9 0 1 9 0 1 STATION No. 4 5 6 7 8 (3) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION F.LOOP 19 20 GOT R/W E R CRC R OVER O AB.IF R TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD 7 8 IP address of CNC D.LINK T.PASS 7 8 IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) POWER DUAL SW.E M/S.E E PRM.E R CRC R OVER O R AB.IF TIME DATA UNDER LOOP SD RD 7 8 AJ71QE71 (1) NETWORK No. 21 9 0 1 9 0 1 (1) Network number setting switch For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239". Network number setting switch 4 Description Set value 5 6 2 3 7 8 X100 22 9 0 1 7 8 X10 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 X1 9 0 1 NETWORK No. Set the network No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. (Default: 001) 1 to 239 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 (2) Group number setting switch Group number setting switch 4 5 6 2 3 7 8 9 0 1 *1 GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z Station No. of CNC Type Communication GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit User's Manual Network No. of Set the type of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: QJ71E71) Port No. For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. 9 0 1 Item 18 CNC CONNECTION Switch setting (GT15-75J71P23-Z, GT15- ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Switch setting GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 18.4.4 *1 GROUP No. Description Set the group No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. (Default: 0) Set value 0: No group setting (fixed)*1 The GOT does not use the group number. Specify "0". 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Ethernet setting 18 - 13 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 18.4.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15- (3) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch 5 6 X1 9 0 1 5 6 2 3 4 X10 7 8 STATION No. 7 8 2 3 4 Description Set the station No. of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. Set to not duplicate other stations in the network. (Default: 01) 75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) Set value 1 to 64: GT1575J71LP23-Z 1 to 32: GT1575J71BR13-Z POINT Switch setting of the communication unit When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit, the switch setting is not needed. For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. 9 0 1 (4) Mode setting switch 89 CDE 23 67 AB MODE 45 Mode setting switch Description Online (Default: 0) GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual Set value 0 GT15-75J61BT13-Z Front side F0 1 Left side POINT RUN L RUN 01 EF 2 901 BCD 901 78 78 901 BAUDRATE 78 ON 1 2 (4) STATION NO. 1 23 456 (3) L ERR. 10 23 456 1 3 DA SW ON OFF 1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 1 5 DG 2 4 DB 7 NC NC 6 8 SLD (FG1) NC (1) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch 01 EF 2 345 89 67 A BCD GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit User's Manual (2) RD MODE 23 456 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection (2) When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT. (3) Self check test Select "3" to "9" as the mode setting switch to provide a self check test of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. For details, refer to the following manual. SD (1) 345 89 67 A (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. Description Set value Select the online mode. (Default: 0) 0 (fixed) (2) Station number setting switch 901 78 23 78 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 456 18 - 14 Description Set value 23 456 901 Station number setting switch Specify the station No. of the CC-Link communication unit. (Default: 01) 1 to 64 17 Description Specify the transmission speed. (Default: 0) Set value 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps 18 CNC CONNECTION 23 456 901 Transmission baudrate setting switch ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (3) Transmission baudrate setting switch 78 (4) Condition setting switches Description SW1 Specify input data status of the data link error station. (Default: OFF) OFF: Cleared ON: Held SW2 Specify the number of stations occupied. (Default: OFF) OFF: 1 station ON: 4 stations ON Setting switch Set value 19 1 2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Condition setting switches 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION POINT (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. 18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection (2) When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the GT15-75J61BT13-Z type CC-Link communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 15 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection Parameter setting Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer. However, in the case of using the default parameters or not requiring separate settings due to normal stations, it is not necessary to set the network (1) Control Station Parameter If you wish to place the control station in CNC and set the common parameters, set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. (a) Start I/O No. Slot Start I/O No. EXT1 0200 EXT2 0280 EXT1 EXT2 (b) Example of GX Developer setting For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 (2) Normal Station Parameter As for normal stations, it is not necessary to set parameters unless separate settings are required. The refresh parameters are set and written as required. In this case, the parameter setting of the first I/O No. is the same as in the case of the control station. 18 - 16 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 17 Expansion unit settings 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1) Set the operation condition. SW Description OFF ON 1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG) Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM) 16 Station OFF 4K points OFF 3 Used 4 Number of stations*2 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF OFF 7 B/W total points*2 (Valid when SW3 is ON) 8 Not used Always OFF 5 6 ON Station number setting switch 2) parameter*2 OFF OFF 8 Station ON 2K points ON OFF OFF ON ON 18 32 Station ON 6K points ON ON ON 64 Station 8K points Station number setting*2*3 (Setting range) 01 to 64: Station number Other than 01 to 64: Setting error 20 Setting switch of group number Group number setting Not used, fixed to 0 3) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Condition setting switch Settings CNC CONNECTION Switch name MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION No. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (1) FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable) 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Setting switch of network number Network number setting*2 (Setting range) 001 to 255: Network number Other than 001 to 255: Setting error 4) 22 5) *1 *2 *3 *4 Mode setting 0: Online 1: Cannot be used 2: Offline 3 to F: Test mode FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Mode setting switch *2 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network. Set as necessary. Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. Set the station type to the control station. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 17 (2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable) Switch layout No. Switch name Settings Set the operation condition. Condition setting switch 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1) SW Description type*1 OFF ON Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net 1 Network 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG) 3 Used parameter*2 Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM) OFF 4 5 Number of stations*2 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF ON 6 7 B/W total points*2 (Valid when SW3 is ON) 8 Not used 1) OFF OFF Station number setting*2*3 (Setting range) 01 to 64: Station number Other than 01 to 64: Setting error 3) 2) 4) Setting switch of group number Group number setting Not used, fixed to 0 3) Setting switch of network number 5) Network number setting*2 (Setting range) 001 to 255: Network number Other than 001 to 255: Setting error 4) Mode setting switch 5) *1 *2 *3 *4 Mode setting*2 0: Online 1: Cannot be used 2: Offline 3 to F: Test mode Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network. Set as necessary. Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. Set the station type to the control station. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 18 - 18 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings ON 2K poi nts ON Always OFF Station number setting switch 2) 8 Sta tio n OFF OFF 16 Sta tio n 4K poi nts OFF ON OFF ON 32 Sta tio n 6K poi nts ON ON ON ON 64 Sta tio n 8K poi nts CC-Link (ID) connection Make the communication settings by the setting switch in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865). Parameter setting Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary to set the network parameters. 17 Expansion unit settings (1) Expansion unit 18 1) CNC CONNECTION (1) Master station parameter It is necessary to set and write the network parameters to CNC with GX Developer. The following shows an example of parameter settings.Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. (a) Start I/O No. 2) 3) 19 Start I/O No. EXT1 0200 EXT2 0280 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 4) Slot ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.5.2 EXT1 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION EXT2 (b) Example of GX Developer setting 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1) 2) FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 19 (2) Contents of setting No. Switch name Settings Set the operation condition. Switch status Condition setting switch 1) Setting validity OFF ON Master station (Standby master station) Local station (Standby master station) Station type*1 Master station/local station Standby master station (Valid) (Valid) SW2 Not used Always OFF - - SW3 Not used Always OFF - - valid valid Invalid valid No. Description SW1 SW4 Data link error station input data status*1 Clear OFF SW4 Number of occupied Hold 1 Sta tio n OFF 2 Sta tio n ON 3 Sta tion ON 4 Sta tio n SW5 stations*1 OFF SW7 Not used Always OFF - - SW8 Not used Always OFF - - ON ON OFF This switch sets the unit operation status. Mode setting switch No. 0 Name Description Online*1 1 2) 3) Setting switch of station No. Master station Local station Automatic online return provided when data link is enabled Yes Yes Link with remote I/O net mode Yes No 2 Offline*1 Data link offline state Yes Yes 3 Line test 1*1 Line test 1 in offline state Yes No 4 Line test 2*1 Line test 2 in offline state Yes No Checks the parameter details Yes No Test Expansion unit (FCU6-HR865) Yes Yes 5 Transmission speed setting switch Parameter confirmation test*1 6 Hardware test*1 7 to F Not usable This switch sets the unit transmission speed. No. Description 0 156Kbps*1 1 625Kbps*1 2 2.5Mbps*1 3 5Mbps*1 4 10Mbps*1 5 to F Not usable This switch sets the unit station No.*1*2 (Setting range) Master station: 00 Local station: 01 to 64 Standby master station: 01 to 64 4) *1 *2 Set as necessary. Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 18 - 20 Settability 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings Ethernet (192.168.1.xx) [Communication with GOT] N/W No. :239 PLC No. :2 IP address :192.168.1.2 (1) Network parameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. (a) Unit No. Slot position Start I/O No. EXT1 0200 EXT2 0280 EXT3 0300 When mounted in EXT1 and EXT3 EXT2 EXT3 EXT1 EXT1 Unit2 Unit2 Unit1 Unit1 When mounted in EXT2 and EXT3 When mounted in EXT1 only EXT2 EXT3 EXT1 Unit1 Unit2 Unit1 When mounted in EXT2 only When mounted in EXT3 only EXT3 Unit1 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 20 21 22 EXT2 Unit1 18 19 Mounting position of extension unit When mounted in EXT1 and EXT2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION N/W No. :1 PLC No. :1 IP address :192.168.1.1 CNC CONNECTION N/W No. :239 PLC No. :3 IP address :192.168.1.3 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION The following shows the example of the system configuration when using the CNC monitor function. Set parameters related to Ethernet with MELSEC’s peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION System configuration 17 Parameter setting MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Ethernet connection FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 18.5.3 18 - 21 (b) Example of GX Developer setting (2) CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address, gateway address, subnet mask and port No. by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side. For details of the parameter setting operation, refer to the following. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 IV Setting the Ethernet IP Address 7-segment LED POINT IP address setting IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid. Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side, referring to the next page. Rotary switch 18 - 22 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * 18.7 Precautions 18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. (1) I/O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the CNC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual. MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual (1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. • MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) (2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the following. 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Monitoring range Only CNC of the same networks No. can be monitored in GOT. For details, refer to the following manual. 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Starting GOT with CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection) With the CNC connection (MESLSECNET/10 connection), the data link starts approximately 10 seconds after the GOT starts. When a network error occurs in the system alarm When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs with the CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection), the system alarm is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error factor is removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version E0 or later. CNC CONNECTION Using cyclic transmission 20 GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual (2) CC-Link Mode CNC is not compatible with CC-Link Ver.2. (3) When GOT malfunctions The cyclic output status remains the same as before becoming faulty. For transient transmission (1) Access range that can be monitored The GOT can access to the CNC mounting the master and local station of the CC-Link System. It cannot access another network via the CC-Link module. GOT startup in CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)), the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup. When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)), when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later. 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later. CC-Link (ID) connection 18 - 23 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Version of CNC 18.7.3 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Direct connection to CPU 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 18.7.1 18 18.7.4 Ethernet connection Version of CNC Via network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the CNCs in another network via the CNC (network module, Ethernet module, etc.). When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT. 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) When connecting to the multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and CNC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. • Using a switching hub • More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) • Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT Ethernet cable connection Ethernet cable is so susceptible to noise that you should wire power cables and electric supply cables separately. And you need to attach a ferrite core (attachment) on the control unit side. For details of the Ethernet cable connection, refer to the following C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 IX Connection Function with GOT LED1 1 turn Ferrite core Ethernet Ferrite core FG cable for Ethernet 18 - 24 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.7 Precautions GOT For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later. MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 1 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 1 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19. 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 17 19.2 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 3 19.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14 19.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 15 19.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 23 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 24 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 29 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 19.8 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 19 - 1 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly. Serial Multi-Drop Unit 19 - 2 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master module") directly The following table shows the connectable models. Clock Communication type Between CPU Between and master master module module and GOT 18 CNC CONNECTION Model name Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 19 Q12HCPU*1 C Controller module MELSEC-QS*5 Q12DCCPU-V*4 Q24DHCCPU-V QS001CPU 20 - MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION (Q mode)*5 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 21 RS-485 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSEC-Q Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION *1 22 RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 - L02CPU*3 L26CPU*3 MELSEC-L*5 L26CPU-BT*3 L02CPU-P*3 RS-232 RS-422 L26CPU-PBT*3 L02SCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. When connecting in direct CPU connection, the adapter L6ADP-R2 is required. Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 19 - 3 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Series ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 19.2 Connectable Model List Communication type Series MELSEC-Q (A mode)*3 Model name Q02CPU-A Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*2*3 Q2ACPU-S1 RS-422 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU RS-422 Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU)*2*3 Q2ASHCPU RS-422 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 RS-485 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 MELSEC-A (AnCPU)*4 A3ACPUR21 RS-422 A1NCPU*1 A1NCPUP21 *1 A1NCPUR21*1 A2NCPU*1 A2NCPUP21*1 A2NCPUR21*1 A2NCPU-S1*1 A2NCPUP21-S1*1 A2NCPUR21-S1*1 A3NCPU*1 A3NCPUP21*1 A3NCPUR21*1 MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)*4 A2USCPU RS-422 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 19 - 4 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later • A2SCPU: Version H or later GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later. PLC type HW/SW Version PLC type Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL Q4ARCPU AL - - Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored. SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List HW/SW Version 17 Communication type Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Series A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU (AnSCPU)*5 A2SCPU*1 18 RS-422 CNC CONNECTION MELSEC-A A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPUP21*1 A0J2HCPUR21*1 RS-422 19 RS-422 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A0J2HCPU*1 A0J2HCPU-DC24*1 MELSEC-A*5 A2CCPU*1 A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 20 A2CCPUC24-PRF A1FXCPU MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A2CJCPU-S3 RS-485 Q172CPU*2*3 Q173CPU*2*3 Q172CPUN*2 RS-232 RS-422 Q173CPUN*2 21 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 RS-232 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Motion controller CPU (Q Series) *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU RS-232 A273UCPU RS-422 A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 Motion controller A373UCPU CPU (A Series)*5 A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Q170MCPU RS-422 RS-422 A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later • A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later • A2CCPU: Version H or later When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 19 - 5 Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN Motion controller A172SHCPU CPU (A Series)*2 A172SHCPUN RS-422 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 MELSEC-WS MELSECNET/H remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC C70 Robot controller WS0-CPU0 RS-232 WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G RS-232 QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - NZ2GF-ETB - Q173NCCPU RS-232 CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) RS-232 FX0 RS-422 FX0S RS-422 FX0N FX1 RS-422 FX2 FX2C RS-485 RS-422 *1 FX1S MELSEC-FX FX1N RS-232 RS-422 FX2N FX1NC FX2NC *1 RS-232 RS-422 FX3G FX3GC FX3U RS-232 RS-422 FX3UC (Continued to next page) *1 *2 19 - 6 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 17 Communication type Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Series FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 18 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-D700 CNC CONNECTION FREQROL FREQROL-F500J RS-422 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 RS-485 FREQROL-F700P CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- DU MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J4- A GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A MR-J2S- RS-232 RS-422 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MR-J2S- 19 K(-A0) 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSERVO MD-CX522- 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MELIPM 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 19 - 7 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master module") in computer link connection The following table shows the connectable models. Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1 Q01CPU*1 Q02CPU*1 RS-232 RS-422 Q02HCPU*1 Q06HCPU*1 Q12HCPU*1 Q25HCPU*1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU RS-232 RS-422 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) - Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU (Q mode)*3 Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU RS-232 RS-422 Q10UDHCPU RS-485 Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU RS-232 RS-422 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q12DCCPU-V*4 C Controller module Q24DHCCPU-V MELSEC-QS QS001CPU RS-232 - L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L*3 L26CPU-BT RS-232 RS-422 L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 19 - 8 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 17 Communication type (A mode)*1 Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION MELSEC-Q Model name RS-232 RS-422 Q2ACPU (QnACPU)*1 Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU 18 RS-232 RS-422 CNC CONNECTION MELSEC-QnA Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU)*1 Q2ASHCPU RS-232 RS-422 19 Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 20 A2ACPU-S1 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION RS-485 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU RS-232 RS-422 21 A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 22 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2USCPU RS-232 RS-422 (Continued to next page) *1 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 19 - 9 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Series Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 MELSEC-A A1SHCPU (AnSCPU) A2SCPU RS-232 RS-422 A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 RS-422 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 - A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU RS-232 RS-422 RS-485 Q172CPU*1*2 Q173CPU *1*2 Q172CPUN *1*2 RS-232 RS-422 Q173CPUN*1*2 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 RS-232 RS-422 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU RS-232 RS-422 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 Motion controller A373UCPU CPU (A Series) A373UCPU-S3 RS-232 RS-422 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. *2 • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers. • Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later • Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. *3 19 - 10 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 17 Communication type Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Model name A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN Motion controller CPU (A Series) A172SHCPU RS-232 RS-422 A172SHCPUN 18 A173UHCPU CC-Link IE Field Network head module - WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 RS-232 RS-422 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB - CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 RS-422 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - FX0 - FX0S RS-485 20 - FX0N FX1 - FX2 FX2C 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MELSECNET/H remote I/O station WS0-CPU0 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MELSEC-WS CNC CONNECTION A173UHCPU-S1 *1 21 FX1S FX1N - FX2N MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSEC-FX FX1NC FX2NC *1 - FX3G FX3GC FX3U 22 - FX3UC (Continued to next page) *1 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 19 - 11 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Series Communication type Series Model name Clock Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-D700 RS-422 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 RS-485 FREQROL-F700P MELIPM MELSERVO 19 - 12 MD-CX522MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- DU MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J4- A K(-A0) RS-232 RS-422 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List The following table shows the [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 for which the GOT multi-drop connection is available. Connection type Serial Multi-Drop Connection driver DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-A DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-A DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC-QnU/DC DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU MELSEC-A MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION 18 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-L MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* 19 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION MELSEC-FX GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MELSEC-L QnA/L/Q CPU 20 MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX MELSEC-QnA/Q MELSEC-Q(MULTI) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION (RS-422) Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit Type CNC CONNECTION PLC GOT type MELSEC-L MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 MELSEC-FX POINT 21 User's Manual GOT Hardware version GT16, GT15*1, GT14 version A or later GT1155-QTBD version C or later GT1155-QSBD, GT1150-QLBD version F or later GT1055-QSBD, GT1050-QBBD version C or later GT1045-QSBD, GT1040-QBBD version A or later GT1030-L D , GT1030-H GT1020-L *1 D D version B or later Standard monitor OS 22 - Standard monitor OS[01.12.**]or later version E or later When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.14Q or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required. For details of the OS installation, refer to the following. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List 19 - 13 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION GT MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection The following GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection. For the confirming method of hardware version, refer to the following. 19.3 System Configuration Communication driver Communication driver Connection type dependent Multi-Drop (Slave) (Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit) Serial multi drop connection unit PLC Varies according to the connection type. Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit PLC Model Commun ication type Connection cable Connection cable Cable model RS485 connection diagram 2) RS485 connection diagram 1) RS485 For details of the system configuration between the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit and PLC, refer to the corresponding section. connection diagram 3) GT01-RS4-M GOT RS-485 GOT Connection cable GOT Option device Model GT15-RS4-TE 500m*2 - (Built into GOT) *5 19 - 14 GT14-RS2T4-9P*4 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT). The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT. When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases. Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.3 System Configuration 16 GOTs for Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit*3 RS485 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Number of connectable equipment GT15-RS4-9S connection diagram 4) RS485 Max. distance FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m) GT10-9PT5S*1 connection diagram 5) (GOT) 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT. 19.4.1 RS-485 cable 18 CNC CONNECTION Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1) 3 SDA SDB RDA RDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG SHELL SDA SDB RDA RDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG SHELL GOT side* (9 pin) 19 Serial multi drop connection unit *2 R R GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 Terminal block *6 SDA SDB RDA RDB SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG Terminal block *6 SDA SDB RDA RDB SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG SHELL 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG 3 GOT side* (9 pin) Terminal block *6 20 *4 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 3 GOT side* (9 pin) RDA*1 RDB*1 SDA*1 SDB*1 SG 21 *1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB. *2 *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". *4 *5 *6 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding. For the cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block, refer to the following. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION *5 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Precautions when preparing a cable(2) 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram 19 - 15 RS485 connection diagram 2) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *2 CON side*3(20 pin) SDA*1 SDA1(TXD1+) SDB*1 SDB1(TXD1-) RDA1(RXD1+) RDA RDB1(RXD1-) RDB SG SG NC *5 *5 NC NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) CON side*3(20 pin) SDA2(TXD2+) 6 SDB2(TXD2-) 8 RDA2(RXD2+) 10 RDB2(RXD2-) 12 SG 2 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 9 RDA1(RXD1+) *5 *5 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 RDB1(RXD1-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 RDA1(RXD1+) 9 RDB1(RXD1-) 11 SG 2 1 NC *5 3 4 6 8 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB. *2 *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". *4 *5 Connect a 110 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 19 - 16 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram CON side*3(20 pin) *5 NC NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) 6 8 10 R 12 2 1 3 4 5 7 9 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *4 17 RS485 connection diagram 2) RDB*1 SDB1(TXD1-) SDA*1 RDA1(RXD1+) *1 RDB1(RXD1-) SG SG NC *5 *5 NC NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) SDB2(TXD2-) 8 RDA2(RXD2+) 10 RDB2(RXD2-) 12 SG 2 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 RDA1(RXD1+) 9 RDB1(RXD1-) 11 NC 13 *5 14 *5 RSA(RTS+) NC 15 16 RSB(RTS-) NC 17 18 CSA(CTS+) NC 19 20 CSB(CTS-) SDA1(TXD1+) 5 SDB1(TXD1-) 7 RDA1(RXD1+) 9 RDB1(RXD1-) 11 SG 2 1 *5 3 4 6 8 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB. *2 *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". *4 *5 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding. *5 NC NC NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-) NC RSA(RTS+) NC RSB(RTS-) NC CSA(CTS+) NC CSB(CTS-) 6 R 8 18 *4 10 R 12 *4 2 1 3 4 19 5 7 9 11 13 20 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION SDB SDA2(TXD2+) 6 CNC CONNECTION SDA1(TXD1+) CON side*3(20pin) GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION RDA*1 CON side*3(20pin) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION CON side*3(20pin) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Serial multi drop connection unit *2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (For 2 pair wiring) 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram 19 - 17 RS485 connection diagram 3) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *2 GOT side*3 SDA*1 SDA1 SDB*1 SDB1 RDA1 RDA RDB1 RDB SG SG *5 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 FG 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 10 GOT side*3 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 FG 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 10 *1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB. *2 *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". *4 *5 Connect a 110 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding. GOT side*3 SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SG SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 FG 1 2 3 R 4 *4 9 5 6 7 8 10 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS485 connection diagram 3) (For 2 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *2 GOT side*3 RDA*1 SDA1 RDB*1 SDB1 SDA *1 RDA1 SDB *1 RDB1 SG SG *5 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 FG 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 10 GOT side*3 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 FG 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 10 *1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB, RDA/RDB. *2 *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". *4 *5 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 19 - 18 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram GOT side*3 SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SG SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 FG 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 10 R *4 17 RS485 connection diagram 4) SDB SDB RDA RDA RDB RDB *3 SG SG *5 RSA RSB CSA CSB *4 SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 *3 SG 5 *5 3 RSA RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 GOT side*2 *3 *4 SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 *3 SG 5 *5 3 RSA RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 *4 1 6 18 2 CNC CONNECTION SDA SDA GOT side*1 *3 7 5 3 8 4 19 9 *1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN". *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". *3 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "1pair" when using the connection conversion adapter. In that case, transition wiring is not necessary between SDA and RDA or SDB and RDB. *4 This is the connector pin No. of GT14, GT11, GT105 , or GT104 *5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GOT side*1 *3 20 main unit. or less). MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Serial multi drop connection unit *2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (For 1 pair wiring) RS485 connection diagram 4) (For 2 pair wiring) SDA RDA SDB RDB RDA SDA RDB SDB SG SG *5 RSA RSB CSA CSB GOT side*1 *3 *4 SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 SG 5 3 *5 8 4 9 RSA RSB CSA CSB GOT side*2 *3 *4 SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 SG 5 *5 3 RSA RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 *4 21 1 6 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION GOT side*1 *3 2 7 5 3 22 8 4 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Serial multi drop connection unit *2 9 *1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN". *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". *3 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "2pair" when using the connection conversion adapter. *4 This is the connector pin No. of GT14, GT11, GT105 , or GT104 *5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 main unit. or less). 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram 19 - 19 RS485 connection diagram 5) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *1 GOT side*2 GOT side*2 SDA SDA SDA SDA SDB SDB SDB SDB RDA RDA RDA RDA RDB RDB RDB RDB SG SG SG *3 *1 *2 *3 GOT side*2 *3 SG *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". 19.6.3 Setting switches Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows. 2-wire type/4-wire type: 2-wire type (1Pair) • When GOT is a terminal Terminating resistor: 110 • When GOT is not a terminal Terminating resistor: OPEN 1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 or less). RS485 connection diagram 5) (For 2 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit *1 GOT side*2 GOT side*2 GOT side*2 RDA SDA SDA SDA RDB SDB SDB SDB SDA RDA RDA RDA SDB RDB RDB RDB SG *1 *2 *3 19 - 20 SG SG *3 *3 SG *3 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". 19.6.3 Setting switches Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows. 2-wire type/4-wire type: 4-wire type (2Pair) • When GOT is a terminal Terminating resistor: 330 • When GOT is not a terminal Terminating resistor: OPEN 1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 or less). 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT Mixed wiring with various GOTs The GOT multi-drop connection can be used with various GOTs mixed. GT16, GT15 (GT15-RS4-9S) CNC CONNECTION SDA SDB RDA RDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG SHELL 18 GT16 (FA-LTBGTR4CBL□□) GT16, GT15 (GT15-RS4-TE) RSA RSB CSA CSB SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG RDB1 RDA1 SDB1 SDA1 RDB2 RDA2 SDB2 SDA2 SG FG Example of mixed wiring with various GOTs GT11, GT10 (GT10-9PT5S) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION RDB RDA SDB SDA RSA RSB CSA CSB SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG User-created terminal block Serial multi drop connection unit RDA RDB SDA SDB 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION SG MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram 19 - 21 Precautions when preparing a cable (3) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. (1) Cable Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm2 or more as a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following shows recommended model names and manufacturers of the cable to be used. Manufacturer Model Mitsubishi Cable Industries,Ltd Remark Two-pair cable of SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P Showa Electric Wire & Cable Co.,Ltd Sumitomo Electric Industries.,Ltd The Furukawa Electric Co.,Ltd 0.5mm2 Two-pair cable of KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P DPEV SB 0.3 3P DPEV SB 0.5 3P D-KPEV-SB 0.5 0.5mm2 Three-pair cable of 0.3mm2 Three-pair cable of 0.5mm2 3P IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2 IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2 Fujikura Ltd. Three-pair cable of 0.5mm2 Two-pair cable of 0.3mm2 Two-pair cable of 0.5mm2 Pair Shield Two-pair cable structural drawing example Three-pair cable structural drawing example (2) Cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block Create by yourself, referring to the following connection diagram. Example of connection diagram for 2 pair wiring SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG 1 6 2 7 5 3 8 4 9 Shell SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB FG Make sure to connect the wiring branched on the GOT side connector. Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.2mm2 or more. Use an applicable cable to D-sub connector. Wiring should be the shortest distance. 19 - 22 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Connecting terminating resistors When connecting a Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch. (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector switch. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 19.5.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. 19.5.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 20 Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times 21 Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec GOT Address Specify the station number of the host station in the system configuration. (Default: 0) 0 to 15 Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 ms The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Range 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps [Controller Setting] from the Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Set it according to the connected equipment. • Controller Type: Set it according to the connected equipment. • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Multi-Drop (slave) Description MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Item GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 4. Click! 18 CNC CONNECTION Set the channel of connecting equipment. POINT (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.5 GOT Side Settings 19 - 23 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Setting communication interface (communication settings) 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 19.5.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 19.5 GOT Side Settings 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.1 Write the OS 19.6.2 Write the standard monitor OS and communication driver according to the desired connection type onto the serial multi-drop connection unit. For the OS writing methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen design manual Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit interface setting on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer 3. For the communication interface driver, set the same communication driver as the serial multi-drop connection. For details on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer3, refer to the manuals. GT Designer3 Version 1. Click! 1. Check-mark a communication driver according to the desired connection type and click the [Write] button. 19 - 24 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit Screen design manual Setting the multi-drop system information function When checking the connection status of each GOT which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side, set the multi-drop system information function. The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side word device. 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Setting on the PLC side word device 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Controller setting GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 Set the following to the driver for the connected equipment. • Connection type dependent 21 The driver for connection with the GOT is fixed to the following one. • Multi-drop(Host) 2. Perform the detailed settings for the driver. ■ Communication detail settings 3. 1. Set [Use the system information of Multidrop] as necessary. Select [Use the system information of Multidrop] and click the [Set] button. The following dialog window is displayed. function 4. 5. Click the [Write] button when settings are completed. If the [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] dialog box is closed, communication setting contents for GT01RS4-M does not remain. • To maintain the communication setting contents, click 2. Set the PLC side word device to [Head Device (10 Points)]. In this example, "D0" is set. (export). ■ Exporting/Importing the communication setting contents • To use communication setting contents which are saved previously, click 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION ■ Setting the multi-drop system information MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 (import). ■ Exporting/Importing the communication setting contents 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19 - 25 (2) Assignment contents of the PLC side word device The following table shows the device assignment contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to "D0". Device Description D0 (Head device+0) Control signal 1-1 D1(Head device+1) Station information notification signal D2(Head device+2) (Reserve) D3(Head device+3) (Reserve) D4(Head device+4) (Reserve) D5(Head device+5) Slave station control signal D6(Head device+6) (Reserve) D7(Head device+7) (Reserve) D8(Head device+8) (Reserve) D9(Head device+9) (Reserve) (3) Details on the word device assignment contents (a) Control signal 1-1 Bit position Description 10 second cycle flicker signal bit1 to 15 (Reserve) < 10 second cycle flicker signal *1 > By the repetition of turning ON/OFF every 5 seconds, the connection between GT01-RS4-M and the PLC can be confirmed on the PLC side. When no repetition of this ON/OFF is observed, GT01-RS4-M is not connected to the PLC. OFF When writing or clearing data on the program area from the personal computer to the PLC using FA transparent function, flicker of the signal as shown above may be temporarily stopped. (b) Station information notification signal *2 This signal notifies the status of the slave station (GOT) which is connected to the master station (GT01-RS4-M). Only the bit corresponding to the number of connected slave station (GOT) is turned ON and other bits are turned OFF. bit15 bit14 .................. bit2 bit1 bit0 Station No. 15 Station No. 14 .................. Station No. 2 Station No. 1 Station No. 0 • 1: Connected • 0: Unconnected (Including communication error status) *2 19 - 26 Action The master station accesses all the slave stations (station 0 to 15). When the multi-drop system information is not used, the operation is the same. Turning on the bit corresponding to a station No. disconnects the specified slave station from the master station. Other than 0 bit15 bit14 .......... bit2 bit1 bit0 Station No. 15 Station No. 14 .......... Station No. 2 Station No. 1 Station No. 0 1...Connected 0...Unconnected 5sec ON *1 Device value 0 bit0 5sec (c) Slave station control signal This signal controls slave stations which are not updated by the master station. Usually, the master station accesses all stations (up to 16 stations). In addition, if stations are temporarily in communication error due to a power disconnection or screen data transfer during the steady operation, the automatic recovery of the station is executed for one station per ten seconds. Therefore, the automatic recovery may take maximum 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Using this control signal, the number of slave stations to be monitored by the master station can be reduced to the actual number of slave stations to be used by a user. This makes the automatic recovery processing smooth. If an error occurs in only one station, the time for the station to recover automatically can be reduced within 10 seconds. When the communication between GT01-RS4-M and the PLC becomes faulty, the station information notification signal is not updated. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit When the bits are off and the master station and the slave stations are in communication, the communication with the corresponding slave stations is disconnected if the above corresponding bits are turned on. setting contents (1) Export 17 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (3) For the connection with GOT ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Exporting/Importing the communication CNC CONNECTION 18 (2) 1. Description 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300 ms Import Enter the name of the file previously saved and open the file. The file format is [*.ini] (fixed). Range 21 22 (4) For the connected equipment Set the communication detail settings of the driver for controllers according to the connection type. Refer to each chapter. 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Item MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION After determining the storage location as necessary, name the file and save it. The file format is [*.ini] (fixed). 19 - 27 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 19.6.3 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. POINT Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit For details on the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit, refer to the following manual. Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit User’s Manual Terminating resistor selector switch 19 - 28 PLC communication selection switch 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 17 19.7.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. 18 CNC CONNECTION POINT Connection conversion adapter For details on the connection conversion adapter, refer to the following manual. Connection Conversion Adapter User’s manual GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1pair / 2pair signal selection switch FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter 19 - 29 19.8 Precautions Connecting GT16 and GT15 in multi-drop connection Using the multi-drop connection in the multichannel configuration (1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.12N or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required. (2) Device specification Network No. and station No. are not supported. Station number setting on GOT Set each station number so that no station number overlaps.When the station No. is duplicated, the GOT whose station No. is duplicated cannot be monitored normally. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order.There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.3 Station No.0 Station No.15 If a communication timeout error occurs when using the multi-drop connection in the multi-channel configuration, set the send delay time to the serial multi-drop connection unit side. ■ Communication detail settings Device update cycle • When the number of connected slave GOTs and the device points of each GOT increase, the device update cycle on the screen may get slower. In such a case, it is recommended to reduce the device points of each GOT. (Please consider 250 points as a guide of 1 GOT, and 750 points as a guide of the total points.) In addition, when a timeout error occurs, make the timeout time longer in the communication settings of the slave GOT. • When the device number is set randomly, the device update cycle becomes slower compared to the case that the device number is set consecutively.Therefore, it is recommended to set the device number consecutively. • Depending on the device points or combination, it may take time to switch the screen.At this time, the device update cycle of other slave station is also affected. FA transparent function The example of a Station No. setting Extended/Option function of GOT The extended/option functions of GOT shown below are not available. System monitor, Device monitor, Ladder monitor, A list editor, FX list editor, Intelligent unit monitor, Network monitor, Q motion monitor, Servo amplifier monitor, CNC monitor, Backup/restore, CNC data I/O, SFC monitor, Ladder editor, Log viewer, MELSEC-L troubleshoot, Motion SFC, motion program (SV43) editor, Motion program (SV43) I/O System alarm (GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11) The alarms of the serial multi-drop connection unit are displayed on the system alarm.The alarms of the connected PLC are not displayed. FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the GOT multi-drop connection system. (1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required. (2) Number of personal computers Only one personal computer can be connected to the multi-drop connection system. Only one personal computer Activating the serial multi-drop connection unit The master module detects a slave GOT, which is connected, at the startup.It may take time to detect again the slave station which is not detected at this point.Activate the master module in the condition that a communication can be made after the startup of the slave GOT. 19 - 30 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.8 Precautions (3) Monitor speed of GOT The monitoring performance slows down according to the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA transparent function, the monitoring performance of the whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result, timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 20 17 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 20.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2 20.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2 20.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 5 20.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 7 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 - 11 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 20 - 1 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) ( For GT10) Communication driver GOT (1st) PLC Communication driver MELSEC-FX GOT (2nd) Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. GOT (1st) *1 PLC Connection type Communic ation type For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU RS-232 Option device Model Commu nication type (Built into GOT) RS-422 (Built into GOT) RS-422 (Built into GOT) RS-422 (Built into GOT) RS-422 CONNECTION*4 Cable model RS422 connection diagram 1) RS422 connection diagram 1) RS422 connection diagram 1) RS422 connection diagram 1) GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*3 COMPUTER LINK (Built into GOT) GOT (2nd) *1 Connection cable RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m) + RS232 connection Max. distance Option device 30m (Built into GOT) 30m (Built into GOT) 30m (Built into GOT) 30m (Built into GOT) 3m (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) Model Number of connectable equipment 2 GOTs *2 diagram 4) (Continued to next page) 20 - 2 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List Communic ation type For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Option device (Built into GOT) Model RS-422 Cable model RS422 connection diagram 2) GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) RS-232 (Built into GOT) RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m) + RS232 connection COMPUTER Max. distance Option device 30m (Built into GOT) Model Number of connectable equipment *5 18 3m 2 GOTs 15m ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Connection type Commu nication type 17 GOT (2nd) *1 Connection cable (Built into GOT) diagram 5) LINK CNC CONNECTION GOT (1st) *1 PLC 19 *1 *2 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported. The 2nd GOT must be a RS-232 built-in product. *3 *4 *5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS232 connection diagram 2)) When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only QCPU (Q mode), LCPU. The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-422 built-in product. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION CONNECTION*4 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.2 System Configuration 20 - 3 20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface Communication driver Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A ( For GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) ( For GT10) Communication driver GOT (1st) PLC Communication driver MELSEC-FX GOT (2nd) Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. GOT (1st) *1 PLC Connection type Communica tion type Option device (Built into GOT) GOT (2nd) *1 Connection cable Model Commun ication type RS-232 Cable model GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or RS232 connection Max. distance Option device 15m (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT) Model Number of connectable equipment diagram 1) (Built into GOT) RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or RS232 connection diagram 1) (Built into GOT) For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or RS232 connection diagram 1) RS-422 (Built into GOT) RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or RS232 connection 2 GOTs diagram 1) GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *3 (Built into GOT) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION*4 RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m) + RS232 connection 3m 15m (Built into GOT) *2 (Built into GOT) *2 diagram 4) (Built into GOT) RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 3) GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) (Built into GOT) RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m) + RS232 connection 15m 3m 15m (Built into GOT) diagram 5) 20 - 4 *1 *2 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported. The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-232 built-in product. *3 *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS232 connection diagram 2)) When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only QCPU (Q mode), LCPU. 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.2 System Configuration 17 RS232 connection diagram 1) 1 6 RS RD (RXD) 2 1 SD (TXD) SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD) ER (DTR) 4 4 DR (DSR) GOT side GOT side SG 5 5 SG N.C. 1 1 N.C. DR (DSR) 6 3 ER (DTR) RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) RS (RTS) 7 7 CS (CTS) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) CS (CTS) 8 8 N.C. ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) - 9 9 N.C. SG 5 5 SG DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) RS232 connection diagram 5) Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) D-Sub 9-pin side Second GOT side RS(RTS) 7 8 CS(CTS) CS(CTS) 8 7 RS(RTS) N.C. 1 1 - 9 - - RD (RXD) 2 3 SD (TXD) SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD) ER (DTR) 4 6 DR (DSR) SG 5 5 SG DR (DSR) 6 4 ER (DTR) RS (RTS) 7 8 CS (CTS) CS (CTS) 8 7 RS (RTS) - 9 - - RS232 connection diagram 2) Second GOT side (terminal block) Untied wire color of GT10-C30R2-6P SD N.C. Brown RD Red ER Blue DR Yellow SG Green RS Purple Precautions when preparing a cable CS The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector NC For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. RS232 connection diagram 3) First GOT side 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Second GOT side (terminal block) N.C. 1 6 RS RD(RXD) 2 1 SD(TXD) SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) ER(DTR) 4 4 DR(DSR) SG 5 5 SG DR(DSR) 6 3 ER(DTR) RS(RTS) 7 7 CS(CTS) CS(CTS) 8 8 N.C. - 9 9 N.C. 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.3 Connection Diagram 19 20 21 22 (1) Cable length NC 18 CNC CONNECTION Connection diagram N.C. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION RS-232 Cable Second GOT side (terminal block) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) D-Sub 9-pin MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 20.3.1 RS232 connection diagram 4) 20 - 5 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 20.3 Connection Diagram 20.3.2 RS-422 cable Precautions when preparing a cable Connection diagram (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less. RS422 connection diagram 1) (2) GOT side connector GOT side GOT side SDA 1 2 RDA RDA 2 1 SDA RSA 3 4 CSA CSA 4 3 RSA SG 5 5 SG SDB 6 7 RDB RDB 7 6 SDB RSB 8 9 CSB CSB 9 8 RSB For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to "300 ". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS422 connection diagram 2) First GOT side Second GOT side (terminal block) RDA 2 1 SDA RDB 7 2 SDB SDA 1 3 RDA SDB 6 4 RDB SG 5 5 SG CSA 4 6 RSA CSB 9 7 RSB RSA 3 8 CSA RSB 8 9 CSB 20 - 6 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.3 Connection Diagram 4. This section explains with an example of the following system configuration. RS-232 cable 1st GOT GT11 RS-422 cable 2nd GOT GT11 Setting for the first GOT The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. 20.4.2 Communication detail settings Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (2) Settings of communication interface connecting to the second GOT 2. (1) Settings of communication interface connecting to the PLC 18 CNC CONNECTION Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 20.4 GOT Side Settings 2. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Standard I/F (RS232) • Driver: Set either of the following according to the Controller Type to be connected. For GT14, GT12, GT11 A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 MELSEC-FX For GT10 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX Click! 1. 2. Select [Common] the menu. [I/F Communication Setting] from The I/F Connection list window is displayed. Select the following. • I/F-1: RS422/232 CH No.: 9 Driver: Host (PC) Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20 - 7 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Click! MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 (3) [Transparent] setting (GT14 only) Setting for the second GOT Set the communication interface connecting to the first GOT. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. Select [Common] [Environment Setup] [GOT Setup], check [Enable GOT Setup], and select the [Transparent] menu. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple GOTs. For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Click! 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select [CH1] from the list menu. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Controller Type: Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication interface connecting to the PLC) • I/F: Standard I/F (RS422/232) • Driver: Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication interface connecting to the PLC) The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication interface connecting to the PLC) Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 20 - 8 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20.4.2 Communication detail settings 17 (2) MELSEC-FX (a) For the GT14, GT12, GT11 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 CNC CONNECTION 18 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300ms Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time) 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms) 0 to 300ms Transmission Speed 19 20 21 (b) For GT10 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Description Range MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Item Description MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Item Item Transmission Speed Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings Range 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps 20 - 9 (3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) Item Transmission Speed Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. Range 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps (4) MELSEC-A (GT10) Item Transmission Speed Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment. Range 9600bps POINT (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the GOT utility, refer to the following manual: GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 20 - 10 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings GOT's communication timing Using the FA transparent function When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or USB interface is used for the connection. 2nd GOT PC PC 19 • If the first GOT is turned on after a while the second GOT is turned on, because the communication start of the second GOT is delayed, a communication error may be detected at the second GOT. • If the system power is turned on simultaneously and it takes time to start the communication of the second GOT, a communication error may be developed. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION RS-232 USB PC 1st GOT (2) Adjusting communication timing (a) When powering up the system simultaneously Using the utility or selecting [GOT Setup] [Opening Screen Time] from GT Designer3, set the opening screen time adding a delay to each setting for the GOTs. During the opening process, communication with the connected device does not start. Example: Set value of [Opening Screen Time] (Inside (): set value) First module (5s) Second module (10s) (b) When powering on devices individually Turn on the connected device first, and then the first GOT, the second GOT, and so on. Monitoring stop condition for the GOT in the multiple-GT11 connection In the system where multiple GOTs are connected, performing either of the following monitoring stop operations on the preceding stage (the first GOT) also stops monitoring of the GOT on the next stage (the second GOT). When the GOT on the preceding stage resumes monitoring, the GOT on the next stage also resumes it. • When project data or the OS is written/read by GT Designer3*1 • When the GOT is set up*1 *1 Power supply (24V DC) Power feeding to GOT A timeout error occurs in GX Developer. The title screen is displayed. 1st GOT 2nd GOT Monitoring stopped Downloading First GOT's communication Communication of the 2nd GOT is enabled. user screen GT Designer3 USB The project data is being download. Second GOT's communication Retry user screen When PLC power disconnection occurs in the multiple-GOT connection In the system where multiple GOTs are connected, when the communication between the PLC and the first GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection and a disconnection of the communication cable between the PLC and the first GOT, the GOT waits for timeout against the communication request from the peripheral devices (GX Developer, etc.), and recovery of monitoring between the PLC and the GOT is delayed. 1st GOT 2nd GOT Monitoring Monitoring 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions 20 - 11 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1st GOT CNC CONNECTION (When connecting a personal computer to the first GOT, the FA transparent function can be used.) 18 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Adjust the communication timing so that, after applying the power to the system, the communication with the connected device (MITSUBISHI PLC) is performed in order starting from the first GOT (from the 1st GOT to the 2nd, and so on). When the communication is failed, retries are performed. And if the predetermined time has elapsed, a communication error occurs. 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION (1) GOT's communication timing ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 20.5 Precautions 20 - 12 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 1 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 4 21.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 7 21.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 41 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 42 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 21. 18 CNC CONNECTION 21 17 21 - 1 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? Multi-channel Function is a function to monitor up to four FA controllers (PLC CPU, temperature controller, inverter, etc.) on one GOT by writing multiple communication drivers in the GOT. (For GT155 , up to two controllers (two channels)) Installing multiple communication drivers Channel No.1 Bus connection Channel No.2 OMRON PLC connection Channel No.3 Temperature controller connection Monitoring the devices of FA controllers Channel No.4 Servo amplifier connection POINT (1) Before using the multi-channel function This manual describes the procedure to use the multi-channel function, based on the following system configuration example. 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection 21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection (2) System configuration when the multi-channel function is used The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multichannel function. For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration (3) Precautions for hardware To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required for some GOTs. The following table shows the required option function boards. GOT 21 - 2 Option function board GT16, GT12 Not necessary GT15 GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M GT14 Not necessary 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? (1) With a single unit of GOT, the system consisting of PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo amplifier and other controllers can be configured. PLC system Servo amplifier system 19 (2) Controlling FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) It is possible to control FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.). For example, it is possible to execute read/write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is satisfied, using the device of the PLC CPU on the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) as the trigger for action. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Can monitor different kinds of controllers on the same screen. Temperature controller system 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Condition is satisfied FXCPU Writing to a device (3) With one GOT, the Ethernet connection and the bus or network connection are available in combination. (GT16 only) One GOT can make the Ethernet connections and the bus or network connection. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established. Also, the GOT can monitor multiple controllers on an Ethernet network.(Multi-channel Ethernet connection) 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION PLC Temperatur controller Servo amplifier 18 CNC CONNECTION One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established. In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is possible. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Features of the multi-channel function 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Hub 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? 21 - 3 21.2 System Configuration 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established. In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is possible. Communication driver Bus(Q) Communication driver Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC OMRON THERMAC /INPANEL NEO MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M QCPU Connection cable Bus connection (Channel No.1) OMRON PLC Connection cable Direct CPU connection (Channel No.2) OMRON temperature controller Connection cable Temperature controller connection (Channel No.3) MELSERVOJ2-Super series Connection cable Servo amplifier connection (Channel No.4) PLC Connection type MELSEC-Q Bus connection OMRON PLC OMRON temperature controller MELSERVO-J2-Super Direct CPU connection OMRON PLC Direct CPU connection OMRON temperature controller GOT GOT Connection cable For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Channel No. Option device 1 GT15-QBUS 2 - (Built into GOT) 3 GT15-RS2-9P system configuration 4 GT15-RS4-9S For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. 1 Each chapter indicating the Each chapter indicating the system configuration 21 - 4 Communication driver 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration - (Built into GOT) 2 Model Number of connectable equipment 4 connected equipment for 1 GOT (4 channels) 2 connected equipment for 1 GOT (2 channels) 17 Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8 The following shows the drivers that can be set to Channels No. 5 to 8. For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller, refer to the chapter of each controller. Driver*1 5 to 7 Barcode Reader, RFID Controller, PC Remote Operation(Serial), Printer (Serial) 8 Barcode Reader, RFID Controller, PC Remote Operation(Serial), Fingerprint Authentication, Printer (Serial) 18 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Products, Peripherals) FINGERPRINT AUTHENTICATION DEVICE CONNECTION BAR CODE READER CONNECTION PC REMOTE CONNECTION PRINTER CONNECTION RFID CONNECTION 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Only one channel can be assigned to one driver. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION *1 Reference CNC CONNECTION Channel No. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION POINT 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 21 - 5 21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection One GOT can make several Ethernet connections and the bus or network connections. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established. Communication driver MELSECNET/H Communication driver Communication driver Ethernet/IP(AB)/ Gateway MELSEC-FX FXCPU Connection cable Direct CPU connection (Channel No.1) QCPU Connection cable MELSECNET/H connection (Channel No.2) Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 GOT ALLENBRADLEY PLC Connection cable Ethernet connection (Channel No.3) Robot controller Connection cable Ethernet connection (Channel No.4) GOT PLC Connection type MELSEC-FX Direct CPU connection QCPU MELSECNET/H ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC Ethernet Robot controller ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC Ethernet OMRON PLC Connection cable For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration 21 - 6 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration Channel No. Option device 1 GT15-RS2T4-9P 2 GT15-J71LP23-25 3 - (Built into GOT) Model Number of connectable equipment 4 connected equipment for 1 GOT (4 channels) 4 1 - (Built into GOT) 2 2 connected equipment for 1 GOT (2 channels) 17 Basics of interface selection This section explains basic knowledge of the multi-channel function. A general flow of operation from system selection for the multi-channel function to drawing is explained in 21.3.2 to 21.3.6. It is recommended to refer to 21.3.2 to 21.3.6 when making necessary settings using the multi-channel function for the first time. Multi-channel function specifications How the units are installed and the multi-channel function specifications are described below. 19 (1) Image drawing of unit installation GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 2nd stage Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively. (For the GT1655, GT155 , only one extension interface can be installed.) A communication unit installed at the 4th or higher stage cannot be used. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 3rd stage 18 CNC CONNECTION 21.3.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 1st stage Standard interface 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION For GT16 The RS-232 interface, the USB interface, the RS-422/485 interface, and the Ethernet interface are built in as the standard interfaces. For GT15 The RS-232 interface and the USB interface are built in as the standard interfaces. (Example: In the case of the GT1575) FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 7 (2) Specifications Specifications Item GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT155 GT14 Description GT12 GT156 GT16 • In bus connection and network connection (*1), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT. • For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 4 channels can be set. • When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is not included in the count of the number of channels. • The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not included in the count of the number of channels. Max. number of channels 4 channels GT15 • For the bus connection, network connection (*1), and Ethernet connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT. • When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count of the number of channels. • The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not included in the count of the number of channels. 2 channels GT14 • The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not included in the count of the number of channels. • For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 2 channels can be set. (GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only) • When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is not included in the count of the number of channels. (GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only) GT12 • For the Ethernet connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT. • When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count of the number of channels. • The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not included in the count of the number of channels. Max. installable number of modules • Multiple identical units can be installed only for serial communication units. • It is necessary to calculate the consumed current. 5 3 5 3 - (( This section ■ Calculating consumed current) • An RS-422 conversion unit is not included in the count of the number of units. (For GT1655, GT155 applicable.) Allowable number of stages Max. 3 stages (2 slots) Max. 3 stages (1 slot) Max. 3 stages (1 slot) - • A module that occupies 2 slots (*5, *6, *7) must be installed at the first stage. • For the video/RGB display, RGB output, and multimedia function, install the unit indicated in *6 at the first stage and the other units at the second or later stage. • When a unit indicated in *7 is used, other extension units cannot be installed. • The CF card unit must be installed on the last stage, if used. *1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) *2 *3 *4 Ethernet connection, MODBUS®/TCP connection Gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download Fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer (writing remote personal computer operation (serial), FA transparent function, OS install, project data) or serial printer GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13 *5 21 - 8 Max. 3 stages (2 slot) , the RS-422 conversion unit is not 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION User's Manual of GOT used. 17 CNC CONNECTION 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION *7 GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1, GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT, GT16MMMR GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z Usable units differ depending on the GOT. For units usable with each GOT, refer to the following manuals. 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION *6 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 9 Calculating consumed current For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller, refer to the below tables. For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller, refer to the below tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT. (1) Current supply capacity of the GOT Capacity (A) GOT type Capacity (A) GOT type GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13 GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74 GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74 GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2 GT1675-VN, 2.4 GT1575-S GT1665M-S GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2 2.2 GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2 GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, 1.3 GT1550-Q 1.3 (2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller Module type Module type Consumed current (A) GT15-QBUS, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUS2L 0.275*1 GT15-ABUS, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUS2L 0.12 GT16M-R2 GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1 GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1 GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1 GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1 GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT15V-75ROUT GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1 GT15-J71GF13-T2 0.96 GT15-CFCD 0.07 GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15 GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08 GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1 Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1 RFID controller *2 GT15-PRN 0.09 GT16M-V4 0.12*1 *1 *2 21 - 10 Consumed current (A) GT15V-75V4 GT15-80FPA 0.2*1 0*1 0.11 0.22 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function. For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit. When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current. (Maximum value is less than 0.3 A) 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V Total consumed current (A) 2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104 Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT. 18 (b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A) 1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774 Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed. CNC CONNECTION Current supply capacity of GOT (A) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 (3) Calculation example GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 11 21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi-channel function is explained below. Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below. System selection Determine the connection type and the channel No. to be used. Interface selection Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to 21.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) be used for the multichannel function. Checking the unit installation position Determine the communication unit installation position. 21 - 12 1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) Make settings for Communication Settings. 21.3.5 Setting for communication settings Confirm items to know before starting drawing. 21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Determining the connection type (1) GT16 For GT16, the combinations of the bus or network connection, the Ethernet connection, and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table. Ethernet connection 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)) 18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14.3 Ethernet Connection Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET) MODBUS®/TCP connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION (Continued to next page) CNC CONNECTION 5. BUS CONNECTION MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Bus connection 20 21 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Bus/network connection 18 Reference MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Connection type MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3.3 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 13 Connection type Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection • 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC • 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC • 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC • 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC • 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC • 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC • 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC • 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.2 Serial Connection • 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC • 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER Third party safety controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Third party servo amplifier connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER Third party temperature controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT • 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Microcomputer Connection (Serial) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL) MODBUS®/RTU connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION Serial connection 21 - 14 Reference 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings The following shows the applicable combinations of connection types, the number of channels, and restricted functions. FA transparent function RS-232 (a) • Bus/network connection: 1 channel • Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (b) • Bus/network connection: 1 channel • Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (c) • Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels • Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (d) • Bus/network connection: 1 channel • Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels • Serial connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (e) • Serial connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2 (f) • Ethernet connection:: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2 *1 18 USB 19 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function Remote personal computer operation Video display function Multimedia function Operation panel function External I/O function RGB display function Report function Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit The video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function cannot be used together. The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time. For details, refer to the following. 21 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only. When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available. 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION *2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 CNC CONNECTION Allowable combination of connection types Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Item : Restricted GOT to be used GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION : Allowed 17 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 15 (2) GT15 For GT15, the combinations of the bus, network, or Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table. Connection type Bus connection Bus/network/Ethernet connection Reference 5. BUS CONNECTION Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)) 18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 3.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14.3 Ethernet Connection Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET) MODBUS®/TCP connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION (Continued to next page) 21 - 16 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection • 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC • 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC • 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC • 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC • 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC • 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC • 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC • 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.2 Serial Connection • 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC • 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER Serial connection 18 Third party safety controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Third party servo amplifier connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER Third party temperature controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT • 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Microcomputer Connection (Serial) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL) MODBUS®/RTU connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 17 CNC CONNECTION 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Computer link connection 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Direct CPU connection ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Reference 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Connection type The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. : Allowed GOT to be used Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1595 GT1585 GT157 : Restricted Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1*2 FA transparent function GT155 RS-232 USB GT156 (a) • Bus/network/Ethernet connection: 1 channel • Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels Max. 2 channels *3 (b) • Serial connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels Max. 2 channels *3 *1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function Remote personal computer operation Video display function Operation panel function External I/O function RGB display function Report function Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit The video display function and RGB display function cannot be used together. The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time. For details, refer to the following. *2 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function and file transfer function (FTP client) can be used. Bus connection MELSECNET/10 connection *3 MELSECTNET/H connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection CC-Link connection MODBUS®/TCP connection For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only. When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available. (3) GT14 For GT14, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table. Connection type Ethernet connection CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 3. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 3.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14.3 Ethernet Connection Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET) MODBUS®/TCP connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Ethernet connection Serial connection Reference 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION (Continued to next page) 21 - 18 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER Third party temperature controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT • 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Microcomputer connection (Serial) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL) MODBUS®/RTU connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. : Restricted ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 19 20 21 • Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels • Serial connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 2 channels - *2 *3 (b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2 *3 22 Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1 GOT to be used Item Allowable combination of connection types *1 GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QLBDE GT1455-QTBD, GT1450-QLBD *3 USB Ethernet When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. Barcode function For details, refer to the following. *2 FA transparent function RS-232 RFID function 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only. When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available. When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not allowed. 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 19 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION (a) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION : Allowed CNC CONNECTION Third party safety controller connection 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection • 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC • 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC • 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Serial connection 17 Reference MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Connection type (4) GT12 For GT12, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table Connection type Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET) MODBUS®/TCP connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Ethernet connection Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection • 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC • 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC • 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC • 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC • 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC • 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC • 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC • 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC • 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection • 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection • 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC • 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC Third party safety controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Third party servo amplifier connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER Third party temperature controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1 • 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT • 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Products 2 • 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER • 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Microcomputer connection (Serial) Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL) MODBUS®/RTU connection Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals • 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION Serial connection 21 - 20 Reference 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Allowable combination of connection types GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1*2 GT1275 GT1265 FA transparent function RS-232 (a) • Ethernet connection: 1 channel • Serial connection: 1 channel Max. 2 channels *3 (b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels *3 *1 18 USB When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. Barcode function For details, refer to the following. RFID function *2 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download and gateway function can be used. *3 MODBUS®/TCP Connection For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only. When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available. CNC CONNECTION Item : Restricted 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION : Allowed 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 21 Determining the channel No. (1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot controller After determining the connection type to be used, determine the channel Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be used for the respective connection types. There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos. Set the channel No. by selecting [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu. 1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) (2) Channel No. of external devices (fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer and serial printer) When connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer or serial printer, select the channel No. (No.5 to No.8) for each external device. (a) Number of external devices that can be connected to the GOT One fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer or serial printer can be connected to one GOT. One driver must be set for one channel No. (No.5 to No.8) in the communication settings. (b) Operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) When using the operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication), the RFID controller is available for the channel No.8 only. (c) External devices that requires the power supply from the GOT When using the barcode reader or RFID controller that requires the power supply from the GOT, set the channel No.8. When the channel No.5 to No.7 is set, the GOT cannot supply the power. Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet. Selection of connection type Write down the name of connection type to be used. Write Check Sheet 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 21 - 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings To use the multi-channel function, add interfaces to the GOT with the following methods if required. (1) GT16 • Install communication units on the extension interfaces. • Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface, the RS422/485 interface, and/or the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. Extension interface 2 3rd stage Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively. (For the GT1655, only one extension interface can be installed.) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 2nd stage 1st stage Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT) 20 Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication. For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable. For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422 conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it. (For the GT1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.) 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT) Not used for the multi-channel function. Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT) Allows controllers to be connected via Ethernet. Up to four channels can be set. 22 Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT) Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication. 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION (Example: In the case of the GT1685) 18 CNC CONNECTION Extension interface 1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.3.4 21 - 23 (2) GT15 • Install communication units on the extension interfaces. • Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 3rd stage 2nd stage Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively. (For the GT155 , only one extension interface can be installed.) A communication unit installed at the 4th or higher stage cannot be used. 1st stage Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT) Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication. For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable. For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422 conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it. (For the GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.) (Example: In the case of the GT1575) Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT) Not used for the multi-channel function. 21 - 24 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings For the connection via the connection type selected in 21.3.3, select interfaces and communication units to be used. Select the interfaces and communication units according to the connection type by referring to the following. • Bus connection Reference for required interface and communication unit ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Selected connection type This section ■ GOT interface used for bus connection • MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) • MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 18 CNC CONNECTION • CC-Link IE Controller Network connection • CC-Link IE Field Network connection This section ■ GOT interface used for network connection • CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) • CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network), CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 19 • Ethernet connection GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION • Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) • MODBUS®/TCP connection This section ■ GOT interface used for Ethernet connection • Robot controller connection 17 • CNC connection (Ethernet connection) • Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) 20 • Direct CPU connection MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION • Computer link connection • CC-Link connection (via G4) • Third party PLC connection (serial connection) • Third party safety controller connection • Third party servo amplifier connection 21 • Third party robot controller connection • Third party temperature controller connection This section ■ GOT interface used for serial connection MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION • Microcomputer Connection (Serial) • GOT Multi- Drop Connection • MODBUS®/RTU connection • Inverter connection 22 • Servo amplifier connection • Other functions FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION • CNC connection (serial connection) This section ■ Interfaces and option units used for other functions POINT Number of units that can be installed to a GOT The number of units that can be installed to extension interfaces differs depending on the GOT type. GOT GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1595, GT1585, GT157 GT1655, GT155 GT12 , GT156 Number of units that can be installed Up to 5 units can be installed (up to 4 communication units) Up to 3 units can be installed (up to 2 communication units) - 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 25 GOT interface used for bus connection For the bus connection, use the following communication units. Model*1 Interface GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-ABUS(2) Bus connection unit *1 GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS(2), To mount multiple units, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required. POINT (1) Bus connection units to be used GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of serial connection channels. When using the multi-channel function for the first time, it is recommended to use GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15ABUS(2). (2) Restrictions by bus connection unit installation For the following functions, use the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2), regardless of the number of channels used for the serial connection. With the GT15-75QBUS(2)L or GT15-75ABUS(2)L, the following functions are not available. Function Remote personal computer operation(serial), Video display function, Multimedia function, Operation panel function, External I/O function, RGB display function, Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), Sound output function, Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download*1, *1 Gateway function*1, MES interface function*1 Since the GT16 has the Ethernet interface, the function is available regardless of the bus connection unit to be used. GOT interface used for network connection For the network connection, use the following communication units. Interface Model MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 GT15-J71BR13 POINT When using GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z (1) GT16 The GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable. (2) GT15 No unit can be mounted on the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z. (For the GT155 , the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable) Therefore, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is used for the serial connection. Because of this, the functions using the RS-232 interface, including the barcode function, are not available. The gateway function, the printer output, and others are also not available since no unit can be mounted on the above models. 21 - 26 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 GOT interface used for Ethernet connection ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION For the Ethernet connection, use the following interface built in the GOT and communication unit. (1) GT16 Interface 18 CNC CONNECTION Up to four channels can be used. (2) GT15 Ethernet communication unit Model GT15-J71E71-100 (3) GT14 Interface built in GOT *1 19 Name GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Interface Ethernet interface*1 Up to two channels can be used. (4) GT12 Interface Interface built in GOT Name 20 Ethernet interface POINT When using Ethernet download, gateway function, or MES interface function (1) GT16 The Ethernet download, the gateway function, and the MES interface function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT (one channel). (2) GT15 For using Ethernet download, the gateway function and MES interface function, only one Ethernet communication unit is required. (3) GT14 The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT (one channel). (4) GT12 The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT (one channel). GOT interface used for serial connection For the serial connection, provide interfaces equivalent to the number of channels by using the following interfaces built in the GOT and communication units in combinations. (1) GT16 Interface Name/model Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, *1 *2 *1*2 , RS-422/485 interface GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required. (For GT 1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.) 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 27 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Interface 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION *1 Ethernet interface*1 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Interface built in GOT Name (2) GT15 Interface Name/model Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1*2 Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, *1 *2 GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required. (For GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.) (3) GT14 Interface Name/model RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface Interface built in GOT Serial communication module *1 - The FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. (4) GT12 Interface Name/model RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface Interface built in GOT Serial communication module *1 - The FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT. Interfaces and option units used for other functions When the following functions are used in combinations, the number of available channels may vary according to the combinations of units Function Reference Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), Operation panel function, Sound output function Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), External I/O function, Remote personal computer operation (serial), Multimedia function, Video display function, RGB display function Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit (1) (b) (1) (c) download*1, Remote personal computer operation(Ethernet), Ethernet Gateway function*1, MES interface function*1 Fingerprint authentication, RFID function, Report function (when using the serial printer), Barcode function, Remote personal computer operation(serial), Hard copy function (when using the serial printer) *1 (1) (a) (1) (d) (1) (e) For GT16, the function is available regardless of the combinations of units because the GOT has the Ethernet interface. For GT15, the function is not available when the Ethernet communication unit cannot be mounted because of the combination of units. Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi-channel function to be used is restricted or not. If it is restricted, review the system configuration. (1) Number of stages taken up by the individual functions (number of slots) (a) Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), operation panel function, external I/O function and sound output function The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit is required depending on the function to be used. Each unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface. 21 - 28 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings A video input unit, an RGB input unit, a video/RGB input unit, an RGB output unit or a multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used. Each type of unit uses 1 stage (2 slots) of extension interface. 18 CNC CONNECTION Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT. The CF card unit or CF card extension unit is required. The CF card unit or CF card extension unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION (d) Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway and MES interface functions 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Functions with CF card unit or CF card extension unit • GT16 Use the interface built in the GOT. The Ethernet communication unit is not applicable. • GT15 An Ethernet communication unit is required. 21 An Ethernet communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface. If the GOT is already connected in the Ethernet connection, the Ethernet communication unit installed in the GOT is used. (e) Fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial), report function (when using a serial printer) and hard copy function (when using a serial printer) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION (c) 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (b) Remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Use the interface built in the GOT or a serial communication unit. A serial communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface. 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 29 (2) Combinations of units that affect the number of available channels The following are examples of unit combinations that affect the number of available channels. POINT Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) For details on the precautions for installing units on another unit, refer to the following. 1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are using. For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following. User's Manual of GOT used. Example 1) To add the printer output (when using a PictBridge compatible printer) and the Ethernet download in a system using the bus connection (1 channel), serial connection (3 channels), and the barcode function (a) For GT16 Mount the printer unit at the third stage, and use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. This enables both the printer output of the report function and the Ethernet download. Printer unit Serial communication unit Serial communication Serial communication unit unit Bus connection unit Barcode reader (b) For GT15 Because units can be mounted up to the third stage for GT15, the printer output of the report function and the Ethernet download cannot be used together. Printer unit Ethernet communication unit Serial communication unit Serial communication Serial communication unit unit Bus connection unit Barcode reader 21 - 30 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Example 2) To add the serial connection (1 channel) to the system using the bus connection (unit occupying 2 slots: 1 channel), the serial connection (2 channels), the video display, and the barcode function Serial communication Serial communication unit unit Bus connection unit Video input unit Barcode reader 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Since there are no available areas left for installing a unit, serial connection can be used for up to 2 channels. CNC CONNECTION 18 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 31 Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet. Selection of interface (communication unit) Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used Write Check Sheet for each of the connection type. 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet (Continued to next page) 21 - 32 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 Write down the following items to the check sheet. 1. 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type. CNC CONNECTION 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 21 * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION When GT15-QBUS2/ABUS2 is used, although GT15-RS2-9P is installed physically at the 2nd stage of extend interface 2, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. Therefore, in the check sheet, the position should be entered as 1st stage. 2. After writing down the names of communication units, write down CH No. to be assigned to respective units based on the entry in ■ Check Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface). 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Write Check Sheet ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Attaching the communication unit (Continued to next page) 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 33 3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the respective connection types, refer to the following. Chapters of each respective connection type * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 21 - 34 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 Setting for communication settings Make communication settings based on the interface and the installation position of the respective communication units. Extend interface 1 Extend interface 2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 21.3.5 18 CNC CONNECTION 3rd stage 2nd stage 1st stage 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION RS-232 interface built in a GOT MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet where the necessary information has been written. The positions that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are Check specified on the check sheet by numbers (GT16: (1) to (9), GT15: (1) to (7)). 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. This completes the setting for Communication Settings. Create a screen with GT Designer3. 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 35 Example: Setting example for "Bus connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (3 channels) + Bar code reader" (In the case of the GT157 ) 3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) OMRON temperature controller connection 2 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) FXCPU direction CPU connection 4 1 Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2) Serial communication unit (GT15-RS4-9P) Inverter connection QCPU bus connection 5 Bar code reader 5 1 2 3 4 21 - 36 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (1 channel)" (In the case of the GT155 ) Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) FXCPU direction CPU connection MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25) CNC CONNECTION 18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 37 Example: Setting example for Ethernet connection (4 channels) (In the case of the GT1685) Ethernet interface built in the GOT QCPU Ethernet connection YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet connection YASKAWA PLC Ethernet connection MODBUS /TCP connection 21 - 38 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.3.6 17 Items to be checked before starting drawing ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set beforehand when using the multi-channel function. Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No. 18 Screen Design Manual CNC CONNECTION GT Designer3 Version GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 Click the device setting button. Click the controller to be set. 20 Set the device. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Accessible range for monitoring The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi-channel function is used. 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 FXCPU 22 Accessible range is not changed. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION FXCPU 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 39 Clock function Set the controller for which adjust/broadcast should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 10:10 10:10 CH No. 1 Mitsubishi PLC M TS IUBISHI CH No. 2 Servo amplifier C H ARGE 10:10 CH No. 3 OMRON PLC Broadcast is executed for CH No. 1 and CH No. 3. CH No. 4 Temperature controller FA transparent function Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No. 22.5.1 Setting communication interface The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility. To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility. CH No. 1 Mitsubishi PLC M TS IUBISHI C H ARGE CH No. 2 Servo amplifier CH No. 3 OMRON PLC CH No. 4 Temperature controller FA transparent function is executed for CH No. 1. Station No. switching function Set the controller for which the station No. switching function should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual CH No. 1 Mitsubishi PLC MITSUBISH I CHA RGE CH No. 2 Servo amplifier CH No. 3 OMRON PLC Station No. switching is executed for CH No. 1. 21 - 40 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings CH No. 4 Temperature controller 17 Precautions for hardware To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required according to the GOT. The following shows required option function boards according to the GOT. Not necessary GT15 GT15-QFNB, GT15-MESB48M GT14 Not necessary GT12 Not necessary GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M 19 Precautions for use Occurrence of the same system alarm at different channels When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm. Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT. Confirmation of the channel No. at which a system alarm occurred When a system alarm occurred, confirm the channel No. where the alarm occurred, using the procedure indicated below. (1) Check by [System alarm display] of the utility. 20 21 GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION GT15 User's Manual GT14 User's Manual (2) Monitor the internal devices of the GOT. Screen Design Manual 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION GT Designer3 Version GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GT16 21.4.2 18 Option function board CNC CONNECTION GOT MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 21.4 Precautions 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.4 Precautions 21 - 41 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used. Sections 21.3.3 to 21.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet. Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the setting for the multi-channel function. Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet. Selection of connection type Write Check Sheet Enter the name of connection type to be used. Section 2.8.10 Multi-channel function check sheet The following symbols are used for each purpose. Indicates parts where items and details are to be written. Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet. Write Check Sheet Indicates parts where written details are to be checked. Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings. Check 21 - 42 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Shows items and contents to be written on the check sheet. Also describes an example of the check sheet. (1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller CPU, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot controller (No.1 to No.4) 2 3 4 ( Selection of interface (communication unit) 21.3.3) ( 21.3.4) Connection name Connection name Connection name Connection name 19 (2) Channel No. of fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer, serial printer (No.5 to No.8) 7 8 21.3.3) ( 21.3.4) Connection name Connection name Connection name Connection name 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6 ( Selection of interface (communication unit) 21 RS-232 interface built in a GOT MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 5 Selection of connection type 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION CH No. 18 CNC CONNECTION 1 Selection of connection type GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION CH No. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Check sheet No.1 (selection of connection type and interface) 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 21 - 43 Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface) Attaching the communication unit ( 1.3.7) (1) GT16 Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. (1) Driver name (4) 2rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 2rd stage Com. unit name CH No. (2) Driver name (5) 1rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1rd stage Com. unit name CH No. (3) Driver name (6) Standard interface 3 (only one connection) Connecting a controller Com. unit name CH No. Driver name Standard interface 1 (only one connection) Connecting a controller (8) Com. unit name CH No. Driver name (7) Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer 8 (7) Connecting a personal computer (8) 9 (9) Host (PC) Standard interface 4 (only one connection) (3) Connecting a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection) (2) (1) Com. unit name CH No. Driver name (9) (6) Connecting a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection) (5) Com. unit name CH No. Driver name (4) Multi Com. unit name CH No. 21 - 44 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Multi-channel Ethernet connection Driver name 17 Extension interface 1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (2) GT15 Extension interface 2 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage Com. unit name (1) CH No. Driver name CH No. Driver name CH No. Driver name (4) 18 2nd stage CH No. Driver name 2nd stage Com. unit name (2) CNC CONNECTION Com. unit name (5) 1st stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1st stage Com. unit name (3) (6) (only one connection) Connecting a controller Com. unit name (7) CH No. 20 Driver name (7) Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer 8 (3) (2) (1) Connecting a personal computer 9 Host (PC) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Standard interface 1 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION (6) (5) (4) 22 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION * For the GT155 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 21 - 45 21 - 46 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 22 17 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22. 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 - 11 22.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 26 22.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 36 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 39 22.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 67 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 22 - 1 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function The FA transparent function allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi PLC to be read, written and monitored from a personal computer connected via a GOT. A 1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348 Bus connection cable RS-232/RS-422 cable Ethernet connection cable RS-232 cable USB cable Ethernet connection cable Sequence program can be read, written, monitored, etc. 22.2 Compatible Software The following shows the software compatible with the FA transparent function. POINT (1) The range accessible by software when FA transparent function is used Use of the FA transparent function does not affect the range accessible by the software. For details on accessible range, refer to the manual for the respective software. (2) The software settings when using FA transparent function For the software settings, refer to the following when using FA transparent function. 22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer 22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer 22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator 22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 22.6.9 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator 22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP 22.6.11 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN 22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator 22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator 22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool 22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module 22 - 2 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function 17 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with RS-232 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software MELSOFT Navigator *9 GX Developer*1 18 GX Works2*10 PX Developer*4 CNC CONNECTION QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module GX Configurator*5-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT GX Configurator-QP*7 MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12 *1 Q/QnA/ACPU, motion controller CPU (A Series) GX Developer GX Works2*11 MX Component*11, 19 MX Sheet*12 SW6RN-GSV43P, MR Configurator*3 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*6 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*15 MR Configurator*3, MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *16 *17 *15 MR Configurator2 MX Sheet*17 20 MR Configurator2*13 *14 GX Developer Version 8 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the GOT. MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or Q06PHCPU to the GOT. Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D or later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Z or later GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 22 - 3 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MX Component*16, 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MT Works2*8, 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MT Developer*2 SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API) GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MELSOFT Navigator*9 (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software MELSOFT Navigator*10 GX Developer GX Works2*11 PX Developer*3 QCPU (Q mode) GX Configurator*4-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT GX Configurator-QP*8 MX Component*16, MELSOFT Navigator LCPU*14 QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU MX Sheet*17 *15 GX Developer*12 GX Works2*13, GX Logviewer MX Component*16, GX Developer MX Sheet*17, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*20 MX Component*16, MX Sheet*17 MELSOFT Navigator*10 GX Developer GX Works2*11 FX-PCS/WIN*5 FXCPU FX Configurator-FP*6 FX Configurator-EN *19 MX Component*16, Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MX Sheet*17 MELSOFT Navigator*10 MT Developer SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-GSV43P, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API) MT Works2*9 Motion controller CPU (A Series) MX Component*23, SW3RN-GSV22P, MX Component*16, MX Sheet*17 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*22 MR Configurator*1, MR Configurator2*18 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*22 MR Configurator2*21 FREQROL A700/F700/E700/D700 Series FR Configurator*2 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*7 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *16 *17 *18 *19 *20 *21 *22 *23 *24 22 - 4 MR Configurator*1, GX Developer SW3RN-GSV13P, SW3RN-GSV51P MX Sheet*24 SW3RN-GSV43P, MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. FR Configurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-WJ) Ver.1.02 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the A700/ F700 series to the GOT. FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.2.00 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the E700 series to the GOT. FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.3.10 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the F700 series to the GOT. PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or Q06PHCPU to the GOT. Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later The RS-232/USB conversion adaptor (GT10-RS2TUSB-5S) is not applicable to FX-PCS/WIN. FX Configurator-FP Version 1.30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function. The adapter (L6ADP-R2) is required. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later. FX Configurator-EN Version 1.10A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 17 (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Software MELSOFT Navigator*4 GX Developer*1 GX Works2*5 PX Developer*2 MX Sheet*10 MELSOFT Navigator*8 GX Developer*6 LCPU GX Works2*7 GX LogViewer MX Component*9, MX Sheet*10, Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*11 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the GOT. PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. (4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software MELSOFT Navigator*3 QCPU (Q mode)*1, C Controller module *4 MX Component*10, MX Sheet*11 MELSOFT Navigator *9 GX Developer*6 LCPU GX Works2*7 GX LogViewer QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU*1 GX Works2*16 GX Developer*2 MX Sheet*11, MX Component*10, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*12 MX Sheet*11 *3 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MELSOFT Navigator SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P, SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API) MT Works2*5*8 Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2*13 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *15 MR Configurator2 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *15 MR Configurator2*14 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *16 Only QCPU can be connected.To connect to QnA/ACPU, connect via QCPU. GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.10L or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.08J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.12N or later is required to connect with Q17nDCPU-S1. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. RT ToolBox2 Version 1.7 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection. GX Works2 Version 1.98C or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MX Component*10, FXCPU 20 21 GX Developer*2 GX Works2 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MX Component*9, CNC CONNECTION 18 GX Configurator-QP*3 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION QCPU (Q mode) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION PLC CPU 22 - 5 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software MELSOFT Navigator*9 GX Developer*1 GX Works2*10 QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module PX Developer*4 GX Configurator*5-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT GX Configurator-QP*7 MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*19 QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU, motion controller CPU (A Series) GX Developer*1 MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13 MELSOFT Navigator*9 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MT Developer*2 SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-GSV43P, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API) MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18 MR Configurator*3 MT Works2*8, CNC CPU(Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator*11 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*6 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*16 MR Configurator*3, MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*16 MR Configurator2*15 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *16 *17 *18 *19 22 - 6 MR Configurator2*14 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the GOT. MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or Q06PHCPU to the GOT. Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function. NC Configurator Version A0 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 17 (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Software MELSOFT Navigator*11 GX Developer*1 GX Works2*12 PX Developer*5 18 GX Configurator*6-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT GX Configurator-QP*9 MX Component *17 *18 , MX Sheet MELSOFT Navigator*16 GX Developer*13 LCPU*15 GX Works2*14 GX Logviewer QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU, motion controller CPU (A Series) GX Developer*1 MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18, MX Component*17, 19 MX Sheet*18 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Navigator*11 GX Developer*1 GX Works2*12 FXCPU FX Configurator-FP*7 FX Configurator-EN *20 MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18 MELSOFT Navigator*11 SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-GSV43P, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API) MX Component*24, MX Sheet*25 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MT Developer*2 SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV54P, MR Configurator*3 MT Works2*10, FREQROL A700/F700/E700/D700 Series FR Configurator Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*8 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *23 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *23 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *16 *17 *18 *19 *20 *21 *22 *23 *24 *25 *4 MR Configurator*3, MR Configurator2 MR Configurator2*19 *22 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the GOT. MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. FR Configurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-WJ) Ver.1.02 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the A700/ F700 series to the GOT. FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.2.00 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the E700 series to the GOT. FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.3.10 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the F700 series to the GOT. PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or Q06PHCPU to the GOT. Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later FX Configurator-FP Version 1.30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function. The adapter (L6ADP-R2) is required. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later. FX Configurator-EN Version 1.10A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 22 - 7 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSOFT LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*21 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION QCPU (Q mode) CNC CONNECTION PLC CPU (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software QCPU (Q mode) MELSOFT Navigator*4 GX Developer*1 GX Works2*5 PX Developer*2 GX Configurator-QP*3 MX Component*9, MX Sheet*10 LCPU MELSOFT Navigator*8 GX Developer*6 GX Works2*7 GX LogViewer MX Component*9, MX Sheet*10, Motion controller CPU (Q Series) *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 MX Component*12, MX LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*11 Sheet*13 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the GOT. PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. (4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU QCPU (Q mode)*1, C Controller module LCPU MELSOFT Navigator*10 GX Developer*7 GX Works2*8 GX LogViewer MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12, FXCPU GX QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU*1 GX Developer*2 MX Component*11, Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC CPU(Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator*6 Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2*15 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *17 MR Configurator2 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *17 MR Configurator2*16 *14 *15 *16 *17 *18 *19 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*14 Works2*19 MELSOFT Navigator*3 MT Works2*5*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *12 *13 22 - 8 Software MELSOFT Navigator*3 GX Developer*2 GX Works2*4*13 MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*18 MX Sheet*12 Only QCPU can be connected.To connect to QnA/ACPU, connect via QCPU. GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.10L or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.08J or later is required to use the FA transparent function. NC Configurator Version A1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.12N or later is required to connect with Q17nDCPU-S1. MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to execute the FA transparent function with using CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB). C controller module does not support CC-Link IE Field Network. LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. RT ToolBox2 Version 1.7 or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection. Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.98C or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Motion controller CPU (Q series) MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *5 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *5 MX MX Sheet*3, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*8 18 MT Works2*4 MR Configurator2 *6 MR Configurator2*7 GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. Use MT Works2 Version 1.25B or later for MT Works2. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection. Use MR Configurator2 Version 1.07H or later for MR Configurator2. Use MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later for MR Configurator2. Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 GX Works2 Component *2, CNC CONNECTION QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module Software *1, (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 *1, MX Component *3, MX Sheet*4 LCPU*2 GX Works2 *1, MX Component *3, MX Sheet*4 FXCPU GX Works2*5 20 MT Works2 MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*9 MR Configurator2*7 MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*9 MR Configurator2*8 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION *6 Motion controller CPU (Q series) GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. The adapter (L6ADP-R2) is required. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.73B or later is required for GX Works2 to use the FA transparent function. MT Works2 Version 1.25B or later is required for MT Works2 to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.07H or later is required for MR Configurator2 to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection. 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU LCPU *2 *1 *2 *3 Software GX Works2 *1, GX Works2 *1 MX Component , MX Component *2, *2 22 MX Sheet*3 , MX Sheet*3 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function. Connecting the GOT and personal computer with Modem (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU *1 *2 Software GX Developer*1 QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 *2 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.16S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU QCPU (Q mode) Software GX Developer*1 GX Works2 *2 GX Developer*1 FXCPU *1 *2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.16S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 22 - 9 (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU GX Developer*1 QCPU (Q mode) *1 *2 Software GX Works2 *2 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function. GX Works2 Version 1.16S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. (4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU GX QCPU (Q mode) *1 *2 22 - 10 Software Developer*1 GX Works2 *2 Use GX Developer of Version 8.78G or later. Use GX Works2 of Version 1.15R or later. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *2 Q00JCPU 18 CNC CONNECTION The following models support FA transparent function. 19 Q00CPU GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 20 Q02PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Q06PHCPU Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) 21 Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU GX Developer GX Works2 GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet 22 Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MELSEC-Q (Q mode) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Q00UJCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU *1 *1 *1 Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUEHCPU has no direct coupled I/F. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 11 Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *3 Q12DCCPU-V C Controller module Q24DHCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V GX Developer GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller *2 *1 *1 *1 *2 *2 module*5 MELSEC-QS MELSEC-L MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) QS001CPU - L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU GX Developer GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet LCPU Logging Configuration Tool GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q4ARCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) MELSEC-A (AnCPU) Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *4 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V have no direct coupled I/F. When using Q12DCCPU-V1 or Q24DHCCPU-V as the connected CPU, only MX Component can be used. When accessing other CPUs relaying Q12DCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-V, GX Developer or GX Works2 can also be used. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection. When the GOT and the personal computer are connected in the serial connection, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module is unavailable. (Continued to next page) 22 - 12 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *3 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type 18 CNC CONNECTION A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A2SCPU*1 A2SCPU-S1 19 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *4 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU 21 A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSEC-A A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MT Developer Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MT Developer MR Configurator *1 *1 *1 MT Works2 *2 *2 *2 Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU MT Works2 GX Developer GX Works2 (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 *4 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since only the USB port is available as the direct coupled I/F for Q172H/ Q173HCPU. Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172H/Q173HCPU has no direct coupled I/F. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 13 Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *2 A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC GX Developer GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet GX Developer FX Configurator-FP MX Component MX Sheet FX3G GX Works2 FX3GC MELSEC-FX GX Developer FX Configurator-FP MX Component MX Sheet GX Works2 GX Developer FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN MX Component MX Sheet FX3U GX Works2 FX3UC GX Developer FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN MX Component MX Sheet GX Works2 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 - (Continued to next page) *1 *2 22 - 14 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *4 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type 18 CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC Robot controller CNC CONNECTION QJ72LP25G - QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - 19 NZ2GF-ETB GX Works2 CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) GX Developer NC Configurator MELDAS C6/C64 GX Developer CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) RT ToolBox2 *1 *1 *3 *3 *2 20 CRnD-700 FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 21 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FR Configurator MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION FREQROL FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 MD-CX522MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- MELSERVO 22 K(-A0) FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MELIPM - DU MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J3- B MR-J4- A MR-J4- B MR Configurator MR Configurator2 - MR-J4W2- B MR-J4W3- B *1 *2 *3 *4 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION CC-Link IE Field Network head module QJ72LP25-25 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station MR Configurator2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q173NCCPU has no direct coupled I/F. Connect to the DISPLAY I/F of Q173NCCPU. GX Developer accesses the PLC CPU which configures the multiple CPU system. Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since CRnQ-700 has no direct coupled I/F. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 15 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection *2 Target software Ethernet connection *2 *2 Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU *3 *3 Q12HCPU *3 Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU *3 Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU *3 *3 Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU *1 *1*3 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 22 - 16 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUDEHCPU has no direct coupled I/F. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. GT11 is not supported. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type Q12DCCPU-V C controller module Q24DHCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CNC CONNECTION 18 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module *2 - 19 L02CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet *2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION L26CPU *2 L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU 20 Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A - MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q3ACPU - Q4ACPU 21 Q4ARCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Q2ASCPU - Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU 22 A2UCPU-S1 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2ACPUP21-S1 - A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. GT11 is not supported. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 17 Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 - A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU - A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 - A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 - A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q172CPUN Q173CPUN - Q172HCPU Q173HCPU (Continued to next page) *1 22 - 18 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type 18 CNC CONNECTION Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173DCPU-S1 MT Works2 *2 *3 *2*3 Q172DSCPU 19 Q173DSCPU *2 *2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Q170MCPU MT Works2 GX Developer GX Works2 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 20 A373UCPU MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN 21 A172SHCPU MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0 FX0S 22 FX0N FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S MELSEC-FX FX1N GX Works2 *2 FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 - (Continued to next page) *1 *2 *3 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. GT11 is not supported. Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172D/Q173DCPU has no direct coupled I/F. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 19 Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station CC-Link IE Field Network head module CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CNC QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G - QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - NZ2GF-ETB - CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) - MELDAS C6/C64 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - CRnD-700 FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J - FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0) MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL - MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2MMELSERVO MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J3- B*3*4 MR-J4- A MR-J4- B*3*4 MR Configurator2 *2 *2 *2 *2 - MR-J4W2- B*3*4 MR-J4W3- *3*4 *1 *2 *3 *4 22 - 20 DU B MR Configurator2 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. GT11 is not supported. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software 18 CNC CONNECTION *2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU 19 Q02HCPU GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU 20 Q25PHCPU MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU 21 Q00UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Q01UCPU GX Developer GX Works2 Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU 22 Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU *1 *1 *1 Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU (Continued to next page) *1 *2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUEHCPU has no direct coupled I/F. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 21 Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 Q12DCCPU-V C Controller module Q24DHCCPU-V MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - L02CPU L26CPU MELSEC-L L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P - L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A - Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU - Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU - Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 - A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 (Continued to next page) *1 22 - 22 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 19 A2SCPU*1 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) - A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 21 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 - MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Q173HCPU Q172DCPU - Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU (Continued to next page) *1 18 CNC CONNECTION *1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 23 Connection type Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software *1 A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N - A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S MELSEC-FX FX1N GX Developer FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 - (Continued to next page) *1 22 - 24 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Bus connection Series Model name Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Target software CC-Link IE Field Network head module CNC QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G - QJ72BR15 LJ72GF15-T2 - CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) - 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station MELDAS C6/C64 Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) - CRnD-700 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J 18 CNC CONNECTION *1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 Connection type - 21 FREQROL-D700 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 MD-CX522- K(-A0) MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION MELIPM MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2MMELSERVO DU MR-J3- A MR-J3- T MR-J3- B MR-J4- A MR-J4- B - MR-J4W2- B MR-J4W3- B *1 - GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 22 - 25 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.1 GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB PC GOT PLC Connection cable Communication driver Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Interface RS-232/USB conversion adaptor Cable model RS-232 - GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) CONNECTION Max. distance 3m - GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) GT10-RS2TUSB-5S GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) BUS RS-232 *2 Personal computer Connection cable *4 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU*6 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION*1*6 USB ETHERNET CONNECTION*3 - GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) 3m Software GX Developer GX Works2 GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*5 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 22 - 26 Applicable to the QCPU only GT10, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool are not applicable to the bus connection. GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection. The use of RS-232/USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal computer. For details, refer to the following manual. RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User's Manual GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool and Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module are not supported. Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration Communication driver PC GOT PLC Connection type dependant Connection cable ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) Personal computer Connection type Model Interface Cable model length*3 Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. *2 - (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e 100m GX Works2 Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module *5 BUS CONNECTION*4 GT15-J71E71-100 DIRECT *6 CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT CONNECTION*6 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 27 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Maximum segment 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Connection cable*1 GOT 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION PLC 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Varies according to the connection type. CNC CONNECTION 18 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem Communication driver Connection type dependant Modem GOT PLC Adapter cable Connection cable Modem Phone line PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Adapter cable Interface Connection cable Personal Modem Phone line Cable model RS-232 (Built into GOT) - computer*3 Software *1 BUS CONNECTION*2 *1 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m) Number of connectable equipment Public line GX Developer GX Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT *1 CONNECTION*1 ETHERNET CONNECTION*4 *1 For connectable modems, system equipment and connection cables, refer to the following Technical News. *2 *3 List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (T10-0039) GT10 is not applicable to the bus connection. Installation of the GOT modem connection tool to the personal computer is required to connect the GOT to a modem. For details, refer to the following manual. *4 22 - 28 GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 17 PX Developer, GX Configurator ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.4.2 PC GOT Communication driver Connection cable Connection type dependant PLC Connection type For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. GOT Model Personal computer Connection cable Interface Cable model Max. distance RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) 3m 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION USB 1 personal computer for 1 GOT 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 20 PX Developer GX Configurator BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Software Number of connectable equipment GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 Varies according to the connection type. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION PLC CNC CONNECTION 18 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 29 22.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) PC GOT Connection cable Communication driver Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Interface RS-232/USB conversion adaptor Cable model RS-232 - GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) - GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) BUS CONNECTION*1 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Personal computer Connection cable RS-232 GT10-RS2TUSB-5S *3 GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) Max. distance Software 3m MT Developer MT Works2 Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT ETHERNET CONNECTION*2 GOT MULTI-DROP USB - GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) CONNECTION*4 *1 *2 *3 *4 22 - 30 GT10 is not applicable to the bus connection. GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection. The use of RS-232/USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal computer. RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor USER'S MANUAL GX LogViewer, MX Component and MX Sheet are not supported. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration Communication driver PC GOT PLC Connection type dependant Connection cable ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. BUS *2 Interface *5 - (Built into GOT) GT15-J71E71-100 CONNECTION*4 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Maximum segment Personal computer Cable model length*3 Software Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e 100m MT Works2 Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT 20 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 19 22 - 31 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Connection type Connection cable*1 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION GOT 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION PLC GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Varies according to the connection type. CNC CONNECTION 18 22.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 Communication driver Connection type dependant When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB Servo amplifier QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) Servo amplifier PC GOT Connection cable Communication driver Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. SSCNET , SSCNET PLC /H GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Personal computer Connection cable Interface Cable model Max. distance RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) ETHERNET CONNECTION*1 *1 22 - 32 Only MR Configurator2 is compatible with the Ethernet connection. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 3m Software Number of connectable equipment MR Configurator MR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT 17 Servo amplifier QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) Servo amplifier ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) PC GOT Connection cable Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. BUS *2 Interface *5 - (Built into GOT) GT15-J71E71-100 CONNECTION*4 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Connection cable*1 Maximum segment Personal computer Cable model length*3 Software Twisted pair cable • 10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e 100m MR Configurator2 Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment. For how to check the function version, refer to the following. GT16 User's Manual A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 33 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION GOT 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION PLC /H 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION , SSCNET 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Varies according to the connection type. CNC CONNECTION 18 22.4.5 FR Configurator Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 Inverter Inverter PC GOT Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. Inverter GOT Connection type Model For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi inverter, refer to the following. Interface Cable model Max. distance RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m Number of connectable equipment Software FR Configurator GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) USB INVERTER CONNECTION 22.4.6 Personal computer Connection cable 1 personal computer for 1 GOT 3m FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN PC GOT PLC Communication driver Connection cable MELSEC-FX Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Connection cable Interface RS-232/USB conversion adaptor Cable model RS-232 - GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) RS-232 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU - GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) GT10-RS2TUSB-5S*1 GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) - GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) USB *1 Software 3m FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT The use of RS-232/USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal computer. RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User's Manual 22 - 34 Personal computer Max. distance 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 17 RT ToolBox2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.4.7 PC Communication driver Connection type dependant 19 Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Personal computer Connection cable Interface Cable model Max. distance RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m BUS CONNECTION*1 Number of connectable equipment Software 1 personal computer for 1 GOT RT ToolBox2 DIRECT USB CONNECTION TO CPU*1 GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) 3m ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 20 21 NC Configurator MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.4.8 CRnD-700 is not applicable to the bus connection, the direct CPU connection. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Connection cable MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION GOT CNC CONNECTION 18 CRnQ-700 22 PC GOT Communication driver Connection cable Connection type dependant Varies according to the connection type. PLC GOT Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max. distance Software USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) 3m NC Configurator For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. BUS CONNECTION Personal computer Connection cable Number of connectable equipment 1 personal computer for 1 GOT ETHERNET CONNECTION*1 *1 GT11 is not applicable to the Ethernet connection. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 35 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Q173NCCPU 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22.5.1 Setting communication interface Communication setting with personal computer Controller setting Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer. Set the channel of the connected equipment. For details of the setting contents, refer to the following manual. 2. Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 7.1.2 Interface setting of the GOT Example: For GT16 3. 4. Click! 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Common] menu. [Controller Setting] from the The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Set Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Make the settings according to the usage environment. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting 22 - 36 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] Transfer) ]from the menu. [PC(Data The [PC (Data Transfer)] is displayed. Set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer. (a) Host (PC) setting When communicating the GOT and the personal computer in the direct connection, set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer. (b) Ethernet download setting When communicating the GOT via Ethernet, set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer. Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) IP Label Set the IP Label of detail setting. Subnet Mask*1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet download. (Default: 5014) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013, 49153) Gateway*1 Ethernet Download Port No.*1 *1 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 1time) 1time Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 5sec) 5sec Set the AT command to initialize the modem. (Default: AT&FE0%C0&K0&D0W2S0=1) Up to 255 one-byte alphanumeric characters - Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT IP Address Setting] screen. POINT Setting the FA transparent function of GX Works2 When connecting the GOT and the personal computer in Ethernet connection, set the GOT IP address and the Ethernet download port No. to the same as the contents of PLC side I/F detailed setting of GOT. 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 Command*1 *1 3. 18 The maximum number of characters of the AT command differs according to the specification of the modem. When the maximum number of characters of the AT command which can be used in the modem is less than 255, set the initialization command according to the specification of the modem. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after downloading [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GT User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. 19 20 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION (c) Host (modem) setting When communicating the GOT via modem, set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the modem. Initialization 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION GOT IP Address Default Parity None Even Odd Range CNC CONNECTION Description Range GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Item Description Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd) MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Item FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200) 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit) 7bits/8bits Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit/2bits 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22 - 37 GOT Setup When using the multi-channel function (only GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12), specify the channel No. on which FA transparent function is executed. 2. 3. 4. Click! 1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu. 2. Check [Enable GOT Setup]. 3. Select the [Transparent] tab. 4. As necessary, check one of [CH1] to [CH4]. (Default: CH1) < GT16,GT15 > [CH1], [CH2], [CH3], [CH4] < GT14,GT12 > [CH1], [CH2] Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT Transparent setting on the utility screen Transparent setting can be performed by the GOT. For details of the operating, refer to the following. GT 22 - 38 User's Manual 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings 17 22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (For bus connection) 18 CNC CONNECTION The setting method for the FA transparent function of GX Developer is used as an example. GX Configurator is an add-on software of GX Developer. (Except for GX Configurator-QP) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 7. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module]. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module]. Bus connection Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. Direct CPU connection The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. *1 21 [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode] Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB (COM) PLC side I/F : PLC module Other station : No specification *1 This is operation required in the case of using GX Developer of which version is 8.22Y and above. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 8. 4. 5. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting]. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 39 Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection(when connected to the QJ71C24(N)) (GX Configurator is not supported.) 6. 7. 1. Click [Online] 2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 3. 5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial PLC side I/F : C24 Other station : No specification Mark the [USB] checkbox. 8. 4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting]. Return to [Transfer Setup] and double-click [C24] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F detailed setting of C24]. Check [via GOT transparent mode] for [PLC side I/F detailed setting of C24]. 22 - 40 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). 17 When connecting the GOT and PLC in ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Ethernet communication (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) CNC CONNECTION 18 1. Click [Online] 2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set]. 20 Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB (COM) PLC side I/F : PLC module Other station : No specification MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 3. [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. 19 Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module]. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 6. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 4. 5. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting]. 8. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 9. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name]. When connecting the Q173NCCPU, set [QJ71E71]. 10. Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting is not required. 11. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 41 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 12.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (when connecting to FXCPU) 6. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU. POINT How to operate GX Developer For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. 1. 2. 3. 4. GX Developer Version Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial PLC side I/F : PLC module Other station : No specification Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting]. 22 - 42 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting Operating Manual 17 Accessing by GX Works2 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Works2. (For bus connection) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.2 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Bus connection 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. Direct CPU connection Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 21 Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification: MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1. [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 8. 4. 5. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 43 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N)) 6. 1. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 7. 5. Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification 8. 4. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT to PC via modem Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22 - 44 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). 17 (3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (a) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) CNC CONNECTION 18 6. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...]. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 8. 4. 5. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. 9. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [PLC Type]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 45 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 10.Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [PLC type], the setting is not required. 11. Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module. 4. 5. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 12.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). OK PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter Setup Cancel PLC Mode (b) Connecting to FXCPU FXCPU via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode FX3U-ENET-ADP-0.0.0.0. Setting... C24 Setup Computer Type QJ71C24 Station No. 0 Parity Odd Sum Check Exists Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification 22 - 46 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...]. POINT IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Input Format 18 DEC. Version of GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to execute the FA transparent function with using Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB). 8. 9. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module], which is connected via a GOT. (Use default value for settings other than the following.) :3 Network No. PC No. :1 :192.168.3.18 IP address :5001 Port No. Communication :UDP (fixed) format Ethernet Set [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module] for [PLC Type]. 10. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module]. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION This section describes the settings of the GX Works2 in the following case of system configuration. (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Ethernet setting :192.168.3.30 IP address CC-Link IE Field Network setting :1 Network No. :1 Station No. CC-Link IE Field Network CNC CONNECTION FX3U-ENET-ADP FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet Module Module Side 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION OK Cancel PLC Type 17 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION GOT(Ethernet) Transparent Setting (4) Connecting the GOT and Ethernet adapter (NZ2GFETB) in Ethernet connection, and connecting it to a PLC in the CC-Link IE Field Network. 21 [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU. (Use default value for settings other than the following.) : CC IE Field (Local station) Network Type :1 Network No. :2 PC No. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 47 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 11. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type : CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. :1 PC No. :0 Total Stations :2 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION HUB 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 6. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the [CPU mode] to [LCPU]. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]. PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22 - 48 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 8. On the[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...]. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 CNC CONNECTION 18 9. [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT. 10. Set [NZ2GF-ETB] for [PLC Type]. 13. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 14. Click [Other station (Single network)]. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 11. Set the same number to [IP address] as the number assigned to NZ2GF-ETB, and click [OK]. In the system configuration example, the setting is as follows. [IP address]: 192 168 3 30 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 15. Double-click [CC IE Field]. 12. Return to [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], and click [OK]. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 49 When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15 and GT14 only) (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 16.Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is displayed. 17.Set [Network No.] and [Station No.] assigned to CPU, and click [OK]. When connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module of the system configuration example, the setting is as follows. [Network No.] :1 [Station No.] :0 1. 2. 18.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click 3. [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). 4. 5. 22 - 50 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F :Ethernet Board PLC side I/F :GOT Other Station Setting : No specification Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting]. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used. (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N)) ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION (For bus connection) 17 CNC CONNECTION 18 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the Ethernet download setting. 2. 3. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Ethernet Board PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No specification 21 22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection]. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 8. Bus connection [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] 22 Direct CPU connection Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox. 4. 5. 9. 20 Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting]. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 51 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 6. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX LogViewer. 6. 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the Ethernet download setting. 1. 2. Click [Show Assistant Dialog] for [View] on GX LogViewer. The [Assistant] dialog box is displayed. 22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting 8. 9. Check [C24] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection]. 3. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). 4. 5. 6. 22 - 52 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting Click [LCPU] [Show Logged Device Status] in the [Assistant] dialog box. The [Transfer Setup Connection 1] dialog box is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection 1]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : (Select from the system configuration) For [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] of [Transfer Setup], refer to the following. 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 17 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.4 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Configurator-QP. Bus connection Interface: PLC Type: Bus The [Connection setup] is displayed. Set the [PC side] in [Connection setup]. Direct CPU connection Interface: (RS-232C) COM setting: COM1 to COM10 Transmission speed: 9.6kbps to 115.2kbps Interface: PLC Type: Direct coupled When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Interface: C24 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Computer link connection Interface: USB 21 (For bus connection only) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 2. 3. Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on GX Configurator-QP. 19 22 5. 6. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1. Set the [PLC side] in [Connection setup]. PLC type: Q series PLC type Multi PLC specification: None/No.1 to 4 Direct CPU connection, mark the [via GOT transparent mode] checkbox. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 4. CNC CONNECTION 18 Set the [Module connecting I/O address] in [Connection setup]. Specify the actual IP address of the module. The screen returns to the [Connection setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QD75***(QnCPU). 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 53 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Developer with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). 4. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module]. Bus connection 1. Click [Communication] MT Developer. [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] [Communication Setting] in Direct CPU connection [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] 5. 6. 2. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted by using the transparent function in [CPU]. Click [Connection Test]. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 3. Click [Detail]. 22 - 54 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 7. Confirm that the personal computer is connected to the motion controller CPU (Q series). 22.6.6 17 Accessing by the MT Works2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Works2 with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 1. 2. 3. Click [Transfer setup] Check-mark either of the following in [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Bus connection [Online]. Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] checkbox. The [Transfer setup] is displayed. Direct CPU connection Set the [Transfer setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB CPU side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No specification Mark the [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 7. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 6. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 8. 4. 5. Double-click [Serial] of the PLC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting]. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode). Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 55 (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 6. 7. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification: Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set]. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 8. Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 22 - 56 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 9. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name]. computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15 and GT14 only) 10. Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting is not required. (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION When connecting the GOT and personal 18 CNC CONNECTION 11. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1. 21 Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Ethernet Board PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification: MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode). 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 12. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click 20 4. 5. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting]. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 57 22.6.7 (For bus connection) Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Developer. For details, refer to the following: 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer 22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Works2. For details, refer to the following: 22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 22.6.9 6. 7. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the Ethernet download setting. Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator This section explains the setting method of the FA transparent function of FR Configurator with an example of connecting to FREQROL A700/F700 series. 22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting 8. Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection]. Bus connection [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] Direct CPU connection Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox. 1. 9. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been connected to the Motion controller (Q mode). 22 - 58 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting Click [Settings] Configurator. [Communication Settings...] in FR 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of FX Configurator-FP with an example of connecting to FXCPU. 2. CNC CONNECTION 18 Check-mark either of the following in [Communication Port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 19 Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 3. Click the [GOT Transparent Communication]. 4. Click the [OK]. 1. Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on FX Configurator-FP. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 Check-mark either of the following in [PC side]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 5. 6. Mark the [RS-232 (FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD Included)] checkbox. Click [OFFLINE] to make it [ONLINE]. Click the [System Read], then check if GOT has been connected to FREQROL A700/F700 series normally. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB(GOT Transparent)] checkbox. 3. 4. Click [Comm. Test]. After the communication test is completed, check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 59 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 2. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 22.6.11 Accessing by FX ConfiguratorEN This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the FX Configurator-EN. 5. 1. 2. 3. Click [Transfer setup] on the FX Configurator-EN. Mark the [Serial port/USB] checkbox in [Connecting interface]. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port/ USB] of [Connecting interface]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C (include FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USBBD)] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB (GOT Transparent mode)] checkbox. 4. Click [Connection test] 22 - 60 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting After the communication test is completed, check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU. 17 22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of connecting to CRnQ-700. Connecting the GOT and Controller in bus connection or direct CPU connection (CRnQ700) CNC CONNECTION 18 Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 5. 20 Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2. Click [Edit Project]. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1. Click [Detail]. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 4. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module]. Bus connection [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] Direct CPU connection [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] 7. 2. 3. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted in [CPU]. Set [Method] to [CRnC]. Click [Detail]. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 6. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 22 - 61 Connecting the GOT and Controller in Ethernet connection 1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2. Click [Edit Project]. 2. Set [Method] to [CRnQ]. 3. Click [Detail]. 6. 7. 8. 9. On the [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module], mark the [via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set]. Set [QJ71E71] for [Type]. Specify the number assigned to the Ethernet module for [Network No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in "Module side". Specify the number assigned to the GOT for [Network No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in "GOT side". 10. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted in [CPU]. 4. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with serial Mark the [RS-232] checkbox. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox. 5. Click [Detail]. 22 - 62 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of NC Configurator. 22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the MELSOFT Navigator. 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator 1. 1. 2. Click [File] [Batch Read] in MELSOFT The [Batch Read] is displayed. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 2. Click [Online] Navigator. CNC CONNECTION 18 [Open]. The [Open] is displayed. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 4. 4. Select [NC] on the upper left of the screen, and set the following: NC series : C70 M or C70 L Connect pattern : Set the pattern according to the connect pattern. IP address : Set as necessary. Click [Execute] to read and display the specified project. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 3. Select the projects to be read from [Select Project], and set the storage destination of the workspace in [Save Workspace]. 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 3. 21 By clicking [Open], data is read from CNC and displayed. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 63 22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool . 22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module with the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) connected. When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection 1. 2. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup...]. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. 1. 2. 3. 3. 4. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PLC side I/F : GOT Other station : No specification Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No specification Set [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] in [Transfer Setup]. For details, refer to the following. 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 4. 22 - 64 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. 4. 6. Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] screen. 18 CNC CONNECTION 5. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode). (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 19 6. 7. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPUV), which is firstly connected via a GOT. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V). GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] screen. 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 5. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module. 8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V). 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PLC side I/F : GOT Other station : No specification 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 65 When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15, and GT14 only) (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module. 5. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the Ethernet download setting. 22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Ethernet Board PLC side I/F : GOT Other station : No specification 8. 4. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting]. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used. 22 - 66 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode). 17 When performing the FA transparent function, use either RS-232 interface or USB interface of the GOT. Using both of them to perform the FA transparent function concurrently is not allowed. RS-232 Software available for the FA transparent function When multiple kinds of software are activated on one personal computer, only one of them is available for communications using the FA transparent function. Do not concurrently perform any communications using the FA transparent function. (Offline operation with each software is available) Also, do not perform communications with the GOT (e.g. downloading project data) from GT Designer3 during execution of communications using the FA transparent function. USB Conditions for suspending the FA transparent function Online operation GX Developer and so on The FA transparent function is also suspended when any of the following operations, which stop the GOT monitor, is performed. Note that the FA transparent function will not be stopped while using the optional function such as the Utility display or ladder monitor function. • When project data is written/read, or when the OS is written by GT Designer3*1 • When the GOT is set up*1 • When no communication request (online monitor, etc.) has been issued from GX Developer for 45 minutes *1 GT Designer3 Communication with GOT When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection (1) When multiple GOTs are bus-connected When multiple GOTs are bus-connected, the FA transparent function can be used on each GOT. However, note that the monitoring performance of each GOT slows down as the number of monitoring GOTs and personal computers increases. A timeout error occurs in GX Developer. When GOT monitoring is faulty The FA transparent function cannot be used in case that the GOT monitoring is faulty due to PLC CPU errors or faulty communication between the PLC CPU and GOT. When GOT monitoring is faulty, check the following. RS-232 cable PC (1) Whether the PLC CPU operates normally Refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU you use. (2) Whether the PLC CPU and GOT are connected normally 5. BUS CONNECTION 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 22 - 67 18 CNC CONNECTION Connect the personal computer, to which GX Developer or any other relevant software has been installed, to the RS-232 interface or USB interface of the GOT. When monitoring the PLC CPU from a personal computer, the GOT and personal computer refresh the display slower. 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION transparent function personal computer 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION GOT interface required to use the FA When monitoring the PLC CPU from a 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Precautions common to each software 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7.1 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 22.7 Precautions (2) When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection, the following GX Developer functions or GX Works2 functions cannot be executed. When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection (1) GX Developer function or GX Works2 function When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection, the following GX Developer functions or GX Works2 functions cannot be executed. The message [The executed function is not supported. Please check the manual and other documentation.] is displayed on GX Developer or GX Works2. The message [The executed function is not supported. Please check the manual and other documentation.] is displayed on GX Developer or GX Works2. Unsupported GX Developer functions Remark Unsupported GX Developer functions • Remote Reset • Remote system reset • • • • • • • ― Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote STEP-RUN Remote latch clear Write clock data Clear malfunction log • Remote Reset • Remote system reset Inexecutable only when specify all stations/groups has been performed. When using together with the Multiple-GT11, GT10 connection function When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or USB interface is used for the connection. 1st GOT Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote STEP-RUN Remote latch clear Write clock data Clear malfunction log • • • • • Remote password function MELSECNET diagnostics CC IE Control diagnostics CC IE Field diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics (PING test/loopback test with the Ethernet module (Q series)) Inexecutable only when specify all stations/groups has been performed. ― (2) GOT station monitoring function RS-232 PC USB PC When PLC power disconnection occurs with the FA transparent function being used While the FA transparent function is being used, if the communication between the PLC and the GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection or a disconnection of the communication cable between the PLC and the GOT, the GOT waits for timeout against the communication request from the peripheral devices (GX Developer, etc.), and it takes a few minutes to recover the monitoring between the PLC and the GOT. Monitoring Online operation GX Developer and so on 22 - 68 • • • • • • • ― PC 2nd GOT 1st GOT Remark 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection, GOT station monitoring function cannot be operated. Therefore, in the cases of [no connection target], [PLC power OFF], etc., the monitoring of the GOT delays for the timeout time. When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required. When connecting the GOT and PC with RS232 The [Transmission speed] setting in [PC side I/F Serial setting] in GX Developer or GX Works2 must be within the range supported by the connected CPU. (2) Number of personal computers Only one personal computer can be connected to the multi-drop connection system. Only one personal computer CPU connected QCPU, FXCPU Transmission speed 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps QnACPU 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps ACPU 9600, 19200bps Motion controller CPU (A series) 9600bps When [monitor conditions] have been set on (3) Monitor speed of GOT The monitoring performance slows down according to the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA transparent function, the monitoring performance of the whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result, timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system. When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem connection When using the FA transparent function with a modem, the communication settings of compatible software, modem connection tool, modem and GOT must be set correctly to communicate with the GOT. If not correctly set, the communication cannot be performed. When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB When the operations shown below are executed, the operation is executed in the PLC. However, the display on the GOT may stop temporarily or the display of timeout may appear on GX Works2. Operation*1 Remark • Remote Reset Applied for the following operations specifying the currently selected station. • • • • • • • Applied for the following operations specifying all the station. Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote STEP-RUN Remote Reset Remote latch clear Write clock data • CC IE Control diagnostics (Link startup/stop) • CC IE Field diagnostics (Link startup/stop) *1 GX Developer, GX Works2 (1) Monitoring performance of the GOT is temporarily suspended. (2) The GOT cannot respond to the touch switch operation and numerical/ascii inputs. (3) Writing to PLC results in a system alarm occurrence and displays the message, "315 Device writing error. Correct device.". (4) While setting the monitor conditions, do not perform any operation which makes the GOT restart (e.g. downloading project data, changing utility data). Doing so may display a system alarm, "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." when the GOT restarts. When the monitor conditions setting for the PLC CPU has not been cancelled, reconnect GX Developer, GX Works2 to cancel the setting.(An error may be output when the monitor conditions setting is cancelled.) (5) When the time check of GX Developer, GX Works2 is set to 30 seconds or more in the monitor condition settings, the message "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." may appear. Set the time check time of GX Developer, GX Works2 to 30 seconds or less. When exiting GX Developer, GX Works2 For 45 seconds after GX Developer, GX Works2 has been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same speed as when the FA transparent function is working. ― The remote operations only of when the connection type between the GOT and CPU is the direct CPU connection or computer link connection are applied. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 22 - 69 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION When connecting to QCPU (A mode), set the PLC type to "A4UCPU" or "QCPU (A mode)" on GX Developer. 18 CNC CONNECTION (1) Standard monitor OS installation, Communication driver writing When connecting to QCPU (A mode) 19 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the GOT multi-drop connection system. 17 20 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION connection When using GX Developer, GX Woks2 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.7.2 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION When connecting the GOT multi-drop When performing [Read to PLC], [Write to PLC] and other file operations on GX Developer, GX Works2 If any of the following GOT functions is executed during the file operation such as [Read to PLC] or [Write to PLC], an error may occur on the GOT, GX Developer, or GX Works2. In this case, take the following corrective action: • File reading in the ladder monitor function for MELSEC-Q Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side The file is not found. With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the file reading. Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 File access failure. Please retry. With no file reading being executed in the ladder monitor function for MELSEC-Q, re-execute the file operation. • Reading the special module monitor CPU Malfunction log Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Communication error With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the CPU malfunction log reading. 358 PLC file access failure. Confirm PLC drive.*1 Corrective action on GOT side With no file operation on GX Developer or GX Works2, turn ON the trigger device for the recipe function again. Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 File access failure. Please retry. PLC file system error. Unable to communicate with PLC. Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 Execute the file access operation again with the recipe inprocess signal in GOT system information OFF. Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Backup With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the backup. Restore With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the restore. Error messages on GOT Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 No message is displayed. (The TC set value space is blank.) With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the TC monitor. File access failure. Please retry. With no TC set value being read, reexecute the file operation. *1 22 - 70 The numerical indicates the system alarm No. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions File access failure. Please retry. With no special module monitor malfunction log being read, execute the file operation. Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 ― With no backup being executed, execute the file operation. ― With no restore being executed, execute the file operation. Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 ― With no special module monitor CPU malfunction log being read, execute the file operation. • SFC monitor file reading Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side ― With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the file reading. • Reading TC monitor set value in the system monitor function Corrective action on GOT side Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 • Backup/restore • Read/write of values of the file register specified for the recipe function Error messages on GOT Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 ― With no file writing being executed on ladder edit, execute the file operation. When PLC write is failed while using the FA transparent function The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent function may be failed due to some reason such as cable disconnection. When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the same personal computer, or reset the PLC CPU. Restrictions on GX Developer during backup/ restore execution (1) When reading/writing data from/to a PLC, monitoring a PLC, and others are executed with GX Developer or GX Works2 with the FA transparent function during the backup/restore execution with the GOT, the backup/ restore is stopped. Check that reading/writing data from/to the PLC, monitoring the PLC, and others are not executed with GX Developer or GX Works2 with the FA transparent function. Execute the backup/restore with the GOT again. (2) When the backup/restore is executed with the GOT while reading/writing data from/to a PLC, monitoring a PLC, and others are executed with GX Developer or GX Works2 with the FA transparent function, errors occur on GX Developer or GX Works2. The backup/restore with the GOT is correctly executed. (1) Timeout time settings When the FA transparent function is used with a modem, it takes time for the initial communication with PLC and GX Works2 or GX Developer and a timeout may occur. In that case, set a longer time for the initial communication timeout time for the GOT modem connection tool. (2) Communication settings When the FA transparent function is used via modem, the communication setting differs depending on the connection target of the GOT. Set as follows. Target of the GOT Setting target Setting item GOT modem Communication GX GX GT Works2 Developer connection settings of the Designer3 *1 *1 tool GOT Data length FXCPU Parity Stop bit 8bits 7bits 8bits None Even None 1bit 1bit Data length QCPU Parity 1bit Communication settings of GX Works2/GX Developer are set automatically, and setting is not required. When connecting the ACPU and motion controller CPU (A series) in bus connection Do not execute write during RUN with GX Developer. An error may occur in the PLC due to the write during RUN, what may stop the PLC. 22.7.3 When using MT Developer, MT Works2 When exiting MT Developer, MT Works2 For 45 seconds after GX Developer, MT Works2 has been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same speed as when the FA transparent function is working. When PLC write is failed while using the FA transparent function The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent function may be failed due to some reasons such as cable disconnection. When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the same personal computer, or reset the motion controller CPU. When a cable disconnection has occurred When the cable between the GOT and the motion CPU is disconnected, it takes time until a timeout error occurs in MT Developer. 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 18 19 20 8bits Odd Stop bit *1 1bit ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ― With no file reading being executed on ladder edit, execute the file operation. computer with modem connection CNC CONNECTION Write With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the file writing. Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Read With no file operation being executed on GX Developer or GX Works2, re-execute the file reading. Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 22 - 71 MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION Corrective action on GOT side 17 21 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Error messages on GOT When connecting the GOT and personal 22 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION • Reading/Writing files of ladder edit 22.7.4 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 Unavailable functions and restrictions For the use via the motion controller, there are unavailable functions and restrictions. For details on the restrictions, refer to the help screen of MR Configurator. Monitor speed of GOT Since the FA transparent function is used via the motion CPU, the monitor speed of GOT is slow. 22.7.5 When using FR Configurator GOT monitoring when using FA transparent function When FA transparent function is used, GOT suspends monitoring on channels supporting FA transparent function. POINT Cancelling the suspended GOT monitoring immediately To cancel the suspended (45 seconds) GOT monitoring immediately after FA transparent is executed, input "1" to device GS457.Then GOT resumes monitoring. If FA transparent is resumed even if "1" is already input to device GS457, an error will occur on FR Configurator. For the details of the device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Manual Screen Design When using the oscilloscope function specified sampling Since the monitoring of the inverter data may be not performed at the specified sampling intervals depending on the settings of oscilloscope function, adjust the communication setting, a sampling interval, etc. PU mode operation command source selection On the setting of PU mode operation command source selection (Pr:551) of the inverter, specify the terminal (1:RS-485 terminals, 2:PU connected) connected to GOT. 22 - 72 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions [A] ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ........ A-24 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING ................. 3-1 AnCPU type Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection ................................ 7-13 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 AnSCPU type Bus connection ................................................ 5-12 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection ................................ 7-14 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 [B] Built-in Ethernet port QCPU ................................ 8-11 Bus connection ...................................................... 5-1 [C] C Controller module Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ................................................................. 13-6,13-7 CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-11 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).... 13-1 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................... 14-1 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection .......... 11-1 CC-Link IE Field Network connection.................. 12-1 CNC C70 Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ................................................................. 13-6,13-7 CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-12 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 CNC connection CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 18-5 Direct connection to CPU................................. 18-3 Ethernet connection ......................................... 18-6 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 18-4 CNC side settings .............................................. 18-16 Coaxial cable ....................................................... 1-29 Communication module ....................................... 1-17 Computer link connection ...................................... 7-1 Connectable Model List Bus connection................................................... 5-2 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-2 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-2 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-2 CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-2 CNC connection ............................................... 18-2 Computer link connection................................... 7-2 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-2 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-2 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION................. 19-2 INVERTER CONNECTION.............................. 15-2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 10-2 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-2 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function............................................................. 20-2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-2 Connection Diagram CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-8 CNC connection ............................................... 18-7 Computer link connection................................. 7-15 Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-22 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-15 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-21 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function............................................................. 20-5 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-8 Connector conversion adapter............................. 1-18 Controller Type ...................................................... 1-6 Conversion cables ............................................... 1-18 [D] DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET................... 2-1 Device Range that Can Be Set CNC connection ............................................. 18-23 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-44 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-8 Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-17 Direct connection to CPU ...................................... 6-1 Index-1 INDEX INDEX [E] Ethernet connection............................................... 8-1 [F] FA transparent function ............................... 22-1,22-2 FXCPU Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-10 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-9 [G] GOT connector specifications ............................. 1-26 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION .................... 19-1 GOT Side Settings Bus connection................................................. 5-30 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-9 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-9 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-8 CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-8 CNC connection ............................................... 18-8 Computer link connection................................. 7-19 Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-25 Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-15 FA transparent function.................................. 22-36 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-23 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-29 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 10-9 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-9 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-7 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function ............................................................ 20-7 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-3 Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-12 [H] HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM ....... 4-1 [I] I/F .......................................................................... 1-8 I/F communication setting.................................... 1-12 Inverter FREQROL A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ......................................................................... 15-3 FREQROL A700/F700/F700P........................ 15-14 FREQROL E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/ F700PJ............................................................. 15-7 FREQROL E700 ............................................ 15-10 INVERTER CONNECTION ................................. 15-1 Inverter Side Settings ........................................ 15-31 [L] LCPU CC-Link connection.......................................... 14-7 Computer link connection................................... 7-8 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-7 List of Models that Can Be Monitored ............... 22-11 Index-2 [M] MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ............................................................................. 10-1 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ............................................................................... 9-1 Motion controller CPU (A series) Bus connection......................................... 5-19,5-24 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection......................... 7-13,7-14 Direct connection to CPU ................................... 6-9 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Motion controller CPU (Q series) Bus connection................................................... 5-5 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-7 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7 Computer link connection................................... 7-7 Direct connection to CPU ........................... 6-6,6-20 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ............................ 21-1 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ................. 21-42 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function ............................................................................. 20-1 [O] Option unit ........................................................... 1-18 [P] Personal Computer Side Setting ....................... 22-39 PLC Side Setting CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ....................................................................... 13-12 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection..... 11-10 CC-Link IE Field Network connection............. 12-10 Computer link connection................................. 7-22 Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-20 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ....................................................................... 10-12 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 9-11 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-6 PLC Side Settings CC-Link connection (via G4) .......................... 14-11 Precautions Bus connection................................................. 5-34 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ....................................................................... 13-39 CC-Link connection (via G4) .......................... 14-17 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection..... 11-16 CC-Link IE Field Network connection............. 12-13 CNC connection ............................................. 18-23 [Q] QCPU(A mode) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection .................................. 7-9 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 QCPU(Q mode) Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ................................................................. 13-6,13-7 CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-7 Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ................................... 8-7,8-11 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 QnACPU type Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection ................................ 7-10 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-8 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 QnASCPU type Bus connection ................................................ 5-12 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 Computer link connection ................................ 7-11 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-8 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 QSCPU CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 [R] Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system Computer link connection................................... 7-7 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 ROBOT CONTROLLER Bus connection................................................... 5-5 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ................................................................. 13-6,13-7 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7 Computer link connection................................... 7-7 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ............. 17-1 [S] Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ....................... 1-18 Servo amplifier MELSERVO-J2M Series .................................. 16-4 MELSERVO-J2-Super Series .......................... 16-3 MELSERVO-J3 Series ..................................... 16-5 Servo amplifier connection .................................. 16-1 Setting connected equipment ................................ 1-4 Setting of connection conversion adapter.......... 19-29 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ..... 19-24 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side ......................... 16-14 Station number setting INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-43 MELSERVO connection................................. 16-16 System Configuration Bus connection................................................... 5-5 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) ......................................................................... 13-6 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7 CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-7 CNC connection ............................................... 18-3 Computer link connection................................... 7-7 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 FA transparent function.................................. 22-26 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-14 INVERTER CONNECTION.............................. 15-3 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 10-7 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7 Index-3 INDEX Computer link connection ................................ 7-29 Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-28 Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-49 FA transparent function.................................. 22-67 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-30 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-47 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ....................................................................... 10-26 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 9-16 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ...................... 21-41 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function .......................................................... 20-11 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ......... 17-8 Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-45 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING ....................................................... 1-1 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-4 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function ............................................................ 20-2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-3 [T] Terminating resistors of GOT .............................. 1-30 [W] What is Multi-channel Function? ......................... 21-2 Index-4 REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Date * Manual Number Revision Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-A First edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.01B Nov., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-B B edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.05F • Compatible with iQ Works Jan.,2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-C C edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.10L • MELSEC-L compatible, MELSEC-FX (MELSEC-FX buffer memory compatible), FA transparent (GX Works2 compatible, NC Configurator compatible), GT10 motion controller CPU (Q series) connection compatible May,2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-D D edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.14Q • Q50UDEH/Q100UDEH compatible, Q172DCPU-S1/Q173DCPU-S1 compatible, LJ72GF15-T2 compatible • GT16/GT15 GOT multi-drop connection compatible Jun., 2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-E E edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.17T • GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, and GT1662-VN are added. • Q12DCCPU-V compatible, MELSEC-WS compatible, FA transparent (MX Component, MX Sheet and GX LogViewer compatible) Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-F F edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.19V • Compatible with CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module • FA transparent in GOT multi-drop connection compatible • Station monitoring function (Inverter connection) compatible • FA transparent (MR Configurator2 compatible) Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-G G edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.23Z • CC IE Control extended mode compatible • Inverter connection with 31 modules, device range expansion compatible • FA transparent in LCPU Logging Configuration Tool compatible • FA transparent in Ethernet connection between GOT and personal computer compatible Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-H H edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.28E • GT1655-V is added. Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-I I edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.31H • CC-Link IE Field Network compatible • Communication setting storage and error information notification in GOT multi-drop connection compatible • FA transparent (MX Component) in Ethernet connection between personal computer and GOT compatible • Device range expansion (D and W of QCPU and X, Y, Ww, and Wr of LCPU) compatible • Communication setting format 2 compatible Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-J J edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.37P • GT14, GT12 are added. • Station shutoff function (Inverter connection) compatible • CC-Link IE Field Network compatible model (QS001CPU) are added. • Note about Ethernet connection (FXCPU) are added. Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-K K edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.40S • "I/F Communication Setting" is compatible with "5V power supply". • CC-Link IE field extended device of QSCPU compatible • Station shutoff function for the network connection via PLC CPU compatible • Station number setting function compatible (multi-drop system information function expanded) • FA transparent in Ethernet connection between GOT and personal computer compatible (FXCPU, motion CPU, MELSERVO) • RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor is added. • FX3U-ENET-ADP is added. Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-L L edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.45X • FX3GC compatible • Q172DSCPU/Q173DSCPU compatible Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-M M edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.54G • Ethernet connection; Timeout time setting range is extended. • MELSERVO-J4 series compatible • Ping test at the GT14 main unit compatible Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-N N edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.58L • Device G compatible REVISIONS - 1 * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print Date * Manual Number Revision Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.63R • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed. • C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) compatible • Inverter connection (MELIPM series) compatible • FA transparent function (MX Component 4.00A) compatible Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.67V • High-speed QnU (QnUDVCPU) compatible • MELSEC-L models (L26CPU/L02SCPU, LJ71E71-100) are added. • FA transparent function (Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module) compatible • FA transparent function (FXCPU) compatible This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. © 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS - 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term] The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. [Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified. If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer’s expence. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. (2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided. 4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced. 5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses. 6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user. 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued. 3. Overseas service Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ. 4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks. 5. Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice. 6. Product application (1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault. (2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications. However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at our discretion. In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required. GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. SH(NA)-080898ENG-P Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 (ELE) (Mitsubishi Products) MODEL SW1-GTD3-U(CON1)-ELE MODEL CODE 1D7MC9 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P(1302)MEE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission. Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, February 2013. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE German Branch Gothaer Straße 8 D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Czech Branch Radlická 751/113e CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE French Branch 25, Boulevard des Bouvets F-92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Irish Branch Westgate Business Park, Ballymount IRL-Dublin 24 Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 I-20864 Agrate Brianza (MB) Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND Polish Branch Krakowska 50 PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA Russian Branch 52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor RU-115054 Мoscow Phone: +7 495 721-2070 Fax: +7 495 721-2071 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubí 76-80 E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131 Fax: +34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 28 87 80 Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 JAPAN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Tokyo Building 2-7-3 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku Tokyo 100-8310 Phone: +81 (3) 3218-2111 Fax: +81 (3) 3218-2185 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Phone: +1 (847) 478-2100 Fax: +1 (847) 478-0328 GEVA AUSTRIA Wiener Straße 89 AT-2500 Baden Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 TECHNIKON BELARUS Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705 BY-220030 Minsk Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 ESCO DRIVES BELGIUM Culliganlaan 3 BE-1831 Diegem Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 60 Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 61 KONING & HARTMAN B.V. BELGIUM Woluwelaan 31 BE-1800 Vilvoorde Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 INEA RBT d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Stegne 11 SI-1000 Ljubljana Phone: +386 (0)1/ 513 8116 Fax: +386 (0)1/ 513 8170 AKHNATON BULGARIA 4, Andrei Ljapchev Blvd., PO Box 21 BG-1756 Sofia Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6000 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 INEA CR CROATIA Losinjska 4 a HR-10000 Zagreb Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 AutoCont C.S. S.R.O. CZECH REPUBLIC Kafkova 1853/3 CZ-702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone: +420 595 691 150 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK Lykkegardsvej 17 DK-4000 Roskilde Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA Pärnu mnt.160i EE-11317 Tallinn Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Vanha Nurmijärventie 62 FIN-01670 Vantaa Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500 Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501 PROVENDOR OY FINLAND Teljänkatu 8 A3 FIN-28130 Pori Phone: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3300 Fax: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3322 UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE 5, Mavrogenous Str. GR-18542 Piraeus Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 MELTRADE Ltd. HUNGARY Fertő utca 14. HU-1107 Budapest Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA Ritausmas iela 23 LV-1058 Riga Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA Goštautu g. 3 LT-48324 Kaunas Phone: +370 37 262707 Fax: +370 37 455605 ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA 99, Paola Hill Malta-Paola PLA 1702 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA bld. Traian 23/1 MD-2060 Kishinev Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280 HIFLEX AUTOM. B.V. NETHERLANDS Wolweverstraat 22 NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +31 (0)180 / 46 60 04 Fax: +31 (0)180 / 44 23 55 KONING & HARTMAN B.V. NETHERLANDS Haarlerbergweg 21-23 NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05 Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Postboks 487 NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77 Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89 PT- 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910 Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 INEA SR SERBIA Izletnicka 10 SER-113000 Smederevo Phone: +381 (0)26 / 615 401 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 615 401 SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA Jána Derku 1671 SK-911 01 Trencín Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20 INEA RBT d.o.o. SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI-1000 Ljubljana Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8116 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170 Beijer Electronics Automation AB SWEDEN Box 426 SE-20124 Malmö Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01 OMNI RAY AG SWITZERLAND Im Schörli 5 CH-8600 Dübendorf Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28 TURKEY Fabrika Otomasyonu Merkezi Şerifali Mahallesi Nutuk Sokak No:5 İ Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 39 95 CSC AUTOMATION Ltd. UKRAINE 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St. UA-02660 Kiev Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66 EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES TOO Kazpromavtomatika Ul. Zhambyla 28 KAZ-100017 Karaganda Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50 KAZAKHSTAN MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES I.C. SYSTEMS Ltd. EGYPT 23 Al-Saad-Al-Alee St. EG-Sarayat, Maadi, Cairo Phone: +20 (0) 2 / 235 98 548 Fax: +20 (0) 2 / 235 96 625 ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761 GIRIT CELADON Ltd. ISRAEL 12 H'aomanut Street IL-42505 Netanya Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30 LEBANON CEG LIBAN Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA Lebanon-Beirut Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 445 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 193 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE ADROIT TECHNOLOGIES SOUTH AFRICA 20 Waterford Office Park 189 Witkoppen Road ZA-Fourways Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 658 8100 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 658 8101 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res Author : Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Create Date : 2012:12:27 13:30:07+09:00 Modify Date : 2013:07:04 20:06:17+10:00 Subject : SH-080898ENG-P Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Metadata Date : 2013:07:04 20:06:17+10:00 Format : application/pdf Title : GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE) Creator : Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Description : SH-080898ENG-P Rights : Copyright 2010 Mitsubishi.Electric Corporation All Rights.Reserved. Document ID : uuid:6c9d49cd-4fb0-4f2f-9cf3-f96d1ba0d906 Instance ID : uuid:b0ee1811-dfb1-4542-a27f-df5551d1d667 Startup Profile : Print Keywords : Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 754EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools